THE LIBRARY 
 
 OF 
 THE UNIVERSITY 
 
 OF CALIFORNIA 
 LOS ANGELES
 
 TEXT-BOOK 
 
 OF 
 
 BY 
 
 EDWAKD G. LOKING, M. D. 
 
 PART I. 
 
 THE NOEMAL EYE, DETERMINATION OF EEFEACTION, 
 
 DISEASES OF THE MEDIA, PHYSIOLOGICAL OPTICS, 
 
 AND THEOEY OF THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE. 
 
 NEW YOEK: 
 
 D. APPLETON AND COMPANY, 
 
 1, 3, AND 5 BOND STREET. 
 
 1886.
 
 COPYRIGHT, 1885, 
 BY D. APPLETON AND COMPANY.
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Remarks on the ophthalmoscope. Examination by daylight. 
 
 Examination of the eye by artificial light 1-7 
 
 CHAPTER H. 
 
 Examination with the ophthalmoscope. Method of examination. 
 Examination by the inverted image. Examination by the 
 upright image 8^20 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 The anatomy of the fundus of the normal eye 21-43 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 The fundus of the normal eye as seen with the ophthalmoscope. 
 
 Anomalies 43-105 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 Determination of the optical condition of the eye with the oph- 
 thalmoscope. Refraction. Astigmatism. Refraction accord- 
 ing to the standard of the inch. Directions in case the observ- 
 er is ametropic. Determination of the refraction of an eye 
 by the mirror alone, and by means of the inverted image. 
 Astigmatism with the mirror alone. Astigmatism with the 
 inverted image. Amount of enlargement produced by up- 
 right image 106-145
 
 iv CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Examination of the media of the eye. Oblique illumination. The 
 aqueous humor. The iris. The lens. Opacities of the lens. 
 Examination of the media by the ophthalmoscope. The iris. 
 The lens. Vitreous humor, and fundus of the eye. Differ- 
 ential diagnosis of troubles in the media. Entozoa . . . 146-194 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 General principles of the ophthalmoscope. Physiological optics. 
 Theory of the ophthalmoscope. The metric system. Oph- 
 thalmoscopes. Adjuncts to the ophthalmoscope . . . 195-259
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 REMARKS ON THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE. 
 
 IN the whole history of medicine there is no more beautiful epi- 
 sode than the invention of the ophthalmoscope, and physiology has 
 few greater triumphs. With it it is like walking into Nature's labo- 
 ratory and " seeing the Infinite in action," since by its means we are 
 enabled to look upon the only nerve in the whole body which can 
 ever lie open to our inspection under physiological conditions, and to 
 follow in a transparent membrane an isolated circulation from its en- 
 trance into the eye through the arteries to its exit in the veins. We 
 are further enabled to watch and study daily, or even hourly, morbid 
 processes in each and every phase, from simple hyperaemia to absolute 
 stasis, and from passive O3dema to the most violent inflammation ; 
 while oftentimes through its agency also we get the first intimation 
 of disease in remote and seemingly unconnected organs, so as to read, 
 as if in a book, " the written troubles of the brain," the heart, the 
 spleen, the kidneys, and the spine. 
 
 It is little wonder, then, that the adept learns to look upon the 
 ophthalmoscope as one of the most beautiful in theory, the most per- 
 fect in practice, and the most far-reaching in results, of any of the in- 
 struments known to medical science, or that he should be brought to 
 consider the invention of Helmholtz as the most potent factor in 
 bringing the art of ophthalmology to the highest plane of medical 
 diagnosis and treatment.* Nor is it surprising that even the student, 
 once entered upon its investigation, finds the study of the instrument 
 as fascinating as it can be made profound. It is to enable him to 
 prosecute such studies with greater ease and with more expedition 
 than if left to himself, that the following pages are written. 
 
 * Virchow, " Trans. Internat. Congress," London, 1881. 
 
 1
 
 2 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 That the ophthalmoscope has become a necessity in the detection 
 of disease is now universally admitted. Physicians, therefore, at the 
 present time are much more interested in the facts which the mirror 
 reveals than in the principles upon which it depends. To understand, 
 however, the practical working of the instrument and the full extent 
 of its application, the few fundamental laws upon which it depends 
 must be thoroughly understood. For such as are not already ac- 
 quainted with them, these laws, briefly and simply stated, will be 
 found in the Appendix at the end of the volume. 
 
 In making an ophthalmoscopic examination three principal things 
 are to be considered : 
 
 1. The instrument and the illumination used. 
 
 2. The optical condition of the observer's eye. 
 
 3. The optical and physical condition of the eye to be observed. 
 The great aim in an ophthalmoscope should be largeness of field 
 
 of view, with suitable and sufficient illumination. These require- 
 ments seem to be fulfilled best in the general shape and construction 
 of what is known as Liebreich's small ophthalmoscope, which consists 
 of the concave mirror with a central aperture attached to a short, 
 straight handle. The mirror is usually about seven inches focal 
 length, with a clip at the back for the necessary correcting-glasses. 
 Unfortunately, these instruments as made abroad, though cheap, are 
 comparatively worthless, from the mirrors not being true, and from 
 the annoying reflections arising from the edges of the perforation and 
 back-plate of the mirror. For lightness, freedom from reflections, and 
 durability, there are no superior instruments to those now made in 
 New York, notably by Messrs. Hunter and Meyrowitz, whose instru- 
 ments in the way of workmanship and optical accuracy are unsur- 
 passed. Almost every ophthalmologist has taken a hand in perfect- 
 ing or at least altering the instrument, and from the first I have, per- 
 haps, done more than my share. To mention all the modifications 
 now known and in use would make a book of itself, and I must refer 
 those who are curious as to the evolution of this beautiful instrument 
 to the current literature of the day. My advice to the student is in 
 the beginning to get the best instrument of its kind, not necessarily 
 the most complex and the highest priced, assuring him that it makes 
 no difference whatever whose instrument he uses, provided it is com- 
 prehensive enough to suit his wants, and that he learns how to use 
 it with judgment and skill. Beginning with the simpler ones, he can 
 pass to those which are more complex, should occasion require. In 
 the Appendix will be found a description of some of the forms sug-
 
 REMARKS ON THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE. 3 
 
 gested by the writer, not because they are in any way better than 
 others, but simply because he is better acquainted with their quali- 
 ties, good and bad. Of his rather voluminous contributions in this 
 line, only those are mentioned which have stood the test of time and 
 proved their usefulness. 
 
 The Illumination. The great convenience attending the use of 
 gas, and its universal adoption as a source of light in this country, 
 would give to its use for the purposes of ophthalmoscopy a decided 
 preference, even if it did not possess the most suitable quality of light. 
 As, however, there can be but little objection to it even on this score, 
 all that need be considered is the shape in which it shall be employed. 
 
 The best form for an ophthalmoscopic lamp is that made after the 
 English pattern, consisting of two parallel tubes with such an arrange- 
 ment of joints as to give a wide extent of vertical and lateral move- 
 ments.* From their somewhat elaborate construction they are per- 
 haps better fitted for institutions and the offices of specialists than 
 for those of the general practitioner. A form of lamp which an- 
 swers every purpose in an admirable way is the common drop-light, 
 with a flexible tube and Argand burner fitted to a stand with a slid- 
 ing-bracket, by which the height of the light can be regulated at will. 
 
 Kerosene gives an admirable light, especially some of the purer 
 qualities ; but, if used, the old-fashioned lamp, where the flame is a 
 broad one, is better than the German student-lamp, where the flame, 
 though very brilliant and white, is so narrow that the circle of disper- 
 sion on the retina is very much drawn out in a vertical and reduced 
 in a lateral direction. To the fastidious, some improvement in all 
 these sources of illumination can be obtained by the use of a light- 
 blue chimney or a screen of blue glass placed before the lamp. 
 
 Any lamp, however, which gives a good light may be used, and its 
 position, if the flame be of the larger kind, should be a little behind 
 and a little to one side of the patient's head, and about on a line with 
 the eye to be observed. It should, however, be as close to the head 
 as is comfortable, so that the angle of the incident and reflected light 
 should be as small as possible, so as to prevent a too great rotation of 
 the ophthalmoscope on its vertical axis. 
 
 When, however, the flame of the lamp is small and the inverted 
 image is used, as, for example, a candle-flame at the bedside, this 
 should then be placed between the patient and the observer, and 
 nearer to the latter than the former. The lateral distance should be 
 about the same as in an ordinary examination. In this way we get a 
 
 * These lamps, which carry an Argand burner, can be had from the firm of 
 Mitchell & Vance, New York.
 
 4 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 larger and brighter circle of dispersion, and use to the best advantage 
 the little light at our disposal. 
 
 In regard to the quantity of light given by different mirrors, of 
 course those which are silvered produce a greater illumination than 
 those which are not ; and those which are concave, greater than those 
 which are plane. Each kind of mirror has its advantages, and it 
 would be better theoretically to use different mirrors, embracing 
 also different degrees of curvature for different kinds of work. This 
 is, however, so inconvenient as to render it practically impossible ; 
 still, a word must be said as to the great and positive advantage in 
 some cases of what is known as Helrnholtz's or the weak-light mir- 
 ror, which consists of three parallel plates of thin plane glass.* No 
 mirror gives a more beautiful illumination than this when all the con- 
 ditions for its use are favorable, such as a sufficiently dilated pupil 
 and clearness of the media ; for by its subdued light slight changes in 
 the fundus of the eye, and even slight variation in shade of color 
 especially, as will be seen later, in the optic nerve are made mani- 
 fest ; changes which under a brighter illumination are lost in an excess 
 of light. 
 
 As would naturally be inferred, this mirror is of great advantage 
 where there is a marked dread of light on the part of the patient. It 
 is not, however, serviceable for general work, as it can not be used for 
 the inverted image, while some of its virtue can be obtained, in great 
 part at least, with the " strong-light " mirrors by reducing the quan- 
 tity of light coming from the source of illumination. 
 
 Simple concave mirrors of such a strength as are ordinarily used 
 in ophthalmoscopy throw upon the eye a converging cone of light, 
 the base of which is equal to the surface of the mirror, though, of 
 course, as we bring the mirror more closely to the eye only those rays 
 which are reflected from its central portions will enter the pupil. 
 The shorter the focus the greater is the condensation of the light ; 
 but experience as well as theory shows that only mirrors of moder- 
 ately short focal lengths are suitable for ophthalmoscopy. As a rule, 
 the mirror should not have a focus shorter than seven nor longer than 
 ten inches. 
 
 EXAMINATION BY DAYLIGHT. 
 
 This consists simply in substituting natural for artificial illumi- 
 nation, and can be accomplished by having a small slit cut in the 
 shutter. 
 
 Its only advantage is that we see the fundus more nearly under its 
 natural color, as the reflection from the bottom of the eye is free from 
 
 * See description in Appendix, p. 230.
 
 KEMARKS OX THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE. 5 
 
 the yellow it receives from either oil or gas. When thus seen, its 
 color varies from a pure red to a delicate reddish-pink. The method 
 is, however, inconvenient in its application, and, as artificial light be- 
 comes from force of habit our natural criterion, the method is really 
 of little practical use. It is, however, in those very rare cases of re- 
 tinitis from leucaemia, of decided advantage, as under dispersed day- 
 light the fundus maintains the characteristic orange-color, while the 
 normal eye loses all trace of it. To obtain the best results, the pupil 
 of the eye should be dilated, and the only light admitted to the room 
 should be through the narrow aperture which serves as the source of 
 illumination. I have, however, often obtained a perfectly clear view 
 of the fundus when the pupil was dilated, by placing the patient with 
 his back to the window. 
 
 EXAMINATION OF THE EYE BY ARTIFICIAL LIGHT. 
 
 Oblique Illumination. The first step toward an ophthalmoscopic 
 examination of the fundus of the eye should be the consideration of 
 the condition of the interposing media the cornea, aqueous humor, 
 lens, and vitreous body. 
 
 This is a most important step, and as a precautionary measure 
 should never be omitted, for disturbances in any of these bodies, 
 although so slight as to readily escape observation, may nevertheless 
 have a considerable effect on the character and clearness of the image, 
 and any want of attention to this particular may lead the practitioner 
 not only into error but even into disgrace. The habit of picking up 
 an ophthalmoscope and making straight for the optic disk is fatal to 
 exact ophthalmoscopy, and many a " slight effusion or oedema into the 
 retina " has in other and more careful hands resolved itself into a dif- 
 fuse opacity of the vitreous, the lens, or even the cornea and that 
 too, not only in the hands of a beginner, but also in those of an adept. 
 
 One of the principal ways of ascertaining the condition of the me- 
 dia is by means of a 'condensing lens. This method of examination is 
 called that by oblique illumination, because a cone of light is thrown 
 by the lens upon and obliquely through the anterior parts of the eye. 
 
 The manner in which the lenses are used will be understood readily 
 from the drawing, Fig. 1. 
 
 The light should be placed at a little distance from the head of the 
 patient a foot, more or less and on the same side as the eye to be 
 examined, and at about the same height, but in a somewhat more ad- 
 vanced plane. 
 
 Any convex lens of a moderately short focal length may be used, 
 the ordinary two-and-a-half -inch glass of the ophthalmoscope answer-
 
 6 TEXT-BOOK OF OFHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 ing every purpose. The lens should be held between the light and 
 the eye, at a little less than its focal length. A converging cone of 
 light is thus thrown upon and into the eye, and this should be made 
 to play about by slight lateral displacements of the glass, so that the 
 
 -- 
 
 FIG. 1. 
 
 illumination may reach successively different parts of the surface of 
 the cornea. When a general survey of this is to be made for the pur- 
 pose of detecting any change, and of contrasting such a change with 
 the surrounding tissue in a general way, the lens should be held 
 nearer to the eye, so that the surface of the cornea may cut the cone 
 of light thrown upon it some way from its apex. The circle of illu- 
 mination is in this way increased, though the light is at the same time 
 less condensed. If a small and isolated portion of the surface is to be 
 carefully examined, as, for example, the seat of a minute foreign body, 
 then the lens should be gradually withdrawn till this comes just within 
 its focus, so as to obtain the greatest amount of illumination. 
 
 The cornea, aqueous humor, iris, and lens should in turn be care- 
 fully observed, and the examination should be further helped by caus- 
 ing the patient to move his eyes in various directions ; for oftentimes 
 a sudden turn of the eye will bring to view a delicate and comet-like 
 opacity which would otherwise have escaped detection. 
 
 The first lens can be supplemented by a second, as seen in the 
 drawing. This is placed immediately in front of the observed eye, 
 and in the path of the rays coming to the observer. This second
 
 EEMAKKS ON THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE. 7 
 
 glass acts simply as a magnifier, and as such should be held at about 
 the focal distance of the glass from the cornea. 
 
 Simple as all this appears, it nevertheless requires a good deal of 
 skill and experience to reap the full benefits of the method of exami- 
 nation by oblique illumination, and especially in regard to the troubles 
 of the lens and deeper structures. To do this thoroughly, the pupil 
 should be dilated by atropine. In such cases it is often advantageous 
 to have the lamp placed directly above and a little in front of the pa- 
 tient's head, which should then be thrown slightly back. The observer 
 should then stand a little to one side, so as not to interfere with the 
 light entering the eye, but still be hi the track of the returning rays. 
 By this means the angles of incidence and reflection are made a little 
 larger, and a better view is obtained. 
 
 The conditions of the posterior capsule and anterior portions of 
 the vitreous can be, and often are, advantageously examined by this 
 method ; but, from the difficulty of the illumination, most observers 
 prefer, rather than to waste time and run the risk of overlooking 
 minute disturbances in these deeper parts, to use the direct light 
 from the ophthalmoscope. Still, lateral illumination has advantages 
 of its own, even for these parts, especially when the disturbances 
 are of a diffused nature, and it should never be neglected.
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 EXAMINATION WITH THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE. 
 
 YEKY little, I had almost said nothing, can be learned of the 
 technical working of the ophthalmoscope from a book. The neces- 
 sary skill must be acquired in the presence of the subject, and with 
 the instrument in the hand. 
 
 That ophthalmoscopy in its widest sense is a very difficult art must 
 certainly be admitted. But it has always struck me that its difficul- 
 ties have been exaggerated, so far as its practical working is concerned, 
 by the abstruse manner in which its principles have been inculcated. 
 In this way a sort of dread of the instrument has been created in the 
 minds of many practitioners in whose hands, with a trifling effort in 
 overcoming a few technicalities, it might have been a source of in- 
 creased knowledge to themselves and of absolute advantage to their 
 patients. 
 
 The greatest good to the greatest number is, or ought to be, as 
 much the watchword of medicine as it is of politics ; and I sincerely 
 hope that the time is not distant when the ophthalmoscope will be in 
 the hands of every thoughtful and observant physician, to be used by 
 him just as the microscope now is, without affectation, as a means for 
 the detection of disease. 
 
 It would be a sorry day for the sick and suffering if every physi- 
 cian who used the microscope had to be a Yirchow, or who used the 
 ophthalmoscope a Helmholtz. The ability to add and subtract vulgar 
 fractions is all the mathematical knowledge which is required to put 
 the ordinary physician, clinically speaking, on a par with the pro- 
 foundest mathematician, and, now that the metric system has been 
 adopted, one can dispense with even this small amount of knowledge. 
 
 Strictly speaking, before looking into the condition of another's 
 eye, the observer should have a knowledge of the visual power and 
 refraction of his own eye, and should possess the ability of correcting 
 any defects should they exist. Some methods of examination require 
 this, others do not ; at least where the error of refraction is still within 
 moderate limits, as, for example, in the examination by the " inverted
 
 EXAMINATION WITH THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE. 9 
 
 method." It is, however, absolutely necessary when the "upright 
 method " is employed, and more will be said on the matter under that 
 heading. 
 
 The first step in the examination of an eye with the ophthalmo- 
 scope is to illuminate the eye in a suitable manner. 
 
 One of the greatest obstacles to this with inexperienced observers, 
 and one which, more than any other, has discouraged the general 
 practitioner at the very outset from pursuing his studies, has arisen 
 from the fact that his first essays have been made with subjects where 
 the pupil has been undilated. 
 
 A good deal of prejudice exists in the minds of many writers 
 against the use of atropine, especially when, after many years of ex- 
 perience, they themselves have become emancipated from its use. It 
 certainly must be admitted that it is an inconvenience to the patient 
 for the time being, but the duration of this inconvenience can be so 
 shortened that it is not to be weighed against the positive advantage 
 gained by a thorough and minute examination. Delicate changes 
 often escape detection, even in the hands of skilful observers ; and, 
 when this is the case, it is usually from two causes : either the in- 
 verted image alone is used, and thus a sufficient enlargement is not 
 obtained, or the examination is made through an undilated pupil. 
 Thus, even if the upright image has been used, the examination often 
 proves fruitless from the fact that the observer, from a natural dread 
 of subjecting his patient to the annoying effect of atropine, has failed 
 to get anything like an adequate view of those parts of the eye in 
 which these changes are apt to occur ; that is to say, of the peripheri- 
 cal parts of the lens, and of the region of the macula lutea. 
 
 For the purposes of an ophthalmoscopic investigation it is only 
 necessary to employ the drug in the mildest possible form, so as to 
 limit its action to a single day. By far the best way of using it seems 
 to me to be by the gelatine wafers * or disks prepared by Savory & 
 Moore, of London. These disks come of three degrees of strength, 
 each disk containing 20 ^ 00 , ?0 ft o0 , and TO oVirfF f a gr am of atropia. 
 One of the first, or even one of the second strength, placed in the 
 cul-de-sac of the conjunctiva, is sufficient to dilate the pupil fully, 
 unless unnatural irritation is present, in the course of an hour or two. 
 Even if it fails to do this completely, it produces a partial dilata- 
 tion, and with it a rigidity of the iris, which is usually all that is 
 needed. If these wafers can not be procured, then a very weak solu- 
 
 * The officinal name of these wafers is "Ophthalmic Gelatine Di^ks atropized. 
 Savory & Moore, 143 Bond Street, London." They can also be had of Caswell, 
 Hazard & Co., New York City.
 
 10 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 tion, gr. j of the neutral sulphate of atropia to aqua des. iij, may be 
 employed, or a drop of a two-per-cent solution of the hydrochlorate 
 of cocaine, which produces usually a sufficient but temporary dilation 
 of the pupil. 
 
 As skill in the use of the instrument increases, the necessity for 
 the use of atropine will become less and less, until it is finally reserved 
 for rare occasions. I never hesitate, however, to use a wafer when 
 trouble either in the periphery of the lens or at the macula lutea is 
 suspected. 
 
 It should, however, be stated that in the minds of some of the 
 profession a belief exists that the use of atropine has a tendency to 
 bring on an acute attack of glaucoma in eyes which are predisposed 
 that way. Luckily the part affected, limited as it chiefly is ophthal- 
 moscopically to the optic nerve, is the part of the eye most readily 
 seen and studied with an undilated pupil. 
 
 METHOD OF EXAMINATION WITH THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE. 
 
 Simple Illumination of the Fundus. The patient should be 
 placed in a darkened room, with his back to a well -burning lamp with- 
 out any shade or globe. This should be on the same side and on 
 about the same level as the eye to be observed. It should, however, 
 be placed a little behind the head, say five or six inches, and some- 
 what removed from it laterally. The observer's seat should be a little 
 higher than the patient's, and he should sit not directly in front of 
 the latter, but to one side, so that his chair should come, not in front 
 of the patient's chair, but by the side of it. This gives plenty of 
 room for movements, both on the part of the observed and the ob- 
 server, and avoids the necessity of the latter being compelled, when 
 he wishes to approach closely to the eye examined, to be directly in 
 the face of the patient. The observer's eye should be about eighteen 
 or twenty inches from that of the patient, who should be made to di- 
 rect his gaze in front of him, and, if the right eye is to be examined, 
 a little to the left, and if the left, a little toward the right. 
 
 Light is now thrown from the ophthalmoscope directly upon the 
 observed eye, and the observer, looking through the hole of the mir- 
 ror and in the direction of the reflected rays, sees the pupil glow. 
 This glow is nothing but the reflection of light from some portion of 
 the fundus which has become illuminated through the pupillary space. 
 We, therefore, speak of the presence or absence of the " reflex " of 
 the fundus, according as the pupil shines or does not shine. 
 
 The illumination of the pupil, or, more properly speaking, of the 
 fundus, having been obtained, when the patient is looking straight
 
 EXAMINATION WITH THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE. H 
 
 ahead he should be made to change the direction of his gaze by look- 
 ing up and down and to the right and left, first slowly and then 
 quickly, the observer all the time covering the eye with the light cast 
 from the mirror, thus keeping the pupillary space constantly brilliant. 
 In this way different portions of the eye are successively illuminated. 
 
 The mirror should also be gently rotated from side to side on its 
 vertical axis by a slight movement of the wrist, so as to get the advan- 
 tage of the alternate play of light and shade, oftentimes in itself an 
 all-important factor in the detection of disease. 
 
 This done, the observer should learn to move his own head back 
 and forth, directly toward and then away from the patient. By this 
 means he is often able to detect the presence of membranes, growths, 
 and separations of the retina, and their probable antero-posterior posi- 
 tion. He should also move his head from right to left, and vice versa, 
 keeping the pupil of the observed eye always brilliant. All these 
 various movements should be practiced over and over again, first with 
 an enlarged and then with an undilated pupil, till the ability to " get 
 the reflex " in all possible positions and movements of the eye is 
 acquired with ease and precision. 
 
 Having illuminated the back of the eye, the next step is to resolve 
 this indefinite glow into a definite picture or image. It will have al- 
 ready been noticed by the attentive observer, however inexperienced, 
 that whereas we usually get with the illumination from the mirror 
 alone merely a diffuse brilliancy in the pupillary space, we do, never- 
 theless, with some eyes obtain a distinct image of a small portion of 
 the f undus, as, for example, a limited section of a retinal vessel or a 
 small segment of the optic nerve. This is due to some error in the 
 refraction of the eye observed, and is present notably in myopic eyes, 
 and the more so the greater the degree of myopia. 
 
 If the eye be myopic, an inverted and aerial image will be formed 
 in front of the observed eye, and at a distance equal to the degree of 
 the myopia present. It is this aerial image which the observer sees, 
 and not a part of the fundus itself. On the other hand, if the eye 
 observed is hypermetropic, the observer gets a direct view of a small 
 part of the fundus itself seen through the patient's pupil. To tell 
 whether the image in any case is in verted or erect, the observer has 
 simply to move his head. If the image is inverted, and the eye ob- 
 served consequently myopic, the image will appear to move in a con- 
 trary direction to the movement of either the observer's or patient's 
 head. If the image is upright, and the eye consequently is hyperme- 
 tropic, then it will seem to move in the same direction. The optical 
 reasons for the formation of these images with myopic and hyperme-
 
 12 
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 tropic, as well as occasionally with emmetropic eyes, their compara- 
 tive enlargement and extent of the fundus seen, are discussed in the 
 chapter on the theory of the ophthalmoscope. 
 
 EXAMINATION 13 Y THE INVESTED IMAGE. 
 
 The view of the fundus seen as just described with the mirror 
 alone, even if it could be always obtained, would be entirely too re- 
 stricted to ba of any clinical value ; and another means of producing 
 an image, and at the same time of enlarging the field of view, would 
 be an absolute necessity. One way of obtaining this object is by sup- 
 plementing the use of the mirror with that of a convex lens. This is 
 held by the observer before the eye of the patient, and directly in the 
 path of the returning rays, as shown in the drawing (Fig. 2). 
 
 FIG. 2. 
 
 A lens so held not only increases the circle of illumination on the 
 retina, but intercepts the rays leaving the fundus, which are by its 
 means brought to a focus, and thus an aerial image is formed between 
 the glass and the observer's eye, as is fully explained in another place ; 
 moreover, a great number of peripheric rays which would have 
 passed outside of the observer's line of vision are brought directly 
 into it by having their direction changed by the lens, and thus the 
 field of view is enlarged, this enlargement depending, as we shall see 
 later, on the strength of the glass used. 
 
 The most conspicuous portion of the fundus, and one which serves 
 as an objective point for the examination, is the optic disk. To bring 
 this opposite the pupil of the eye to be observed, and in the observ-
 
 EXAMINATION WITH THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE. 13 
 
 er's Hue of vision, the patient must be directed to look a little inward, 
 that is, toward the nasal side of his field of view. "When the nerve is 
 opposite the pupil, the observer will at once become aware of the fact 
 by the peculiarly white reflex filling the pupillary space. 
 
 For the purpose of bringing the nerve-entrance easily into view, 
 and at the same time of furnishing to the patient a definite object to 
 look at, it is a common expedient with many observers to hold the 
 instrument not in a vertical direction, with the handle downward, as 
 shown in the drawing, but to place this horizontally outward, across 
 the patient's field of view, and then to elevate the little finger, at 
 which he is told to direct his view ; or the patient may be told to 
 look at the right ear of the surgeon if it be the right eye, or the left 
 ear if it be the left eye, which is under examination. 
 
 The white reflex from the disk having been obtained, the object- 
 glass should be brought into position, as shown in the drawing (Fig. 
 2), directly in front of the pupil, and in the path of the returning 
 rays. The glass should be held between the thumb and forefinger, 
 and the observer should place his little finger of the same hand on 
 the patient's forehead, for the purposes of a rest. 
 
 The observer should then practice until he acquires a perfect 
 facility in moving the glass backward and forward in the line of vision 
 for the purpose of focusing. The glass should not be held in a plane 
 exactly at right angles to the visual axis, but should be turned a little 
 on its vertical axis, so as to lie obliquely across this line. By this 
 manoauvre the images of the lamp formed by the anterior and poste- 
 rior surfaces of the glass are separated from each other, and a space in 
 the centre of the field is obtained free from these annoying reflexions. 
 This to-and-fro movement of the glass having been acquired, the 
 observer should then learn to move the glass back and forth directly 
 across the visual line, and upward and downward. The image is in 
 this way displaced from side to side, and a parallax is obtained be- 
 tween objects occupying different planes in the eye. One can thus 
 form an estimate of differences in level formed by projections and 
 excavations, as, for example, that of the nerve in glaucoma. The 
 explanation of this effect may be illustrated as follows (Fig. 3) : 
 
 Let L be a convex lens, o its optical centre, and the line a o a' its 
 principal axis. Let a and b be two points on this line behind the lens, 
 and at a distance greater than its focal length. The images of a and 
 b will be formed at a given distance in front of the lens and on its 
 principal axis, say at a' and b'. If, now, the lens be moved into the 
 position shown by the dotted line, then o, the optic centre, passes to o'. 
 The image of a will then be formed at ", and that of b at b'' '. By
 
 14 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 the displacement of the lens the image of 5 makes a greater excursion 
 than that of , and will lie farther from the line a o a'. The nearer 
 one of the objects is to the lens, the greater the displacement it under- 
 goes. We can thus make some anterior point either move dispro- 
 portionately to, or even pass over, a posterior one, and thus learn that 
 
 FIG. 3. 
 
 the former must lie in front of the latter. In this way the edge of 
 an excavated optic nerve can be made to pass over the lamina cribrosa 
 and shut out portions of the vessels lying in its plane, and from the 
 degree in which this takes place we can form an estimate of the depth 
 of the cavity. 
 
 Though this method is of considerable use in detecting the exist- 
 ence of inequalities in the bottom of the eye while taking a general 
 and rapid survey of the fundus, it is, however, vastly inferior to the 
 upright image for the purposes of ascertaining their exact amount, 
 as is explained in the chapter of "Determination of the Errors of 
 Refraction." 
 
 The rule laid down in the books, in making an examination by 
 this method, is to hold the object-glass at a distance in front of the 
 eye equal to its focal length. Practically it is better to make this dis- 
 tance a little greater. This is done to sink the image of the iris, for 
 by gradually withdrawing the glass from a close proximity to the eye 
 outward the pupillary space becomes larger and larger, till the rim of 
 the iris passes out of the observer's field of view, and the only rays 
 which can then enter the observer's eye are those coming through 
 the pupil from the fundus itself. 
 
 The stronger the object-glass the larger will be the extent of the 
 fundus seen at one time, but the smaller will its individual details 
 appear, and vice versa ; the weaker the glass the smaller the tield, but 
 the greater the enlargement of its component parts. It is, therefore, 
 always an advantage, sometimes a necessity, to make use of glasses of
 
 EXAMINATION- WITH THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE. 15 
 
 different strengths. Thus we often find it serviceable when we wish 
 to make a general inspection of the f undus, and thus learn the rela- 
 tions of morbid changes to definite and recognized landmarks, to use 
 a comparatively strong glass, such as a two or, less advantageously, a 
 two-and-a-half -inch lens ; but, when we wish to examine a certain spot 
 under an increased enlargement and more in detail, we employ a weaker 
 number, say a three, four, or even a five-inch lens. Some observers 
 strike a mean, and use a two-and-a-half or even a three-inch lens for all 
 work. 
 
 The writer feels sure that he has been able to observe changes in a 
 comparatively satisfactory manner, which would otherwise have re- 
 mained undetected, by sometimes using a one-and-a-half-inch lens. 
 The advantages of so strong a glass are particularly well shown in 
 cases where the pupil is abnormally small, reduced as it sometimes is 
 to a pin-point, or where this is bound down by adhesions, and the pu- 
 pillary space is the seat of minute deposits or thin membranes, which 
 are, however, still permeable to strongly condensed light. So, too, 
 with troubles in the lens which partly occlude the pupil, or those in 
 the vitreous, or in fact in any case where we wish to see through a 
 narrow opening where a large field is desired and a suitable illumina- 
 tion is difficult to obtain. 
 
 As the observer gains skill in the use of the instrument, the aerial 
 image formed by the first glass, which we have spoken of as the 
 object-glass, may be magnified by placing a convex lens behind the 
 ophthalmoscope, which then acts the part of an eye-piece. In mak- 
 ing use of this glass the observer should endeavor to relax his accom- 
 modation as fully as he can, so as to use the strongest glass practica- 
 ble, and thus get as great a magnifying power as possible. To facili- 
 tate this, the observer may resort to the same expedient as is used with 
 the microscope, namely, to keep both eyes open and to exclude one 
 from the visual act by keeping the visual axes parallel as when look- 
 ing at a distance ; moreover, this glass, besides its magnifying power, 
 is often a relief to the eye by removing the strain from the accommo- 
 dation. This applies particularly when the observer is hypermetropic, 
 in which case the glass may be an absolute necessity, especially when 
 the error of refraction is of a high degree. It must be used, of 
 course, where the observer is presbyopic in any but the most moderate 
 degree, or where from any cause there is a limited range of accom- 
 modation. When either of the above conditions is present, even a 
 myope of a low degree may require a weak eye-piece. An observer 
 who is myopic to a moderate degree, say from J% to $ (2 to 4 D.), 
 sees the inverted image under peculiar advantages, as his eye is
 
 16 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 adapted to receive the rays coming from the aerial image without any 
 eye-piece behind the mirror, and with little or no effort at accommo- 
 dation. The myopia may, however, be so great as to necessitate the 
 use of a concave glass, so as to make vision distinct for the distance 
 at which the image lies. Suppose the observer is myopic , then his 
 farthest point of distinct vision lies at live inches before his eye, and, 
 provided he occupies the usual position, the image is at ten to twelve 
 inches from his eye. and his far point must be carried out to this dis- 
 tance, ^ iV rV tf D. 3.5 = 3.5 D.), which will be the glass 
 that such an observer requires. He could, however, by moving his 
 head forward, lessen the distance between his eye and the image till 
 he saw this clearly. 
 
 It is sometimes extremely difficult, if not impossible, when the 
 eye under observation is very myopic, say above (12 D.), to get a 
 satisfactory view of the f undus with the upright image, because the 
 correcting-glass must be so strong that it necessarily consumes a great 
 deal of light. 
 
 Liebreich's * method of obtaining the same degree of enlargement 
 as that of the upright image by means of the inverted, while preserv- 
 ing the clearness and brilliancy of the latter, is as useful as it is in- 
 genious. Suppose the eye is myopic ^ (12 D.), then the aerial image 
 formed by the lenticular system of the eye itself will be three inches 
 in front of the eye. This image will, of course, be inverted and con-' 
 siderably enlarged. A lens of a low power, % (9 D.) or even (7 D.), 
 is now held in front of this image, and at about four or five inches in 
 front of the eye. So used, it acts like any magnifier; but, as the 
 image is considerably within the focal length of the glass, its magni- 
 fying power is much limited. Still, this is sufficient to so enlarge the 
 area of the pupil that the image of the iris passes out of sight and 
 the field of view is enlarged. The writer has found it advantageous 
 to use a second weak convex glass behind the mirror, say -J- y 1 ^ or -f- 
 T? (^i ^0 3 D.). As the object-glass- one of the common magnifiers 
 sold in the shops has a diameter of two and a half inches, it is broad 
 enough to throw into the eye a large quantity of light, and the result- 
 ing picture is therefore not only very large but very brilliant, and 
 perfectly well defined. Each observer can readily find for himself, 
 by a few trials, what combination is best adapted for his own eye ; 
 those unable to relax their accommodation find it easier to use a 
 weaker glass, say + -fa (1.5 D.) behind the mirror. 
 
 The optic disk and its immediate neighborhood having been suffi- 
 ciently examined, the other parts of the fundus should be brought 
 
 * Graefe's "Archiv," 7. Ab., 11, p. 130.
 
 EXAMINATION WITH THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE. 17 
 
 successively into view by making the patient look up and down and 
 to the right and left, first to a moderate degree and then to his utmost 
 capacity, according as the equator, or the parts toward the ora serrata, 
 are to be inspected. The region of the yellow spot is brought into 
 view by the patient looking directly at the hole in the mirror. When 
 he does this, however, the corneal reflex comes exactly over his pupil, 
 and thus obscures or obliterates the image of the fundus. The pupil 
 must be dilated to get a satisfactory view of this part of the fundus, 
 except in case of the young. The difficulty is further increased by 
 the light falling directly on the most sensitive part of the retina, and 
 to the stimulation of which the iris most readily responds. Some- 
 thing can be done toward avoiding these difficulties by making the 
 patient look, not at the centre of the mirror, but at its edge, or even 
 a little more to his temporal side. In this way, by a little patience 
 and skilful manipulation, one can see round the corneal reflex, and 
 thus bring the part into a comparatively fair view. 
 
 The examination of the region of the macula lutea by the inverted 
 image, even at the best and with a dilated pupil, is very inferior, as a 
 rule, to that with the upright image. It is, however, sometimes in- 
 dispensable, as, for example, when there are changes and opacities in 
 the different media which it requires a very strong light to overcome. 
 This is especially the case in commencing cataract where the nucleus 
 of the lens has become opaque, with more or less diffuse opacity in the 
 cortical substance. Changes at the yellow spot can often be detected 
 in this manner, when by the upright image nothing can be seen. 
 
 It is usually assumed that the examination by the inverted is easier 
 and more convenient than that by the upright image. It has been 
 certainly, until lately at least, much more frequently used than the 
 latter, and by some, as it never should be, exclusively. The one is, 
 or should be, the necessary supplement of the other, and both should 
 be employed in every case, and the final preference of the one over the 
 other should depend on the nature of the trouble then under investi- 
 gation. In regard to the comparative difficulties of the two methods, 
 it has always appeared to me that there was but little choice between 
 them. It may often be easier and it certainly is when the pupil is 
 small or bound down to get a picture of the fundus by the indirect 
 than by the direct method. But to use either so as to bring out its 
 full capabilities requires a certain though very limited amount of 
 optical knowledge. This once acquired, the upright is, to my mind, 
 the easier of the two, as the manipulation of the instrument is sim- 
 pler. No one, however, can be a good or even passable ophthalmos- 
 copist who can not make use of both.
 
 18 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 If the illumination of the eye by oblique light is the first step in 
 an ophthalmoscopic examination, the second should be that by the 
 inverted image. With it a general survey of the fundus is obtained, 
 and, from the extent of the field seen, the entire seat of the disease 
 may be taken in at once and contrasted with the surrounding and 
 healthy tissue. So, too, from the comprehensiveness of the view, the 
 relations of changes to certain fixed objective points, such as the 
 optic disk, the macula lutea, the equator of the eye, and the neighbor- 
 hood of the ora serrata, are readily determined. Peculiarities of shade 
 and color are sometimes for the same reason made more manifest 
 than with the upright image. That the inverted image is often indis- 
 pensable where, from any cause, an increased illumination is desired, 
 has already been pointed out. 
 
 EXAMINATION BY THE UPRIGHT IMAGE. 
 
 If the ophthalmoscope was one of the most brilliant inventions 
 ever known to medical science, it was certainly, also, one of the most 
 complete, for the very method first proposed by Helmholtz still re- 
 mains by far the most beautiful, comprehensive, and truthful of all 
 the means yet in our possession for the exploration of the bottom of 
 the eye. 
 
 As a knowledge of this method is absolutely necessary for the 
 determination of the optical condition of the eye, a few words as 
 to the manner in which it should be performed in general may be 
 of service to the reader before proceeding to the more difficult 
 task of determining in a given case the nature and exact degree of 
 refraction. 
 
 The position of the patient and examiner is not without impor- 
 tance. The observer should sit well to the side of the patient, and on 
 the side, of course, of the eye to be examined. If the right eye is to 
 be examined, the patient should be directed to look slightly toward 
 the right ; if the left eye, then toward the left. 
 
 In fact, the directions are exactly opposite to those given for the 
 inverted image, and just the contrary to what are usually laid down 
 in the books. This position in the examination throws the optic axis 
 away from the median line, places the optic nerve just opposite the 
 pupil, and allows the observer to approach very near the observed eye 
 without bending too much over the person examined. 
 
 The observer must learn to use either eye and either hand as occa- 
 sion may require, so as to be able to examine the patient's right eye 
 with his right, and the left with his left, holding the ophthalmoscope 
 in the right or left hand, as the case may be.
 
 EXAMINATION" WITH THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE. 
 
 19 
 
 As the examination by the upright image consists, as shown in the 
 drawing (Fig. 4), of looking directly through the pupil to the fimdus 
 beyond, the observer should bring his own eye as closely to the ob- 
 served eye as is possible ; for, when obliged to look through a nar- 
 
 FIG. 4. 
 
 row opening, the nearer we bring our eye to the edges of the aper- 
 ture, the wider will be the field of view of what lies beyond. Also, 
 as a matter of course, the larger the pupil, the easier the inspection 
 and the greater the extent of fundus seen. For this reason the first 
 attempt of the observer should be with a dilated pupil. 
 
 For an observer to see the details of the fundus clearly with the 
 upright image, some knowledge of the optical condition of his own 
 eye is necessary, as well as that of the eye to be observed, and any 
 existing fault should be corrected by the proper neutralizing glass. 
 
 The inexperienced observer, even if emmetropic and able to relax 
 his accommodation perfectly for distant objects, is usually a little, 
 sometimes a good deal, myopic for the ophthalmoscope. This comes 
 from the fact that he is unable to adjust his eye for parallel rays when 
 looking into an eye which he knows to be only a short distance from 
 him. He instinctively accommodates and transforms his eye for the 
 time being from an emmetropic to a myopic eye. This must be cor- 
 rected by a suitable concave glass behind the mirror. 
 
 It is better for the beginner not to waste too much time in trying 
 to correct his myopia, either natural or acquired, too exactly ; but to
 
 20 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 take such a glass as will enable him to see the fundus with ease and 
 distinctness, and, this having been attained, the observer will gradually 
 learn to discard the use of too strong a glass by gradually substituting 
 for it a weaker one. The weaker the concave glass, consistent with 
 perfectly clear vision, the better. If, on the other hand, the observer 
 is hypermetropic, and can so relax his accommodation as to be able to 
 use a convex glass, this should be as strong as possible, so that he may 
 see with as little strain on his accommodation and get as large an 
 image as can be secured. 
 
 The general directions for the movements of the patient's eye, up 
 and down, to the right and left, are of course the same as with the in- 
 verted image, only it must be borne in mind that the positions of the 
 objects are really as they appear, and not, as with the inverted image, 
 reversed. The macula lutea is found by following a line directly out- 
 ward from a little below the centre of the optic nerve, and for a dis- 
 tance from its edge of a little over two of its diameters.
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 THE ANATOMY OF THE FUNDUS OF THE NORMAL EYE. 
 
 NOWHERE, except perhaps with the microscope, is the difference 
 between mere sight on the one hand and observation on the other so 
 clearly exemplified as in the use of the ophthalmoscope. It is easy 
 enough after the requisite practice to see with the instrument ; but to 
 appreciate properly what is seen, and especially to differentiate between 
 slight variations, whether of health or disease, requires not only a per- 
 fect perception of the picture as a whole, but an intimate and exact 
 observation and analysis of each and every constituent of the part 
 under consideration. 
 
 To appreciate every detail of the picture, and to give to each its 
 due significance, necessitates therefore an intimate acquaintance with 
 the anatomical elements of the part and their relationship with and 
 dependence upon each other ; and I earnestly recommend to those who 
 wish to acquire the art of ophthalmoscopy, so as to use it with ease 
 and surety, to become as conversant as their opportunities will permit, 
 not only with the grosser anatomical construction, but also with the 
 essential details of the minute anatomy of the parts which contribute 
 either directly or indirectly to what is seen with the mirror. As the 
 works by which this would be accomplished are often inaccessible to 
 the student and practitioner, I have thought it advisable to preface 
 what I shall have to say in regard to the ophthalmoscopic picture of 
 the normal eye by a short account of the principal anatomical factors 
 out of which the picture is developed. 
 
 The optic nerve, in its passage through the orbit, is invested by 
 two sheaths, an " inner " and " outer sheath." The outer sheath, since 
 it is continuous with the dura mater, if not a part of it, is called the 
 dural sheath, while the inner, being derived from the pia mater, is 
 called the pial sheath. The entire space between these two sheaths 
 that is to say, between the dural and pial sheath is called the inter- 
 vaginal or subvaginal space, but it is important to notice here that this 
 space taken as a whole is divided longitudinally by another sheath, the 
 arachnoidal sheath, which is shown in the drawing by the letter (a).
 
 22 
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 This subdivides the intervaginal space into two spaces. The space 
 lying between the outer, or dural sheath, and the arachnoidal sheath 
 (a) is called the subdural space, and is continuous with the subdural 
 or arachnoidal space of the cranium. This space, as will be seen from 
 
 FIG. 5. Section through the optic-nerve entrance. (From Henle, modified by 
 Schwalbe.) r, retina ; cA, choroid ; scZ, sclera ; <?, dural sheath ; a, arach- 
 noidal sheath ; p, pial sheath of the nerve-stem ; space between d and a, sub- 
 dural space ; between a and j, subarachnoidal space of the optic nerve. The 
 central vessels and connective-tissue string appear at the right. (G. and S., 
 vol. i., p. 328.*) 
 
 the drawing, is very narrow ; indeed, in the normal eye it is separated 
 from the dural by only a split-like interval. The second space, or that 
 which lies between the arachnoidal sheath (a) and the pial sheath (p\ 
 is called the subarachnoidal space, and is continuous with the sub- 
 arachnoidal space of the brain. This is much larger than the preced- 
 ing space. These are the spaces which become distended in disease 
 of the brain or its membranes, and which have played so conspicuous 
 a part of late years in the discussions as to the cause of that form of 
 optic neuritis known as choked disk. 
 
 As they reach the bulb, both spaces terminate with a more or less 
 
 * The German publication entitled " Handbuch der Gesammten Augenheil- 
 kunde," edited by Graefe and Saemisch, will in the following pages be denoted 
 by the letters G. and S.
 
 THE ANATOMY OF THE FUNDUS OF THE NORMAL EYE. 23 
 
 pointed end. The outer, or subdural, ends sooner than the inner, or 
 subarachnoidal space, which passes close up to the choroid, and is only 
 separated from it by the thin lamella of sclera which is continuous 
 with the pial sheath. As will be seen from the drawing, the sheaths 
 mentioned above are connected together, that is to say, the dural with 
 the arachnoidal, and this latter with the pial, by fine, loose bands of 
 connective tissue which run transversely between them. There is a free 
 communication for fluid between the two spaces by means of minute 
 perforations in the arachnoidal sheath. The entire subvaginal space and 
 its two compartments have an endothelial lining, arid are lymph-spaces. 
 
 Although the termination of the intervaginal space, taken as a 
 whole, is more or less pointed, it differs very much in all eyes, even 
 those which are nor- 
 mal, in extent and 
 configuration, as will 
 be seen in compar- 
 ing the two sides of 
 the drawing, which 
 is diagrammatic. 
 
 In all myopic 
 eyes, as pointed out 
 by Jaeger, and even 
 in some normal eyes, 
 the end of this space 
 becomes exceedingly 
 pointed and extends 
 f rfhpr into flip KP!P 
 ra, and m doing this 
 is compelled to form, 
 in well-marked cases 
 at least, almost a right angle with its earlier course. These condi- 
 tions can be seen from the following figure from Jaeger,* which is a 
 section of a myopic eye at the nerve-entrance (Fig. 7). 
 
 That this anatomical peculiarity is connected in some way with 
 the origin and development of myopia, and therefore with the oph- 
 thalmoscopic appearances peculiar to it, there can hardly be a question ; 
 all the more as it is at the outer side of the eye, where the space is 
 found more pointed and more extended into the sclera. 
 
 "When the two sheaths have arrived at the bulb, the outer or dural 
 sheath passes directly into the outer two thirds of the sclera, with the 
 fibres of which it is inseparably fused. 
 
 * " ftber die Einstellungen," etc., PI. II., Fig. 27. 
 
 . 6. Longitudinal section through optic-nerve en- 
 trance, showing the different forms of the end of the 
 subarachnoidal space in the sclera: s#, subarach- 
 noidal space ; scZ, sclera ; cA, choroid ; ?, retina. 
 (G. and S., vol. i., p. 331.)
 
 24 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 The inner or pial sheath is intimately connected with the trunk of 
 the nerve, and invests it closely as far up as the choroid. At this 
 place the greater part of its fibres makes an acute bend and passes into 
 
 the inner third of the sclera, 
 while a smaller portion can be 
 traced into the choroid, which 
 at this place is firmly attached 
 to the sclera. Besides these 
 fibres just mentioned those 
 which pass into the inner por- 
 tion of the sclera and those 
 which extend into the choroid 
 there are still others which 
 branch off at right angles near 
 
 the head of the nerve, just before the level of the choroid is reached, 
 and then pass in a transverse direction through and between the bun- 
 dles of nerve-fibres, and thus take part in the formation of the lamina 
 cribrosa, which forms so important a part in the ophthalmoscopic 
 picture, and which will be more particularly described a little later. 
 
 The Nerve-Stem. If we look at a longitudinal section of the 
 optic nerve in its fresh state, two prominent features present them- 
 selves : first, a remarkable change in color at a certain point in the sur- 
 face of the section ; and, secondly, a change in form. Both these 
 changes occur at the place where the stem meets the bulb. The color 
 of the section, which up to this point has been of a glittering white, 
 changes suddenly to a transparent, grayish tinge. The line of de- 
 markation is sharply defined just as the nerve reaches the level of the 
 sclera, and is slightly concave toward the interior of the eye. This 
 sudden change in color is due to the fact that at this place the nerve- 
 fibres lose their medullary sheath, which has the quality of reflecting 
 a large amount of white light, while the non-medullated portion of 
 the fibre becomes transparent and passes on to be distributed over the 
 surface of the retina, of which it forms the inner layer. The transi- 
 tion from the non-transparent to the transparent portion is not always 
 so sudden as here described, and the medullary sheath is often here 
 and there carried along the fibre for a greater or less extent, some- 
 times even beyond the papilla and into the retina itself, where it pro- 
 duces a very singular appearance with the mirror, which will be de- 
 scribed later. 
 
 This transparent portion of the nerve is the part which interests 
 us most, so far as the ophthalmoscope is concerned, and may be di- 
 vided into two parts : 1. That occupied by the lamina cribrosa, which
 
 THE ANATOMY OF THE FUNDUS OF THE MOEMAL EYE. 25 
 
 is a fine network of transverse fibres which surround the nerve-bun- 
 dles from their entrance into the sclera up to the level of the choroid. 
 2. The papilla optici, which lies entirely within the level of the cho- 
 roid and extends to where the nerve-fibres make a sudden bend, to be 
 distributed over the inner surface of the retina (see Fig. 5). 
 
 The effect of this anatomical arrangement is that, although the 
 nerve-fibres, as a rule, lose their medullary sheath and thus become 
 transparent, either before or as they pass through the sieve-like par- 
 tition of the lamina cribrosa, they are, nevertheless, surrounded by the 
 opaque transverse fibres which go to form the lamina cribrosa, and 
 which still reflect large quantities of white light, so that with the 
 ophthalmoscope we get the representation of a flat, white surface ex- 
 tending across the choroidal opening, and on the same plane with the 
 membrane, instead of the head of the nerve appearing, as it often is, 
 an actual protuberance. 
 
 The Form of the Stem of the Nerve. This undergoes a sudden 
 change in the same region as that in which the change in color took 
 place, and principally for the same reason. The nerve-fibres here 
 suddenly become reduced in size from losing their medullary sheath, 
 and from the fact that the fibre itself becomes finer. The result is 
 that at the lamina cribrosa 
 (Fig. 5) the nerve appears 
 to be tightly constricted, as 
 if by a string. The diame- 
 ter of this part of the nerve 
 is consequently much re- 
 duced, and the narrowest 
 portion will be seen to be 
 precisely that which corre- 
 sponds with the level of the 
 choroidal opening which de- 
 termines the extent of the 
 disk seen with the ophthal- 
 moscope. 
 
 Cross - Section of the 
 Nerve - Stem. The optic 
 nerve differs from other 
 
 nerves on cross-section (Fig. 
 
 O x * ,-, ,1 FIG. 8. Section through optic-nerve stem, 
 
 8) from the fact of the very ,. 6 .. 
 
 J showing connective-tissue partitions, con- 
 much greater number of nec tive-tissne string and vessels : a, central 
 nerve-bundles, and also from arter y ; , vein ; p, pial sheath. (Schwalbe.) 
 the fact that each bundle is (G. and S., vol. i., p. 345.)
 
 26 
 
 TEXT BOOK-OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 not surrounded by a lamellated sheath, but, on the contrary, many 
 bundles are grouped together and are parceled off in a loose way 
 by a peculiar staging of connective tissue. This staging is derived 
 from the pial sheath, and is a thick, tough, fibrillar tissue, the fibres 
 of which are bound together by a, very resisting and cement-like sub- 
 stance much more strongly than ordinary connective tissue. This sub- 
 stance resembles in its chemical and physical properties the tissue of 
 the bands of the ligamentum pectinatum. The staging also carries the 
 blood-vessels which run among the nerve-bundles, but which never 
 penetrate into them. There is a capillary space between the connect- 
 ive-tissue partitions and the nerve-bundles which is probably a lymph- 
 space. The nerve-bundles generally run in a longitudinal course, but 
 they interlace with each other, so that the optic nerve may be looked 
 upon as a nervous plexus with an extraordinarily small and long- 
 drawn-out meshwork, which is consequently split-like in character. 
 
 Lamina Cribrosa. The lamina is, as its name implies, a sieve- 
 like layer of fibres which pass transversely across the head of the nerve 
 (Fig. 5), and which arise from various sources : 1. Those fibres de- 
 rived from the inner and pial sheaths, and which have already been 
 alluded to. 2. Those which come from the sclera. These latter 
 fibres are coarser and more compactly arranged than those from 
 
 the inner sheath. There 
 are also, according to 
 some authors, still oth- 
 er fibres, which come 
 from the choroid and 
 take part in the forma- 
 tion of the lamina. All 
 the fibres taken togeth- 
 er form a much closer 
 and firmer network than 
 is present in other parts 
 of the nerve-stem, the 
 character of which and 
 the condensation which 
 the tissue undergoes will 
 be understood by com- 
 paring Fig. 8, which 
 represents a cross-section posterior to the lamina, and Fig. 9, one 
 which is within it. 
 
 The Nerve-Fibres. The fibres of the optic nerve, considered as a 
 whole, are medullated fibres, and the greater part of them are the 
 
 FIG. 9. Portion of transverse section of the optic 
 nerve, within the region of the lamina cribrosa, 
 with the central vessels and the connective- 
 tissue string surrounding them. (Schwalbe.) 
 (G. and S., vol. i., p. 348.)
 
 THE 'AX ATOMY OF THE FUXDTJS OF THE NORMAL EYE. 27 
 
 finest known. They have no sheath of Schwann, and so the medul- 
 lary substance breaks up easily when the fibres are manipulated. 
 The dividing membranes, composed of the connective-tissue elements 
 already mentioned, do not penetrate into the nerve-bundles, but the 
 fibres are cemented together by a peculiar substance which surrounds 
 each nerve-fibre, and which is identical with the so-called neuroglia of 
 the central organ. The fibres, after passing through the lamina cri- 
 brosa, and after forming the papilla, bend at an acute angle to be dis- 
 tributed in a radiating manner to the retina. In doing this the fibres 
 are not evenly distributed, more passing upward and downward than 
 to the sides, and more to the inner than to the outer side. 
 
 Lymphatic Spaces. Besides the lymph-spaces already mentioned 
 that is, the subvaginal space, which is subdivided into the subdural 
 and subarachnoidal space there is, communicating with these, a fine 
 network of split-like spaces which traverses the entire stem of the 
 intra-orbital portion of the nerve. At the lamina cribrosa these split- 
 like spaces are more abundant and of wider calibre than in other por- 
 tions of the nerve. All these spaces communicate with each other, 
 and also with those other spaces which serve to drain the posterior 
 part of the sclera, retina, and vitreous humor. The normal direction 
 of the current of lymph is from the bulb toward the brain; and, 
 although the subdural and subarachnoidal spaces can be filled by in- 
 jecting in an opposite direction that is, from the brain toward the 
 eye such injections will not pass into the lamina cribrosa. If, then, 
 these spaces and their contents have any influence upon the ophthal- 
 moscopic picture, it is not by fluid migrating from the brain, but by 
 the natural current being stopped, by which a stasis of lymph occurs 
 in the head of the nerve and its surrounding parts. 
 
 We come now to a consideration of perhaps the most important 
 element in the formation of the picture of the optic nerve-disk and 
 retina, and one which, perhaps, more than any other, contributes to 
 the individuality of its features, and which, as a rule, marks the first 
 indications between health and disease. 
 
 The Circulation of the Optic Nerve. The intra-cranial portion of 
 the optic nerve is supplied by the vessels which are distributed to the 
 adjacent membranes and substance of the brain, and also from the 
 pia mater, which only loosely surrounds the nerve until it reaches the 
 chiasma. After leaving the chiasma, however, the stem of the nerve 
 is closely invested by the pia mater, the vessels of which then form a 
 fine network which surrounds the nerve, and from which fine vessels 
 penetrate into the substance of the nerve. These fine vessels ramify 
 along the partitions of connective tissue by which the nerve-bundles
 
 28 
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 are divided. While passing through the bony canal the nerve re- 
 ceives some fine twigs from the ophthalmic artery which passes 
 through the canal in company with it. After the nerve has passed 
 through the optic foramen and entered the orbit, it is now invested, 
 as has been mentioned, with an external sheath. This external sheath 
 is first supplied by means of the ciliary vessels. These then pierce 
 the outer sheath, and, passing through the arachnoidal sheath, which 
 is destitute of vessels, form a network in the pial or inner sheath 
 which closely surrounds the nerve, and from which fine branches 
 penetrate into the substance of the nerve in precisely the same man- 
 ner that has been just described as taking place in the intra-cranial 
 portion of the nerve-stem. At the foramen opticum there is a direct 
 connection between the vessels of the intra-cranial and intra-orbital 
 portions of the inner sheath, and in the orbit again between the ves- 
 sels of both the outer and inner sheaths. 
 
 This system of circulation is continued forward along the sheaths 
 to the bulb and lamina cribrosa, where the network of vessels be- 
 comes closer and finer and the meshes narrower, corresponding in this 
 respect with the network of connective tissue, as has already been 
 pointed out. The anatomical distribution of the vascular supply of 
 this part of the nerve will be seen from the following drawing. 
 
 Ch 
 
 FIG. 10. Longitudinal section through the entrance of optic nerve: s, sclera; cA, 
 choroidea; .ff, retina; vi, inner optic sheath; M, outer; A, arteria centralis 
 retinae; Lc, lamina cribrosa; Aci, short posterior ciliary artery, which gives 
 off a twig to the nerve. (G. and S., vol. ii., p. 305.)
 
 THE ANATOMY OF THE FUXDUS OF THE NORMAL EYE. 29 
 
 But, besides the vessels which naturally belong to the posterior 
 parts of the optic nerve, and run forward along its sheaths, and spring 
 paripassu from the ciliary arteries as they proceed through the orbit, 
 there are other branches of the same vessels, the short ciliaries, which 
 just before they enter the sclera send off branches, which, running 
 backward along the sheaths, form a network upon them, from which 
 minute vessels penetrate into the substance of the nerve (Fig. 10). 
 
 The Central Vessels. This system of circulation just described is 
 re-enforced by the addition of the central vessels vena centralis and 
 arteria centralis retinae. These enter the stem of the optic nerve at a 
 short distance, some ten or fifteen millimetres, from the bulb. The 
 arteria centralis is usually a branch of one of the ciliary arteries. 
 Both artery and vein lie close together in the central canal (Fig. 10, A 
 and V), and contribute to the vascular supply of the anterior parts of 
 the nerves by forming a network of vessels, which, branching from 
 the main trunk, ramify between the nerve-bundles. These vessels 
 form a connection with those coming from the sheaths, and also with 
 those from the sclera and choroid. 
 
 Connective-Tissue String. In their passage through the central 
 canal the vessels are surrounded by a mass of connective tissue, which, 
 it is important to notice, is considerably larger in diameter than the 
 circumference of the two vessels. This is called the connective-tissue 
 envelope or string (Fig. 8). It varies somewhat in amount and den- 
 sity, and is loose and feathery in some instances, and more compact 
 and firm in others where it fills up the entire canal. Schwalbe states 
 that, inside the sclera, and consequently in the district of the lamina 
 cribrosa, he could not discover in this connective-tissue string any ves- 
 sels except the central artery and vein. Fig. 8 shows the connective- 
 tissue cord surrounding the central vessels, and Fig. 9 gives the same 
 at the lamina cribrosa. 
 
 This lack of vessels in the connective-tissue string corresponds 
 with what we see commonly with the ophthalmoscope, for there is a 
 central portion of the nerve that is to say, a circuit immediately 
 around the vessels which shows either an entire want of vascularity, 
 or one which is much less marked than in that zone of the nerve which 
 lies between, the connective-tissue string and the circumference of 
 the nerve. 
 
 The intra-scleral portion of the nerve that is to say, the lamina 
 cribrosa and the papilla receives, besides the vessels coming from the 
 sheaths and from the central vessels, also branches from the ciliary 
 vessels and from the choroid. In this way a connection is established 
 between the retinal and ciliary system, which is effected in a great
 
 30 
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 measure by a peculiar arrangement of vessels which is known as the 
 arterial circle of the optic nerve, or more commonly the scleral circle. 
 ,11118 circle is formed within the sclera by two or three small branches 
 from the short ciliary arteries. These pierce the sclera at the pos- 
 terior pole of the eye at a short distance from the nerve, and then 
 form within the substance of the sclera a vascular circle, which sur- 
 rounds the head of the nerve at about the level of the lamina cribrosa. 
 From this circle branches pass in a transverse direction directly into 
 the substance of the nerve (Aci, Fig. 10, and a a, Fig. 21). Here 
 they form an anastomosis with the vessels coming from the central 
 artery, and with other vessels distributed to the head of the nerve. 
 
 FIG. 11. Surface preparation. The choroid and retina have been removed. The 
 striped vessels are the arteries; the dark vessels the veins: Aci, short ciliary 
 arteries ; T, ciliary veins ; ca, scleral circle ; a, central artery ; v, central vein. 
 (Leber.) (G. and S., vol. ii., p. 306.) 
 
 Fig. 11 represents a surface view of the scleral circle. The section 
 shows the nerve and surrounding sclerotic at the level of the circle. 
 
 Besides these vessels which come from the scleral circle, there are 
 other very fine ones both arteries and veins which pass directly 
 from the border of the choroid into the head of the nerve, and the
 
 THE ANATOMY OF THE FUNDUS OF THE NORMAL EYE. 31 
 
 fine capillary network of the choroid merges itself directly into the 
 coarser network of vessels which surround the nerve-bundles. Thus 
 an anastomosis takes place in this region between what is known as 
 the ciliary and retinal system. This in the normal eye is carried on 
 by very fine vessels, which are hardly more than capillaries, and which 
 do not extend, except in very rare cases, to any appreciable distance 
 into the retina. The head of the nerve is the only place where there 
 is an anastomosis between retinal and choroidal vessels. 
 
 ANATOMY OF THE KETTNA. 
 
 The retina for the use of the ophthalmoscope may be looked upon 
 as the expansion of the optic nerve into a membrane which lines the 
 inner surface of the choroid. However complicated and intricate 
 the structure of this may be as revealed by the microscope, so far as 
 the mirror is concerned, it may be considered, excluding the epithelial 
 layer separating it from the choroid, as a perfectly transparent mem- 
 brane which reveals nothing of its structure and but very little, and 
 that only in certain places, of its presence. Moreover, as it lies within 
 a cavity which is open to inspection, its grosser anatomical details are 
 better studied with the mirror than in any other way. A considera- 
 tion of these will, therefore, be postponed until the ophthalmoscopic 
 appearances are described. 
 
 There are, however, a few details in the minute anatomy which 
 are not visible with the instrument, but which have an effect upon 
 the ophthalmoscopic picture which it is useful to know and bear in 
 mind, as it is indeed of certain measurements, and the relative bearing 
 of certain localities to each other. 
 
 Taken as a whole, the thickest part of the retina is near the en- 
 trance of the optic nerve, where, according to Muller, it measures 
 0.428 mm. From this place forward it gradually decreases to 0.140. 
 Its anterior border, from the fact that it presents a serrated edge 
 when torn from its attachments at the zonula Zinnii, is called the ora 
 serrata. There is one exception to the general decrease in the thick- 
 ness of the retina, and this is at the macula lutea. The retina, at a 
 short distance from the outer side of the nerve, rises in a knoll-like 
 fashion until it reaches at the yellow spot a height of 0.49 mm., when 
 it again decreases to the bottom of the fovea, which is the thinnest 
 part of the retina, and amounts to only 0.1 mm. Fig. 12 shows, in a 
 diagrammatic way, these differences in level with the gradually de- 
 creasing thickness of the retina as it proceeds to the anterior portions 
 of the eye. 
 
 The region of the maculea lutea extends in an elliptical shape
 
 32 
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 around the fovea as a centre. It gets its name from the fact that this 
 portion of the retina assumes a yellow shade after death. It is situ- 
 ated to the outer side of the optic nerve, and its centre is a little 
 below the meridian which passes through the centre of the nerve. 
 The distance from the centre of the disk to the centre of the yellow 
 spot that is, the fovea is, on the average, 4 mm., although some 
 variations occur in this even in the normal eye. It varies also in 
 
 FIG. 12. Diagrammatic horizontal section from Merkel, showing gradual de- 
 crease of thickness of retina and depression at the macula lutea. (G. and S., 
 vol. i., p 43.) 
 
 shape from a circle to an ellipse. This latter is by far the commonest 
 form, and the proportion of the horizontal to the vertical diameter is 
 as 4 to 3. It is not exactly in a horizontal line with the disk, as will 
 be seen from Fig. 13, in which the dotted line, which is diagrammatic, 
 marks the position and extent of the macula lutea. 
 
 The distance from the centre of the optic nerve to the inner bor- 
 der of the yellow spot varies from 2.2 to 2.45 mm. The horizontal
 
 THE ANATOMY OF THE FUNDUS OF THE NORMAL EYE. 33 
 
 FIG. 13. Ophthalraoscopic appearances of blood-vessels of retina, from life. 
 (Magnified 7J times.) The light vessels are the arteries ; the black, veins. 
 
 diameter of the spot itself varies in different eyes very much, as can 
 be seen with the ophthalmoscope. Sometimes it reaches as high as 
 three millimetres nearly twice that of the nerve. On the average 
 it is about two millimetres. The " maculea lutea," or region of the 
 
 FIG. 14 gives a diagrammatic section of the retina through the region of the 
 macula lutea and fovea, and shows the depression formed in this portion of 
 the retina by thinning of the layers. (" Handbuch der Lehre von den Gewe- 
 ben." S. Strieker, part v., p. 1024.) (Half size.) 
 
 yellow spot, must not be confounded, as it often is in ophthalmoscopic 
 parlance and literature, with the fovea centralis, which is the central 
 spot of the ellipsoidal region, as will be seen from the diagram. The
 
 34: 
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPIITHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 fovea does not, however, lie directly in the centre of the ellipse which 
 marks the boundary of the yellow spot, but a little below it, and a 
 little nearer to the inner than the outer side. The fovea is a minute 
 depression in the retina, with usually rather steep sides. In life it 
 
 varies a good deal, both in shape 
 and size, as can readily be seen 
 with the ophthalmoscope by the 
 reflexes that take place from its 
 borders. Just behind the fovea 
 centralis, and for a little space im- 
 mediately around it, the pigment 
 in the epithelial layer which sepa- 
 rates the retina from the chouoid 
 is more abundant and of a deeper 
 color than in other parts of the 
 fundus, and the pigment mem- 
 brane itself is more closely united 
 with the retina than in any other 
 place ; so much so that in tearing 
 them apart this portion of the epi- 
 thelial membrane often remains at- 
 tached to the retina. 
 
 The Vessels of the Retina. 
 The arteries and veins are subdi- 
 visions of the arteria and vena cen- 
 tralis, and the manner in which 
 they are distributed will be better 
 understood by a study of Fig. 13 
 than by any detailed verbal descrip- 
 tion. Their appearance with the 
 
 FIG. 15. Diagrammatic section of reti- 
 na, showing the different layers. 
 (Schultze, altered by Schwalbe.) 
 
 ophthalmoscope will be given later 
 under its appropriate heading. The 
 1, membrana limitans interna; 2, j p Branches of the vessels run 
 
 layer of optic- nerve fibres: 3, layer . ~, , , -, 
 
 in the nerve-fibre layer, and are 
 
 of ganglion -cells; 4, internal mo- i_ -L 
 
 lecular layer; 5, layer of internal immediately beneath the internal 
 
 granules; 6, external molecular limiting membrane. They lie so 
 
 layer; 7, layer of external gran- superficially that in a cross-section 
 
 ules; 8, membrana limitans exter- they are seen ^th the microscope 
 
 na; 9, layer of rods and cones; 10, to t above the general level 
 pigment layer; , position of first , ,. j ,-1 , 
 
 , i .,, . , of the retina toward the vitreous 
 
 network of capillaries; o, second 
 
 humor. While the large vessels 
 run in the plane of the inner sur- 
 
 network of capillaries. 
 S., vol. i., p. 358.) 
 
 (G. and
 
 THE ANATOMY OF THE FUNDUS OF THE NORMAL EYE. 35 
 
 face of the retina, smaller vessels penetrate the substance perpendicular 
 to its surface as far as the internal granular layer (Fig. 15, 5). These 
 vessels resolve themselves in penetrating into the retina into two 
 layers of capillaries one in the outer part of the internal molecular 
 lafer (4), and one in the outer part of the layer of internal granules 
 (5). The layers external to this layer are, consequently, without 
 vessels, and a glance at the diagram will show that this portion em- 
 braces the larger half of the entire retina. 
 
 It will be seen from Fig. 13 that the macula lutea, or the ellipsoid- 
 al space inclosed by the dotted line, contains a number of fine vas- 
 cular twigs which, coming from above and below, radiate toward the 
 spot in the centre which marks the position of the fovea centralis. It 
 is well to remember that the macula lutea is the place of the entire 
 retina which is the richest in blood-vessels, many of which can be 
 
 FIG. 16. Blood-vessels of the yellow spot of the human retina injected: A, arter- 
 ies ; F, veins : jV, nasal side of yellow spot (toward optic disk) ; T, temporal 
 side. The shaded area in the middle is the fovea centralis. (Nettleship, 
 " Ophth. Hosp. Rep.," vol. in., part ii., p. 40.) 
 
 plainly seen with the ophthalmoscope, while the microscope shows 
 that the capillary plexus is richer and finer here than in any other 
 part of the retina. As will be seen from the drawing above, Fig. 16, 
 it is only the fovea itself that is devoid of vessels. 
 
 A more instructive figure still of the finer vessels of this region is 
 that furnished by the entoptic appearances, as will be seen from the
 
 36 
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 FIG. 17. 
 
 drawing (Fig. 17) given by Dr. Ayres. It must be borne in mind, 
 however, that the enlargement by this method is not nearly so great 
 as with the microscope, and that the space here free from vessels is 
 not, as in the drawing above, the fovea itself, but the region of the 
 yellow spot. The fovea 
 is seen as a small spot in 
 the centre. 
 
 The retinal arteries 
 do not anastomose with 
 each other. They sim- 
 ply continue on to the 
 periphery of the retina, 
 bifurcating as they go, 
 until they pass at the 
 ora serrata into a mesh- 
 work of very fine cap- 
 illaries, which in turn 
 empty into minute veins 
 which pass backward 
 along the course of the 
 arteries into the vena 
 centralis. At the ora serrata there is no communication whatever 
 with the vessels of the choroid. 
 
 Lymph-Spaces. The lymph-spaces of the retina are formed by 
 perivascular canals, which surround the blood-vessels themselves. In 
 
 the arteries this investment is not com- 
 plete, but is formed by sheath-like pro- 
 cesses which accompany the vessels in 
 strife. The capillaries of the retina 
 do not consist of a single endothelial 
 canal, but of two separable cylinders 
 which lie the one within the other. 
 It is precisely the same with the veins, 
 except that the outer endothelial layer 
 is re-enforced by a tissue which is not 
 unsimilar to reticulated connective tis- 
 sue. The column of blood, then, is 
 only separated from that of the lymph by means of a single thin 
 endothelial membrane, as is shown diagramatically in Fig. 18. 
 
 Pigment -Layer of the fietina. Between the choroid and the 
 retina lies a delicate membrane, which, from the very important effect 
 that it has, according to some observers, upon the ophthalmoscopic 
 
 FIG. 18. Diagrammatic section 
 of vein : a, outer wall ; space 
 between a and Z, lymph- 
 space; &, inner endothelial 
 cylinder; between 5 and c, 
 plasmic current of blood-col- 
 umn ; c, red- blood column.
 
 THE ANATOMY OF THE FUNDUS OF THE NORMAL EYE. 37 
 
 picture of the normal eye, as well as that of morbid conditions, de- 
 serves attention. The pigment-membrane consists of a single layer 
 of hexagonal cells which rest upon the thin transparent membrane 
 the lamina vitrea and which are joined with each other by a thin 
 and transparent cement-like substance in such a manner as to leave a 
 transparent space between the borders of the cells, as will be seen 
 from Fig. 19. 
 
 The pigment-granules within the cell are very fine, and may be 
 looked upon as held in solution in a colorless vitreous substance, 
 
 FIG. 19. Cells from the pigment-layer of the human retina: a, surface view, 
 showing the cells connected together; 5, side-view, showing the long, hair- 
 like processes, some of which are pigmented and some free from pigment; 
 c, side-view of a single cell, showing its connection with the outer member of 
 the rods of the retina. (Strieker, " Handbuch," part v., p. 1013.) 
 
 which during life is exceedingly soft. The pigment is so arranged 
 that it occupies the peripheri<5al portion of the cell, leaving the centre 
 comparatively free, as shown in the drawing ; moreover, it is only the 
 inner portion of the cell, or that nearest the retina, which is pigmented. 
 The thickness of the cell amounts to about -pfa of a line. The pig- 
 mented portion, therefore, would be only -^-^ of a line. Here, as in 
 the stroma, the quantity of pigment in the cell may vary in different 
 eyes or in different cells of the same eye ; it is also of lighter color in 
 pronounced blondes and darker in the negro. Still, in the ordinary 
 individual, whether of medium pigmentation or inclined to the blonde 
 or dark, not only are the anatomical elements very uniform in char- 
 acter and appearance, but, as a rule, so also is the pigmentation. 
 
 Lymph-Spaces. The external surface of the choroid is provided 
 with an endothelium, and the space between it and the sclera is called 
 the perichoroidal space. The arteries, capillaries, and veins are pro- 
 vided with perivascular sheaths, by which the lymph is carried into 
 the perichoroidal space, from which it finds an exit into the orbital 
 spaces by a fissure-like space at each side of the vena vorticosa as it 
 passes through the sclera, as shown in the drawing (Fig. 20) : 
 
 The lymph from the retina finds an exit at the lamina cribrosa
 
 38 
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 scl 
 
 into the opticus, the lymph-spaces of which, as already shown, com- 
 municate with those of the brain. 
 
 The Choroid. So far as the grosser 
 construction is concerned, the choroid is 
 better studied with the mirror than in 
 any other way. Still, it is interesting as 
 well as instructive to know, at least in a 
 cursory manner, the anatomical elements 
 of which it is composed, and, as it is the 
 great purveyor of the eye, the sources 
 from which it draws its vascular supply. 
 The choroid may be looked upon as a vas- 
 cular web or membrane in which the ves- 
 sels are loosely woven together by a sort 
 of connective tissue, which, taken with 
 the vessels, forms a vascular parenchyma 
 or stroma. The non-vascular part of this 
 consists of a small quantity of connective 
 tissue, some elastic fibres, pigmented and 
 non-pigmented cells, which vary both in 
 quantity and amount of pigmentation in 
 different layers. The inner layer, or that 
 of the finer vessels, contains but very lit- 
 tle, and, according to some authorities, 
 no pigment at all. In the outer layers, 
 though always present to a greater or less 
 degree, it may vary greatly in different 
 individuals not only in quantity but also 
 in intensity. The choroid varies in thickness from .08 to .16 mm., 
 or only about one fourth or fifth as thick as the retina, a fact seldom 
 held in mind by the ophthalmological student. The choroid lines 
 the inner surface of the sclera from the optic-nerve entrance to the 
 ciliary processes. It is loosely connected by its outer surface by fine 
 shreds, which taken together form a membrane which has received 
 the name of the membrana supra-choroidea. 
 
 The external surface of the choroid is provided with an endothe- 
 lial membrane, while its inner surface is covered by a smooth and 
 perfectly transparent membrane, the lamina mtrea. The choroid is 
 attached in a firm manner to the sclera in only two places first, an- 
 teriorly, near the junction of the sclera and cornea ; and, secondly, 
 which it is important to remember, at the optic-nerve entrance, which 
 it closely surrounds. Here the layers of the choroid pass into a thin 
 
 FIG. 20. Diagrammatic rep- 
 resentation of a section of 
 a vena vorticosa and its 
 perivascular spaces in the 
 pig's eye: r, retina; ch, 
 choroid ; Pch, pericho- 
 roidal space, injected ; 
 Scl, sclera ; t, space of 
 tenon ; , vena vorti- 
 cosa. (" Handbuch der 
 Lehre von den Geweben 
 des Menschen und der 
 Thiere." S. Strieker, part 
 v., p. 106.)
 
 THE ANATOMY OF THE FUNDUS OF THE NORMAL EYE. 39 
 
 ring, which consists of concentric fibres which form the opening 
 known as the choroidal foramen, which is 1*4 mm. in diameter. Be- 
 sides this direct attachment, there is an indirect one by means of nu- 
 merous nerves and vessels which pass between the choroid and sclera. 
 At the macula lutea the number of these small vessels is so great that 
 a rather close adhesion is formed between the two membranes. The 
 inner surface of the choroid formed by the lamina vitrea is not direct- 
 ly attached to the retina, although the close adaptation of the pig- 
 ment-layer and the hair-like processes which pass from it for a slight 
 distance, at least, between the rods and cones, occasion a certain 
 amount of adhesion, which is sometimes so great that the pigment- 
 layer remains attached to the retina at the macula lutea when the 
 two membranes are torn apart. As a rule, however, and in all other 
 portions except the macula lutea, the pigment-layer, at any attempt 
 at separation, goes with the choroid. 
 
 The Vessels of the Choroid. Although the vessels form a more 
 or less interwoven mass, they may, for convenience' sake, be considered 
 as arranged in three layers : 1. The inner layer, or capillaries. 2. The 
 middle layer, or fine vessels, mostly arteries. 3. The outer layer, or 
 large vessels. The origin of the vessels and the manner in which they 
 are distributed will be seen from the diagram (Fig. 21). 
 
 The short ciliary arteries which chiefly supply the blood for the 
 choroid arise, by means of from four to six small stems, from the 
 ophthalmic artery. While following the trunk of the nerve in the 
 orbit they divide themselves into numerous branches, some twenty in 
 number, which surround the nerve and pierce the sclera at a short 
 distance from the entrance of the nerve-stem, in a perpendicular di- 
 rection, as shown in the diagram by the vessels marked a. The 
 greater part of these vessels proceed forward, branching as they go, 
 and extending themselves over the inner surface of the sclera to form 
 the principal arterial supply of the choroid. Other branches pass 
 backward toward the head of the nerve, where they anastomose with 
 the vessels which belong to the sheaths, and also with the branches 
 coining from the central artery. Still other smaller branches, while 
 yet in the sclera, form the scleral ring. From these, branches are 
 sent out into the substance of the options, as has already been de- 
 scribed. It is well to repeat here, that all these vessels form an anas- 
 tomosis with each other at the head of the nerve, and this is the only 
 place where there is any connection whatever between the retinal and 
 choroidal circulation. 
 
 The long ciliary arteries, 5, two in number, lie on each side of the 
 eye. They pierce the sclera very obliquely, and then run forward in
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 FIG. 21. Diagrammatic representation of the circulation of the eye, horizontal 
 section. Veins, black ; arteries, clear : a, short posterior ciliary arteries ; &, 
 long posterior ciliary arteries; cc', anterior ciliary artery and vein; dd', 
 posterior conjunctival artery and vein ; ee\ central artery and vein ; f, ves- 
 sels of the inner ; g, those of the outer optic sheath ; A, one of the venaa vor- 
 ticosse ; , short posterior ciliary vein ; &, branch of a short posterior ciliary 
 artery which passes into the opticus; I, anastomosis of the choroidal vessels 
 with those of the nerve; TO, chorio capillaris; n, episcleral branches; 0, re- 
 current choroidal artery; p, major arterial circle of the iris; y, vessels of the 
 iris; r, ciliary processes; , branch of a vena vorticosa coming from the cili- 
 ary muscle ; , branch of the anterior ciliary veins coming from the ciliary 
 muscle; , venous circle; , network of vessels at the border of the cornea; 
 to, anterior conjunctival artery and vein. (G. and S., vol. ii., p, 303.)
 
 THE ANATOMY OF THE FUNDUS OF THE NORMAL EYE. 41 
 
 the horizontal meridian of the eye, on the outside of the choroid and 
 between it and the sclera, to be distributed to the anterior parts of the 
 choroid, iris, and ciliary body. These latter, however, contribute but 
 little or nothing to the ophthalmoscopic picture, and the same may be 
 said of the anterior ciliary arteries, cc, and the recurrent arteries, rr, of 
 the choroid, which are branches of the long ciliary and anterior ciliary 
 arteries which run in a posterior direction from the most anterior 
 parts of the choroid. 
 
 The short ciliary arteries lie, when they first pierce the sclera, in 
 the outermost portion of the choroid, surrounded by the loose and 
 
 FIG. 22. Diagrammatic representation of the circulation in the choroidal tract. 
 On the left side the ciliary processes are covered by the ciliary muscle ; on 
 the right the ciliary muscle is removed so as to show the processes : /, iris ; 
 J/e, ciliary muscle ; PC, ciliary processes ; oc, orbiculus ciliaris ; eA, choroidea ; 
 o, optic-nerve entrance; Ah, short ciliary arteries; Al, long ciliary arteries; 
 A'a, anterior ciliary arteries; Cim, circ. art. irid. major; Vvi, vense vorticosse; 
 Fa, ven. cil, ant. ; rr, recurrent arteries of the choroid. (Leber, G. and S., 
 vol. ii., p. 315.) 
 
 highly pigmented tissue of the supra-choroidea. They then pass, di- 
 viding and becoming smaller as they go into the inner layers of the 
 choroid, until by subdivision the finer branches resolve themselves
 
 42 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 into a uniform layer of minute capillaries which cover the entire 
 surface of the choroid from the nerve-entrance to the ora serrata. 
 The network of capillaries in the region surrounding the nerve, and 
 especially in that of the macula lutea, is the finest anywhere in the 
 body. At the entrance of the nerve the capillaries of the choroid are 
 in communication with those of the papilla, even if this layer does 
 not, as some say, pass directly over into the head of the nerve. 
 
 The Veins of the Choroid. These vessels are, from their peculiar 
 conformation, usually called the vense vorticosae. These vortices are 
 usually four, though they occasionally amount to six in number. The 
 various branches of these veins collect the blood from both the ante- 
 rior and posterior parts of the eye, and, piercing the sclera near the 
 equator of the eye, empty into the veins of the orbit. The surface 
 distribution of these veins and that of the arteries will be seen from 
 the drawing (Fig. 22).
 
 CHAPTER IY. 
 
 THE FUNDUS OF THE NORMAL EYE. 
 
 THE two most prominent features of the back, or, as it is com- 
 monly called, the fundus of the eye, may be considered, first, a red 
 background ; secondly, a whitish, disk-like circle, from the centre of 
 which radiates a delicate tracery of vessels. 
 
 It is certainly one of the most curious facts in the entire art of 
 ophthalmoscopy that there should be any difference of opinion as to 
 the cause and origin of the color of the fundus. Such, however, is 
 the fact, for, while some observers attribute the general red hue to the 
 light reflected by the expansion of the network of the choroidal vessels 
 and capillaries, others maintain, such as Jaeger and Mauthner, that the 
 color is due solely to the light reflected from the pigment-epithelium 
 layer, and that no light passes beyond this, when in its normal condi- 
 tion, to the vessels below, and consequently that none is reflected 
 back to the observer. This is a fact of great importance, for, if it 
 were true, then physiological as well as pathological details and pro- 
 cesses in the choroid would be concealed from the observer. It is 
 maintained by those who hold this view that this is precisely what 
 takes place, and that the general uniformity in color and want of 
 detail in the back of the eye are due to the fact that the light strikes 
 the pigment-layer and is reflected from it just as it would be from a 
 thin but untransparent fabric which, while it gave evidence of its own 
 material and color, would conceal everything below it. It is well 
 known, however, that there are many cases in the normal eye in 
 which the details of the choroid, such as the larger vessels and their 
 interstices, are exposed to view, and this objection, which would be 
 fatal to the theory that light did not penetrate the pigment-layers, is 
 met by the statement that where such details are evident there the 
 pigment-epithelium is wanting in pigment, and that the degree of pig- 
 mentation of this layer may and does vary in such eyes. 
 
 The objections to the theory that the color of the fundus is due 
 solely to the pigment-layer, and that light does not pass through it, 
 are so strong and so numerous as to need some little comment.
 
 44 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 In the first place, if it were true that light did not pass through 
 the membrane, then the general coloration of the fundus would not 
 be, as it almost invariably is, either red or of a reddish hue, but of the 
 color of the pigment, which, when seen even by strong daylight, is 
 either of a pure black, or, at the most, of the darkest possible shade of 
 brown, and under the comparatively feeble light of the ophthalmo- 
 scope would be even of a darker shade than by daylight. Moreover, 
 anatomy teaches that the pigment-layer is an exceedingly thin and 
 delicate membrane, consisting of a single layer of hexagonal cells, 
 which are pigmented for only half their thickness, with interspaces 
 of clear, transparent tissue between the individual cells, as will be 
 seen from the accompanying cut (Fig. 23). 
 
 That large quantities of light must pass 
 through such a membrane is self-evident, and 
 the pigment-layer may be looked upon, so far 
 as its effect upon the color of the fundus is 
 concerned, as a very delicate and transparent 
 membrane holding in suspension a certain quan- 
 tity of pigment-granules, so fine as to be almost 
 FIG. 23. vitreous in nature ; and which covers the cho- 
 
 roid, but which, while it may alter, according 
 
 to its richness in pigment, the shade of color belonging to the choroidal 
 vessels, can not in itself alone conceal them from view. 
 
 The fact that we do not always see the larger vessels depends, I 
 believe, not on the pigment-layer alone, but upon the nature and ana- 
 tomical construction of the choroid itself ; and that the general uni- 
 formity of surface which we notice, as a rule, is due principally to the 
 great number and closeness of the small vessels and capillaries, which, 
 knit and woven together like a fabric, lie over the larger vessels, and 
 which, too small to be seen individually with the low magnifying 
 power of the ophthalmoscope, yet give the appearance, as a whole, of 
 a more or less uniform and homogeneous texture. It will be well to 
 remember, in this connection, that the vessels of the choroid are ar- 
 ranged in such a manner that the capillary layer is the most internal, 
 that is, nearest to the observer, while the smaller vessels, mostly arter- 
 ies, come next, and the larger vessels, mostly veins, form the most 
 external layer moreover, that the network of capillaries and small 
 veins and arteries is the finest and closest near the posterior pole of 
 the eye, where, according to Leber, there is " an almost inseparable 
 entanglement of vessels " ; and this is especially true of the region 
 opposite to the macula lutea, where the network of capillaries is the 
 finest in the body.
 
 THE FUXDUS OF THE NORMAL EYE. 45 
 
 The anatomical distribution of the vessels and the different 
 degrees of the fineness and density of the network in the different 
 regions of the fundus are shown in the drawing below from Leber. 
 
 b c 
 
 FIG. 24. Capillary network of the choroid : a, in the neighborhood of the nerve- 
 entrance ; 6, in the region of the equator ; c, in the neighborhood of the ante- 
 rior end of the choroid veins striped longitudinally ; arteries striped cross- 
 wise ; capillaries solid. These latter, as represented in the woodcut, are too 
 fine by about one half. (G. and S., vol. ii., p. 318.) 
 
 It will be seen that even under the microscope the network of ves- 
 sels is exceedingly fine and close. To get some idea of how impossi- 
 ble it would be to distinguish any of the details of such a complication 
 of small vessels arteries, veins, and capillaries with the low magnify- 
 ing power of the ophthalmoscope, the student has only to make a 
 strong concave glass from the test case, and to hold this at such a dis- 
 tance from the drawing that the reduction in the image shall be 
 about one fifth of the actual size of the woodcut. Under even this very 
 trifling reduction it will be observed that every detail of the drawing 
 is lost, and an idea can be formed of what it would be in nature if the 
 enlargement produced by the microscope was removed. This part of 
 the choroid would then in the ordinary eye appear as one uniform 
 layer of a red texture. 
 
 It should also be remembered that the innermost vascular layer of 
 the choroid the capillaries and small vessels ramify in a sort of 
 structureless membrane, which in the normal eye contains but little or 
 no pigment, so that, in point of fact, the only thing which lies between 
 the observer's eye and what may be looked upon as a thin column or 
 layer of blood is a delicate single layer of hexagonal cells, the pig- 
 mented part of which is less than T fa of a line thick, and in which 
 and between which there are numerous interstices of clear tissue. 
 
 The smaller vessels become less numerous as the ora serrata is 
 approached, and the meshes between them larger and more elongated ; 
 and the ophthalmoscopic picture agrees with this anatomical distribu- 
 tion of the vessels. 
 
 The color of the fundus, then, according to this view, would be
 
 46 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 due to reflection from the blood contained in all the choroidal vessels 
 combined, tempered by the pigment contained in the epithelial layer, 
 and influenced to a far greater degree by that of the general stroma of 
 the choroid. To this may be added a certain portion of white light 
 reflected from the sclera, for that a certain quantity of light from the 
 mirror does filter through to the external membrane of the eye, and in 
 some cases to a considerable degree, and is then reflected back, I think 
 can not be doubted. 
 
 Such being the cause of the color, it remains only to say, what the 
 observer will soon find out for himself, that this may vary in shade 
 and tone from the lightest and most delicate pink, as I have seen it in 
 some pronounced blondes, to a shade which, passing through a yellow- 
 ish orange-red, comes to a pure and vivid red, and even to a maroon. 
 If, however, there is one shade which the normal eye never assumes 
 it is that of the blood itself, for there is never a time when the con- 
 trast between the color of the blood in the retinal vessels and that of 
 the general fundus is not clearly defined. 
 
 This variation in shade and tone, as well as that in detail and de- 
 sign, depends in a great measure on the general coloring or complex- 
 ion of the individual examined. Thus, when the complexion is dark, 
 and the pigmentation of the hair and iris is marked, the fundus of the 
 eye will as a usual thing present a deeper shade of red, and the gen- 
 eral details of the fundus will be more obscured than where the hair 
 and iris are of a light color. Indeed, when the fundus is exceedingly 
 rich in pigment the ordinary yellowish or ochre-red reflex is not pres- 
 ent, and the tint approaches a grayish-red, in which at times the gray 
 predominates. In those cases, moreover, in which the pigment is really 
 what may be called excessive in quantity, as in some pronounced ne- 
 groes, the whole fundus seems to have a slaty, grayish hue, or even a 
 silvery, sheen-like appearance, with but little or no red tinge in it. 
 Here, if ever, we get the effect from the pigment-layer alone in great 
 part, and the ophthalmoscopic picture then corresponds in its lack of 
 color with what would be expected when most if not all of the light 
 was reflected from the pigment-membrane without penetrating to the 
 vessels below. Still, that the appearance of the fundus corresponds 
 with the degree of pigmentation of the hair and iris, is not as common 
 a rule as is usually supposed, for I have seen many blondes, even 
 those approaching an albinotic type, in whom the same uniformity 
 in coloration, the same stippled appearance, and the same want of 
 detail as to the visibility of the larger vessels existed, as in persons 
 with the average amount of coloring material, or even in those who 
 were deeply pigmented.
 
 THE FUNDUS OF THE NORMAL EYE. 47 
 
 Here, too, besides the amount of pigment in the pigment-layer and 
 in the stroma of the choroid, the comparative number of small vessels 
 and capillaries take their share in producing the difference in shade, 
 since the vascularity, that is to say, the number of smaller vessels and 
 capillaries, varies in different individuals, even in persons of the same 
 coloration and general complexion. Where, therefore, the vessels 
 large and fine are numerous, and the pigment also rich in quantity, 
 there will be, no matter what the complexion may be, a more general 
 uniformity in texture and a deeper and more pronounced color to the 
 fundus. Where the smaller vessels and capillaries are poorly devel- 
 oped, and at jthe same time the pigment is also deficient in quantity, 
 there the fundus will be less uniform in character, less compact in sub- 
 stance, and the larger vessels, especially toward the equator of the 
 eye, will be seen in greater detail. 
 
 The picture produced under these conditions is exceedingly varie- 
 gated and beautiful. In the posterior pole of the eye, in the neigh- 
 borhood of the nerve, and especially at the region of the macula lutea, 
 where the finer vessels are the thickest and the most intricate, and the 
 pigment in the epithelial layer the most abundant, there will be as a 
 rule a uniform surface with no definite details apparent, except here 
 and there one or two of the larger and deeper-lying vessels of the 
 stroma may struggle into view in subdued contrast with the general 
 uniformity of the rest of this portion of the fundus. As we proceed 
 toward the equator of the eye, this uniformity in color and texture 
 gives place to a more detailed pattern formed by the interlacing and 
 anastomosing of the vessels which form a network, the meshes of 
 which are more or less circular, ovoid, or rhomboidal in shape. Near 
 the equator these meshes become more open in shape and more elon- 
 gated in form. The branches of the vessels anastomose and inter- 
 lace less frequently, and run more parallel to each other and as- 
 sume a meridional course. Here the tapering commencements of 
 the venae vorticosse can be seen, gradually increasing in size and radi- 
 ating toward a common centre, while at the extreme limit of the 
 ophthalmoscopic field the branches of the outgoing veins come into 
 view. These venae vorticosae vary in number from four to six, or 
 even more. 
 
 Under such circumstances the intervascular spaces are clearly de- 
 fined, and appear in the more posterior parts of the fundus of a deli- 
 cate pinkish-white, or even, especially toward the periphery, of a pure 
 white, from reflexion from the surface of the sclera, or, to put it in 
 other words, the vessels appear sharply defined against a whitish 
 background.
 
 48 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 On the other hand, where the pigment is richly or excessively 
 developed in the stroma of the choroid, while there is a deficiency of 
 smaller vessels and capillaries, we may have precisely the same con- 
 figuration as to the convolutions of the vessels, the only difference 
 being as to the color of the intervascular spaces, which are then, 
 instead of being of a whitish hue, either of a dark gray or even black. 
 When this pigment of the stroma is very abundant, and is collected 
 into masses between the interstices of the vessels, it then follows their 
 radiations, and gives a peculiar striped appearance which resembles the 
 markings of a tiger's skin, for which reason it is often spoken of in the 
 books as the choroid tigre. It occurs in various degrees, and is, as a 
 rule, from the anatomical reasons already pointed out, most marked 
 in the periphery of the fundus. This should not be confounded with 
 displacements and accretions of pigment through morbid processes, 
 from which it is usually easily distinguished by its regularity in de- 
 sign, its uniformity of surface and color, and its sharpness of outline. 
 
 This difference of effect, due to the greater or less quantity of the 
 smaller vessels, may be observed not only in different individuals, but 
 also in different parts of the same eye. Thus there may be one dis- 
 trict of the fundus which will present a uniform coloring, wliile an- 
 other portion lying adjacent to it will reveal all the details of the 
 stroma and its larger vessels (see Plate II., Fig. 1). Or we sometimes 
 find one portion of one of the larger vessels covered over and obscured 
 for a considerable distance by what appears to be a homogeneous and 
 continuous surface, while another part of the same vessel or one lying 
 close to it will be seen with perfect distinctness. It would certainly 
 appear to be more natural to attribute such diversity of appearance in 
 the background of the same eye to different degrees of vascularity 
 than to different degrees of pigmentation in -the pigment epithelial 
 layer, which anatomy teaches us is remarkable for containing, as a 
 rule, a uniform amount of coloring-matter in its cells over the entire 
 surface of the membrane as far as the ciliary processes. 
 
 Schweigger, however, takes a somewhat different view ; for, while 
 he believes that the vessels of the choroid, and even the white light 
 reflected from the surface of the sclera, have a share in the production 
 of the color and detail of the fundus, he nevertheless attributes the 
 predominating influence to the pigment-layer, and even goes so far as 
 to say that in those cases in which in certain places there is a uniform 
 hue, while in others the details of the fundus are clearly seen, there is 
 in these latter portions a local lack of pigment in the epithelial layer. 
 
 Besides there being a finer and closer network of vessels at that 
 part of the choroid which corresponds to the macula lutea, there is
 
 THE FUNDUS OF THE NORMAL EYE. 
 
 Lea 
 
 also an increased amount of pigment both in the epithelial layer and 
 in the stroma of the choroid, which, as a rule, gives a deeper and 
 richer tone to this region than to the rest of the fundus ; and I have 
 also, on one or two occasions, with the inverted image, seen the fovea 
 appear as a minute dot in the very centre of this region, much as the 
 bull's-eye does on a target. This region is also the seat of various 
 reflexes, which will be dwelt upon later. 
 
 As seen with the ophthalmoscope, the red background of the eye 
 closely encircles the stem of the optic nerve. This is due to the fact 
 that the choroid passes beyond what is usually called the scleral open- 
 ing, as will be seen in the drawing, into the constriction, which takes 
 place in the optic nerve, in the neighborhood of the lamina cribrosa, 
 ch (see Fig. 25, also Fig. 5). The scleral opening, therefore, even if it 
 existed, could not be seen with the mirror, though the name still holds 
 its place in the litera- 
 ture. Strictly speak- 
 ing, also, the choroidal 
 foramen is not a fora- 
 men, as fibres are sent 
 out from the choroid 
 into the optic nerve 
 and the lamina cribro- 
 sa. So far as the oph- 
 thalmoscope is con- 
 cerned, it may be 
 looked upon, however, 
 as an opening, through 
 
 which the optic nerve protrudes, or, better still, as an opening in a 
 membrane by which the head of the nerve is encircled, the margin of 
 which is formed from concentric fibres from the choroid. This open- 
 ing determines the area of the optic nerve seen with the instrument, 
 and its transverse diameter is on the average 1.4 mm. 
 
 The margin of the opening from the concentric way in which the 
 fibres forming it run, and from the fact that the vascular layer of the 
 choroid is carried up to its edge, is usually clear and well defined, 
 sometimes so sharply cut as to really resemble the drawings made 
 from it, so that in some cases the head of the nerve appears to be sur- 
 rounded by a very fine dark line. The border may, however, be 
 more or less irregular, and may at times show a variation in color from 
 the rest of the fundus, especially at the outer side, where not infre- 
 quently there is a crescentic figure of a deeper shade than the sur- 
 rounding tissue. This is due to an increased amount of pigment 
 
 FIG. 25. G. and 8., vol. i., p. 18.
 
 50 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 mixed with the general red of the part, and this pigment may be so 
 increased in quantity as to form small fragmentary patches here and 
 there around the edges of the disk, which gives to the bordering 
 tissue a more or less frayed appearance ; or the pigment may be 
 gathered together into a crescentic figure like the young moon. 
 This usually surrounds the outer edge of the nerve, or may be sepa- 
 rated from it by a narrow strip of the ordinary red color of the fundus. 
 It may, however, lie at the inner side of the nerve, or, in very rare 
 cases, above or below it ; or, in rarer cases still, there may be two cres- 
 centic figures, one at the outer and the other at the inner side of the 
 nerve, or, indeed, a narrow circle of pigment may extend round the 
 entire circumference of the disk. On the other hand, instead of a 
 deeper coloring at the outer side of the nerve with an increased 
 pigmentation, the fundus at this place may show a paler hue and 
 a lesser pigmentation than the surrounding parts. Aggregations 
 of pigment sometimes occur in other parts of the fundus in normal 
 eyes and are usually congenital defects, and are sometimes of a 
 bizarre appearance, and then deserve, from their rarity, the name of 
 anomalies of pigmentation, and as such will be alluded to later. 
 
 As the background varies in color and tone, so too it may vary to 
 a considerable degree in what may be called its texture. Thus it has 
 usually a more or less stippled appearance, no matter how uniform its 
 coloring may be. This granular or shagreen effect is thought by 
 most authors to be produced entirely by an increased amount in quan- 
 tity and intensity of the pigment in the epithelial layer, and Lie- 
 breich goes so far as to say that in certain conditions the individual 
 cells of the layer can be detected with the ophthalmoscope. This is 
 probably, however, not the case, as the enlargement with the ophthal- 
 moscope is too small to permit of seeing so minute an object upon 
 such a confusing background and surroundings. Eut the appearance 
 claimed for a single cell may be, and probably is, sometimes due to 
 an aggregation of cells. My own opinion is, that it is also due in part 
 to the varying degrees of pigment in the stroma of the choroid, and 
 to the fact that light is alternately reflected and interrupted from sur- 
 faces which lie in different planes. Sometimes the surface appears 
 smooth and hard like a cloth with no nap to it, and then again like 
 one that has a plush or " velvety feel." This latter condition when 
 well marked is, I believe, more often pathological than physiological, 
 and a sign of congestion and slight oedema in the choroid. 
 
 It should not be forgotten that the general color and tone of the 
 fundus change somewhat with the quality of the light employed in 
 the illumination. The whiter the light the less vivid the red, until
 
 THE FUNDUS OF THE NORMAL EYE. 51 
 
 with ordinary daylight it becomes a delicate rose-pink. Moreover, 
 the stronger the illumination the more pronounced is the red hue, and 
 the inexperienced observer will often be surprised to find that a 
 fundus which, seen under the strong illumination and small enlarge- 
 ment of the inverted image, appears to be of a vivid red, is, under the 
 reduced illumination and increased enlargement of the upright, a 
 pale, yellowish ochre. 
 
 The variations in appearance of the background of the eye are as 
 unlimited as the number of persons examined, for no two are alike ; 
 still, with all this infinite variety of shade of color and of detail, there 
 is nevertheless a certain appearance and tone to a normal fundus which 
 enable the observer after the requisite practice to distinguish at once 
 a healthy fundus from one that is either congenitally or pathologically 
 abnormal. 
 
 To give an adequate description of all the diversities of shade or 
 design would be almost as useless as it would be impossible. The stu- 
 dent may, however, profit by taking a glance at the chromo-lithographic 
 plates at the end of the volume, representing the background of vari- 
 ous normal eyes, and showing different degrees of pigmentation and 
 vascularity (Plates I and II). 
 
 The second, and without doubt the most prominent, feature in the 
 fundus, and one toward which the experienced as well as the inex- 
 perienced observer turns as a basis for further observations, is the 
 white circle or disk which may be said to mark the centre of the 
 ophthalmoscopic field. This is known in the books under different 
 names, from the various characteristics which it possesses. Thus, from 
 its shape it is most frequently spoken of as the " disk " ; while, from 
 the fact that, anatomically speaking, it sometimes rises above the level 
 of the retina, it is called the " papilla " ; or, again, as it marks the 
 place where the optic nerve passes through the sclera, it is often des- 
 ignated as the " optic-nerve entrance." 
 
 The disk, though always circular in form, is seldom a perfect cir- 
 cle, though this, so far as the eye can detect, is sometimes the case. 
 It is usually, however, more or less oval in shape, and, when such is 
 the case, the long diameter is usually vertical. The reverse, however, 
 may occur, and the largest diameter run in an oblique direction. 
 Here, as elsewhere in the body, variations may occur which are very 
 marked, and the preponderance of one diameter over the other in 
 the proportion of nine to seven and a half, or even seven, can be 
 considered of common occurrence and strictly within physiological 
 limits. A greater discrepancy than this must, however, be considered 
 as excessive, and in this sense abnormal. I have, occasionally, seen
 
 52 TEXT-BOOK OF OPIITHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 the oval carried so far as to be fairly considered a distortion, in eyes, 
 too, which certainly had no appearance of disease, and in which there 
 was no optical error. Fig. 26 represents such an eye, the diameters 
 
 being as 25 is to 13, or nearly two to 
 one. These exaggerations in shape, as 
 well as the marked obliquity of the long 
 diameter, are often accompanied with a 
 reduction of vision, which would lead 
 to the belief that they were really the 
 expression of congenital malformations 
 or arrests of development. 
 
 This diversity in shape of the optic 
 nerve, and the various inclinations of its 
 long diameter which are due to anatom- 
 ical construction, must not be confound- 
 ed with the same appearances sometimes 
 FIG. 26. produced by astigmatism, and which 
 
 disappear as soon as the optical error 
 
 is corrected by the methods to be pointed out in the chapter on 
 refraction. 
 
 The diameter of the optic nerve itself at the level of the choroid- 
 al foramen varies considerably, ranging in the normal eye from 1.2 
 to 1.6 mm. If we now take the enlargement under which the fundus 
 of an emmetropic eye is seen with the ophthalmoscope as 14| times, 
 and take also the smallest measurement given above as the diameter 
 of the disk, this latter is seen as if equal in round numbers to 17 mm. ; 
 while, if the largest measurement is taken, the diameter of the disk 
 would rea^h nearly 23 mm., or one third larger. If, now, instead of 
 taking the extremes, we take the general average of the diameter of 
 the nerve as 1.4 mm., which agrees with the average dimensions of 
 the choroidal foramen, the diameter of the disk would be, under the 
 same enlargement, 20 mm., and Liebreich has drawn in his Atlas (Tab. 
 II, Fig. 1) the disk of a normal eye with sucli dimensions. There can 
 be but little question that to the ordinary observer the diameter of 
 this disk appears altogether too large. But it must be borne in mind 
 that the apparent size of an object and its actual size are very differ- 
 ent things. In looking at the fundus of a normal eye there is no 
 object to compare it with ; and as the observer, though his own eye 
 is accommodated for an infinite distance, knows that the object viewed 
 is not only not at an infinite distance, but is actually at a few inches 
 from his own eye, objects of the fundus appear smaller than they 
 really are. To imitate on paper, therefore, the size of the disk as it
 
 THE FUNDUS OF THE NORMAL EYE. 53 
 
 really appears to the ordinary observer, the diameter of the disk 
 would have to be reduced to 16 or even 1 5 mm. It is for this reason 
 that the beautiful and thoroughly artistic drawings of Liebreich, rep- 
 resenting the fundus of various normal eyes,* appear to be so untrue 
 to nature in respect to size. 
 
 The five drawings given by Liebreich and taken collectively as 
 they stand, and independent of the scales upon which they are drawn, 
 represent very well the great discrepancy which may exist in the size 
 of the disk in the normal eye. As has already been stated, the size 
 of the choroidal foramen would also affect the size of the disk in dif- 
 ferent cases even where the diameter of the nerve itself is the same, 
 since the larger the foramen and the less closely it invests the head 
 of the nerve, the greater the extent of surface of the nerve or its 
 sheath exposed to view (Plate II., Fig. 3). This is often made mani- 
 fest by the ophthalmoscope when the edge of the choroidal opening 
 seems to be drawn to one side. When this apparent traction is pres- 
 ent, it is usually at the outer side of the nerve, though other portions 
 of the circumference may at times appear to have suffered from the 
 same want of close adjustment of the choroidal opening or foramen 
 to the constricted portion of the head of the nerve. 
 
 Thus we see from anatomical reasons alone, and quite independent 
 of those of an optical nature, that the size of the normal disk may 
 pass through wide fluctuations ; and, what is true of the disk is true 
 also of its component parts as, for example, the vessels so that it 
 may happen that the disk shall be so much larger than common that 
 the vessels, although of normal size, shall, in comparison, seem ab- 
 normally small ; and, vice versa, the disk may, from anatomical con- 
 struction, be so small that the vessels may seem abnormally large. 
 Experience and practice, however, soon enable the observer to make 
 allowances for even the larger deviations from the standard, and to 
 tell at a glance what is normal, though peculiar, from what is either 
 congenitally or pathologically abnormal. 
 
 The surface of the disk appears to lie in the same plane with the 
 background formed by the choroid. This is due to the fact that all 
 that part of the head of the nerve which lies anteriorly to the plane 
 of the choroid is so transparent as not to be visible in its normal con- 
 dition except under the closest inspection. This transparent condition 
 of the head of the nerve is due principally to the fact that the optic 
 nerve-fibres, after entering the lamina cribrosa, lose their medullary 
 sheath (page 24). What really produces the white surface of the disk 
 is the combined mass of nerve-fibres, with their sheaths, the transverse 
 
 * "Atlas d'Ophthalraoscopie," Tab. II.
 
 54: TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 interlacing fibres of the lamina cribrosa, and those from the choroid, 
 which, taken together, reflect a large quantity of white light. Prac- 
 tically, we look through a thin portion of the head of the nerve, 
 which is transparent, down upon a slightly more posterior portion 
 which is opaque, and which reflects a large amount of white light. 
 What we see is really the anterior surface of the lamina cribrosa, 
 together with the abrupt endings of the medullary sheaths of the 
 uerve-flbres (Fig. 25, Icr). 
 
 It follows from this that even if the head of the nerve were a real 
 papilla, and did project above the surface of the retina, this projection 
 would, in the great majority of cases, be overlooked, as the attention 
 of the observer is directed to a plane slightly posterior to the internal 
 surface of the nerve, just as we sink the consciousness of the glass in 
 looking at the picture behind it. That the papilla should reveal itself 
 in the normal eye in microscopic sections so much more frequently 
 than with the mirror is, therefore, natural. Still, by very accurately 
 focusing the vessels, one can often convince one's self, even where it is 
 not at first apparent, that the head of the nerve does rise above the 
 level of the retina, and thus become a true papilla, especially toward 
 the nasal side. 
 
 To the inattentive observer the disk presents merely a circular sur- 
 face of a white or pinkish color, from the centre of which a system 
 of vessels emerge to ramify over the surface of the retina. Closer 
 inspection, however, shows that even the surface of the disk is by no 
 means so uniform in structure or appearance as it seems at the first 
 glance, but that its surface is variegated by certain dispositions of light 
 and shade, and by certain accentuations of color which arrange them- 
 selves in more or less pronounced and constantly occurring features. 
 A true appreciation of these is absolutely indispensable to a proper 
 knowledge of physiological as well as pathological conditions. 
 
 Discarding, for the moment, the effect of the vessels, and admit- 
 ting that the fundamental color is of a creamy white, even then we 
 very rarely, if ever, have a uniform appearance of the disk, either in 
 color or texture. On the contrary, the surface is usually more or less 
 variegated; sometimes markedly so, according to the different pro- 
 portions and arrangements of this part of the nerve. If the medul- 
 lary sheath is discontinued upon all the nerve-fibres in a uniform 
 manner just at the lamina cribrosa, then the surface of the disk will 
 appear to be flat, and lie in one and the same plane, and be more uni- 
 form in character. When, however, the sheaths are discontinued in 
 an irregular manner some before they reach the lamina, and others 
 after they have passed it then the surface has a more or less mottled
 
 THE FUNDUS OF THE NORMAL EYE. 
 
 55 
 
 appearance, which is expressed by alternate patches or spots of gray 
 on a white ground. Contrary to what would be supposed, these gray- 
 ish flecks or spots, according to some authorities, are not due to a 
 more opaque tissue, which reflects a grayish color, but to the fact that 
 the sheath is discontinued earlier upon the fibres which correspond to 
 these spots, and that, as a consequence, the transparent fibres allow the 
 light to penetrate their substance without being reflected back to the 
 observer in an equal degree. These places, therefore, appear of a 
 darker shade than the surrounding nerve- 
 substance, the fibres of which, as they 
 still possess their sheaths, strongly re- 
 flect the light. This effect can be car- 
 ried so far as to give a reticulated 
 or honeycombed appearance, especially 
 where there is an excavation of any 
 kind, physiological or pathological, in 
 the head of the nerve. This appear- 
 ance is very well shown in Fig. 27, 
 which is a normal eye, from Liebreich 
 (Atlas, Tab. I, Fig. 5). That the above 
 explanation is true in some cases is prob- 
 ably correct ; still, there is a very simi- 
 lar condition which is really due to some 
 
 peculiarity in the nerve-fibre itself, or to some slight pigmentary 
 deposit, which reflects a grayish kind of light, that is, at times, 
 exceedingly difficult if not impossible to tell with the instrument 
 alone from that which comes from gray atrophy of the tissue. 
 
 Admitting that the fundamental color of the disk is white, it re- 
 mains to be considered how this is affected by the vascularity of this 
 portion of the nerve which, as has already been shown in the chapter 
 on anatomy, page 27 et al., draws its blood-supply from so many and 
 such different sources. It is this vascularity of course which imparts 
 to the nerve the reddish tinge which it always possesses to a greater or 
 less degree in a state of health. First, as to the shade of color. This 
 may differ from a delicate pink to a pure reddish hue, which depends a 
 great deal, not only on the richness of the smaller vessels and capillaries, 
 but also on the comparative amounts of connective-tissue elements and 
 opaque fibres which form the background of the disk. Where there 
 is little of this kind of tissue the disk has a more translucent appear- 
 ance, and we get the consciousness, at least a careful observer does, 
 besides the effect of the small, isolated vessels that lie superficially, 
 also that of a deeper-lying set of vessels which, though too small and 
 
 FIG. 27.
 
 56 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 too close together to be seen as individual vessels, yet which neverthe- 
 less give a perceptible indication of their presence by a more or less 
 general pink or reddish hue. 
 
 This appearance is sometimes increased in inflammations of tho 
 choroid, so that we become convinced of a deeper-lying congestion 
 than what comes from the anterior surface of the disk, just as we be- 
 come conscious in some forms of episcleritis of an injection of the 
 underlying sub-con junctival and scleral tissues. Where, on the other 
 hand, the connective-tissue elements are more abundant, the disk has 
 a more opaque appearance, and the color approaches, especially in 
 dark-haired people, to a deep red with even a maroon tinge, probably 
 occasioned by a mixture of very minute pigment-cells among the tis- 
 sues. Moreover, where the connective-tissue elements are abundant 
 in the disk and surrounding parts of the retina, a certain striated ap- 
 pearance is often given to the nerve and the adjacent parts of the 
 retina, which is sometimes so marked as to lead the inexperienced ob- 
 server to believe that he is in the presence of a high degree of conges- 
 tion, or even a neuritis. 
 
 Although a delicate shade of pink or red may extend over the 
 entire surface of the disk with but slight variations in intensity in 
 different places, this is not the usual presentation. On the contrary, 
 the surface of the disk is, as a rule, variegated by different degrees of 
 color depending upon the different degrees of vascularity of the va- 
 rious parts. Thus the reddish tinge is more marked and more homo- 
 geneous toward the nasal side of the disk than the temporal because 
 the vessels and capillaries are thicker in this region. Nor does the 
 color as a rule extend to the centre of the disk on the one hand, nor 
 to the extreme circumference on the other. From this disposition of 
 color it generally results that the centre of the optic nerve, or that 
 part which corresponds to the connective-tissue string, Figs. 5, 8, and 
 9, is to a large degree free from color, and is sometimes spoken of as 
 the clear spot. (See also chromo-lithographic Plate II, Fig. 2.) Just 
 outside of this clear spot comes a band or zone of vascularity of 
 greater or less breadth which encircles the connective-tissue string and 
 porus opticus. This may be looked upon as the vascular portion of 
 the disk. Sometimes, instead of being a complete zone or circle of 
 injection, it is narrower at the top and bottom of the disk so as to 
 form two crescents, one on the nasal and one on the temporal side of 
 the nerve, of which the inner one, as before mentioned, is usually the 
 most prominent, both as to extent and shade of color. Outside of 
 this injected portion of the nerve comes a white narrow circle, which 
 is sometimes so free from vascularity and of so white a color that it
 
 THE FUNDUS OF THE NOEMAL EYE. 57 
 
 seems to bind the circumference of tlie disk as a tire binds the wheel. 
 Usually, however, this ring is not of a uniform diameter in all its ex- 
 tent, but narrows itself at the upper and lower portions of the disk so 
 as to form an inner and outer crescent, which then appear to embrace 
 the head of the nerve. Sometimes only one crescent is present, and 
 then it is usually the outer one. 
 
 This narrow white circle has received the name of the scleral ring, 
 from the belief that it marked the edge of the " scleral opening." 
 This would appear to be erroneous, as there is no such thing as the 
 scleral opening, the outer sheath of the nerve being so merged with 
 the sclera as to form a continuous membrane. A better name for it 
 is that given to it by Jaeger, of the " connective-tissue ring," since it 
 is formed from the connective-tissue elements of the inner sheath of 
 the nerve as it is continued upward into the innermost layers of the 
 sclera and into the choroid itself (Fig. 5). The scleral ring, properly 
 speaking, is indeed another and entirely different ring, and is only 
 seen in abnormal and pathological conditions. This is a broader white 
 ring which encircles the optic nerve and owes its existence to the fact 
 that the portions of choroidal tissue which surrounds the head of the 
 optic nerve have become atrophic and been absorbed. This effect is 
 seen at its height in certain cases of glaucoma. It is then seen that it 
 is entirely outside of the circumference of the nerve, while the con- 
 nective-tissue ring appears to form the outer boundary of the nerve 
 itself. The appearance of the connective-tissue ring is due to the 
 fact that we look through the transparent fibres of the head of the 
 nerve, which is spread out more or less like a mushroom, to the con- 
 nective-tissue elements of the inner sheath and those of the lamina 
 cribrosa which lie below (see " Anatomy," page 24:). 
 
 The connective-tissue ring varies, therefore, not only in size but 
 also in shape and color, according to the predominance of the connect- 
 ive-tissue elements in the sheath and in those portions of the head 
 of the nerve bordering upon it. Sometimes in elderly people this tis- 
 sue is so abundant in this part of the nerve, and reflects so much white 
 or grayish-white light as to lead to the supposition that there is a 
 local atrophy of the nerve. I have, moreover, occasionally seen the 
 same appearance in youthful eyes which were otherwise normal, both 
 as to the ophthalmoscope and amount of vision. When the ring is thus 
 prominent in appearance, it is also probable that the medullary sheath 
 has been continued along the fibres of the nerve-bundles which lie 
 near the periphery of the disk, a little beyond the lamina cribrosa. 
 This would also account for the optical effect of a cup-like excavation 
 of the head of the nerve where there was no bending of the vessels.
 
 58 
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPIITHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 "We have then four concentric markings in and around the disk : 
 
 1. The innermost or non-vascular portion or " clear spot," Fig. 28, a. 
 
 2. The vascular portion, vp. 3. The connective-tissue ring, ctr. 4. 
 The choroidal or pigment ring, chr. (See also chromo-lithographic 
 Plate II, Fig. 2.) 
 
 It is essential to the student to note carefully these concentric 
 markings, as they are important, as will be seen later, in making a 
 
 differential diagnosis. 
 
 In diseased conditions 
 we have, as already ob- 
 served, still another con- 
 centric marking known 
 as the scleral ring. In 
 some rare cases even in 
 normal eyes, where the 
 choroid seems to be drawn 
 aside, portions of the scle- 
 ra may be seen, which 
 then, instead of forming 
 FIG. 28. Diagrammatic representation of the sur- a complete ring, give rise 
 face of the disk, showing its concentric mark- to a small white crescent- 
 ings: a, non-vascular portion, or "clear-spot," i c or gemiiunar figure. 
 
 formed by connective-tissue string; vp. vas- -.-rji 
 
 ,. * . When this occurs only 
 cular portion; ctr, connective-tissue ring; 
 
 chr, choroidal ring. at the outer 6lde of the 
 
 nerve, it produces the ap- 
 pearance of a small conus. This appearance is due, at least most 
 frequently, to a congenital defect, and not as in the ordinary cone to 
 a distention of the coats of the eyeball and traction upon the choroid. 
 
 If there is this diversity in the general surface aspect of the disk, 
 there is a like diversity in what may be looked upon as its elevation. 
 If we look at a perpendicular section of the optic nerve, we see that 
 the vessels which supply the retina run through a canal which pierces 
 the centre of the anterior portion of the nerve (Fig. 5, p. 22). The 
 expanded part of this canal at the head of the nerve is called the porus 
 options, and varies to a great degree in different eyes, both as to width 
 and depth. Sometimes the tissue of the head of the nerve embraces 
 the retinal vessels so closely, up to the very angle which they make as 
 they pass into the retina, that, so far as the ophthalmoscope is con- 
 cerned, there does not appear to be any porus opticus. In this case 
 the vessels seem to emerge from a close-fitting tissue. At other 
 times there is a gentle separation of the mouth of the canal, which 
 may be so increased as to offer a wide, funnel-shaped excavation like
 
 THE FUNDUS OF THE NORMAL EYE. 59 
 
 that of a calla lily or convolvulus. Again, the excavation may be 
 very shallow and extend itself with a gentle curve outward like an 
 exceedingly shallow Grecian or Etruscan cup, so shallow indeed as to 
 be barely recognizable, and it is this form which predominates and 
 which is considered the typical physiological excavation of the optic 
 nerve, in contradistinction to the abnormal excavations which are the 
 results of disease. 
 
 The most prominent feature of a physiological excavation and the 
 one that is looked upon by some authors as pathognomonic is, that it 
 does not extend to the edges of the nerve, and that the vessels are not 
 pressed backward so as to rest upon the floor of the depression. This 
 rule, however true it may be in the majority of cases, especially 
 where it includes the entire circuit of the nerve, has not a few excep- 
 tions, at least where the excavation is limited to certain portions of 
 the circumference ; for I have seen many cases, even in young chil- 
 dren, where there was no sign or symptom of disease, in which the 
 excavation, especially at the temporal side, passed clear up to the 
 edge of the nerve, and in which at times the vessels followed pretty 
 nearly the plane of the floor of the excavation. Sometimes the excava- 
 tion, instead of spreading out from the axis of the nerve with sloping 
 sides, has from the beginning a wide floor, forming almost a tubular 
 or cylindric opening, the sides of which are so steep as to be almost at 
 right angles with the surface of the disk, and giving much the appear- 
 ance as if drilled out with a punch. Such an opening may occupy a 
 considerable portion of the centre of the nerve, the abrupt rim of 
 which is then usually pierced by the ves- 
 sels, as is shown in the drawing (Fig. 29), 
 which is a sketch from the normal eye of 
 a child of ten years, with a vision in this 
 eye of over f g. 
 
 This sharp rim may extend round the 
 entire excavation, but most frequently at 
 some portion of its circumference, and 
 then usually at the temporal side, it loses 
 its abrupt brim and slopes gradually to F IG 29. 
 
 the edge of the nerve as if it had been 
 
 drawn away from its former position, and, when this is so, some parts 
 of the lamina cribrosa come into view and reveal themselves by the 
 darkish spots on a white ground which have already been alluded to, 
 and which are shown in Fig. 27, p. 55. 
 
 Sometimes these excavations do not preserve a continuous plane or 
 floor, but the ascent from the centre of the nerve toward its edge is
 
 60 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 broken by a slight rise or step to a higher level, which may be either 
 abrupt and steep or very sloping, as seen in the two sides of Fig. 30. 
 It is this kind of an excavation which requires particular attention on 
 the part of the observer in determining whether the floor of the exca- 
 vation, which is on two different planes, is entirely congenital, or 
 
 whether a pre-existing physiological excava- 
 tion is not having a second and abnormal 
 one of a lesser circumference grafted upon it. 
 It is claimed by some writers that some 
 of these excavations, especially those in 
 which the floor is broad and flat and the 
 FIG. 30. sides steep, are not real but only " apparent 
 
 excavations," due to the fact that where 
 
 there appears to be an actual want of tissue there is none in reality ; 
 but that the tissue, though present, is so transparent as not to reveal 
 itself under the illumination of the ophthalmoscope. If this is true, 
 of course there is no means of determining with the instrument with 
 positive certainty whether an absolute want of tissue exists or not, or 
 whether in a given case an excavation is real or only apparent, due to 
 the early discontinuance of the medullary sheaths of the nerve-tibres 
 and absence of connective-tissue elements. Still the writer on rare occa- 
 sions has been led to believe that he was dealing with one of these 
 apparent excavations from the detection of a small bit of feathery tis- 
 sue, which appeared to lie in a perfectly transparent medium and 
 which was destitute of all motion ; or, again, from the fact that here 
 and there minute vessels could be detected as if suspended in a jelly- 
 like substance at a level which was in advance of the floor of the ex- 
 cavation. 
 
 The great characteristic of these physiological and congenital exca- 
 vations is that, although they may occupy different and various posi- 
 tions in the surface of the nerve, and although they may have steep 
 walls and overhanging sides, they do not extend up to the edge of the 
 nerve. It is true they may occasionally touch this at some part of 
 the circumference, especially at the outer side toward the macula. But 
 this is very different from the excavation made by the pressure of the 
 contents of the globe, which, as a rule, depresses the entire surface of 
 the disk below the original level, and produces a crater-like opening 
 with shelving edges, that undermine the entire extent of the disk 
 up to and even beyond the choroidal foramen. 
 
 There are some congenital excavations so great that they must 
 certainly be looked upon as abnormal, and either the result of mal- 
 formation or intra-uterine disease, and in this sense the word congeni-
 
 THE FUNDUS OF THE NORMAL EYE. 61 
 
 tal must not be confounded, as it often is, with the term physiological. 
 Such an excavation is shown in Fig. 31. It was taken from the eye 
 of a lady in the prime of life, who came to me with the complaint 
 
 that she was unable to use her eyes for 
 
 any length of time without discomfort and 
 pain. I am inclined to think that most 
 observers would, at the first glance, think 
 as I did, that this enormous excavation was 
 of a glaucomatous character. A moment's 
 inspection, however, led me to change my 
 mind. In the first place the excavation, j 
 though occupying nearly the entire surface 
 of the nerve, did not extend at any part of JT IG- 31, 
 
 its circumference to the edge of the disk. 
 
 The sides of the excavation, though very steep, and all along the upper 
 border beveled backward, nevertheless had a sharp edge so sharp, 
 indeed, and so transparent, that in certain positions a very fine but 
 perfectly marked dark line came into view along the border, caused, I 
 thought at the time, by total reflection as we sometimes see it in a dis- 
 located lens. Had the excavation been due to pressure, the edges would 
 have been rounded off, since the excavation does not reach the rim of 
 the nerve, and the vessels, instead of piercing the border, as they did 
 in various places, would have curled over the rounded brim, as they 
 do in the lower portion of the disk. These facts were, in my mind, 
 highly corroborative of the excavation, extensive as it was, being 
 physiological and not pathological, or at least glaucomatous. Again, 
 there was no pulsation in either veins or arteries. The opinion that 
 the excavation was congenital was strongly corroborated by the fact 
 that a similar one existed in the lady's other eye, and also by the fact 
 that her little daughter, some six years old, had nearly the identical 
 appearances in both eyes. Moreover, vision was more than f$- in 
 both mother and daughter, and the field normal. I have had this 
 patient under observation now for over three years, and no change 
 has taken place in the opthalmoscopic picture nor in the vision. I 
 have been particular to emphasize this case, as I have known more 
 than once eyes to have an iridectomy performed upon them in which 
 such excavations existed under the belief that the surgeon was deal- 
 ing with a glaucomatous affection instead of a congenital anomaly. 
 When such excavations occur in young persons, they are apt in later 
 life to become really glaucomatous. 
 
 As it is with the excavations of the head of the nerve, so it is 
 also with the elevations of its surface above the level of the retina.
 
 62 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 These may vary from a slight local elevation, especially toward the 
 nasal side, since the nerve-fibres are much more abundant here than at 
 the temporal side, to a general mound-like swelling of the entire sur- 
 face of the nerve. This, though usually of a very slight degree, 
 and not to be detected with the mirror, may in rare cases be carried 
 at the nasal side, or, indeed, at any part of the circumference, to a 
 considerable if not an enormous extent, so as to resemble a precipitous 
 rising when contrasted with the outer parts of the disk, which then 
 have the appearance of having fallen away from their original position 
 or sunk to a lower level. These variations in elevation, so far as re- 
 lates to the ophthalmoscope, depend principally on whether the mass 
 of nerve-fibres, as they pass into the retina, are distributed evenly, or 
 whether they are congregated together in one place to a greater degree 
 than in another; and again, also, whether the outer layers of the 
 retina are carried in their ordinary thickness close up to the edge of 
 the choroidal foramen, which makes a steep ascent for the fibres, or 
 whether these outer layers of the retina begin to decline in thickness 
 as is usually the case at a little distance from the head of the nerve ; 
 and, finally, upon the fact whether the tissue of the head of the nerve 
 is to a greater or less degree transparent. All these variations pro- 
 duce countless differences in effect, which it would be futile to try to 
 
 describe, but which the 
 learner must endeavor to 
 recognize and appreciate 
 by practice and experience 
 in order to discriminate 
 correctly between what is 
 normal and what is patho- 
 logical. This is not so dif- 
 ficult as it seems, for, if 
 the observer has once seen 
 
 FIG. 32.-*, temporal side; m, nasal side; oyvena ai ^ SUch . P r n unced dif- 
 centralis. (Schweigger, " Handbuch," p. 389.) ference in the two sides 
 
 of the nerve as that rep- 
 resented in Fig. 32, from Schweigger, he is at once prepared to recog- 
 nize and accept the lesser variations as a matter of course, especially 
 if they are accompanied by the normal amount of vision, or even 
 if this should be slightly decreased. 
 
 THE RETINA. 
 
 So far as the ophthalmoscope is concerned, and speaking in general 
 terms, the retina may be looked upon as a transparent membrane, in
 
 THE FUNDUS OF THE NORMAL EYE. 63 
 
 the inner layers of which the vessels are seen to ramify a membrane 
 which reveals nothing of its intricate structure, and only a trace of its 
 existence, and this, too, only in certain portions. In the immediate 
 neighborhood of the disk some observers claim that by iising the 
 weak-light mirror the retina gives indications of its presence by a 
 very faint grayish tinge, which appears to lie above the choroid. This 
 appearance is the more marked the deeper the pigmentation of the 
 eye, until, in the negro, the retina betrays its existence by a light, 
 opalescent sheen. 
 
 From the translucent nature of the retina we are unable to form 
 directly an estimation of its thickness. Anatomy teaches us, as we 
 have seen (page 31), that the retina is a membrane of considerable 
 thickness at the nerve, and which gradually becomes thinner toward 
 the anterior part of the eye. To the observer with the ophthalmoscope, 
 especially if he be inexperienced, the retinal vessels appear to ramify 
 over the surface of the background, of which they seem to form a 
 part. It is only by a mental effort that the observer can picture to 
 himself that there is an appreciable if not a considerable distance, at 
 least in the posterior parts of the eye and near the nerve, between 
 the larger vessels and the underlying choroid. The effort to realize 
 this fact and to appreciate the amount of the antero-posterior thick- 
 ness of the retina is helped, besides the anatomical knowledge, by the 
 observation of the vessels under certain morbid conditions as when, 
 for example, an exudation lies immediately behind the vessel in the 
 most external layers of the retina, or in the choroid, or, more con- 
 spicuously still, when the vessel passes over a spot of atrophy of the 
 choroid. Under such conditions the observer, mindful of the ana- 
 tomical relations, and looking attentively at the vessel, is made aware, 
 especially if he moves his head slightly from side to side, that the 
 retinal vessel lies in a plane considerably anterior to that of the exu- 
 dation or atrophic spot. The effect, when one's attention is called to 
 it, is quite startling at times. Should the observer, however, not suc- 
 ceed in his attempt to get this appearance with the upright image, 
 he may be helped in his efforts by the use of the inverted, by getting 
 in the manner already pointed out the parallactic displacement of the 
 vessel over the surface of the plaque (page 13). If he employs this, 
 he will see that the vessel lying over the plaque appears to move a 
 little over the surface as he moves his Tens from side to side, so that 
 more of the surface of the spot is seen to lie on one side of the vessel 
 and less on the other than before the mey&nent of the lens took 
 place. 
 
 When this effect has been once fixed upon the mind by the aid of
 
 Q TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 a different and well-defined background which reflects a large quan- 
 tity of light, the student soon gets to carry the impression in his mind 
 even in the normal eye where no such background exists, and it is 
 often of the greatest service to him in making a differential diagnosis 
 as to the exact seat of a morbid process, as, for example, a haemorrhage 
 or exudation. 
 
 Although this perfect or nearly perfect transparency may be 
 looked upon as the normal or typical condition of the retina, yet 
 there are cases, especially in young and growing children, where the 
 connective-tissue elements are so abundant that they produce in the 
 neighborhood of the disk a lack of perfect transparency in the retina, 
 which then shows itself when taken as a whole in the form of minute 
 striae, that radiate as a usual thing from some part or the whole of 
 the disk as a centre. 
 
 In rare cases, and especially where there is reason to believe that 
 the highest and most perfect development of the eye has not taken 
 place, as, for example, in some hypermetropic eyes, this appearance 
 is so marked, and the reflection from the connective-tissue elements so 
 brilliant, as to show a silvery or metallic lustre which then seems to 
 stream out from the papilla in fine radiating lines. Sometimes when 
 these connective -tissue elements are very abundant and fine feathery 
 striae accompany the minuter vessels, which also happen to be more 
 abundant than usual in the neighborhood of the disk, this striated ap- 
 pearance may be carried so far as to obscure the outlines of the disk, 
 and thus lead an inexperienced observer to believe that instead of a 
 normal condition there is an abnormal congestion of the part, if not 
 an actual inflammatory process present, in the shape of a mild and 
 commencing neuro-retinitis. This appearance, from the anatomical 
 nature of the part, is most marked toward the nasal side of the disk, 
 where the nerve-fibres are more abundant and the blood-supply more 
 copious, and least of all directly at the temporal side toward the macu- 
 la, where the nerve-layer is thinner and the vessels less numerous. 
 
 These are the only circumstances under which the tissue of the 
 retina itself is visible as a membrane with the ophthalmoscope in a 
 normal eye. It must be remembered that the details of certain por- 
 tions of the fuiidus are seen with more distinctness than others, as, 
 for example, the periphery of the field, while others appear with a 
 greater accentuation of color, as, for example, the region of the 
 macula lutea. But, as has already been explained, these differences 
 and contrasts are due to the composition of the pigment-layer and 
 choroid, not at all to the retina. The yellow color of the region of 
 the yellow spot seen on the cadaver is not visible in life with the
 
 THE FUNDUS OF THE NOEMAL EYE. 65 
 
 ophthalmoscope, and is probably a post-mortem change. Neither is 
 the visual purple of the retina to be detected with the instrument 
 in the ordinary methods of examination, though some claim to have 
 seen it when certain special conditions and methods are observed. 
 The only portion of the tissue of the retina which seems to have a 
 distinct and visible appearance is the minute spot which in some 
 cases marks the seat of the fovea itself, and which is situated in the 
 centre of the region of the yellow spot. This will be described more 
 in detail a little later when the various reflexes which are found at 
 this region are considered. 
 
 The great transparency of the retina and the inability to see the 
 membrane while in a normal state are more than compensated for by 
 the fact that from its very translucent nature we are enabled to trace 
 an independent circulation for almost its entire extent from the time 
 it enters to the time it leaves the eye, and we are thus permitted to 
 detect and watch minute processes, both physiological and pathologi- 
 cal, which would certainly escape observation were the membrane 
 non-transparent. 
 
 From this fact alone the vessels of the retina are as clearly seen 
 and as readily followed as if pictured in a drawing, while they possess 
 a beauty of design and form and a brilliancy of color which no artistic 
 imitation, however well executed, can ever approach. 
 
 The vessels of the retina are subdivisions of the arteria and vena 
 centralis. The first division of both the artery and vein takes place 
 as a rule in the stem of the nerve before the vessels have reached the 
 papilla or transparent portion of the nerve. The effect of this is to 
 give the appearance, as the vessels issue into the retina, of a superior 
 and inferior artery and a superior and inferior vein (Fig. 33, s. v., 
 s. A., IN. v., IN. A.). Sometimes, however, the first division takes 
 place upon the surface of the papilla, and then the two branches, 
 upper and lower, make a very sudden right angle with the parent 
 stem, which in such a case is very seldom seen, as it is covered by 
 the branches in question. The four principal branches that is, the 
 upper and lower artery and vein issue and find their exit through 
 the porus opticus and in the centre of the nerve. The central canal 
 is sometimes, however, displaced from some faulty development, so 
 that the vessels, instead of occupying the centre of the disk, have an 
 excentric position usually toward the temporal side, more rarely 
 toward the nasal side, and more rarely still above or below the centre 
 of the disk. I have as a rarity seen the principal vein, or more fre- 
 quently one of its branches, find its exit at the very margin of the 
 disk at or very near the sheath of the nerve. When these physiologi-
 
 66 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 cal variations become exaggerated, they are usually congenital anoma- 
 lies, and will be further described a little later under that heading. 
 
 As has already been mentioned, the " connective-tissue string " 
 which accompanies and surrounds the vessels in the central canal has 
 
 FIG. 38. s. v., superior vein ; s. A., superior artery; IN. v., inferior vein; IN. A., 
 inferior artery ; MM, macula branches. 
 
 an influence upon the appearance of the vessels as they issue into 
 sight from the head of the nerve. If this string or fascia is well de- 
 veloped and carried well forward along the vessels up to the head of 
 the disk, then the porus opticus is either in part or entirely obliter- 
 ated, and the vessels appear to issue from a solid substance, and not 
 from any excavation or canal. 
 
 The superior and inferior artery and vein divide again, as a rule, 
 upon the surface of the disk, though the second branch of each may 
 not be given off until the vessels have passed into the substance of the 
 retina. Here the vessels undergo a further subdivision and send out 
 branches in an arborescent manner in different directions, as will be 
 seen from the drawing (Fig. 33). These branches are designated, 
 according to the region which they supply, as the superior and inferior 
 nasal and temporal branches. The tine vessels which leave the tem- 
 poral side of the disk, m m, are sometimes called the macula branches.
 
 THE FUNDUS OF THE NORMAL EYE. 67 
 
 The temporal branches, or those which pass toward the right in the 
 drawing, will be seen to be larger than the nasal. When the field of 
 view is extensive, and yet the enlargement is small, as happens with 
 the inverted image, these temporal vessels, the inferior as well as 
 superior, appear to arch round the region of the macula, leaving, how- 
 ever, its immediate neighborhood free from vessels. It is from this 
 fact that it has been so often asserted that the yellow spot is devoid 
 of vessels, and in accordance with which this region has been repre- 
 sented as free from vessels in almost all even of the best drawings of 
 the fundus. When viewed with the upright image, however, where 
 the enlargement is greater, the appearances are entirely different, 
 and, as is shown in Fig. 13, p. 33, which is by the upright image, 
 the region of the macula lutea, or the space inclosed by the dotted 
 line, contains a number of fine vascular twigs, which, coming from 
 above and below, extend toward the spot in the centre of the oval 
 which marks the position of the fovea. So far, then, from its be- 
 ing true that the region of the yellow spot is devoid of vessels, it is 
 the one portion of the retina which contains, as seen by the ophthal- 
 moscope and demonstrated by the microscope, the greatest number of 
 minute vessels and capillaries (p. 35). 
 
 The larger vessels occasionally cross each other and the smaller 
 ones do very frequently that is to say, the arteries cross the veins and 
 the veins the arteries ; but it must be very rare if it ever occurs that 
 the veins cross other veins and the arteries other arteries, though it 
 has been alleged that this sometimes happens with the veins. Neither 
 do the vessels anastomose with each other, or at least those do not 
 which can be seen under the enlargement of the ophthalmoscope in 
 the normal condition. In abnormal conditions they can occasionally 
 be seen to do this. 
 
 This is, then, in brief, the general plan or arrangement of the ves- 
 sels ; but the variations which take place inside the limits of such a 
 general plan are almost infinite in number, and it would be as impos- 
 sible to give a detailed description of the variations in arrangement 
 which might take place in two different normal eyes as it would be to 
 describe the variations in two different vines which have the same 
 general characteristics and the same general directions, but which pos- 
 sess an infinite number of individual differences, and this, too, when 
 at the first glance they appeared to be almost identical. 
 
 Among these variations there is, however, one which deserves par- 
 ticular attention, and one which the student should be early acquainted 
 with. This is the degree of tortuosity that the vessels in a normal eye 
 often possess, and which may be so great as to lead an inexperienced
 
 68 
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 observer into error, and cause him to attribute to disease what is strictly 
 within physiological limits. A glance at the drawing (Fig. 34), and 
 a comparison of the appearance of the vessels figured there with those 
 
 FIG. 34. 
 
 in Fig. 33, will show how great a difference may exist compatible in 
 each case with a perfect state of health and full amount of vision. 
 Sometimes the vessels are entwined about each other like the twist- 
 ing of two vines, especially in the neigh- 
 borhood of the disk, and when this takes 
 place it is usually, but not always, the 
 artery which maintains its natural course 
 and the vein which encircles it, or one 
 vessel may double upon itself like the 
 twist in a rope. This, too, happens near 
 the disk, the vessel returning upon itself 
 and then continuing on its course (Fig. 
 35). 
 
 In determining whether the tortuosity is a physiological or patho- 
 logical condition, it is important to note the following facts : In the 
 normal eye the tortuosity almost invariably occurs in both eyes, and is 
 of a similar character in each organ, and the vessels, both veins and 
 
 FIG. 35.
 
 THE FUNDCS OF THE NORMAL EYE. 69 
 
 arteries, assume more or less the same kind of deflection. The tortu- 
 osity, moreover, when physiological, is always a lateral one that is to 
 say, in the same plane as the inner layers of the retina, and does not 
 take on, as it does in inflammatory conditions, an antero-posterior bend 
 in any portion of the field. 
 
 The largest diameter of the vessel is usually at the porus opticus. 
 This, however, is not always the case, even in the normal eye. Not 
 infrequently one or both of the principal branches of the vein taper 
 toward the central canal, and are thus smaller at their point of exit than 
 at the circumference of the disk, or even in the neighboring portion 
 of the retina. Where this is carried to excess it gives a leech-like 
 appearance to the vessels, which is a common symptom in some dis- 
 eases, especially those which indicate a lack of blood-pressure from 
 behind or an increased intra-ocular pressure, which is greater than the 
 lateral pressure in the veins. This appearance, which may also occa- 
 sionally occur in the arteries, is often more apparent than real, and 
 is then produced by the manner in which the connective tissue is 
 wrapped around the vessels in the porus opticus, or the foreshorten- 
 ing which may take place from the oblique direction in which the ves- 
 sel enters or leaves the central canal. 
 
 A remarkable characteristic in the retinal vessels, and one which 
 it is important to notice and to fully appreciate, is the great varia- 
 tion which may take place in different individuals in the diameter of 
 the vessel. This may vary a quarter, a third, or even one half, so 
 that on this account it may be very difficult to determine in a given 
 case whether the increase or decrease in size is physiological or patho- 
 logical. 
 
 Though there is this difference in the size of the vessels in differ- 
 ent cases, the veins are usually larger than the arteries in the proportion 
 as four is to three, and continue so in their successive divisions, so that 
 the venous system, as a whole, predominates over the arterial, which 
 is lighter, as a rule, and more superficial, and at the same time less 
 tortuous. Still, there are many exceptions to this rule, and the ar- 
 teries often approach and sometimes equal the veins in size, and indeed 
 they may be more tortuous than the veins. 
 
 The circulation of the retina does not seem to bear any fixed pro- 
 portion or relationship to that of the body in general, and a finely devel- 
 oped physique is often seen with a small or even insignificant retinal 
 system, and the reverse, a poorly developed general system and a well- 
 developed and copious retinal circulation. 
 
 But, what is more important, Jaeger declares that the circulation 
 of the eye bears a direct relationship to that of the brain.
 
 70 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 The walls of the retinal vessels, in what may be considered the 
 most perfect state of development, are so transparent and possess an 
 index of refraction so nearly that of the surrounding media as not to 
 be visible with the ophthalmoscope, as can readily be proved by press- 
 ing upon the globe with the finger to such a degree that the arterial 
 blood is prevented from entering the eye. The arteries, even those 
 of a considerable size, are then seen to be obliterated under the press- 
 ure, and show no trace of their existence. Still, that the index of 
 refraction of the wall, though nearly the same, is not identical with 
 that of the surrounding retinal tissue, but is to a slight degree higher, 
 is shown by the fact that by careful observation, even in the most 
 perfectly developed eyes, a very narrow streak of increased illumina- 
 tion is seen along and close to the side of the vessel, as if a very nar- 
 row portion of the fundus lying in immediate contact with the vessel, 
 or rather just to one side of it, was subject to a more condensed light 
 than what falls upon the parts just outside of it. The walls, then, 
 must reflect some light, but too little to make themselves visible. 
 This being the rule, there are exceptional cases where the wall, or at 
 least the adventitia surrounding it, is opaque enough to be visible, 
 which then gives evidence of its presence by very narrow streaks of 
 a very pale yellow or whitish color running along the sides of the red- 
 blood column. This commonly happens only upon the surface of the 
 disk itself, and very rarely extends, except in those anomalous cases to 
 be mentioned later, to any length into the retina, though I have occa- 
 sionally become conscious of the wall of the vessel, even at some dis- 
 tance from the margin of the disk, and oftentimes when I least 
 expected it, by a fortunate turn of the mirror and a favorable play of 
 light. 
 
 These narrow, band-like striae must not be confounded with simi- 
 lar striae of a fine feathery character which often run along the sides 
 or over the surface of the vessels, or cross from one vessel to the other 
 in long and sweeping arches, which under the play of light give a 
 beautiful silvery or frosted appearance to the vessel itself, or even to 
 large tracts of the neighboring tissue. 
 
 It will be remembered, from the anatomical description given else- 
 where (p. 36, Fig. 18), that there are two parts to the current of blood 
 a central or red column, and an external or colorless portion known 
 as the plasmic current, which surrounds it and lies between the red- 
 blood column and the wall itself. According to Jaeger, ttyis colorless 
 portion, including the wall, amounts to one half of the diameter of 
 the entire vessel that is to say, there is one fourth of the diameter of
 
 THE FUNDUS OF THE NORMAL EYE. 71 
 
 the vessel on each side of the red-blood column. Strictly speaking, 
 then, what one sees with the mirror is not the entire diameter of the 
 vessel, but only that portion of it which is represented by the red- 
 blood column. 
 
 By means of the ophthalmoscope we are enabled to distinguish, 
 while the current is still going on in the vessel, the difference in color 
 between arterial and venous blood. In the normal eye this discrep- 
 ancy always exists, though it may vary to a certain degree, the venous 
 blood being darker or the arterial lighter than common, or vice versa. 
 Thus the color in the arteries may vary from a deep scarlet to a yel- 
 lowish red, or even to a reddish yellow, and that in the veins from a 
 dull light red to a dark-bluish or purplish red. 
 
 The quicker the current the brighter is the color, while the slower 
 it is the darker is the blood, especially in the veins. This difference 
 in color between arterial and venous blood is, of course, due to the 
 same physiological and chemical variations which affect it elsewhere, 
 and is dependent mostly on the rapidity of the circulation, the degree 
 of oxidization, and the proportion of red and white corpuscles, of 
 hgemoglobin, and the amount of albuminous compounds. As a rule, 
 the lighter the general background the darker do the retinal vessels 
 appear, and the darker the fundus the lighter the vessels. But there 
 are exceptions to this rule. 
 
 As the retinal circulation is derived directly from the general, it 
 would be supposed that the former would be stamped at least with the 
 most marked features of the latter, but a glance with the mirror shows 
 that the retinal differs from the general in one of its most prominent 
 characteristics ; that is to say, there is no visible pulsation in the retinal 
 vessels in what must be considered as the examples of the highest 
 development in the normal eye. The stream passes steadily along 
 without any apparent movement of the vessels themselves or any visi- 
 ble change in their calibre, and nobody in looking into the typical eye 
 would ever imagine that the retinal circulation was subject to the 
 interrupted and rhythmical action of the heart. But although such 
 typical eyes are by no means rare, where the lateral pressure in the 
 blood-vessels is exactly counterbalanced by the pressure of the sur- 
 rounding media, and where consequently there is no pulsation, never- 
 theless there are very many other cases perhaps the majority where 
 we do see plainly enough that the retinal circulation is subject to the 
 action of the heart, the rhythmical beat of which is expressed not as 
 elsewhere by a movement in the arteries, but by a pulsation in the 
 veins. 
 
 The Venous Pulse. This consists of an alternate contraction and
 
 72 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 dilatation of a portion of the vein, unaccompanied, in the normal eye 
 at least, with any movement of the vessel. These variations of calibre 
 are usually only observed at the central portion of the disk, just where 
 the vein makes a turn to pass into the central canal. They very 
 rarely extend as far as the circumference of the nerve, and more rarely 
 still beyond this. I have, however, occasionally seen the pulsation on 
 the peripheral portions of the disk, and as a great rarity even beyond 
 it in the retina itself. It is a question, however, whether in these 
 rare cases the eye can be looked upon as a normal one, although no 
 other evidences of disease may be detected. The point of pulsation 
 where the dilatation of the vein takes place is usually of a darker 
 color than the rest of the vessel : first, because of a slight temporary 
 impediment to the circulation ; and, secondly, from the turn of the 
 vessel as it enters the canal, less light is reflected from it to the ob- 
 server. 
 
 The flatter the vessel the more tapering it is, and the quicker its 
 turn into the porus opticus, and, the greater the physiological excava- 
 tion, the more readily does the pulsation occur. Usually only one 
 branch of the vein pulsates, and then it is most commonly the lower 
 principal vein. Sometimes, however, two or even more branches are 
 seen to pulsate ; moreover, a pulse may exist at one time and not at 
 another. 
 
 The emptying of the small portion of the vein takes place from 
 the centre toward the periphery, and the refilling in the opposite 
 direction from the periphery toward the centre. The contraction, or 
 emptying of the vessel, occurs with the contraction of the heart, and 
 therefore with the diastole of the arteries, and synchronous, or nearly 
 so, with the radial pulse. The refilling is synchronous or nearly so 
 with the diastole of the heart, and therefore with the systole of the 
 arteries. The refilling occupies a shorter period of time than the 
 emptying, and there is a slight pause at the maximum of distention. 
 
 The prevailing theory as to the cause of the venous pulse is that 
 advanced by Bonders, although others had previously described its 
 essential principles. Briefly stated, it is as follows : 
 
 At each contraction of the heart, blood is forced into all the arter- 
 ies of the eye, those distributed to the choroid, ciliary body and iris, as 
 well as to the retina. The lateral pressure thus produced in the arteries 
 during their diastole is propagated to the fluid contents of the globe. 
 Thus the intraocular tension for the time being is increased, and the 
 effect of such increased tension is naturally felt at the place of least 
 resistance that is to say, upon the venous system where the blood- 
 column possesses the least lateral pressure. Moreover, the precise
 
 THE FUNDUS OF THE NORMAL EYE, 73 
 
 place where the force will be the most exercised will be the spot most 
 distant in the circle from the entrance of the blood, and nearest, in its 
 return, to the heart, or, in other words, at its exit from the globe at 
 the porus options. The vein yields here to the pressure and becomes 
 reduced in size ; but this reduction in calibre will be limited to a 
 small portion of the vessel, because when the compression takes place 
 part of the blood is forced out of the eye, while another portion is 
 forced backward, which keeps the vessel from collapsing, so that the 
 compression is in the nature of a constriction, which is limited to a 
 small part of the vein, just at its turning-point in the centre of the 
 disk. When the diastole of the arteries begins to decline, the press- 
 ure on the vein is removed, and the blood rushes forward from the 
 periphery toward the centre to refill the space ; and it is this alternate 
 contraction and refilling of the vessel which constitute the venous 
 pulse. The pulse is, therefore, synchronous or nearly so with the 
 systole of the heart and the diastole of the arteries. In point of fact 
 it begins a little before the diastole, and is, therefore, a little in advance 
 of the pulse at the wrist. 
 
 Since the discovery of the venous pulse by Van Trigt in 1852, and 
 independently by Coccius in 1853, the cause of its occurrence has 
 been widely discussed and speculated upon, even up to the present 
 date, by all the great writers of ophthalmoscopic literature, and, it 
 must be confessed, with no very satisfactory or decisive result, as no 
 explanation has ever been given which completely fulfils all the con- 
 ditions of the problem. For a more extended discussion as to the 
 nature of the venous pulse, and speculations as to its cause, the reader 
 is referred to the following articles : " Studien iiber die Circulation 
 im Auge," von Dr. Jos. Jacobi, " Archiv fur Ophth.," Bd. xxii, 
 Ab. i, S. Ill, 1876 ; "Zur Lehre vom Venenpuls der Retina, etc.," 
 von Dr. F. Helfreich, " Archiv fur Ophth.," Bd. xxviii, Ab. iii, S. i, 
 1882. 
 
 It would appear, however, to be safe to assume, as the result of 
 these investigations and deductions, that the venous pulse is the ex- 
 pression of a want of equilibrium, dependent upon the action of the 
 heart, between the amount of lateral pressure exercised by the blood- 
 column within the vein and that exercised from without by the sur- 
 rounding media. Furthermore, that the effect of this rhythmical 
 variation incident to the action of the heart may be increased or less- 
 ened by the anatomical peculiarity of the part, such as the arrange- 
 ment of the vessels at the centre of the disk and their relations to each 
 other in the porus opticus or in the nerve-stem itself, as well as by the 
 nature and shape of the physiological excavation. Thus an impedi-
 
 74 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 ment might occur from some anatomical variation in the vein or in its 
 relation to the artery, by which the flow of blood would be impeded 
 in its exit from the eye ; while, on the other hand, the vein might from 
 some other variation empty itself faster than it could be supplied 
 from behind. 
 
 Now, whether from the action of the heart the intraocular tension 
 is increased temporarily, or whether, as some think, this always re- 
 mains the same, and the lateral pressure in the veins is reduced dur- 
 ing the contraction of the arteries, or whether both occur, are matters 
 for further physiological investigation. The salient point remains, 
 that it is the discrepancy between the two forces which produces the 
 pulse. 
 
 That the venous pulse is simply the expression of a want of equi- 
 librium between the pressure outside and inside of the vein, is shown 
 by the fact that, in those eyes in which under ordinary conditions 
 there is no pulse, this can be produced at will by increasing the intra- 
 ocular tension by exerting pressure with the h'nger upon the globe. 
 This is a valuable fact to know, in a diagnostic point of view, as it 
 shows in certain morbid conditions the degree of existing tension, 
 and whether the circulation is still going on. It is, therefore, well 
 for the beginner to practice its production and to watch its effect. 
 
 In a paper published in the " Transactions of the American Oph- 
 thalmological Society for 1878," Drs. Wadsworth and Putnam call 
 attention for the first time to rhythmical changes which may take 
 place in the venous pulse, which recall the rhythmical changes in arte- 
 rial tension described by Traube, Hering, and others, and which may 
 be the cause of the long waves of movement of the brain noticed by 
 Mosso and others, besides one of themselves. In three cases the vein, 
 besides pulsating in the usual manner, was seen to dilate and contract 
 gradually in periods corresponding to about five respirations. 
 
 The Arterial Pulse. Although Donders had in the earliest days 
 of the ophthalmoscope pointed out that he had in some cases seen the 
 arteries undoubtedly increase somewhat in size during the systole of 
 the heart, nevertheless it was commonly held, by the great majority of 
 observers, that there was no visible pulsation in the arteries of a nor- 
 mal eye, and it is so stated by Mauthner in his admirable work on the 
 ophthalmoscope. 
 
 Later investigation and more accurate observation have shown 
 
 that occasionally a variation in calibre or movement of the artery may 
 
 be observed, and Becker * says that he has seen in some eyes which 
 
 were perfectly sound, and where there was no heart-disease, undoubted 
 
 * " Ai-chiv far Ophth.," Bd. xviii, Ab. i, S. 271.
 
 THE FUNDUS OF THE NORMAL EYE. 75 
 
 rhythmical dilatations and displacement of the vessel in the arteries 
 of the disk and the retina, and this has been corroborated by other 
 observers. This pulsation is systolic, and due to the fact that the 
 lateral pressure in the arteries is less than the intraocular pressure, 
 which may happen from some reduction in the heart's impulse or by 
 some obstruction to the current, by which the influx of blood into 
 the eye is either reduced in quantity or in force. Under these condi- 
 tions the artery is seen to empty and refill alternately, and the pulsa- 
 tions, though by no means so common or so marked as those in the 
 veins, have the peculiarity, when once they do occur, of extending 
 over a large portion of the vessel in the disk and into the substance of 
 the retina. 
 
 An arterial pulse can be produced artificially in almost all eyes by 
 pressure of the finger upon the globe, just as in the case of the veins, 
 though more force is required to produce it. The presence of the 
 pulse and the facility with which it is produced under pressure give 
 some indication of the force and rapidity of the circulation, and the 
 amount of intraocular tension, while its absence proclaims the fact 
 that the circulation has ceased, or very nearly so, as in some cases of 
 embolism and thrombosis. 
 
 But besides this actual pulsation in the arteries, there is what is 
 known as an apparent pulsation, which was pointed out by Becker. 
 This consists not in a real variation in the calibre of the artery, but in 
 its displacement by the vein which lies in contact with it. That is to 
 say, when the artery lies in contact with the vein, or crosses either 
 directly or obliquely over the portion which pulsates, this pulsation is 
 imparted to the artery, which then undergoes a displacement, and 
 rises and falls in unison with the vein, and thus appears to dilate and 
 contract. That this apparent pulsation is imparted to the artery is 
 shown by its being synchronous with that of the vein. If it was an 
 independent pulsation in the artery itself, it would alternate with that 
 of the vein. 
 
 The Light-Streak. The summit of the cylindrical surface of the 
 vessels is marked by a luminous band which is usually known as the 
 light-streak. This runs longitudinally along the crest of both the 
 arteries and veins. It is of a pale straw color, and occupies, as a rule, 
 about one third of the diameter of the vessel. Its breadth, however, 
 often varies even in normal eyes, being sometimes greater and some- 
 times less than the above dimensions. It is usually more brilliant, 
 broader, more sharply defined, and of a lighter color upon the arteries 
 than upon the veins, and it is the more uniform and more clearly 
 defined the more transparent are the walls of the vessel, the superim-
 
 76 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 posed retinal layers, and the media of the eye. The quicker the cur- 
 rent the brighter is the light-streak, especially upon the veins. Re- 
 tardation of the current dulls its brilliancy and reduces its diameter, 
 on the veins at least. It is a very valuable factor in diagnosis, and its 
 various phases and characteristics in different eyes should be carefully 
 noted. 
 
 Various theories have been advanced in explanation ,of the pres- 
 ence and peculiarities of the light-streak. Van Trigt was the first to 
 ascribe this light-streak to the reflection toward the observer of those 
 rays of light which under the ophthalmoscope strike upon the anterior 
 surface of the arteries. Jaeger in 1854 accepts this explanation, and 
 gives the following account of it : The lighter and clearer centre of 
 the arterial as well as venous vessels is in fact only produced by in- 
 creased reflection of the rays from the surface of the vessels. Those 
 rays which fall on the summit of the curvature of the vessel are mostly 
 reflected back in the direction of the rays entering the eye, while, on 
 the contrary, the rays which fall upon the descending portions of the 
 curved surface of the vessel are for the most part reflected in a side- 
 wise direction. 
 
 Mauthner, also, in his work on the ophthalmoscope, accepts Van 
 Trigt's and Jaeger's explanation of the phenomena, and remarks that, 
 " Since the wall of the vessels reflects sufficient light to make itself 
 independently visible, so must the light-streak be the expression of 
 this light-reflection." In a later work, however, Jaeger gives up the 
 idea that the light is reflected back from the walls themselves, as they 
 are too transparent to produce sufficient reflection, and says the walls 
 of the vessels and the retina are very nearly of the same refraction, so 
 that with the ophthalmoscope under physiological conditions it is only 
 the red-blood columns and not the walls of the vessels that are seen. 
 The red-blood column reflects back toward the mirror the greater part 
 of those rays of light which are thrown by the ophthalmoscope on its 
 central portion, which therefore appears illuminated and brilliant, 
 while on the other hand the lateral portions reflect the light falling 
 upon them in a sidewise direction, and consequently appear dark. 
 
 In 1870 the writer advanced the theory that the light striking the 
 wall nearest the observer passes through this without being reflected 
 to any considerable degree, traverses the contents of the vessel, and is 
 then reflected back slightly from the opposite wall, but principally 
 from the subjacent tissues, and consequently that the light-streak was 
 the product of reflection and refraction. This explanation was ac- 
 cepted by Giraud Teulon, who supported the theory not only by a 
 repetition of the experiments which had been made, but by some addi-
 
 THE FUNDUS OF THE NUKMAL EYE. 77 
 
 tional ones of his own. It was also corroborated, to a degree at least, 
 by some experiments with the microscope by Becker on the circula- 
 tion in the frog's foot. It was, however, opposed by Donders and 
 Nagel, who adhered to the old explanation of the theory of reflection 
 from the anterior wall. Schneller, in 1872, expressed the opinion 
 that the light-streak was the image of the source of light formed by 
 regular reflection. 
 
 Objections to this view and the arguments upon which it was 
 founded were raised by the writer, based upon the indices of refrac- 
 tion of the blood-column and surrounding media, and it was shown, 
 not only mathematically but experimentally, that even if the view of 
 Schneller was correct his explanation of it was untenable. In 1876, 
 Jaeger again returned to the subject, and reiterated his f ormer opinion 
 that the light-streak was the product of regular reflection, not from 
 the wall of the vessel, but from the blood-column, and to maintain his 
 position was obliged to assume that the index of refraction of the 
 blood-column is less than that of the surrounding media. 
 
 It will be seen, then, from these various opinions, that no thor- 
 oughly satisfactory and acceptable explanation of the presence of the 
 light- streak on the centre of the retinal vessels has as yet been given. 
 
 The Region of the Macula Lutea. To the careful observer, the 
 region of the yellow spot presents some very interesting phenomena, 
 and care must be taken at the outset to draw a sharp distinction be- 
 tween the region of the macula as a whole and its central point the 
 fovea centralis which, unfortunately, has not always been the case 
 even in formal discussions and writings, the term yellow spot, or 
 macula, being used as synonymous with fovea. They are, however, 
 widely diiferent, the fovea occupying but a small portion of the yellow 
 spot and marking its centre (Fig. 13, p. 33). Fortunately, with a 
 little attention and skill, the boundary lines of both the yellow spot 
 and the position of the fovea can be easily distinguished from each 
 other with the mirror by the glittering reflections which arise here 
 from the light thrown upon them with the ophthalmoscope. These 
 reflections are of two kinds : one that marks the outer border of the 
 entire region, and to be seen with the inverted image ; and the 
 other that which marks the fovea, to be seen, as a rule, only with the 
 direct or upright method. 
 
 The Reflex seen round the Macula Lutea with the Indirect Image. 
 In order to obtain this in the best and easiest manner, the patient 
 should be directed to look, not as usually recommended, at the hole 
 of the mirror, but a little to the side of this that is to say, the 
 patient should turn his eye a little toward the temporal side ; or, in
 
 78 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 other words, a little to the right if it is his right eye, and a little 
 to the left if it his left eye which is to be examined. The observer, 
 then, with a little care and patience, especially if he makes a slight 
 lateral displacement of the lens, will become conscious of a lumi- 
 nous or silvery ring which appears, as the inverted image is used 
 and the details of the fundus are reversed, to lie, not to the outside, 
 but to the inside, of the nerve, and to inclose an oval-shaped por- 
 tion of the fundus, the centre of which is marked by a minute 
 spot of a darker color. The inner edge of this ring is about 1 
 diameters of the disk from the outer edge of the nerve, and small 
 portions of both the nerve and ring can sometimes be seen at the 
 same time (Fig. 13). It is impossible to give even an approximate 
 idea of this phantom-like reflex, and I have never seen any adequate 
 representation of it, but the accompanying diagram (Fig. 36) may 
 
 t?ervo to give an idea of the general shape 
 and outline. This is almost invariably an 
 oval, in which the horizontal diameter is 
 the larger in the proportion of about four 
 to three. The internal border, or that 
 turned toward the fovea, is sharply de- 
 F fined and clearly cut, while the external 
 
 varies under the play of light, now broader 
 
 and then narrower, extending at times with tongue-like projections 
 out over the surface of the retina, and giving a frosted appearance to 
 the neighboring tissue. That there is, in fact, a considerable amount 
 of general irregularity of the surface of this region, especially in young 
 children, follows, I think, from the irregularity of these reflections, 
 due, probably, to the projection of small vessels which occupy so 
 thickly this region. 
 
 This reflex, or, as it is sometimes called, halo, varies a good deal in 
 size, being at times much smaller than at others. It differs in shape, 
 too, which sometimes approaches a circular form instead of being, as 
 is commonly the case, a pronounced oval. 
 
 The color of the inclosed space is not, as would seem natural from 
 its name, yellow, or even of a yellowish tinge. Still we are hardly 
 justified in saying that the region of the macula lutea is not actually 
 of a faint yellowish color during life, from the fact that it does not 
 appear so with the ophthalmoscope, as the retina is so transparent that 
 any light shade of yellow would be dominated and quenched by the 
 greater amount of transmitted red light from the choroid. Though 
 not yellow, the color of the inclosed space differs from the rest Q| the 
 fundus, and certainly, when the ring is clearly perceived, seems to
 
 THE FUNDUS OF THE NORMAL EYE. 79 
 
 lack definition and to be of a somewhat grayish or brown color, rather 
 than of a pure red. The shade is brighter near the periphery of the 
 oval, and grows darker toward the centre, which, as a rule, as before 
 mentioned, is marked by a small spot or dot, which is usually circular 
 in shape, and which is called the fovea. Occasionally these markings 
 are so clearly defined as to make, with the halo, three concentric rings 
 or zones with the minute dot in the centre, not unlike the bull's-eye 
 on a target, which may then, as a great rarity, appear, not as it usually 
 does, the darkest point in the region, but as a minute, pale, straw- 
 colored dot, so light, indeed, that I have on one or two occasions 
 imagined, at least, that it was actually a minute point of reflection. 
 This minute point, which marks the fovea, though always in a central 
 position, is not usually in the exact centre of the ellipse, being a little 
 nearer the upper than the under border. As a rule no vessels are to 
 be seen within the circuit of the halo, simply because the enlargement 
 of the inverted image is not sufficient to render them visible. 
 
 It must be remembered that the halo round the macula is not seen 
 in all eyes, and, even in some of those where it is present, it is diffi- 
 cult, if not impossible, to produce it in its entire circuit. The younger 
 the individual, the easier it is to see and the brighter it appears, while 
 in the adult it is often but slightly marked or not to be detected at all. 
 In the senile eye I do not remember to have seen it. 
 
 The Regi&n of the Macula Lutea with the Upright Image. The 
 proper examination of this portion of the fundus with the direct 
 method, though not so difficult as that with the indirect, nevertheless 
 offers a good many embarrassments to the student, both from the op- 
 tical condition of the eye and from the fact that the appearances are 
 so different from those which are shown by the indirect method. 
 The best way to pursue is first to obtain a view of the lower border 
 of the nerve, and then to travel outward toward the temporal region 
 until the spot at the fovea is reached. This is usually at about two 
 diameters of the disk from the edge of the nerve, but often, from 
 the increased enlargement, seems to the inexperienced eye to be 
 much farther, and the observer is thus apt at first to fall short of the 
 spot in his estimate. This distance, however, between the nerve and 
 the fovea differs somewhat even in emmetropic eyes, and the apparent 
 variation with the ophthalmoscope is sometimes very marked. Even 
 if the observer takes all these and other precautions, he is apt at first 
 to be disappointed by finding that he sees nothing distinctly, although 
 he is conscious that he is directly over the yellow spot, the reason 
 being that he is probably endeavoring to see through the corneal re- 
 flex, which throws a disturbing influence over the whole picture. He
 
 80 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTOALMOSCOPY. 
 
 must, therefore, be careful to avoid this reflex by looking just over, 
 under, or to the side of it or, in other words, by dodging it from 
 side to side as occasion requires and he will often be rewarded by 
 finding that what was at first obscured by an indistinct haze, and oc- 
 casionally also by an undefined reflex, comes out fair and bright, with 
 all the details clearly and sharply defined. 
 
 The vessels no longer appear to arch over and around the macula, 
 as with the inverted image, but to pursue at the upper and lower 
 edges of the field a more rectangular and almost horizontal course, as 
 shown in the diagram (Fig. 37). From these vessels finer branches 
 are seen to descend and ascend in a slightly radiating course in the 
 direction toward the fovea, which they sometimes very nearly reach. 
 
 In examining this region the stu- 
 dent is very apt to forget the 
 change in conditions, and to be 
 unmindful of the fact that, with 
 an enlargement of fourteen times, 
 his gaze can not take in at once 
 more than the region of the yel- 
 low spot, even if it does that, and 
 he is thus led to believe, from the 
 fact that the vessels stop short of 
 the fovea, that the macula is, even 
 with the upright image, devoid of 
 vessels, when in truth it contains a greater number, visible even to 
 the ophthalmoscope, than any other portion of the retina. In fact, all 
 the vessels, for same distance round the fovea, are within the region 
 of the macula. 
 
 But the most striking fact in reference to the differences between 
 the two methods of examination is that, as a rule, there is not a trace 
 of the brilliant circle which surrounds the yellow spot when the in- 
 verted image is used. That is to say, the periphery of the region 
 does not show any demarcation from the rest of the f undus by any 
 reflex, or even by any change in color. It is only in the immediate 
 neighborhood of the fovea centralis that anything peculiar is notice- 
 able. Toward the centre of the region, however, and for a small cir- 
 cuit round about the fovea, there is generally a concentration of color, 
 and even when this is not marked there is a consciousness on the part 
 of the observer of an increased amount of pigment in the choroidal 
 epithelium and stroma, as well as a deeper red color, which arises from 
 the increased amount of vessels and capillaries in the choroid immedi- 
 ately behind the fovea. Sometimes, however, this gradual accentua- 
 
 FIG. 37.
 
 THE FUNDUS OF THE NORMAL EYE. 81 
 
 tion in shade toward the centre is wanting, and the fovea alone is 
 marked by a small spot which is darker and more ' granular in appear- 
 ance than the surrounding tissue. Sometimes again, though rarely, 
 this central spot, instead of being darker, is lighter than the rest of 
 the fundus, and then usually has the appearance of a pale straw-colored 
 spot which has been delicately applied with a brush, and sometimes, 
 as a greater rarity, the immediate neighborhood of the fovea, or even 
 the more peripheric portion of the yellow spot, is the seat of one or 
 more very minute dots of a bright but light-yellow color, which are 
 not cholesterine, though they occasionally have a slightly glittering 
 aspect. The true character of these dots and their significance have 
 not yet been determined. 
 
 Now, while there is almost invariably a total absence of the reflex 
 which marks the boundary-line of the yellow spot with the inverted 
 image, the fovea is itself under the upright image the seat of a reflex 
 which is quite as remarkable in its way as that seen by the indirect 
 method. 
 
 The usual shape of this reflex is that of a horse-shoe or minute 
 crescent, which changes from side to side according to the m<^|fcments 
 of the observed eye and displacements of the mirror. It is not, how- 
 ever, always of a crescentic or half -moon shape, with attenuated horns, 
 but sometimes has the appearance as if it were only the segment of 
 a small circle, or as if the depression at the fovea was triangular in 
 shape, and light was reflected from only one side of it at a time, in 
 which case the reflection streams out into the surrounding tissue like 
 the tail of a very minute comet ; or again, it has the appearance of a 
 very delicate and phantorn-like veil stretched across the fovea. These 
 are some of the common appearances. As a rarity, I have occasion- 
 ally seen a completely-illuminated circle of very minute dimensions, 
 and, as a greater rarity still, the centre of the circle is in addition 
 marked by a very small but perfectly-shaped dark spot the fovea 
 centralis itself. 
 
 In regard to the fact which Mauthner and others emphasize as so 
 curious and unaccountable, that we do not see with the upright image 
 any indication of the halo which surrounds the region of the yellow 
 spot, it would appear to me to be sufficiently explained by the fact 
 that the diameter of the surface of the macula lutea as a whole, under 
 the enlargement of the upright image, is much too great for the rays 
 reflected from the border of the ellipse to return to the observer, and 
 thus allow the entire circuit to be in view at once ; and furthermore, 
 that the illumination with the upright image is never so strong or so 
 concentrated upon a small surface as it is with the inverted method.
 
 82 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 But, while admitting Mauthner's statement that in the vast majority 
 of cases we do not get the entire ring, or, indeed, any trace of it, 
 nevertheless I would add that I have occasionally obtained a very 
 faint but distinct segment of reflection, which I could make play 
 about in that portion of the retina where the boundary-circle of the 
 yellow spot should be. In speaking about this to Dr. Wadsworth, 
 he informed me that he had several times seen the entire ellipse with 
 the upright image in emmetropic and myopic eyes, and shortly after 
 this I myself observed the same thing in a young child with a rnyo- 
 
 piaHTD.). 
 
 The explanations of the cause of the glittering ring, which has been 
 described as marking the circumference of the region of the yellow 
 spot, and as given by Liebreich, Schweigger, Schirmer, and others, 
 have never been accepted by physiologists as conclusive, and Mauth- 
 ner, in his work on the ophthalmoscope, brings a comprehensive 
 review of the many attempts to solve the problem to a close with the 
 assertion that the phenomenon can not be accounted for on anatomical 
 grounds with the knowledge of the part now in our possession. 
 Shortly after this the writer published an explanation of these reflec- 
 tions, which was founded upon the anatomical construction of the 
 part as described and figured by Max Schultze. The outlines and 
 
 FIG. 38. 
 
 curvatures shown in Fig. 38 are fac similes of Schultze's original 
 drawing (Taf. vi, Fig. 1). The scale is, however, reduced one half, 
 and the details of the tissues are omitted. 
 
 As will be seen, this region, as figured in the diagram and also in 
 the more comprehensive drawing on p. 33, bears in its formation a 
 strong resemblance to a shallow cup, the rim of which is represented 
 by a convex and the bowl by a concave surface. If we look upon 
 these curved surfaces as mirrors, they would each have their foci, one 
 lying behind, the other in front, according to their respective degrees 
 of curvature. If light should be now thrown perpendicularly against 
 such a combination of curves, the apex of the outside rim, or convex 
 surface, would, from well-known optical laws, appear illuminated,
 
 THE FUNDUS OF THE NORMAL EYE. 83 
 
 while the inside, or concave surface, would appear more or less in 
 shadow. 
 
 To illustrate this view several experiments were instituted and 
 described. These were subsequently so much misunderstood, and 
 consequently misrepresented, in the foreign journals, that I should 
 advise the reader who happens to be interested in the matter to con- 
 sult the original articles, and not the abstracts made from them. 
 
 This cup-like excavation might, then, vary in different eyes, both as 
 to extent and depth, so that in some it might be limited to the f ovea alone, 
 and in others extend, getting shallower as it goes, even up to or near 
 the boundary line of the entire macula ; or there might be two depres- 
 sions, one shallow at the circumference of the yellow spot, extending 
 over the surface of the whole region, and a deeper and narrower one 
 at the fovea. These variations would account for the presence of the 
 ring in some eyes and its absence in others, and its frequent and not 
 inconsiderable deviations, when present, in size and shape. Moreover, 
 inasmuch as the nerve-fibre layer ceases to exist as such at the macula 
 lutea (and the nerve fibres make a peculiar bend here), a difference in 
 level might be occasioned which would be sufficiently marked in many 
 eyes to give the effect in question. It was furthermore shown by 
 experiments that the effect might be produced by a difference in level 
 in the nerve-fibre layer alone, without taking into consideration the 
 thinning of the other layers of the retina at this place. It is, there- 
 fore, this difference of level which would appear to be the essential 
 factor in the production of the phenomenon, assisted, no doubt, by the 
 peculiar arrangement of the anatomical elements which enter into the 
 construction of this part, and which go to make this inequality of level, 
 aided also by the different indices of refraction of the retinal elements 
 and the amount of connective tissue. Another argument in favor of 
 this difference of level being the cause of the halo is the fact that 
 there is another reflex, first pointed out by Coccius, with the upright 
 image at the fovea ; and we know for a certainty that the fovea is a 
 more or less narrow fossa with pretty sharply descending walls, and 
 the shape of the reflex is just such as would come from a narrow- 
 mouthed pit ; for, while one side was turned so as to catch the light 
 and reflect it, the other edge would be turned so that no reflex would 
 come back from it, consequently we should have a crescentic-shaped 
 reflex. Moreover, the reflex is occasionally a perfect circle, very 
 small, it is true, but perfect in detail. Now, if a small circular reflex 
 can come from the edges of a minute depression, why may not a larger 
 though shallower depression be the cause of a larger reflex which 
 really varies from it only in size and not in character ?
 
 84: TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 Such being the general outline of the principal features and char- 
 acteristics of the fundus of the eye as seen with the ophthalmoscope, 
 it is necessary, before passing to a consideration of the actual anoma- 
 lies of construction, to say a word in regard to the manner in which 
 the fundus, although perfectly normal in itself, may be affected at dif- 
 ferent epochs of life, and by certain optical conditions which may and 
 often do materially alter its appearance. 
 
 The aspect of the fundus of the young eye differs as much from 
 that of the adult as the countenance, and bears all the peculiar look of 
 freshness which youth always possesses. The fundus is more brilliant 
 in hue and the various tissues have a greater transparency, the out- 
 lines of the nerve and vessels are sharper cut, while at the same time 
 there is usually a greater development of connective-tissue elements, 
 which are shown often by feathery if not glittering reflections from 
 various parts of the fundus, notably along and over the course of the 
 vessels and around the region of the yellow spot. In the infantile 
 eye anatomy teaches us that the pigment is less abundant within the 
 hexagonal cells and increased in the stroma proper, and the ophthal- 
 moscope shows this increase in the neighborhood of the nerve by 
 a more frequent appearance and a greater development of the pig- 
 ment-ring than in later life. 
 
 The adult eye, on the other hand, while freer from connective- 
 tissue elements, is less transparent and less fresh in its appearance, and 
 often shows as plainly as the face the effects of over-use and constitu- 
 tional disease ; while the fundus of the senile eye is lacking in color 
 and vivacity of expression, if the term may be used, and shows all the 
 wear and tear that characterizes the other organs. The fundus, as 
 a rule, is of a paler and less vivid red, with a washed-out appear- 
 ance ; the nerve is pale and anaemic, with ill-defined and ragged 
 edges, and marked by disturbances of an atrophic nature in the 
 choroid which surrounds it, combined oftentimes with a mild degree 
 of maceration of the entire membrane. The vessels, too, appear 
 smaller, and the difference in color between the arteries and veins 
 is but slightly marked, and there is a reduction in the breadth and 
 brilliancy of the light-streak, and altogether to an attentive observer 
 there is often a general appearance of decrepitude and decay. From 
 a deposition of peculiar minute hyaline bodies immediately under the 
 membrana limitans, the retina of aged people has sometimes a stippled 
 or granular appearance ; moreover, prematurely old people have pre- 
 maturely old eyes, and I have often seen emaciated and wizened-up 
 children, bearing the marks of rickets and scrofula, and not yet in their 
 teens, with the eyes of elderly and ill-nourished old people. It is
 
 THE FDNDUS OF THE NORMAL EYE. 85 
 
 often important to bear in mind the discrepancy in young people 
 between the amount of labor imposed upon the eye and the capacity, 
 from imperfect nourishment or want of development, to fulfil it. 
 If this was done there would be fewer glasses ordered of an almost 
 imperceptible strength, and more tonics and a better regimen pre- 
 scribed. 
 
 Variations in the optical condition of the eye lead also to variations 
 in appearance of the fundus. Thus, a myopic eye in which there is 
 no conus, or indeed any other variation from the normal, has a differ- 
 ent appearance in certain respects from an emmetropic eye, due in 
 part, no doubt, to a difference in anatomical construction, especially in 
 regard to the inner sheath of the nerve, but also due in part to its 
 optical condition and the method by which the examination is made. 
 With the inverted method, since the aerial image is smaller than that 
 of the emmetropic eye, the vessels seem to be abnormally small, and 
 from distention of the membranes are straighter in their course and 
 show, since they appear smaller, a less discrepancy in color between the 
 arterial and venous system, while the nerve looks smaller, whiter, and 
 less distinct in outline. With the upright image, on the contrary, as 
 the image is larger than that of an emmetropic eye, the vessels and 
 the nerve seem disproportionately large, and especially is this the case 
 with the nerve, as the effect is increased by the behavior of the inner 
 sheath seen through the choroidal opening, which in myopic eyes, 
 even where there is no posterior staphyloma, does not fit up as 
 closely to the stem of the nerve as in the normal eye. 
 
 It is the reverse with the hypermetropic eye, since the reduction 
 of the image is less with the object-glass than in the emmetropic eye, 
 the vessels and nerve seem to be enlarged, the former then often ap- 
 pearing disproportionately large in respect to the nerve. 
 
 With the upright image, as the enlargement is less than with the 
 normal eye, the nerve often appears too small, sometimes markedly so, 
 while the vessels, although not as much magnified in reality as in a 
 normal eye, appear to be larger, and oftentimes here, as with the in- 
 verted image, disproportionately large in respect to the size of the 
 nerve ; probably, indeed, because they are so, in fact. That is to say, 
 as the hypermetropic eye is usually an undeveloped eye, the nerve 
 may be in reality too small and yet the vessels be of normal calibre. 
 From the same want of perfection in development there is usually a 
 greater amount of connective tissue to be seen in the retina of the 
 hypermetropic eye, and this, as has already been mentioned, oftentimes 
 gives a striated appearance to that part of the fundus which imme- 
 diately surrounds the nerve. Sometimes the striae seem to radiate
 
 86 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 from the porus opticus as a centre beyond the borders of the nerve, 
 the boundary-line of which they obscure, and thus lead an inexpe- 
 rienced observer, especially when, as is often the case, there is increased 
 vascularity of the part, to believe that he is dealing with a morbid 
 process of an inflammatory character. 
 
 Astigmatism also, especially when of a high degree, produces a 
 curious and noteworthy effect on the fundus, which is particularly 
 shown in the contrast between the appearances with the inverted and 
 those with the upright image. With the inverted image little or 
 nothing is observed in regard to any lack of clearness and definition. 
 Although the nerve may appear to be elongated more in one merid- 
 ian than in another, and alter its length in the two principal meridians 
 under the to-and-fro movements of the lens (see p. 140), yet all the 
 details of the disk and that of the general fundus appear sharply de- 
 fined. But the minute the upright image is used the observer is often 
 astonished to find that what was clearly and sharply defined before 
 now seems indistinct and indefinite, with a general out-of -focus look. 
 The whole nerve seems to be out of shape, and to be drawn out in one 
 particular direction ; sometimes only the larger vessels are to be seen, 
 and these seem to be distorted here and there clearly defined with a 
 well-marked light-streak, and then again, as they change their course, 
 they appear to be hazy and indistinct, with no light-streak, and as if 
 they were running through tissue which was slightly oedematous 
 (Plate III, Fig. 5). 
 
 I have known such cases to be pronounced by some observers 
 and those, too, not the inexperienced ones so often alluded to in these 
 pages as cases of neuritis, especially where a considerable degree of 
 amblyopia existed, and no careful correction of the optical condition 
 had been previously made. 
 
 ANOMALIES. 
 
 Variations from the normal standard, when sufficient to warrant 
 the name, are classed under the head of anomalies, and it is essential 
 for the student to be acquainted with the most important of these m 
 order to avoid errors in diagnosis. 
 
 Anomalies of the Media. The media of the normal eye, so far 
 as the ophthalmoscope is concerned, may be looked upon as perfectly 
 transparent, since the slight cloud-like opacity which is present under 
 oblique illumination is absent as the rays of light enter the eye to a 
 large degree parallel to the axis of vision. 
 
 "When, however, the curvature of the cornea is congenitally irregu- 
 lar as, for example, in high degrees of irregular astigmatism we
 
 THE FUXDUS OF THE NORMAL EYE. 87 
 
 obtain a series of shadows which play around the periphery and over 
 the surface of the cornea, especially when the mirror is made to ro- 
 tate in the hand. These shadows, as has been explained more fully 
 elsewhere in the determination of refraction, are due to the fact that 
 the return rays from the fundus are unequally refracted by the dis- 
 torted cornea, so that fewer rays enter the observer's eye from one 
 part of the membrane than from another. 
 
 Anomalies of the Lens. As it is with the cornea, inequalities in 
 the curvature of the lens may cause a different refractive power, and 
 so give rise to a series of shadows which play over the surface of the 
 lens under movements of the mirror. Though much more rare and 
 difficult to determine than in case of the cornea, I have occasionally 
 convinced myself of the presence of such shadows, which then occu- 
 py the central portions of the pupillary space, and do not pass to the 
 periphery of the cornea, as is the case when this membrane is at 
 fault. A unique case of marked alteration in the curvature of the 
 lens has been published by Dr. Agnew in Knapp's "Archives of 
 Ophthalmology," vol. iv, p. 382. Here the protrusion of the central 
 part of the lens was so great as to justify the title bestowed upon it 
 of " lenticonus." 
 
 Opacities in the substance of the lens, whether congenital or ac- 
 quired later in life, are classed under the general name of cataract, and 
 will be described under their proper heading. It will simply be neces- 
 sary here to remind the student that care must be taken not to con- 
 found these formed opacities with dust-like aggregations and minute 
 dark spots. The former usually occupy the peripherical portions of 
 the lens, while the latter are usually situated at the posterior pole. 
 These formations are congenital, and apt to lead a beginner to form 
 a diagnosis of commencing cataract. 
 
 As a great rarity, the three radii which form the suture of the 
 fibres of the lens in the embryo persist in later life, and a casual 
 observer might mistake these for the dark strige so characteristic of 
 commencing cataract. The examples which I have seen have usually 
 been in young children. These radii and striae are not to be con- 
 founded with the natural stellation of the lens, which can be seen in 
 every normal eye by means of oblique light. 
 
 Coloboma of the Lens. This will be described a little later on 
 under coloboma of the choroid and uveal tract, of which it is usually, 
 though not always, the accompaniment. 
 
 Ectopia Lentis, or Dislocation of the Lem. Besides being the re- 
 sult of violence or ordinary concurrent disease, ectopia lentis may occur 
 in very rare cases as a congenital malformation. Sometimes this mal-
 
 88 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 position does not show itself in the early years of childhood, but only 
 later, and then assumes a progressive character. It is apt to be heredi- 
 tary and to exist in the several members of the same family. So far 
 as the ophthalmoscope is concerned, it presents very nearly the same 
 appearances as the ordinary dislocation of the lens. 
 
 The drawing below (Fig. 39) represents a case of double congenital 
 displacement of the lens which is symmetrical in character, and which 
 
 
 FIG. 39. 
 
 was reported by Dr. Little, of Philadelphia (" Transactions American 
 Ophth. Soc., 1883," p. 523). 
 
 Coloboma of the Vitreous. I am not aware that this has ever been 
 detected by the ophthalmoscope, though it has been found on section. 
 
 Anomalies of Pigmentation the Choroid. The pigment of the 
 choroid, instead of being distributed in a uniform manner over the sur- 
 face of the membrane, or collected between the meshes of the stroma 
 and vessels, so as to form a more or less regular design, as in the choroid 
 tigre, is sometimes distributed in an irregular manner and without any 
 particular design. A favorite place for the aggregation of pigment 
 is the neighborhood of the optic-nerve disk, and here, instead of form- 
 ing the sickle-shaped and crescentic form at the outside of the disk 
 known as the choroidal ring, the pigment may be' gathered together 
 irregularly in small aggregations, or be combined into one or two 
 larger or more pronounced patches, such as we see sometimes as the 
 remains of a haemorrhage. So, too, the region of the macula may be 
 the seat of an anomalous distribution of pigment which then some- 
 times simulates the appearance of the remains of some morbid pro- 
 cess, but which to a careful observer gives evidence of being some 
 congenital defect, or the result of some intra-uterine process, since the 
 tissue does not show any of those atrophic spots, the remains of a pre- 
 vious choroidal inflammation, and which allow the sclera to show 
 through ; and especially, too, since the patient himself asserts that his 
 vision has always been defective, and he is not aware of any deteriora- 
 tion. These aggregations of pigment about the yellow spot are not 
 always, however, incompatible with a fair amount of vision ; and I
 
 THE FUNDUS OF THE NORMAL EYE. 
 
 89 
 
 have even seen a case myself, and others have been reported, where 
 there seemed to be the atrophic remains of an intra-uterine choroiditis 
 with a white spot of considerable dimensions and much irregular dis- 
 tribution of pigment, and yet where a considerable amount of vision 
 was present. The chromo-lithograph (Plate II, Fig. 5) gives a remark- 
 able example of this irregular conglomeration of pigment in the eyes 
 of a young lady of twenty. As will be seen, there are no signs of 
 present or past inflammation, and the eye proved to be normal in 
 every respect, with no scotoma and vision equal 1. Jaeger, also, 
 gives a picture in his " Hand Atlas " (Taf . xix., Fig. 85), where the 
 pigment situated at the upper and outer portion of the fundus has the 
 appearance of a black smutch laid on with a brush. It is, however, 
 in the choroid, and close examination shows it to be made up of col- 
 lections of minute particles of pigment. 
 
 Pigmentation of the Nerve. Small patches of pigment often 
 appear either just around or within the circumference of the nerve- 
 disk. These are of choroidal origin, as the pigment-cells of this 
 membrane are continued over into the lamina cribrosa, and have been 
 frequently found there on section. They must not be confounded 
 with the deposits of pigment which sometimes occur within the cir- 
 cumference of the disk after haemorrhage or other morbid processes. 
 The drawings, somewhat enlarged (Figs. 40 and 41), are taken from 
 the chroino-lithographs by Jaeger (" Hand Atlas," Figs. 38 and 39). 
 
 FIG. 40. 
 
 FIG. 41. 
 
 Liebreich, also, gives a remarkable drawing of a congenital varia- 
 tion in the distribution of pigment in the condition known as cyano- 
 sis of the bulb (" Atlas de Ophthalmoscopie," Tab. xii., Fig. 3). 
 
 This consists of a marked and general increase of pigmentation 
 over the entire surface of the fundus, which there has a deep maroon 
 aspect. The region of the macula appears almost black, the fovea
 
 90 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTIIALMOSCOPY. 
 
 being surrounded by a red ring of a brownish hue. The vessels at 
 their point of emergence at the porus opticus are enveloped in a mass 
 of pigment which covers about one third of the centre of the papilla. 
 (See chromo-lithograph Plate III, Fig. 2.) 
 
 Instead of an abnormal increase of pigment, there may be a dimi- 
 nution varying in different degrees from a hardly perceptible want of 
 color to a total lack of it, as in some albinotic eyes, in which the larger 
 choroidal vessels are sharply defined upon a white background (Plate 
 III, Fig. 1). 
 
 Coloboma of the uveal tract occurs from arrest of development in 
 the embryonic eye, in the iris, ciliary body and choroid, to which 
 may be added also a coloboma of the lens. 
 
 Coloboma of the Iris. This usually occurs, in the great majority 
 of cases, directly downward, more rarely downward and either a little 
 inward or outward. It manifests itself under the ophthalmoscope as 
 an illuminated and split-like hiatus in the iris, through which the glit- 
 tering white aspect of the coloboma, which usually accompanies it, is 
 observed. The coloboma of the iris usually extends as far as the 
 ciliary body. The space included in the deficiency appears ordinarily 
 at first sight as perfectly transparent and free from interruptions. 
 Closer inspection, however, shows that although the pigment-layer of 
 the iris is completely wanting, there are usually the remains of the 
 tissue itself in the form of a very delicate and transparent membrane 
 to be detected, which sometimes extends directly across the coloboma, 
 either above or below, or in the shape of a bridge thrown across from 
 the edges of the iris bordering upon the defect. 
 
 Congenital Absence of the Iris (Iredemia). This anomaly gives, 
 on a cursory examination, the same appearance as if the pupil was 
 dilated to its utmost under atropine. So great is this defect at times, 
 that it can not be determined with the ophthalmoscope whether there 
 is any rim at all of iris-tissue or not. Iredemia is of two kinds : either 
 " total," as that described above, or partial ; and the word is used not 
 to describe a lack of development of the entire membrane, but a hia- 
 tus in the circumference of the iris of a greater or less extent, which 
 then closely resembles the true coloboma of the iris. It differs, how- 
 ever, from that in this respect, that there is no accompanying colo- 
 boma of the choroid ; and whereas a " partial " and " total " iredemia 
 may exist in the same individual, a contemporaneous existence of both 
 iredemia and coloboma has not yet been observed. With this condi- 
 tion of iredemia there is usually some derangement of the cornea and its 
 curvature, which may be carried so far as to amount to conical cornea. 
 
 Eccentric Position of the Pupil (Corectopid). This shows itself
 
 THE FUNDUS OF THE NOEMAL EYE. 
 
 91 
 
 with the ophthalmoscope simply as a displaced pupil, and offers but 
 little difficulty in its diagnosis. It varies in degree from the slightest 
 displacement to one that approaches the limits of the cornea. It is 
 usually not round, but of an oval shape. Its position is mostly down- 
 ward, or downward and inward ; but it may lie in other directions. It 
 is often found combined with coloboma of the choroid, and then its 
 origin is apparent. It is, however, difficult to assign this as a cause 
 when the displacement of the pupil is upward or outward unless we 
 assume that there is an abnormal position of the foetal split. Eccen- 
 tric pupil may exist in both eyes. 
 
 Persistent Pupillary Membrane. This anomaly gives a striking 
 ophthalmoscopic picture. It appears to occur more frequently than it 
 really does, from the fact that it has often been confounded with the 
 remains of adhesions formed by some intra-uterine inflammation of the 
 iris. This confusion need never occur, since the true nature of the origin 
 of the membrane has been determined. The differential characteristic 
 of a real pupillary membrane, as will be seen from the drawing, is 
 that the fibres of which it is composed take their origin from the 
 anterior surface of the iris, leaving the pupillary border free and 
 movable. The fibres usually 
 stretch across from the ante- 
 rior surface of the iris to the 
 centre of the lens, where they 
 may form a plaque of consid- 
 erable size, as shown in the 
 drawing (Fig. 42), taken from 
 a case reported by Dr. Ag- 
 new ("Trans. American Ophth. 
 Soc., 1880," p. 110). 
 
 Although not actually de- 
 termined, it is fair to assume, 
 especially since they have been 
 found together, that this mem- 
 brane has oftentimes something 
 to do with the existence, if not 
 
 with the formation of pyramidal cataract. In other cases single fibres 
 are continued as such directly across the entire pupil, where they 
 anastomose with each other (" Manz., G. and S.," vol. ii., p. 94). 
 
 The pupil in these cases of persistent membrane usually expands 
 and contracts to the fullest extent under atropine and eserine respect- 
 ively, which is not the case when the adhesions and bands are due to 
 intra-uterine inflammation. 
 
 FIG. 42.
 
 92 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 Coloboma of the Lens. This consists of a deficiency at the periph- 
 ery of the lens, and may vary in size from the slightest indentation 
 to about one fourth of the substance of the lens. It is always at the 
 borders of the lens, and never invades the centre. It is, according to 
 some authorities, invariably in the lower margin, but Dr. Knapp re- 
 ports a case where the defect was at the upper border. The refrac- 
 tion of the eye in which it is found is usually myopic, sometimes to a 
 great degree. Hypermetropia may, however, be present. With the 
 ophthalmoscope the deficiency sometimes shows itself with a straight 
 edge, as if a small slice of the lower periphery had been cut off in a 
 more or less horizontal direction. As a rule, however, the edge is 
 curved, the convexity looking upward, or the defect may manifest 
 itself as a small, dark stripe running in a vertical direction. It is apt 
 to be mistaken for simple dislocation of the lens. 
 
 Coloboma of the Choroid. Beginning at the posterior part of the 
 eye, the coloboma in the choroid usually extends directly downward, 
 sometimes, however, deviating slightly either inward or outward. It 
 may extend as far as the eye can reach with a fully dilated pupil. It 
 is usually connected with that of the iris by a broad deficiency in the 
 ciliary body, or by means of a raphe, which extends through it, and 
 along the sides of which the ciliary processes, shortened in size and 
 somewhat flattened from before backward, are arranged. 
 
 The coloboma may include the optic nerve and its sheath, or there 
 may be a portion more or less broad of healthy choroidal tissue before 
 the coloboma begins, as is shown in the chromo-lithograph (Plate III, 
 Fig. 3). That portion of the sclera which corresponds to the defect 
 in the choroid usually protrudes backward in varying degrees, though 
 there are cases where it has a uniform surface with the neighboring 
 parts. As a rule, the surface is divided into several shallow compart- 
 ments, or protrusions of different levels, and the deepest of these is 
 usually that which is nearest the nerve. The general surface of these 
 compartments, or ectatic portions, may be further broken by small 
 ridges or furrows which run in a transverse direction, and which are 
 not unlike in appearance those minute furrows formed on a sandy 
 beach by the action of the sea ; or a raphe may extend vertically for 
 a greater or less distance, which then divides the coloboma longitu- 
 dinally into two compartments. 
 
 Although the general effect of the color of the region of the colo- 
 boma is a bright, oftentimes a glittering white, with a mother-of-pearl 
 sheen to it, yet these compartments often vary among themselves in 
 color from a delicate pinkish-white to a peculiar bluish-green. The 
 existence of the protruding, or staphylomatous parts, is shown by the
 
 THE FUNDUS OF THE NORMAL EYE. 93 
 
 play of light which passes over them on the rotatory movements of 
 the mirror, and by the varying strength of the glass which is required 
 to bring the different portions into view by the upright image. 
 
 The distribution of the vessels over the surface of the coloboma is 
 peculiar, and depends somewhat upon the size and extent of the de- 
 fect. If the optic nerve has arrived at a full or fair state of develop- 
 ment, and is not included within the coloboma, the retinal vessels 
 pursue their usual course downward up to the borders of the defect, 
 along which they run, but over which, as a rule, the main trunks do 
 not pass. Smaller branches, however, which arise from them, do 
 cross the edge, and then ramify over the surface of the coloboma. 
 Occasionally, however, the larger vessels do this also, and then usually 
 give evidence of a change in the level of the sclera by a sudden 
 bending in their walls. Usually these vessels have a very abnormal 
 appearance, and pursue a very irregular and tortuous course, follow- 
 ing the irregularities of the surface. 
 
 Sometimes, however, instead of following the surface of the exca- 
 vations, the retina may stretch directly across these, and in this case 
 the retinal vessels can be readily distinguished from those lying below 
 them by the parallactic movements which they undergo, and the differ- 
 ent adjustment of glasses which it is necessary to employ to bring the 
 more distant vessels into focus, and, according to Jaeger, the shadows 
 which they cast upon the whiter surface below by displacements of 
 the mirror. Besides the retinal vessels and the scantily developed 
 vessels of the choroid proper, there are other vessels which come from 
 the sclera and are, in fact, offshoots of the short posterior ciliary ves- 
 sels, which show themselves as a fine and delicate network, of which 
 isolated branches, here and there, can be traced directly into the 
 sclera or followed across the white surface of the coloboma into the 
 normal district of the choroid. It is sometimes extremely difficult to 
 tell the retinal from some of the finer choroidal vessels, especially as 
 it can occasionally be determined, by a careful inspection, that the two 
 anastomose with each other. 
 
 The entrance of the optic nerve may be either partially or entirely 
 included within the coloboma, as is shown in the woodcut taken from 
 the chromo-lithograph by Jaeger (" Hand Atlas," Fig. 88). The nerve, 
 as is the case in the drawing (Fig. 43), is usually of the oval form, 
 and can, as a rule, be easily distinguished from the surrounding tissue ; 
 but there are cases where this is very difficult, if not impossible. 
 Although the nerve does usually preserve its oval form, the largest 
 diameter is not usually in a vertical direction ; on the contrary, the 
 nerve seems frequently to have been turned on its axis until it as-
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 sumes an oblique direction, or it may be turned completely round, to 
 an angle of 90, so that the principal vessels, instead of running ver- 
 tically, run horizontally across the field. Even when this is not the 
 
 case, the vessels are 
 usually arranged in a 
 bizarre and abnormal 
 manner. 
 
 Anatomical exami- 
 nation shows the pro- 
 tuberance of the sclera, 
 as well as a want of 
 the choroid within the 
 district of the colobo- 
 ma. Still, traces of the 
 choroid betray them- 
 selves as a delicate 
 membrane which lines 
 the staphylomatous 
 parts, while the retina, 
 as a rule, is complete- 
 ly wanting within the 
 region of the colobo- 
 
 ma, though there are some cases in which it would appear still to be 
 present and to extend across the coloboma. The defect may exist 
 either in .both eyes or in one eye, and then, in the great majority of 
 cases, in the left. The eye affected with coloboma is generally smaller 
 than normal, or shows a varying degree of microphthalmus, and there 
 is usually corresponding to the defect a complete loss of the field of 
 vision upward, which shows that there is a very low state of develop- 
 ment of the retina. 
 
 Coloboma of the Macula. This occurs as a rare anomaly, and con- 
 sists usually in an isolated defect of the choroid at the region of the 
 yellow spot, which varies considerably in size and shape, but which is 
 usually circular and somewhat larger than the disk. It presents itself 
 with the mirror as a pigmentless spot, showing the peculiar reflex of 
 the sclera and other appearances due to an ordinary coloboma of the 
 choroid, upon which may be seen traces of the choroidal vessels or 
 those coming from branches of the ciliary arteries. In some cases an 
 inequality in the surface of the region can be detected, with a slight 
 protrusion backward of the sclera. Instead of a single spot there may 
 be two, as seen by me and shown in the drawing (Fig. 44, also Plate 
 III, Fig. 4). In this case the second spot lay in the horizontal me- 
 
 FIG. 43.
 
 THE FUNDUS OF THE NORMAL EYE. 
 
 95 
 
 ridian, between the macula and the nerve. Care must be taken not to 
 confound this congenital defect, which is a want of closure of the 
 choroidal split, with those spots of atrophy which may occur as the 
 remains of haemorrhage just at this region, or, more frequently still, 
 from choroiditis, which may also be congenital, inasmuch as the in- 
 flammatory process may 
 have been intra-uterine. 
 
 In one case seen by 
 me, in addition to the 
 coloboma at the region 
 of the macula, there 
 was starting from the 
 temporal side of the de- 
 fect what appeared to 
 be a fold of the retina 
 protruding into the vit- 
 reous, as the retinal 
 vessels could be traced 
 from the normal retina 
 directly over on to the 
 fold. 
 
 Vision is, as a rule, Fi 
 
 very much reduced, al- 
 though there is a case reported by Reich, in which it was almost nor- 
 mal. Burnett (" Knapp's Archives of Ophthalmology," vol. xi, p. 
 461) also reports an interesting case of this defect in which the vision, 
 though comparatively good for the moment, faded away when the 
 eye, which was affected with strabismus, was fixed directly upon any 
 object, which may indeed be the case with simple cross-eye. 
 
 I have also seen one or two cases where there was a distinct circu- 
 lar spot, the size of the optic disk and not unlike it in appearance 
 minus, however, the vessels and which was unmarked by any deposit 
 of pigment. These whitish-pink spots occupied the region of the 
 macula lutea, and the fovea formed the centre. The vision in these 
 cases was somewhat defective. In one case, which I saw with Dr. 
 Rushmore, of Brooklyn, the patient was suffering from an attack of 
 retino-choroiditis, of a low type, in the left eye, and in this eye vision 
 was, for the time being, very much reduced. But the vision of the 
 right eye was, the patient said, as good as it ever was (J-), and declared 
 that there was nothing the matter with it. I looked upon these pe- 
 culiar spots occurring in both eyes as of congenital origin, with a super- 
 added retino-choroiditis in the left eye, due perhaps to a reduced state
 
 96 TEXT -BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 of vitality of the part from some mtra-uterine inflammation or faulty 
 development. Mr. J. E. Adams reports a similar case, and gives a 
 chromo-lithographic picture of the appearance at the macula : " On 
 examination, it was found that the change shown in the plate occupied 
 the region of the macula lutea, and it was assumed that it was the 
 cause of the diminished visual acuteuess (V = f ), but an almost pre- 
 cisely similar condition was discovered in the right eye, in which the 
 vision was absolutely normal. The patches are not raised, but ap- 
 pear simply as alterations in texture and color, and concerning the 
 exact nature of them one can do little more than guess" ("Trans. 
 Ophth. Soc. of the United Kingdom," vol. iii., p. 113). It would 
 appear to me that both Mr. Adams's case and my own are the expres- 
 sions of a faulty development at the macula lutea of a congenital 
 origin, suggestive of a modified coloboma at this place, in which, al- 
 though the closure had taken place in all the membranes, there was an 
 insufficient development of tissue, which showed itself particularly in 
 a reduced number of the minuter vessels of the part, and in their 
 arrangement and distribution. 
 
 Coloboma of the Sheath of the Optic Nerve. The want of closure 
 in the foetal split may affect the sheath of the nerve, and probably 
 also the substance of the nerve itself. Liebreich ("Atlas D'Ophthal- 
 moscopie," Taf. vii., Fig. 4) first gave a drawing of this defect, under 
 the title of "Coloboma of the Sheath." The nerve-entrance seemed 
 to be some three or four times as large as the normal disk, and was 
 sharply defined by the surrounding choroid, which was normal, and in 
 which there was no coloboma. A thin diaphanous membrane was 
 thrown across the lower two thirds of the disk, which concealed be- 
 neath its folds two deep oblong excavations, which were separated 
 from each other by a small raphe. The principal vessels arose in the 
 upper third of the disk, the larger branches proceeding upward, while 
 only a few delicate vessels ran downward, which were more or less 
 covered in by the folded membrane, and which showed at the border 
 of the disk a sharp bend. 
 
 Nieden publishes a long and interesting account of four cases of 
 this very rare anomaly (" Knapp's Archives of Ophthalmology," vol. 
 viii., p. 501), of which the general characteristic was an optic disk about 
 twice as large as the normal optic papilla, surrounded by a normal ap- 
 pearing choroid in which there was no coloboma. The surface of the 
 disk had the appearance of having yielded backward and downward, 
 as can be recognized from the color and course of the vessels, and 
 exhibits the picture of a deep and even excavation, from the bottom 
 of which the lower retinal vessels start forward, and become first visi-
 
 THE FUNDUS OF THE NORMAL EYE. 
 
 97 
 
 FIG. 45. 
 
 ble as they mount into view over the lower edge of the disk, as seen 
 in the drawing (Fig. 45). The scleral and choroidal rings are united 
 into a single line. This excavation of the substance of the disk is 
 
 o 
 
 formed by the non-closure of the embryological furrow in the optic 
 nerve which should naturally unite, and through which the vessels are 
 to be led to the retina. 
 An excavation of the same 
 nature, although of a less 
 degree, is to be seen in the 
 chromo - lithograph (Plate 
 III, Fig. 3, reproduced 
 from "Jaeger's Atlas," Taf. 
 xix., Fig. 87). Dr. Pooley 
 also reports a case of this 
 anomaly in the "Transac- 
 tions of the Sixth Interna- 
 tional Congress at Milan." 
 
 I once observed a case 
 in which there seemed to 
 be no coloboma of the 
 sheath of the nerve, but 
 simply one of the embry- 
 onic furrow alone, as the disk was no larger than it usually is, and the 
 choroidal and scleral rings were perfectly formed. There was, how- 
 ever, a pronounced and split-like excavation at the lower portion of 
 the nerve, with steep and crater-like sides over which the lower ves- 
 sels curved forward into the retina. 
 
 Anomalies of the Disk. The shape and size of the optic disk and 
 the inequalities in its surface vary so much in the normal eye, that it 
 is difficult oftentimes to say where physiological variations leave off 
 and anomalies begin. Irregularities in the close adjustment of the 
 choroidal opening occur to a greater or less extent in many eyes, and 
 sometimes produce the effect of the crescentic figure known as a 
 " conus.'' This occurs usually at the outer edge of the disk, or directly 
 downward, less frequently inward, sometimes, but very rarely, upward. 
 It is not to be confounded with the " cone," the result of progressive 
 myopia. Fuchs, in his paper on congenital anomalies of the optic 
 nerve,* gives some marked cases of malformation of the nerve-en- 
 trance and its immediate neighborhood, due to the presence of a cone 
 directly below the disk, of which Fig. 46 is an example. With this 
 defect there is usually also a distorted condition of the vessels. The 
 
 * " Archiv far Ophthalmologie," B. xxviii., Ab. 1, p. 139, 1882. 
 7
 
 98 
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTIIALMOSCOPY. 
 
 FIG. 46. 
 
 defect commonly occurs in both eyes to a greater or less degree, but 
 sometimes only in one. This cone is always congenital, and may be 
 looked upon as the analogue of the ordinary colo- 
 boma, only of a less degree. 
 
 Fuchs also gives a drawing of a congenital 
 anomaly in which the papilla is covered by a mem- 
 brane, which crosses the entire nerve and com- 
 pletely conceals the entrance of the vessels. Of 
 such membranes, Fuchs has seen three. I have 
 myself observed one which was evidently a con- 
 genital formation, consisting of a delicate but at the same time un- 
 transparent membrane, which covered the entire nerve-entrance, and 
 which extended out over the retinal vessels for some distance beyond 
 the borders of the disk. The vision of the eye was but slightly 
 below the normal. 
 
 It has been already mentioned that sometimes the borders of the 
 choroidal opening do not fit as closely as usual to the head of the 
 nerve, so that, instead of a crescentic figure being formed which 
 resembles a cone, the entire circuit is in- 
 creased, and the disk, therefore, appears 
 to be abnormally large. (See chromo- 
 lithograph, Plate II., Fig. 3.) 
 
 Sometimes, though very rarely, the 
 choroidal opening instead of being larger 
 than normal is smaller; that is to say, 
 the choroidal tissue seems to extend over 
 the limits of the disk. I have seen sev- 
 eral such cases, and of these Fig. 47 is 
 the most marked example. This was 
 sketched from the eyes of a patient in 
 middle life, with a high degree of com- 
 pound myopic astigmatism, and two other members of the family 
 had the same anomaly, only to a less degree. (See also chromo-litho- 
 graph, Plate II., Fig. 4.) 
 
 Opaque Nerve-Fibres. One of the most striking and in some cases 
 one of the most confusing, to the beginner, of all ophthalmoscopic 
 pictures is that presented by the peculiar condition known as " opaque 
 nerve-fibres." As was shown in the anatomical description, p. 24, the 
 fibres of the stem of the optic nerve discard their outer or medullary 
 sheath, which is opaque, as soon as they have arrived at the lamina 
 cribrosa, and continue on in their course to the retina as simple axis 
 cylinders, which are perfectly transparent. The same thing takes
 
 THE FUNDUS OF THE NORMAL EYE. 99 
 
 place in the condition now under consideration. The fibres lose their 
 medullary sheath at the lamina cribrosa so that the head of the optic 
 nerve or disk has its usual degree of transparency, but the medullary 
 sheath is reinstated again just as the fibres leave the edge of the papilla 
 to be distributed to the retina and become again opaque. The com- 
 bined effect of these opaque fibres is to produce at the border of the 
 disk a very conspicuous figure of greater or less extent, which is either 
 of a dull opaque white, or, on the other hand, of considerable brill- 
 iancy, with a mother-of-pearl or watered-silk sheen to it, and with 
 occasionally a bluish or even a greenish tinge. The usual place for 
 the appearance of this figure is either at the upper or lower margin, 
 singly or at both places at once. It is very rarely situated at the 
 inner side of the disk, and according to some authorities never on the 
 outer side, or that toward the macula lutsa. I certainly have never 
 seen it there. This white figure or plaque is ordinarily of about the 
 diameter of the disk in extent, and with the disk as a base extends out 
 over the surface of the retina, the outer border being more or less con- 
 vex. It is when it is of these dimensions and shape that it is most 
 likely to be taken for an exudation due to some form of retinitis or 
 neuro-retinitis, especially in those cases where the fibres are very abun- 
 dant and dense, and the outer sheath well developed, as then the level 
 of the opaque fibres is somewhat more advanced than the general 
 surface of the retina. The chromo-lithograph (Plate II., Fig. 6) is 
 taken from Liebreich, and gives an admirable representation of the 
 anomaly as it commonly appears, though necessarily lacking in brill- 
 iancy and contrast ("Atlas," Taf. xii., Fig. 2). 
 
 As a rule, the opaqueness of the fibre does not leave off abruptly, 
 but gradually becomes thinner and thinner toward the edge of the 
 plaque, which then ends in tongue-like extensions or flame-like pro- 
 cesses. The larger vessels in the immediate neighborhood of the 
 papilla are usually more or less covered in by the opaque mass, and 
 the smaller ones completely concealed by it. The vessels, however, 
 reappear again, and, meandering in and out of the opaque plaque, offer 
 a very striking and beautiful appearance. 
 
 The disk itself sometimes, though comparatively rarely, partici- 
 pates in this want of transparency of the fibres ; that is to say, the 
 medullary sheath is re-established before the fibres reach the border of 
 the papilla, as shown by one of the drawings by Liebreich (Taf. xii., 
 Fig. 1). Sometimes in conjunction with the trouble bordering upon 
 the disk there may be a second isolated spot separated from that at 
 the papilla by a portion of the fundus which has a perfectly normal 
 appearance, and which may in some cases be of considerable extent, as
 
 100 
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 shown in the picture by Liebreich, Taf. xii., Fig. 1 ; also Jaeger 
 (" Hand Atlas," Taf. vi., Fig. 36). 
 
 The drawing (Fig. 48) is taken from Jaeger (" Hand Atlas," Taf. 
 vi., Fig. 36), and is reproduced here, not because this is the common 
 
 form under which the 
 anomaly presents itself, 
 as this is better shown 
 in the chromo - litho- 
 graph (Plate II., Fig. 
 6), but as an exagger- 
 ated example of what 
 may occur, and which 
 when once seen places 
 the learner on his guard 
 as to what may take 
 place in this direction. 
 I have seen the exact 
 counterpart of this pict- 
 ure, but I must say 
 that, from the light 
 and feathery appear- 
 FIG. 48. ance which the plaque 
 
 presented, I was led to 
 
 believe that the effect was largely due besides the opaque fibres to a 
 redundancy of connective tissue. There is usually no disturbance of 
 the amount of vision in these cases, although careful examination will 
 often show that Mariotte's blind spot is increased in size. 
 
 Abnormal Transparency of the Nerve-Fibres. Instead of the 
 above condition, or want of transparency of the nerve-fibre, the op- 
 posite may occur, and the fibres of the head of the nerve show too 
 great a transparency. According to Jaeger, who described it anatomi- 
 cally, such a condition is due to the fact that the nerve-fibre loses its 
 outer sheath some distance before it reaches the lamina cribrosa, and, 
 for this reason, our view can penetrate to a deeper extent into the 
 stem of the nerve, which gives the effect of what Jaeger has called 
 an apparent excavation of the optic nerve. This would presuppose 
 that the transverse fibres and vessels of the lamina were also trans- 
 parent. A better explanation would perhaps be, that the lamina was 
 situated more posteriorly than normal. I have never seen myself ex- 
 actly the condition described by Jaeger, and after him by Mauthner 
 (" Lehrbuch der Ophth.," p. 258), but I have seen what seemed to me 
 to be an abnormally transparent head of the nerve, in which minute
 
 THE FUNDUS OF THE NORMAL EYE. 101 
 
 vessels appeared to be imbedded, as if in some gelatinous substance. 
 This I attributed to a lack, or almost entire want, of connective-tissue 
 elements, and to a paucity of the smaller vessels. 
 
 Bifurcation of the Optic Fibres. Under this title Mauthner 
 (" Lehrbuch der Ophthalmoscopie," p. 267) gives a description of an 
 anomaly which he had seen but once in his experience, and of which 
 Jaeger furnishes the drawing (" Hand Atlas," Taf . vi., Fig. 31). In 
 this case, that of a boy, the optic nerve-fibres seemed to be collected 
 to a great degree into bundles, which ran upward and downward. 
 The vessels also ran upward and downward within the region of these 
 bundles, while the outer and inner portion of the retina appeared to 
 be free from vessels. The fibres were not opaque fibres, nor did they 
 have a white color, but still they were clearly defined as fibres, as by 
 their superimposed condition the upper and lower borders of the 
 disk were obliterated, and the fibrous structure of the retina at this 
 part clearly denoted. The picture given by Jaeger certainly has the 
 appearance which a highly astigmatic eye would produce, but it was 
 shown by careful examination that the appearance was not due to this 
 or any other optical error. I have myself seen not infrequently in 
 highly myopic eyes appearances something similar, though in a less 
 degree, to those described by Mauthner, and have attributed them to 
 some faulty development of the optic nerve as well as that of the 
 entire fundus, and especially of the vascular supply of the retina. 
 
 Discoloration of the Optic Nerve. Mauthner also mentions (p. 
 267) some remarkable cases of discoloration of the optic nerve in- 
 dependent of the infinite variety in shade, if not in color, which is 
 common to the disk in physiological conditions. Chief among these 
 is an optic nerve of a sky-blue or dark-brown color, and he refers to 
 an example figured by Jaeger (Taf. vii., Fig. 40) in which the color is 
 very pronounced and clearly defined by the use of the upright image 
 and weak illumination. The color in the picture referred to seems, 
 to my eye, much more of a green than a blue, though it is described 
 as the latter by Jaeger. I have myself never seen any such marked 
 cases, or, indeed, any which approached them except in morbid con- 
 ditions. 
 
 Anomalies of the Vascular System. In regard to the variations 
 in the vessels of the retina, attention has been called already to the 
 great differences which may exist in the perfectly normal eye, as to 
 the earlier or later divisions of the principal branches and their wide 
 fluctuations in color, diameter, and tortuosity. So great, indeed, are 
 these variations that it is difficult to say where a physiological pecul- 
 iarity leaves off and a congenital abnormality begins. Under this
 
 102 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 latter head may, I think, be classed the examples of great tortuosity 
 of the vessels, reported by Mr. Benson and Mr. Xettleship (" Trans. 
 Ophth. Soc. United Kingdom," vol. ii., pp. 56, 57, Plate III, 1882). 
 In Mr. Benson's case, as shown by an excellent drawing, the veins and 
 arteries were very large, very numerous, and excessively tortuous, and 
 exhibited these peculiarities in each eye. There was no appearance 
 of past neuritis ; no exudation into the retina or thickening of the 
 adventitia of the vessels ; and yet, so great was the tortuosity and snake- 
 like character of the vessels, that all but a very experienced observer 
 would be led to believe that he was in the presence of a commencing 
 neuro-retinitis or choked disk, especially of that form known as the 
 " Medusa " nerve. (See, also, drawings published by Dr. S. Mackenzie, 
 ibid., vol. iv., p. 152, Plate V.) 
 
 It is only very seldom that an increase in the actual number of the 
 retinal vessels is to be determined, either in the veins or arteries, and, 
 when it does occur, it does so more frequently with the former than 
 with the latter. Occasionally we see, on the other hand, an abnormal 
 decrease in the number of vessels, as a whole, or an arrest of develop- 
 ment in a particular branch. 
 
 According to Jaeger,* a decrease in the transparency of the walls of 
 the vessel may take place. This may vary from a slight want of clear- 
 ness, which is hardly perceptible, to a complete want of transparency. 
 This may show itself either as a cloud-like disturbance in the wall of the 
 vessel, or as a granular or punctiform striation, which may run either 
 crosswise or lengthwise of the vessel. It has no regular formation, 
 and may be limited sharply to one spot, or extend itself gradually into 
 the transparent portion. These disturbances have usually a grayish- 
 white or yellowish-brown color, or they show themselves as completely 
 untransparent patches, which strongly reflect the light, and which 
 have at times a silky lustre. These longitudinal discolorations or 
 patches may occur here and there on different vessels, or in different 
 parts of the same vessel. They are most frequently met with, and 
 are larger and more pronounced in character, within the region of the 
 head of the nerve and its immediate neighborhood, and less frequently 
 found at the periphery of the fundus. On account of these disturb- 
 ances, the actual walls of the vessels are delicately denned or even 
 strikingly manifest. The light-streak may be either increased or 
 diminished in size or brilliancy, and take on a granular or striped ap- 
 pearance. The color of the blood-column becomes of a lighter aspect 
 and has a greenish-brown or a grayish-red tinge. 
 
 The index of refraction of the wall of the vessel also affects the 
 * "Ergebnisse rler Untersuchung mit dem Augenspiegel," 1876, p. 61.
 
 THE FUNDUS OF THE NORMAL EYE. 103 
 
 appearance of the blood-column. Under its influence the column of 
 blood appears to be bounded on each side, to a greater or less extent, 
 by narrow translucent bands, which correspond to the thickness of the 
 walls. These longitudinal bands, although transparent, possess, from 
 a difference in refraction from the surrounding tissue, a peculiar 
 smoke-like and hazy appearance, which distinguishes them by contrast 
 from the surrounding tissue, and which gives them the appearance of 
 being slightly in shadow. 
 
 These disturbances of the vascular system which have been de- 
 scribed, do not usually, unless of a very high degree, produce any 
 functional disturbance. 
 
 Persistent Hyaloid Artery. As is known, the hyaloid artery in 
 embryonic life passes through the central canal of the vitreous body 
 on its way to the posterior surface of the lens. This vessel usually 
 disappears before birth, but sometimes persists as a great rarity in 
 after-life, and then reveals itself to the ophthalmoscope, usually as a 
 minute thread-like band which, leaving the central portion of the disk, 
 stretches out into the vitreous for a greater or less extent. It may, 
 indeed, traverse the entire vitreous body and be attached to the pos- 
 terior surface of the lens. Usually, however, the anterior end is 
 unattached, and the body then commonly undergoes a serpentine 
 movement with the varying motions of the eyeball, though it may 
 sometimes remain motionless even under these conditions. With the 
 mirror the artery or its remains usually appear black, or at least of a 
 deep gray color, either in part or in whole, but it must not be inferred 
 from this that the vessel does not contain blood, for as with other bodies 
 in the vitreous we, under ordinary circumstances, see the vessel not by 
 the light which is reflected from its own surface, but by contrast with 
 the light which is reflected from the fundus beyond it. Zehender re- 
 ports a case in which the red color of the ordinary vessels was present 
 at the point of origin of the artery at the disk, was wanting in the 
 central portions, and again present in the very anterior portions when 
 oblique light was used, thus showing that the vessel was patulous for 
 its entire extent. Cases of this anomaly of late years have been re- 
 ported by most of the well-known observers, and it is no longer the 
 rarity it once was. The only case which I have seen myself was in 
 the eye of a young adult. Here the vessel or its remains had the 
 appearance of a fine, dark-colored string, which was attached to the 
 central portion of the disk. It tapered gradually toward its anterior 
 end, which was surmounted by a small, flattened projection, which 
 was not unlike the head of a serpent, and by which it had been evi- 
 dently attached to the posterior surface of the lens in the embryonic
 
 104 
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 FIG. 49. 
 
 state (Fig. 49). On the posterior surface of the lens there was also a 
 small, dark opacity, which was the point of its original attachment. 
 Whether the vessel contained blood or not could not be determined, 
 
 but it had rather the appearance of a 
 vessel which had been obliterated than 
 one which still carried blood. 
 
 This artery usually arises from the 
 central artery, but it may occasionally 
 arise from one of the smaller branch- 
 es. Dr. Kipp reports a case where 
 the anomaly was present in both eyes 
 (" Knapp's Archives of Ophthalmol- 
 ogy and Otology," vol. iii., p. 70). 
 
 Dr. "W. Seely reports a case of the 
 
 remains of the hyaloid system, where the attachment instead of being 
 at the disk was at the posterior pole of the lens. The posterior por- 
 tion of the string was freely movable in the vitreous (" Trans. Ameri- 
 can Ophth. Soc., 1882," p. 345). 
 
 Anastomosis of the Retino-choroidal Vessels. It is certainly a 
 little curious, since a connection has been shown to exist between the 
 central and ciliary system in the immediate neighborhood of the disk, 
 that no such anastomosis has ever been actually seen in normal eyes 
 with the mirror. Anomalies in distribution and course of both retinal 
 and choroidal vessels are common enough, but a true case of a direct 
 communication visible with the ophthalmoscope in a normal eye has, I 
 believe, never been reported. The nearest approach to such a condi- 
 tion, so far as I know, is the case reported by me in a myopic eye, in 
 which a retinal vessel appeared to lead directly into a choroidal 
 vessel (" Knapp's Archives," vol. ii., part ii., 1872). 
 
 Leber mentions the fact that in the immediate neighborhood of 
 the nerve a choroidal vessel may penetrate as far as the retina, and 
 can be seen to do so with the mirror, but he does not say that any 
 communication between such vessel and a retinal vessel takes place, 
 much less that such a connection is visible with the instrument 
 (G. and S., vol. ii., p. 307, 18Y6). 
 
 Nettleship, under the title of cilio-retinal blood-vessels, gives a 
 series of cases in which, although no communication was seen to take 
 place, yet in which it was inferred that it must do so from the fact 
 that a retinal vessel was observed to approach as far as the edge of the 
 disk, and then instead of entering or emerging from the porus options, 
 to bend round and pass behind the choroid (" Ophth. Hospital Reports," 
 vol. ix., Pt. ii., p. 161, 1877). In these cases, as in those earlier reported
 
 THE FUNDUS OF THE NORMAL EYE. 1Q5 
 
 by me, either the vessel penetrates the sclera and makes an outlet for 
 itself, or passes down along the sheath of the nerve to the central 
 system beyond the point of view, or again joins some choroidal vessel, 
 as really seemed to be the fact in the cases which were reported by 
 the writer. 
 
 Arterio-venous Anastomosis. In the " Transactions of the Oph- 
 thalmological Society of the United Kingdom," vol. iv., p. 156, 1884, 
 Mr. Gunn publishes a case of " direct arterio- venous communication 
 on the retina." The drawing shows in the left eye the presence of a 
 large vessel, running vertically, immediately to the inner side of the 
 yellow spot. This was found to be a branch of the inferior temporal 
 vein, running directly upward ; the vessel bifurcated soon after pass- 
 ing the level of the yellow spot. One of the terminal branches con- 
 tinues upward in the line of the vessel, while the other passes upward 
 and inward for a short distance and then opens directly into an artery. 
 There was a cilio-retinal anastomosis in the other eye, so that the con- 
 dition is probably congenital. 
 
 I can not conclude this chapter without again urging the student to 
 perfect himself in the anatomy of the part, and then to make himself 
 thoroughly acquainted with the appearances of the normal eye in all 
 its phases, and never to assume that appearances are abnormal, no 
 matter how peculiar they may be, until he has convinced himself that 
 they are not within physiological limits or the result of some anoma- 
 lous development. It is only in this way that he can avoid falling 
 frequently into error, which may subject his patient to a long and 
 useless medication, or even to all the annoyances and dangers of an 
 uncalled-for and oftentimes dangerous operation. It is the same old 
 story of the musician and his scales. Five sixths of the art of oph- 
 thalmoscopy are contained in a knowledge of the normal eye, the rest 
 is a series of representations which can be read almost at sight.
 
 CHAPTER Y. 
 
 DETERMINATION OF THE OPTICAL CONDITION OF THE EYE WITH THE 
 
 OPHTHALMOSCOPE. 
 
 
 
 THE observer having become so at home with the upright image 
 that he can readily obtain a perfectly distinct view of the fundiis 
 through an undilated as well as a dilated pupil, |hould then, but not 
 before, turn his attention toward what may be called some of the 
 niceties, if not the beauties, of the art, chief among which is the 
 ability to determine the optical condition of the eye. 
 
 Beautiful and comprehensive as the upright image is, as a whole, 
 it has one particular advantage above all others, which, as Helmholtz 
 himself mentioned, is " the ability to determine the optical condition 
 of the eye, independent of its visual power, or the statements of the 
 person examined." 
 
 Since Helmholtz first pointed out this fact in 1851, Ed. Jaeger, 
 Donders, and others have written upon the subject, but it is to Mauth- 
 ner, in his admirable work on the ophthalmoscope, that we are in- 
 debted for the most exhaustive treatise which exists on this important 
 branch of ophthalmoscopy. 
 
 Any ophthalmoscope which is provided with an apparatus at the 
 back for holding the necessary glasses may be used. Here it is that 
 the modern instruments have such an advantage over the older so 
 much so, indeed, that little can be done in this respect without one. 
 
 The kind of mirror, too, is rather a matter of preference than ne- 
 cessity, some examiners preferring a plane, others a concave silvered 
 one. For the simple determination of errors of refraction, I must 
 say that I have a decided preference for the latter wherever it is not 
 directly contraindicated by a dread of light on the part of the patient. 
 There are, it is true, cases where the iris is unusually responsive to light, 
 where it is necessary to use the weak illumination, and even here the 
 difficulty can be usually met by reducing the volume of light employed. 
 
 As the very word refraction implies the true optical value of an 
 eye independent of its accommodation, it follows that this condition 
 can only be ascertained when the eye examined is in a state of rest. 
 Further, that it is indispensable that the observer should be aware of
 
 DETERMINATION OF REFRACTION. 107 
 
 the exact state of refraction and accommodation of his own eye, be- 
 fore he can estimate that of another. 
 
 Perfect relaxation of the accommodation in the observed eye can 
 of course be obtained by atropia, no matter what the nature of the 
 refraction is. But, usually, sufficient relaxation can be secured in em- 
 metropia by causing the patient to look into the distance, and, as 
 much as possible, into vacancy, which is induced somewhat by having 
 the walls of the ophthalmoscopic room painted black. For a myope 
 it will only be necessary that he should look at some object which is 
 at a greater distance than his far point. The ability and disability 
 which hypermetropes have in relaxing their accommodation will bet- 
 ter be considered a little later under its special heading. 
 
 As far as the observer is concerned, it can be laid down as a rale, 
 at least for beginners, that the nearer the refraction of his eye ap- 
 proaches emmetropia, and the more completely he can relax his accom- 
 modation, the better. This ability to relax the accommodation varies 
 with different people, some acquiring the power completely, others 
 only partially. Practice here, as elsewhere, increases the ability. If 
 the observer is emmetropic, one of the best methods of acquiring 
 this control over the accommodation is to take a convex glass of a 
 moderate power, say 3 D, and ascertain the farthest point at which fine 
 type can be read with perfect distinctness through the glass, the other 
 eye being closed, or better still, opened but excluded from the visual 
 act by a screen. Under this condition there is a tendency for the 
 visual axes to assume a parallel position, and with it that perfect 
 state of rest usual to the eye when looking at the most distant ob- 
 jects. If the object can be moved in this case to a distance of twelve 
 inches, it is proof positive that the accommodation is entirely relaxed, 
 since, as the object viewed is situated at the principal focus of the 
 glass, only parallel rays can enter the eye, and such rays can only be 
 brought to a focus on the retina of an emmetropic eye when it is in 
 a state of perfect rest. This experiment should be repeated with 
 glasses of various strengths till the ability is acquired of always seeing 
 the test-object at the focal distance of the glass used. This once ac- 
 quired, a little further practice with the ophthalmoscope will also en- 
 able the observer to relax his accommodation during the examination. 
 
 If, however, the object viewed can not be removed from the eye 
 to a distance equal to the focal length of the glass, then it is evident 
 that the accommodation is not entirely relaxed. If, for example, con- 
 vex 3 D be used, and the object, instead of being seen distinctly at 
 twelve inches, the focal length of 3 D expressed in inches, can only 
 be so seen at nine, then it is evident that some accommodation is still
 
 108 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 going on, and the exact amount of this will be equal to the difference 
 between 4 D and 3 D = 1 D. Continued practice may soon enable 
 the observer to overcome this involuntary contraction of the accom- 
 modation. Sometimes, however, in spite of all his efforts, it still 
 remains, but he soon finds that the amount used is always the same. 
 This, then, represents the optical condition of his eye. If, for exam- 
 ple, he finds that the amount of accommodation which he still uses is 
 2 D or 3 D, his eye is then, practically speaking, no longer emme- 
 tropic, but myopic, equal in fact to 2 D or 3 D, as the case may be. 
 Consequently he must use a concave 2 D or 3 D, in order to see clearly 
 a near object, the rays from which, however, enter his eyes as parallel. 
 Having thus ascertained the optical condition of his eye in its greatest 
 state of rest, he should, having selected some one whose eye has been 
 proved to be emmetropic, practice with the ophthalmoscope through 
 the glass which he has previously found neutralizes the amount of 
 accommodation which he involuntarily employs. 
 
 As a rule, then, the weakest concave glass through which the 
 fundus of an emmetropic eye can be distinctly seen should be taken 
 as the criterion on which the emmetropic observer, who can not en- 
 tirely relax his accommodation, should base his estimate of refraction. 
 
 If the observer is ametropic, the simplest way for him is to reduce 
 his ametropia by the suitable glass. When the observer is astigmatic, 
 he must either wear the proper correcting glass or, better still, have 
 one of small diameter attached by means of a clip or slide to the back 
 of his instrument. More, however, in regard to this matter will be 
 found later under its appropriate heading. 
 
 It is, of course, very essential, for an accurate determination of the 
 refraction, to have some object-point in the eye examined, which shall 
 be fine enough not only to let us judge when we see, but when we are 
 seeing with the most perfect sharpness. 
 
 The most conspicuous object, and one for which we at first instinct- 
 ively look, is the papilla, but this should never be chosen, as it very 
 frequently is, however, as an object on which to found our observa- 
 tions, for the disk often protrudes, sometimes to a considerable degree, 
 above the general plane of the rest of the retina,* and would thus fre- 
 quently lead to the supposition that an eye was hypermetropic, some- 
 times markedly so, which was in reality emmetropic or even myopic. 
 An eye lately examined by the writer was, for example, hypermetropic 
 1 D at the disk, but myopic 2 D in the region of the macula, and Dr. 
 Mathewson showed a case at the New York Ophthalmological Society 
 which was emmetropic at the disk and myopic 6 D at the macula. 
 
 * See Chapter IV., Fig. 32.
 
 DETERMINATION OF REFRACTION. 109 
 
 The main trunks of the central artery, besides being often on an 
 advanced plane at the nerve-entrance, are in themselves seen under 
 too great an enlargement to admit of nice discrimination in focal 
 adjustment. There are, however, some very fine vessels which always 
 leave the edge of the nerve, running out horizontally on both sides. 
 These are admirably adapted for the purpose when viewed at a lit- 
 tle distance from the disk, especially toward the inner side. The best 
 of all objects, however, at least for those who are skilful in this kind of 
 examination, is the choroidal epithelium in the neighborhood of the 
 macula, though the advantages which this region offers are often more 
 than counterbalanced by the difficulties which attend its examination. 
 
 The observer having found out the exact optical condition of his 
 own eye, it remains for him, first, to ascertain the nature of the refrac- 
 tion of the eye under examination, and then, if ametropic, to deter- 
 mine the exact degree of the anomaly. 
 
 If the observer is emmetropic, and relaxes his accommodation en- 
 tirely, he knows that his eye is adjusted for parallel rays only. Now, 
 the only kind of eye from which rays emerge parallel is an emmetro- 
 pic eye ; consequently, if the fundus of the eye examined is focused 
 sharply on the observer's retina, the rays which enter his eye must be 
 parallel, and the eye observed must be emmetropic. 
 
 If, in a given case, the observer finds that he does not gain a clear 
 view of the eye examined when his own eye is in a state of rest, but 
 that it becomes clear by using his accommodation, he then knows that 
 the observed eye must be hypermetropic, since his own eye under ten- 
 sion of the accommodation is no longer adjusted for parallel but for 
 divergent rays, and there is no eye but a hypermetropic eye from 
 which divergent rays can possibly come. 
 
 If the observer finds, however, that he can get no clear view of 
 the fundus, either by relaxing or calling forth his accommodation, he 
 knows that the rays coming from the observed eye can not be either 
 parallel or divergent, consequently they must be convergent, and the 
 eye examined myopic. 
 
 Having thus ascertained in a general way the nature of the opti- 
 cal condition present, the next step is to determine the exact degree 
 of the refraction, it being presupposed in all cases that the examined 
 eye is in a state of rest, as it usually is under the ophthalmoscope. 
 
 If the observer has already perfected himself in the use of the 
 ophthalmoscope, and can readily catch the fuudus and so approach 
 his own eye to the observed eye as to place his instrument at the dis- 
 tance from the cornea in which trial-glasses and spectacles are usually 
 placed, then the determination of the errors of a fraction, thanks to
 
 HO TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 the system of dioptrics, is exceedingly simple, and but few calcula- 
 tions are necessary. The observer has only to ascertain by successive 
 trials the glass through which he sees the fundus with perfect dis- 
 tinctness ; and as the distance between the two eyes is so small that it 
 may be neglected, the observer has only to remember that in hyper- 
 metropia it is the strongest and in myopia the weakest glass through 
 which the details of the fundus remain sharply defined, which is the 
 correct representation of the existing degree of H or M. 
 
 If, for example, the eye being hypermetropic, the strongest glass 
 through which the fundus remains clear is -f- 4 D, then H = 4 D. 
 
 If, on the other hand, the weakest glass through which the fundus 
 becomes perfectly distinct is 4 D, then M = 4 D. 
 
 Such being the theoretical rules, it remains to be seen how far 
 they are applicable to the wants of the practitioner. The advantages 
 offered by this method may be summed up as follows : 
 
 (1.) In the ability to tell the optical condition of the eye examined 
 independent of the statements of the patient, or amount of vision of 
 the eye. 
 
 (2.) In measuring the amount of elevation or depression of given 
 parts of the fundus. 
 
 Under the first heading, the point which, without doubt, is the 
 most important in a practical point of view is the determination of 
 the degree of latent hypermetropia. 
 
 The use of atropia, combined with the trial by glasses is, and 
 must remain in the vast majority of cases, the most certain test pos- 
 sible ; still, its employment is attended with more or less inconven- 
 ience to all, and to some with so much that its use is often impossible. 
 Consequently, any means of diagnosticating the amount of total hyper- 
 metropia, which is on the one hand accurate, and on the other free 
 from inconvenience to the patient, can not fail of being of the greatest 
 value to the practitioner. The only question is, Can the ophthalmo- 
 scope do this ( 
 
 From the result of a series of trials with the ophthalmoscope, both 
 before and after the use of atropia, Mauthner does not hesitate to 
 answer this question in the affirmative, laying it down as a law that 
 " in examinations with the ophthalmoscope (by the upright image) the 
 total hypermetropia is revealed" * This opinion is supported by the 
 citation of the following remarkable case : 
 
 A boy of twelve years presented the usual symptoms of astheno- 
 pia. Both concave and convex glasses were declined for distant vision. 
 Even convex .5 D was obstinately rejected. The ophthalmoscopic 
 
 * Mauthner, "Lehrbuch der Ophthalraoscopie," Ab. 1, S. 174.
 
 DETERMINATION OF REFRACTION. 
 
 examination brought to light a hypermetropia of 7 D. The eye was 
 then paralyzed with atropia, and the total H was found to be by 
 glasses 7 D. 
 
 Inasmuch as I have never seen a case of total H of so high a grade 
 as T D where there was no manifest at all, I am unable to corroborate 
 the above case with a precisely similar one from my own practice. I 
 could, however, cite many where the degree of the manifest was very 
 trifling in proportion to the total revealed by the ophthalmoscope, and 
 where the latter obtained by this means differed but slightly from what 
 was subsequently obtained by the use of atropia and glasses. For ex- 
 ample, 1 D with glasses, 3 D with the ophthalmoscope ; 1.5 D with 
 glasses, 6 D with the ophthalmoscope, 6 D with atropia ; 2 D with 
 glasses, 6 D with the ophthalmoscope, 7 D with atropia ; 3 D with 
 glasses, 8 D with the Ophthalmoscope ; 4 D with glasses, 7 D with 
 the ophthalmoscope, 7 D with atropia, etc., etc. Such glittering re- 
 sults as these certainly need but little comment, and their practical 
 application but little explanation, the only wonder being that ex- 
 aminations of this kind are not as universal as the use of the ophthal- 
 moscope itself. 
 
 There is one point which at first appears curious, and that is, that 
 we get the most exact, and certainly by far the most brilliant results, 
 just where we should expect them least; that is, with the highest 
 grades of hypermetropia, at least such has been my experience, so 
 much so that I feel convinced that it is very difficult, sometimes im- 
 possible, with young people to tell the lighter degrees of H (less 
 than .75 D) with the ophthalmoscope, unless indeed atropia has been 
 used. This I believe to be owing to the fact that hypermetropes of a 
 high degree often relax their accommodation entirely while looking 
 inattentively into the distance, and make no effort to call forth their 
 accommodation till their attention is aroused. When, however, their 
 attention is called to some particular object, they instinctively call 
 forth that amount, or very near it, which is demanded for parallel 
 rays. Consequently, under glasses where particular attention is re- 
 quired of them in deciphering the smaller letters of the test-card, they 
 refuse to relax their accommodation except to a trifling degree ; but 
 when placed in a dimly-lighted room and told to look at a wall which 
 oilers a black and diffused surface, and which will appear to them but 
 a little less distinct even when seen in circles of dispersion, they have 
 no difficulty in relaxing their accommodation. But young persons, 
 who have, say, H .75 D or less, see clearly in the distance with so little 
 effort that they probably never relax their accommodation, preferring 
 to make slight demands on their ciliary muscle rather than to see in
 
 112 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 circles of dispersion. Their condition is practically emmetropic, and in 
 the ophthalmoscopic room they relax their A no more than they are 
 accustomed to, accommodating for the plane of the wall which they 
 see distinctly, or at most for parallel rays. We may, however, lay it 
 down as a rule, even in these cases, that where little or no H can be 
 detected, either by glasses or the ophthalmoscope, little or none exists. 
 
 Without being able to accept, then, unreservedly Mauthner's gen- 
 eral statement, that the total H can be invariably determined with the 
 ophthalmoscope, we nevertheless believe that a very close approxima- 
 tion to it can almost invariably be obtained, even where a spasm of 
 the ciliary muscle exists. The following pronounced case is an ex- 
 ample in point : A lad of twelve years was brought to me by his 
 father with the statement that his son was near-sighted ; that he had 
 become so rather suddenly, and he wished to see if he were wearing 
 the proper glasses. The glass the boy had on at the time was ID. 
 With this glass V=\. On looking into the eye with the mirror, 
 it was seen at once that the boy was not myopic, although he had 
 rejected all other glasses, but was in fact hypermetropic to a con- 
 siderable degree. The fundus could be distinctly seen with -J- 3.5 D, 
 and atropia afterward showed the total H to be 4 D. 
 
 So much for the ophthalmoscope where atropia has not been used ; 
 but there are cases in which it is even superior to the test by atropia 
 and glasses, where the latter indeed utterly fail in giving an idea of 
 the amount of hypermetropia, as the following case will show : 
 
 A bright little girl was brought to me for the purpose of having 
 the exact optical condition of the eyes determined. With a convex 
 1.5 D vision was decidedly improved, amounting, however, even with 
 the glass, only to \ in the right eye, ^ in the left. The same result 
 was obtained under atropia. Glasses of various strengths from 1.5 D 
 to 3 D were tried, and still the vision remained about the same. Re- 
 course was now had to the ophthalmoscope, when a total H of 5 D 
 was found in the right, 6 D in the left eye. The discrepancy be- 
 tween the glass selected by the child and the amount of If as given 
 by the ophthalmoscope was so great that an independent examina- 
 tion was made by another oculist, with precisely the same result in 
 each eye. There was evidently a large amount of congenital amblyo- 
 pia, the only hope of relieving which certainly lay in careful and sys- 
 tematic exercise through that glass which would produce sharply 
 defined images upon the retina, and this glass could only be ascer- 
 tained through the ophthalmoscope. 
 
 So, too, in strabismus in children it is often impossible, from their 
 inability to read, or the irrelevancy of their answers, to get an ade-
 
 DETERMINATION OF REFRACTION. H3 
 
 qnate idea as to the condition of the refraction, even where atropia 
 has been used. And yet the whole question in regard to operative 
 interference may turn on the presence or non-presence of II and its 
 degree. With the ophthalmoscope, however, with a little care and 
 with a dilated pupil, the exact amount, or what approximates to it 
 very closely, can, as a rule, be ascertained, even with children in arms. 
 
 So, too, in any disease in which amblyopia is an element. 
 
 One of the most interesting attributes of the upright image is the 
 means which it affords us for determining the various planes which 
 different parts of the fundus often occupy ; for, inasmuch as a certain 
 amount of refraction corresponds to a given length of the 'axis of the 
 eye, we have only to know the refraction of a certain point to know 
 its exact antero-posterior position, and the difference of refraction be- 
 tween two given points must represent their differences of level. We 
 are thus enabled to measure numerically, for example, the amount of 
 excavation of the optic nerve or its projection above the level of the 
 retina, the projection of the choroid or retina from underlying effusion, 
 the height of tumors and their rate of increase, the amount of swell- 
 ing in the retina, the situations of membranes in the vitreous, etc. 
 
 Taking the emmetropic eye as a standard, calculations have been 
 made to determine what amount of increase or decrease in the length 
 of the optic axis corresponds to a given degree of hypermetropia or 
 myopia. I have calculated, for the easy reference of the reader, from 
 the formulas given by Helmholtz,* the two following tables, the first 
 representing the amount of decrease in length of the axis due to H, 
 and the second the increase due to M. 
 
 TABLE I. 
 
 + 0.25 D equals a shortening of 0.70 mm..;' ' 0$ ^ 
 
 -f 0.5 D " " .14 " 
 
 -f ID " " .29 " 
 
 -f 2D .56 " 
 
 + 3 D " .83 " 
 
 -j- 4D " " 1.09 " 
 
 4- 5D " " 1.33 " 
 
 4- 6D " " 1.57 " 
 
 4- 7D " 1.80 
 
 4- 8 D " " 2.03 " 
 
 4- 9 D 2.24 " 
 
 + 10 D " 2.45 " 
 
 * "Handbuch der physiologischen Optik," S. 54; Mauthner, "Lehrbuch der 
 
 Opbtb.," S. 67-226, Ab. 1. 
 8
 
 114 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 -f- 11 D equals a shortening of 2.65 mm. 
 
 + 12D 
 
 tt 
 
 tt 
 
 2.84 
 
 a 
 
 + 13D 
 
 tt 
 
 tt 
 
 3.04 
 
 tt 
 
 + 14D 
 
 tt 
 
 tt 
 
 3.21 
 
 it 
 
 4-15D 
 
 " 
 
 " 
 
 3.38 
 
 tt 
 
 + 16D 
 
 tt 
 
 
 
 3.56 
 
 tt 
 
 + 17D 
 
 tt 
 
 tt 
 
 3.73 
 
 tt 
 
 4-18D 
 
 tt 
 
 tt 
 
 3.89 
 
 tt 
 
 + 19D 
 
 tt 
 
 It 
 
 4.03 
 
 tt 
 
 + 20D 
 
 a 
 
 It 
 
 4.19 
 
 tt 
 
 + 21D 
 
 tt 
 
 tt 
 
 4.34 
 
 tt 
 
 + 22D 
 
 tt 
 
 It 
 
 4.48 
 
 tt 
 
 4-23D 
 
 tt 
 
 tt 
 
 4.63 
 
 tt 
 
 + 24D 
 
 tt 
 
 tt 
 
 4.78 
 
 tt 
 
 
 TABLE 
 
 II. 
 
 
 
 - 0.25 D 
 
 equals an increase 
 
 of 0.07 
 
 mm. 
 
 - 0.5 D 
 
 tt 
 
 tt 
 
 0.15 
 
 a 
 
 - ID 
 
 tt 
 
 tt 
 
 0.30 
 
 tt 
 
 - 2D 
 
 tt 
 
 tt 
 
 0.61 
 
 tt 
 
 - 3D 
 
 it 
 
 tt 
 
 0.94 
 
 tt 
 
 - 4D 
 
 tt 
 
 it 
 
 1.28 
 
 tt 
 
 - 5D 
 
 tt 
 
 ft 
 
 1.63 
 
 it 
 
 - 6D 
 
 tt 
 
 tt 
 
 2.00 
 
 it 
 
 - 7D 
 
 tt 
 
 tt 
 
 2.38 
 
 tt 
 
 - 8D 
 
 tt 
 
 tt 
 
 2.80 
 
 tt 
 
 9D 
 
 tt 
 
 tt 
 
 3.22 
 
 tt 
 
 10 D 
 
 tt 
 
 tt 
 
 3.67 
 
 tt 
 
 - 11 D 
 
 tt 
 
 u 
 
 4.14 
 
 tt 
 
 - 12 D 
 
 tt 
 
 tt 
 
 4.64 
 
 tt 
 
 - 13 D 
 
 tt 
 
 tt 
 
 5.17 
 
 tt 
 
 - 14 D 
 
 tt 
 
 tt 
 
 5.70 
 
 tt 
 
 - 15 D 
 
 u 
 
 it 
 
 6.27 
 
 tt 
 
 16 D 
 
 tt 
 
 tt 
 
 6.90 
 
 tt 
 
 - 17 D 
 
 it 
 
 tt 
 
 7.58 
 
 tt 
 
 18 D 
 
 tt 
 
 it 
 
 8.25 
 
 tt 
 
 - 19 D 
 
 tt 
 
 tt 
 
 8.95 
 
 tt 
 
 20 D 
 
 tt 
 
 tt 
 
 9.76 
 
 it 
 
 - 21 D 
 
 It 
 
 tt 
 
 10.61 
 
 tt 
 
 - 22 D 
 
 tt 
 
 tt 
 
 11.51 
 
 tt 
 
 - 23 D 
 
 tt 
 
 tt 
 
 12.57 
 
 tt 
 
 - 24 D 
 
 tt 
 
 tt 
 
 13.51 
 
 tt
 
 DETERMINATION OF REFRACTION. H5 
 
 The application of the above tables will perhaps be made clearer 
 by some examples, thus : 
 
 In a case of glaucoma the edge of the nerve is emmetropic, while 
 the bottom of the excavation is myopic 4 D. As myopia 4: D signifies 
 a lengthening of the axis equal to 1.28 mm. (see Table II.), the depth 
 of the excavations must be, since the edge of the nerve is emmetropic, 
 equal to 1.28 mm. In a second case the border of the nerve and gen- 
 eral fundus is myopic 1.5 D, the bottom of the excavation is myopic 
 4 D ; the true extent of the excavation will then be equal to 4 D 
 1.5 D = 2.5 D, M 2.5 D = 0.76 mm. In a third case the edge of 
 the nerve is II 1 D ; the bottom of the excavation is myopic 4 D. 
 As H\ D represents a shortening of the axis 0.29 mm., and M 4: D 
 an increase of 1.28, the true extent of the excavation will be 1.28 -f- 
 0.29 = 1.57 mm. 
 
 In a case of neuritis, following sunstroke, the centre of the nerve 
 to which the disease was almost entirely confined was hypermetropic 
 3 D ; the neighboring region was emmetropic. As If 3 D represents 
 a shortening of the axis 0.83 mm., the protrusion of the nerve was 
 0.83 mm. 
 
 In another case of violent neuro-retinitis in the left eye the cen- 
 tre of the nerve was II 6 D ; a little farther onward, H 3 D ; a little 
 farther still, .ZT 1.5 D ; and, at the farthest extremity of the field, 
 toward the ora serrata, II 1 D. In the other eye, in which the process 
 had just commenced, the general refraction was H = 1 D. Assuming, 
 then, that the refraction of the eyes when in a state of health was emme- 
 tropic and it could not have been far from this a plan might easily 
 be drawn (as, indeed, was done) representing the amount of swelling 
 due to the morbid process. This might be subsequently compared 
 with the future progress and recession of the disease, under atrophy, 
 etc., and some interesting results obtained. It is, of course, very dif- 
 ficult to follow these cases of retinal swelling, such as are common to 
 Bright's disease, from their beginning to their end ; still, such oppor- 
 tunities do occur, even where the cause is renal, and it appears to me 
 many interesting facts might be obtained from such investigations. 
 
 In a certain case a well-marked tumor was observed, situated ex- 
 actly above the optic nerve, the upper edge of which it overhung. 
 As the media were perfectly clear, a distinct view of the growth in 
 all its detail was obtained. The crest of the tumor was, at the first 
 examination, hypermetropic 6 D. The lower half of the nerve and all 
 the surrounding fundus was emmetropic ; the protrusion of the growth 
 was then 1.57 mm. A subsequent examination was made and the crest 
 of the tumor was found to be H 9 D, the protrusion was then 2.24
 
 116 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 mm., and the increase between the two examinations was 2.24 1.57 
 mm. 0.67 mm. 
 
 In another case a membrane in the vitreous appeared clearly de- 
 fined when -f- 18 D was used ; consequently there would have been, 
 if the retina had occupied the plane of the membrane, II = 18 D. 
 The fundus was, in fact, emmetropic ; the membrane was, therefore, 
 in front of the retina to a degree equal to H 18 D = 3.89 mm. 
 
 THE DETERMINATION OF ASTIGMATISM. 
 
 The determination of astigmatism by means of the ophthalmo- 
 scope has always been considered one of the most difficult, and, from 
 its want of accuracy, one of the least satisfactory applications of the 
 instrument, and there is no doubt that this is, to a great extent, true. 
 Still, the difficulty in ascertaining the existence of astigmatism and 
 the uncertainty in establishing its degree are, I think, due in a great 
 measure to the method adopted, which has usually depended on the 
 fact, first pointed out by Knapp * and Schweigger,f that in astigma- 
 tism the disk was seen elongated in one direction with the upright 
 image, and in the opposite by the inverted.:}; The effect involved in 
 this fact is due to the following causes : 
 
 If we look through a convex lens at an object which is placed 
 within its principal focus, we see it magnified to a certain degree, 
 according to the power of the lens. 
 
 If we make, for example, a small cross, the arms of which are of 
 equal length, and view it through a common convex glass, say of three 
 inches focal distance (12 D), it appears enlarged, but equally in both 
 directions, as the magnifying power is the same for each arm. If we 
 now add, however, a convex cylindric glass 6 D to the spherical, we 
 increase the magnifying power in one principal direction without alter- 
 ing it in the other. The lens is, therefore, equal in one direction to 
 12 D, but in the other to 12 D + 6 D = 18 D. If we now turn the 
 glass in such a way that the strongest magnifying power shall corre- 
 spond with the vertical arm of the cross, this will be more enlarged 
 than the horizontal, which is seen through a weaker power, and will 
 consequently appear longer. If we now draw a circle round the arms 
 of the cross in such a way that these shall be the radii, the effect will 
 still be the same, and the circle will appear elongated in the vertical 
 
 * Congress at Heidelberg, 1861. 
 
 t "Arch. f. Ophth.," IX., Ab. 1, p. 178. 
 
 | This is, however, only true when in the inverted image the glass is held 
 within the focal length of the lens from the eye, a fact which the observer being 
 aware of he can always readily provide for.
 
 DETERMINATION OF ASTIGMATISM. 
 
 direction because it is more magnified in that direction, consequently 
 it will appear no longer a circle, but an oval. 
 
 If, however, we now take a second lens and hold it in the other 
 hand at a certain distance in front of the first lens, just as we do in 
 the indirect method with the ophthalmoscope, then we get an inverted 
 image of the cross and circle round it, elongated no longer in the ver- 
 tical but in the horizontal position. The reason of this is that the 
 rays passing through the first lens, whose principal meridians are of 
 different focal power, are refracted unequally, those passing through 
 the vertical meridian where the lens is of two inches focal power more 
 than those passing through the horizontal where it is only three inches. 
 As the rays passing through the vertical meridian are more refracted 
 by the first lens, they will, after passing through the second, come to 
 a focus sooner behind it ; and the nearer the rays meet behind a lens 
 the smaller is the image, consequently the vertical line of the cross 
 will now appear smaller than the horizontal, and the circle will now 
 be elongated horizontally. 
 
 Applying this principle to the eye, Schweigger deduced the fact 
 that with the upright image the disk in astigmatism is seen elongated 
 in the direction of the meridian of greatest refraction ; with the in- 
 verted image in the meridian of the least refraction. This gives us at 
 once the directions of the principal meridians, and we have only to 
 find the glass which reduces the distortion to know the kind and 
 amount of astigmatism. 
 
 It will be seen at once that an examination must be made by both 
 methods, for it may happen that the disk may be elongated anatomi- 
 cally in a vertical, horizontal, or oblique direction, the effect of which 
 might be so counteracted by astigmatism as to make the disk appear 
 round when the ophthalmoscopic examination was made by only one 
 method, but never when both are employed. 
 
 Simple and true as all this is on paper, its application to practical 
 wants is limited from the fact that the distortion under the degrees of 
 astigmatism which usually occur in the human eye is not sufficient to 
 form a basis for accurate calculation. It may be well to state, how- 
 ever, that the effect is always increased by the observer's alternately 
 withdrawing from and approaching the eye examined, watching as he 
 does so the change in the contour of the nerve. 
 
 From the uncertainty and want of delicacy attending this method 
 of examination, it is evident that, in order to make the ophthalmo- 
 scope of practical use in astigmatism, we must look for some more 
 sensitive test to act either as a supplement to or a substitute for the 
 one mentioned above.
 
 118 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 This we have in the vessels, and especially in the light-streak on 
 their centre of curvature. The streak begins to lose its brilliancy and 
 its lateral borders their sharpness of definition the moment the vessel, 
 particularly if of the smaller kind, becomes out of focus even to a 
 very trifling degree. Low degrees of astigmatism, certainly as low as 
 .75 D, can be detected by this test, provided the accommodation in 
 both the observed and observing eye is perfectly relaxed. On this 
 account, it is much easier to determine the effect, if slight, when due 
 to M than to IT, and I do not think it is too much to say that in the 
 former condition even .5 D can then under favorable conditions be 
 pronounced upon. 
 
 If we consider the optic disk as the centre of a circle, and all the 
 vessels large and small radiating from it as so many straight lines, we 
 have in the f undus of the eye itself a representation of Dr. Green's 
 test for astigmatism, in which the principal branches of the central 
 artery and veins represent the vertical lines, and the small vessels 
 leaving the edge of the disk the horizontal and oblique. It may be 
 said that the principal trunks of the central artery and vein do not 
 always run exactly vertical. This is true ; but such is their general 
 tendency, and the fact that the vessels do not continue in their origi- 
 nal vertical course is of itself an assistance to the diagnosis. 
 
 The practical application of this is as follows : If we look with 
 the ophthalmoscope through the cornea of an astigmatic eye to the 
 retina beyond, the effect is precisely the same as if we were looking 
 through an astigmatic glass, and the vessels radiating from the optic 
 nerve will then appear just as the radiating lines do in the common 
 test when seen through a cylindric glass, most distinct in the meridian 
 of greatest ametropia. This gives us at once the direction of one of 
 the principal meridians, and we know that the direction of the other 
 must be at right angles to it. Having thus found out the direction of 
 the principal meridians, we have then only to determine the refraction 
 of each meridian separately, and the difference between the two will 
 be the amount of astigmatism. 
 
 If, for example, in a certain case the vertical vessels appear per- 
 fectly distinct, and are only rendered less so by glasses, one of the 
 principal meridians of the eye must be emmetropic. If, however, 
 the fine horizontal vessels are only made distinct by a concave 1.5 D, 
 then the second principal meridian must be myopic 1.5 D, and, inas- 
 much as the first was emmetropic, the amount of simple astigmatism 
 present must be 1.5 D. So also if it had been H instead of M, and 
 convex instead of concave glasses used. (See chromo-lithograph, 
 Plate III, Fig. 5.)
 
 DETERMINATION OF ASTIGMATISM. H9 
 
 If both meridians are myopic, but one more so than the other, 
 then compound astigmatism is present with M in all meridians, but 
 more pronounced in one. If, for example, the horizontal vessels are 
 seen distinctly only with 3D, while the vertical ones can be seen 
 with 1.5 D, the general myopia then equals 1.5 D, and the astig- 
 matism, that is, the discrepancy between the two principal meridians, 
 is 3 D 1.5 D 1.5 D. The neutralizing glass would then be 1.5 
 Ds o 1.5 DC. Axis horizontal. 
 
 So too if it had been H instead of M, and plus instead of minus 
 glasses had been employed. 
 
 It is a little puzzling, for those who are not much accustomed to 
 the determination of astigmatism, to understand how it is that the 
 vessels, as do radiating lines, always appear most distinct to an em- 
 metropic eye, in the meridian of the greatest ametropia, instead of, as 
 would appear more rational, in that of the least. It would, for ex- 
 ample, seem more natural that, inasmuch as the vertical vessels were 
 seen in the above case most distinctly, the vertical meridian should 
 be the one which deviated least from the normal. But it must be 
 borne in mind that the rays which form the vertical boundary of 
 these vessels are, in fact, horizontal rays, and as such pass through, not 
 the vertical, but the horizontal meridian, and, as this is ernmetropic, 
 they are readily focused on the observer's retina. On the other hand, 
 the rays which form the boundary of the horizontal vessels are vertical 
 rays, and pass through the vertical meridian, which is myopic, and 
 consequently the horizontal vessels are indistinct, although this merid- 
 ian is, in fact, emmetropic. This of course holds good for all kinds 
 and degrees of astigmatism. 
 
 The writer readily admits that this method is also, though by no 
 means in the same degree, wanting in accuracy, and is not to be looked 
 upon at all as a substitute for the trial by glasses, but is to be used in 
 co-operation with it. When so employed, the ophthalmoscope often 
 renders important service in revealing to us at a single glance, the 
 nature of the anomaly and the general direction of the principal 
 meridians, when to have obtained them by glasses would have been 
 an affair of hours. In cases of mixed astigmatism this holds true in 
 a marked degree, and I can not forbear, for the sake of their practical 
 bearing, from citing the two following cases : 
 
 A young lad was examined by me, who, it was alleged by his 
 parents, was nearly " blind " in one eye. On testing the eyes, the left 
 was found to have a trifling degree of hypermetropia (.75 D) with vision 
 one. In the right eye, however, vision was reduced to -fa, that is, 
 Snellen C. could only be read at five feet. A few trials were made
 
 120 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 with glasses with no material improvement in vision. In looking 
 into the eye with the ophthalmoscope the nerve appeared distorted 
 and drawn out vertically, while at the same time its outline was indis- 
 tinct in all directions, as were also all the vessels. On using the ac- 
 commodation, however, the vertical edge of the nerve became well 
 defined, as did all the vessels, so long as they ran in a vertical direc- 
 tion, but as soon as they deviated from this they at once became in- 
 distinct, and in proportion to the amount of the deviation. This was 
 very apparent at a certain place where one of the larger vessels 
 divided, sending off a branch almost at right angles to the original 
 direction of the vessel. The branch which continued in the vertical 
 direction remained perfectly distinct, and the light-streak in the centre 
 of its walls clearly defined, while that running at right angles to it, 
 that is, horizontally, was indistinct and evidently much out of focus, 
 as were, in fact, all the vessels, large and small, running in this direc- 
 tion, and no amount of tension or relaxation of the accommodation 
 made them clearly defined. 
 
 It was manifest that astigmatism was present, and that the direc- 
 tions of the principal meridians were vertical and horizontal. It was 
 evident, too, that, as it required the action of the accommodation to 
 make the vertical vessels distinct, there must be hypermetropia in the 
 horizontal meridian. In determining the degree, it was found that 
 the strongest glass through which a certain fine vertical vessel remained 
 distinct at two inches distance was a convex 2 D, the hypermetropia 
 in the horizontal meridian was therefore equal to 2 D. 
 
 As the horizontal edge of the nerve and all the vessels running 
 horizontally remained indistinct, even when the observer's accommo- 
 dation was perfectly relaxed, it was evident that the rays which 
 formed the horizontal boundary of the nerve and vessels must leave 
 the eye as convergent, and, as these rays are vertical rays, the eye must 
 be myopic in the vertical meridian. It was found that the weakest 
 glass under which the horizontal boundary of the nerve and vessels 
 became sharply defined was 3 D, the vertical meridian was therefore 
 myopic equal to 3 D. The case was therefore one of mixed astig- 
 matism, in which the vertical meridian was myopic 3 D, and the hori- 
 zontal hypermetropic 3 D, and the discrepancy between the two me- 
 ridians was 6 D. With a bicylindric glass 3D and -j- 3 D, vision 
 at once rose from -$ to ? 8 TJ . It was in fact increased eightfold. It 
 was subsequently found from a careful examination that 2.75 DC. 
 and -f- 3 DC. was preferred. With this glass, vision became one half. 
 
 In another case, where the patient suffered a great deal from asthe- 
 nopic symptoms, vision was found to be only one fifth in either eye.
 
 DETERMINATION OF ASTIGMATISM. 121 
 
 Reading was performed at six inches, while in sewing the patient 
 declared that she had to exercise great care to keep from wounding 
 her nose with the needle. As in the former case, spherical glasses 
 were tried with but little improvement of vision. On looking into 
 the eye, here too neither the nerve nor any of the vessels appeared 
 distinctly defined. On accommodating, however, it was seen that, 
 although the vertical and horizontal vessels still remained compara- 
 tively indistinct, those that originally ran, and those which later in 
 their course assumed an oblique direction upward and inward and 
 downward and outward, suddenly came sharply into view, while those 
 which ran at right angles became the most indistinct of all. The 
 same effect was noticed all over the fundus, especially in follow- 
 ing along the course of a vessel, some of the branches of which ap- 
 peared perfectly distinct, while those running at right angles were 
 much out of focus. This meridian was found to be myopic 1.5 D, 
 the opposite hypermetropic 3 D. With these glasses properly ar- 
 ranged, vision rose from one fifth to two thirds, and the patient could 
 read Jaeger No. 4 at ten inches, and sew with ease at twelve. The 
 left eye was + 2 DC. r- 1.5 DC. V= i -f. 
 
 Irregular Astigmatism. This can, as a rule, be readily detected 
 by the fact that a given vessel, while maintaining an undeviating 
 course, can only be clearly defined for a comparatively short distance 
 at a time, no matter what glass is used. 
 
 The vessel, while continuing in precisely the same direction, will 
 for a short distance appear in focus with the light-streak perfectly 
 defined, and then be suddenly interrupted by a portion which is out 
 of focus, and perhaps a little displaced laterally ; and, of two neighbor- 
 ing vessels, one will be sharply defined and the other not. A change 
 of glass, or sometimes a change in the observer's accommodation, will 
 reverse the original order of things, making the part which was indis- 
 tinct clear and the other blurred. This very often happens w r hen 
 such cases are examined with a dilated pupil through portions of the 
 cornea which are widely separated from each other, as, for example, 
 through the upper and lower borders. The ability to diagnosticate 
 irregular astigmatism with the ophthalmoscope is not a difficult mat- 
 ter, as a rule, and it will often save the surgeon a world of trouble in 
 uselessly trying to make an accurate adaptation of glasses, an approxi- 
 mate one being all the circumstances will allow. 
 
 It may be well to mention here that irregular astigmatism, at least 
 of large degrees, can be detected, by the use of the mirror alone at a 
 distance, by the play of light and shadow which takes place on rotary 
 movements of the mirror, and oftentimes by the distorted image of a
 
 122 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 portion of the fundus with its sudden appearance and disappearance. 
 This method of examination, and the appearances which follow, are 
 similar to those obtained in examination for conical cornea. 
 
 DETERMINATION OF REFRACTION ACCORDING TO THE STANDARD OF THE 
 
 INCH. 
 
 In what has preceded, it has been assumed that from practice on 
 the normal eye the observer had become more or less an adept in the 
 use of the instrument, so that he is enabled to approach very close 
 to the eye examined; also that he had a sufficient knowledge of 
 optics not only to understand the principles of lenses upon which the 
 determination of refraction is based, but also the expression of their 
 refractive power by the modern system of dioptrics. Should this not 
 be the case, however, and should the learner be unacquainted with 
 the fundamental principles upon which refraction depends, then it 
 would appear to the writer much simpler for him to first master the 
 subject by means of the old system of notation, in which the focal 
 length of a biconcave or biconvex glass is equal to the radius upon 
 which each surface is ground expressed in inches. 
 
 This method, besides being easier of comprehension to the Eng- 
 lish-speaking student than the metre or dioptric, is, in fact, the more 
 exact of the two, inasmuch as the distance between the two eyes can 
 be readily and easily taken into consideration. The great discrepan- 
 cies which often occur with the dioptric system when these conditions 
 are neglected may be forcibly illustrated by an example which very 
 frequently takes place when the error is of high degree : Two com- 
 petent observers or students examine the same case. The lirst who 
 approaches the eye so closely that the mirror nearly touches the 
 cornea, sees the fundus sharply defined with 9 D. The second, 
 only a single inch more remote than the first, requires 12 D a differ- 
 ence of three dioptrics. Such a discrepancy as this could not have 
 occurred between two observers with the old method, which permits 
 a ready and exact compensation for the different distances at which 
 the examination is made. When the principle upon which the deter- 
 mination of the various errors of refraction depends is once under- 
 stood, the result in inches can be readily reduced to dioptrics. The 
 French inch has been adopted as the standard, as it is used in general 
 ophthalmology when the old system is employed. The reader must 
 bear in mind, however, that the metric system has supplanted the old 
 system of focal lengths in ophthalmoscopy, and that it is adopted here 
 merely for the purposes of illustration. Methods for the transposition 
 of the two systems will be found in the Appendix, p. 241. For the
 
 REFRACTION ACCORDING TO THE STANDARD OF THE INCH. 123 
 
 sake of simplicity and clearness, the principles involved will be illus- 
 trated by a series of propositions. 
 
 PROPOSITION I. For an emmetropic eye to determine that the ob- 
 served eye is emmetropic. Let A (Fig. 50) be the observed eye illumi- 
 
 nated by the ophthalmoscopic mirror m. Since the eye is emmetro- 
 pic and in a state of rest, rays radiating from an illuminated point a 
 on the retina must leave the eye as parallel, and as such pass through 
 the hole of the mirror c. If, now, the observer's eye is placed behind 
 the mirror, the rays which strike his cornea being parallel, will, since 
 his own eye is emmetropic and in a state of rest, just come to a focus 
 on his retina at the point 5. A distinct image of the f undus will 
 therefore be obtained, as what is true of one point is of all. As his 
 eye is adjusted for parallel rays and for no others, he knows the eye 
 examined must be emmetropic ; consequently the fundus of an emme- 
 tropic eye can be distinctly seen by another emmetropic eye without 
 the aid of any correcting-glass, provided, however, that the observer's 
 eye is also in a state of rest. 
 
 If, however, the observer is unable to relax his accommodation 
 entirely, it is evident that the parallel rays entering his eye must come 
 to a focus in front of the retina ; that is to say, rays coming from the 
 point a (Fig. 50) will no longer come to a focus at J, but will unite in 
 front of it at e (Fig. 51). Circles of dispersion will consequently be 
 formed on IPs retina, and an indistinct image of A* 8 fundus will be 
 the result. 
 
 . 51.
 
 124 
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 The reason of this is that IPs eye as has been formerly explained 
 though emmetropic while looking at distant objects, is, as far as 
 ophthalmoscopic examinations are concerned since he can not relax 
 his accommodation virtually myopic, and a concave glass (y) must be 
 used behind the ophthalmoscope, to bring parallel rays to a focus on 
 his retina. The weakest concave glass that will do this will then be 
 exactly the amount that ffs accommodation can not be relaxed, and 
 with it his eye will be just adapted for parallel rays ; consequently, 
 when the fundus of an eye can only be seen clearly through this glass, 
 the eye must be emmetropic. 
 
 PKOPOSITION II. The observer being emmetropic,, to determine the 
 amount of myopia in the observed eye. As the observed eye is my- 
 opic, rays of light emerging from it are convergent, and will meet at 
 a point in front of the eye, at a distance just equal to the amount of 
 the myopia. If, for example, the myopia equals ^-, then the rays will 
 meet at six inches in front of the nodal point. As the observer's eye, 
 however, is emmetropic, and in a state of rest, it is accommodated, not 
 for convergent but parallel rays, so that, before the convergent rays 
 coming from a myopic eye can be focused on the observer's retina, 
 they must be made parallel. This will be made clear by the follow- 
 ing diagram (Fig. 52). 
 
 FIG. 52. 
 
 Let A be an eye myopic $ ; rays of light leaving its retina will 
 emerge convergent, and come to a focus six inches in front of the 
 nodal point 0, at the point 5. If we could place a concave lens at 
 the nodal point 0, we should neutralize the myopia, and the rays would 
 then leave the eye as parallel, since the glass would then be just six 
 inches from the point J, which would then represent its virtual focus. 
 But, as we can not put the glass at the nodal point of the observed eye, 
 we place it as near as the conditions of an ophthalmoscopic examina- 
 tion will permit. This distance is generally assumed to be about two 
 inches. As the glass (g) is then two inches in front of the nodal point, 
 the distance between it and the point l> will be only four inches ; con- 
 sequently, it will require a concave to render the rays parallel at two 
 inches from the eye, while it only required | at the nodal point. If 
 the glass (<?') is at three inches from the nodal point, then it will be
 
 REFRACTION ACCORDING TO THE STANDARD OF THE INCH. 125 
 
 only three inches from the point 5, and it will require a glass of - to 
 reduce the rays to parallel; consequently, -J- three inches from the 
 nodal point is equal to at it. That is to say, the glass required is 
 just as much too strong as it is distant from the nodal point. "We 
 must, therefore, reduce it by this quantity. In the above cases it will 
 be ^+2=^-. % +3 = fa. From which we deduce 
 
 For an emmetropic observer whose eye is at rest, the myopia in a 
 given case will equal the weakest concave glass through which the 
 fundus is seen distinctly, plus the distance of tlie glass from the 
 nodal point of the observed eye. 
 
 This will give the exact amount of the myopia present, but inas- 
 much as we usually measure degrees of ametropia by that glass which 
 brings parallel rays to a focus on the retina, placed not at the nodal 
 point, but half an inch in front of it, we may for ordinary calculations 
 omit this half inch. For example, we say a man is myopic $ when a 
 concave % placed one half inch in front of his nodal point brings 
 parallel rays to a focus on the retina ; he is really, however, myopic 
 only -|j. So, too, with the ophthalmoscope we may neglect this half 
 inch, and then the result will give the amount of ametropia, as it is 
 usually expressed in glasses. 
 
 "We have taken the distance between the glass and nodal point as 
 two inches simply as a matter of convenience, and because it repre- 
 sents about the distance common to those who are not adepts in this 
 kind of examinations. "With a little practice the observer can reduce 
 this distance to one inch instead of two, and if he uses an ophthalmo- 
 scope, the mirror of which lies in the same plane with the handle, or, 
 better still, one with the tilting mirror, he can, with a little skill, ap- 
 proach so near the eye as to place the glass he looks through nearly 
 in the position which the patient would in wearing his glasses. In 
 this case the glass used would represent the amount of ametropia 
 without further addition of the distance. 
 
 If the observer is unable to relax his accommodation when using 
 the ophthalmoscope, he is, as has already been explained, no longer 
 emmetropic but virtually myopic to the amount of accommodation 
 that he involuntarily calls forth. He has then to simply reduce his 
 own eye to the condition of an emmetropic one by adding the suit- 
 able glass and then proceed as above. 
 
 PROPOSITION III. The observer being emmetropic, to estimate the 
 degree of hypermetropia in a given case. As the observed eye is hy- 
 permetropic, rays emerging from it will have a direction as . if they 
 came from a point situated behind the eye observed, equal to the 
 degree of the hypermetropia. Thus the rays coming from an eye hy-
 
 126 
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 permetropic will emerge from it as if they came from a point eight 
 inches behind the nodal point. For example, let A (Fig. 53) be hy- 
 permetropic , then the rays, coming from the point a on the retina, 
 will, after they leave the eye, diverge as if they came from a' eight 
 inches behind the eye. As the observer's eye is emrnetropic and at 
 
 FIG. 53. 
 
 rest, we must render these rays parallel before they can come to a 
 focus on his retina. If we could place a convex glass at the nodal 
 point of A, it would require just to make the rays parallel, inas- 
 much as a', which may be considered as the principal focus, is just 
 eight inches distant, and this glass then would just equal the amount 
 of H. If, however, we place the glass (g) behind the ophthalmoscope 
 two inches in front of the observed eye A, then, as a! is ten inches 
 from the glass, it will only require -^ to render the rays parallel. If 
 the glass (^') is at four inches from the eye, then a' will be twelve 
 inches from the glass, and it will only require -fa. Consequently, the 
 glass used is as much weaker than the hypermetropia is as it is distant 
 from the nodal point ; we must therefore make it so much stronger 
 before it can represent the true degree of II in the observed eye. In 
 the above case, H== T V-2 = i> -ff= -iV-4 i- 
 
 The hypermetropia in the observed eye is, therefore^ for an emme- 
 tropic observer always equal to the glass used, minus the distance of 
 the glass from the nodal point of the examined eye. 
 
 As the accommodation is equivalent to a convex glass of different 
 focal lengths, it is evident that the observer may substitute his own 
 accommodation for the glass, provided he knows just how much he 
 is using, and how far his nodal point is from that of the examined 
 eye. For example, if the observer sees an eye distinctly, while he is 
 conscious that he is accommodating for ten inches, he knows that the 
 H in the observed eye must be equal to T ^- minus the distance be- 
 tween the nodal points of his own and the observed eye. If this is 
 two inches, then H = -fa _ 2 = . 
 
 The ability to judge of refraction by the degree of tension required 
 of the accommodation can only, of course, be brought into play in 
 one condition that is, where the observed eye is hypermetropic, and
 
 REFRACTION ACCORDING TO THE STANDARD OF THE INCH. 127 
 
 even here it is rather a tour de force than an essential advantage. 
 We can all of us, by a little practice, get an approximate idea as to 
 the amount of hypermetropia in a given case by the amount of ten- 
 sion required of our accommodation in getting a clear view of the 
 fundus, but very few, even with any amount of practice, ever approxi- 
 mate that precision which can be obtained with infinitely less trouble 
 by means of glasses. 
 
 As in the above cases the rays of light passing through the hole 
 of the mirror are parallel, and will continue so if uninterrupted to 
 infinity, it makes no difference in the result whether the observer's 
 eye is close against the instrument or a little removed from it. The 
 only calculation necessary is the distance between the glass and nodal 
 point of the examined eye. 
 
 The above directions, which are sufficient for an emmetropic ob- 
 server whose eye is in a state of rest to determine any condition of 
 refraction, may be summed up in this general rule : 
 
 The ametropia in a given case is equal to the glass used plus the 
 distance between it and the nodal point if the eye examined be myopic, 
 minus the distance if it be hypermetropic. 
 
 If, however, the observer is so unfortunate as to be ametropic, 
 then the simplest way for him is to reduce his eye to a condition of 
 emmetropia that is to say, to that condition of refraction that paral- 
 lel rays unite on his retina, considering that portion of the accommo- 
 dation which can not be relaxed as part and parcel of the refraction. 
 
 If the ametropic observer does this, then of course the preceding 
 directions will be all that he will have to bear in mind. Should he 
 not wish, however, to pursue this course, he will find a little later the 
 methods which he must follow. 
 
 The following tables show the amount of decrease and increase in 
 the length of the optical axis in various degrees of hypermetropia and 
 myopia, according to the old system : 
 
 H 
 
 
 TABLE III. 
 
 
 equals a shortening of 
 
 3.97 mm. H ^ equals a shortening of 
 
 0.85 mm. 
 
 i 
 
 a 
 
 2.9 " " TV 
 
 M 
 
 0.74 " 
 
 x 
 
 (4 
 
 2.3 
 
 
 ' iV 
 
 U 
 
 0.65 
 
 
 i 
 
 a 
 
 1.89 
 
 
 ' TV 
 
 U 
 
 0.58 
 
 
 1 
 
 u 
 
 1.6 
 
 
 ' inr 
 
 u 
 
 0.52 
 
 
 | 
 
 M 
 
 1.4 
 
 
 sV 
 
 u 
 
 0.45 
 
 
 * 
 
 u 
 
 1.25 
 
 
 nV 
 
 tt 
 
 0.35 
 
 
 i 
 
 u 
 
 1.12 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 0.26 
 
 
 -iV 
 
 u 
 
 1. 
 
 
 Iv 
 
 (i 
 
 0.21 
 
 
 A 
 
 U 
 
 0.92 
 
 
 -Iff 
 
 u 
 
 0.18 

 
 128 
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 TABLE IY. 
 
 increase of 8.6 mm. M -fa equals an increase of 0.97 ran 
 
 ' 
 
 4.81 
 
 
 TT 
 
 
 0.82 
 
 i 
 
 3.34 
 
 
 TV 
 
 
 0.71 
 
 
 
 2.56 
 
 
 TV 
 
 
 0.63 
 
 * 
 
 2.07 
 
 
 -ZT5 
 
 
 0.56 
 
 4 
 
 1.97 
 
 
 Jl 
 
 
 0.46 
 
 1 
 
 1.5 
 
 
 sV 
 
 
 0.37 
 
 
 
 1.31 
 
 
 f u 
 
 
 0.27 
 
 
 
 1.17 
 
 
 50 
 
 
 0.22 
 
 
 
 1.06 
 
 
 1 It 
 
 0.20 
 
 M \ equals an 
 
 " i 
 " i 
 
 7 
 
 TV 
 
 It should be remembered that these tables are calculated for the 
 actual degree of ametropia present, and not for the glass used in cor- 
 recting it. The observer must consequently make the proper addition 
 or subtraction according as the glass is positive or negative, and ac- 
 cording to the distance at which it is placed from the nodal point. 
 This varies with different observers from about an inch to two or 
 even three inches from the nodal point. If, for example, the ob- 
 server sees the bottom of a hypermetropic eye with -J- , and the 
 distance of his eye from the nodal point is two inches, then the real 
 hypermetropia is not |-, but _ 3 = J-, and it is for the latter degree 
 that the observer must consult the table for the true amount of 
 shortening of the axis. 
 
 So, too, with the negative glass, except that the distance between 
 the glass and the nodal point must be added. If the observer uses 
 -|- two inches distant, then the real M is -J- + 2 = -fa. As the dis- 
 tance from the anterior surface of the cornea to the nodal point is 
 only a little over a quarter of an inch, the observer may, for all 
 practical purposes, make his calculations as between his own and the 
 observed eye. 
 
 The formula used in the construction of the table given in the 
 text is that used by Helmholtz.* 
 
 This is h 4 =f\ F%. In this equation ^ signifies the distance of 
 the object from the first focal point when the object lies in front of 
 it ; Z 2 is the distance of the image of the object behind the second 
 focal point. F^ F 2 are the two principal focal lengths. 
 
 Tf Tf 
 
 From Z t Z 2 = f\ F z we get directly ^ , As the value of l lt 
 
 f'l 
 
 the distance of the object, is given, and JF\ and F z are already estab- 
 lished values, we can at once calculate that of 1 2 . 
 
 In case, however, the object lies behind the first focal point, l { will 
 
 * " Handbuch der physiolog. Optik," p. 64.
 
 REFRACTION ACCORDING TO THE STANDARD OF THE INCH. 129 
 
 lie in front of the second point, and then both ^ and 1 2 have a nega- 
 tive significance. 
 
 The practical application of the formula is as follows: Suppose 
 M% exists, what is the increased length of the antero-posterior axis ? 
 
 The far point of such an eye, calculated from the first nodal point, 
 is two inches or 54.2 mm. But as Z l5 the distance of the object, is not 
 calculated from the first nodal point but from the anterior focal point, 
 which is 19.875 mm. in front of it, l t therefore equals 54.2 19.875 
 = 34.3 mm. "We have then the following values : l v = 34.3 mm. ; 
 f\ = 14.858 ; F 2 = 19.875. Substituting these values in the equation 
 
 I, = ^ we get 
 h 
 
 , 14.858 X 19.875 295.3 
 l * = -3473- = 34. : 
 
 The increase of the antero-posterior axis in J/ equals 8.6 mm., 
 as seen by the table. 
 
 Supposing on the other hand II = ^ is present. Z x is negative and 
 lies two inches behind the second nodal point, which, in its turn, is 
 20.3 mm. behind the first focal point ; ^ therefore equals 54.2 -4- 
 20.3 = 74.5 mm. F^ F% as before equals 295.3 mm. Therefore 
 
 295 3 
 Z 2 = ~7fTfC = ~ 3-97 mm. Thus a hypermetropia of ^ corresponds 
 
 to a decrease of the antero-posterior axis of 3.97 mm. 
 
 DIRECTIONS TO BE OBSERVED IN CASE THE OBSERVER IS AMETEOPIC. 
 
 The observer being myopic. 
 
 PROPOSITION I. For a myope to examine an emmetropic eye. It 
 is very evident that, as the rays which leave an emmetropic eye 
 are parallel, the myopic observer, provided he can relax his accom- 
 modation, will simply have to use the glass behind the mirror which 
 neutralizes his myopia that is to say, which brings parallel rays to a 
 focus on his retina. If a concave ^ does this, then -- will be the glass 
 employed, and whenever he sees an eye distinctly with this glass, he 
 knows that the rays which leave it must be parallel, and consequently 
 it must be emmetropic. 
 
 But it may happen that the myopic observer, like the emmetropic, 
 can not relax his accommodation while using the ophthalmoscope. 
 This will make him just so much more myopic, and instead of using, 
 say, , which fully neutralizes his myopia, he will with the ophthal- 
 moscope have to use, in order to bring parallel rays to a focus on his 
 retina, % or . Under these conditions his eye is equivalent to a
 
 130 
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 myope's of or , whose accommodation is entirely relaxed. The 
 observer will then know that when the eye under examination is seen 
 clearly with this glass it must be emmetropic. 
 
 As the rays leaving the emmetropic eye will always strike upon 
 the glass used as parallel, it is evident that the distance between the 
 two eyes need not be here taken into account, and that, consequently, 
 the observer may be one or more inches from the observed eye, as he 
 pleases. 
 
 PROPOSITION II. For a myope to determine the degree of myopia 
 in the observed eye. If the observer does not wish to wear a correct- 
 ing-glass, which is often inconvenient and clumsy, the simplest way 
 for him is to proceed with the examination just as an emmetrope 
 would, and find by trial with what glass he sees the fundus most dis- 
 tinctly, his accommodation being, of course, relaxed, and then to take 
 into account the amount of his error in refraction ; saying, for exam- 
 ple, a myope of finds that he sees the fundus of the examined eye 
 with concave ^, what is the amount of M present ? 
 
 The observer knows that a part of this glass \ is employed in 
 neutralizing his own myopia, consequently, to get the true glass through 
 which the fundus would be seen independent of his error of refrac- 
 tion, he must subtract this ^ from % used, ^ -^ = ^. Now, assum- 
 ing the distance to be two inches, we have ^ + 2 = J-. The amount of 
 myopia in the examined eye is, therefore, equal to , and a myope 
 of % will have to use at two inches in order to see the fundus 
 clearly. 
 
 From this it will be seen that the myope of even a medium degree 
 will have to use very strong glasses to see the fundus of an eye which 
 is only moderately myopic. 
 
 PROPOSITION III. For a myopic eye to determine the degree of 
 hypermetropia in a given case. Let A represent a hypermetropic eye 
 
 FIG. 54. 
 
 of $ ; rays coining from the fundus of such an eye will diverge as if 
 they came from a point eight inches behind the nodal point at a'. If
 
 REFRACTION ACCORDING TO THE STANDARD OF THE INCH. 131 
 
 now a myope of ^ (B) place his eye two inches in front of the ob- 
 served eye, then the rays which enter his eye will diverge as if they 
 came from a point ten inches in front of his nodal point, that is to say, 
 his far point, and, as his eye is just adapted for such rays, they will 
 come to a focus on his retina, and he will get a clear view of the 
 f undus without the use of any glass (Fig. 54). 
 
 If the observer's eye is at four inches from the observed eye, then 
 the rays which enter his eye will diverge as if they came from a point 
 twelve inches in front of his nodal point, and the observer will only have 
 to be myopic ^ to bring such rays to a focus. The hypennetropia in 
 the observed eye is then always greater than the observer's myopia by 
 as much as the observer's eye is distant from the observed. In the 
 above case H -^ _ 2 = -|-. II = ^ _ 4 = fa. 
 
 If the hypermetropia in the observed eye is greater than the ob- 
 server's myopia (the distance between the two eyes being taken into 
 consideration), it is evident that the rays will emerge so divergent that 
 they will no longer meet upon the observer's retina, but behind it. 
 In order to bring such rays to a focus, he must make himself so 
 much more myopic. This he does by a convex glass which he finds 
 by trial just as an emmetrope would. For example, a myope of T 1 
 finds that he needs a convex -^ to see the f undus distinctly. If he 
 adds this glass he is no longer myopic ^ but T^ + iV = i- Now 
 we have just found that the H equaled the M minus the distance, 
 and as the M ' fa we get H = % _ 2 = ^. 
 
 The observer in this case may use his A instead of a lens, provid- 
 ing he can estimate the amount. 
 
 If, however, the hypermetropia in the observed eye is less than the 
 myopia of the observer (the distance between the eyes being taken 
 into account), it is evident that the rays emerging from the eye will 
 be so little divergent that the stronger myopia of the observer will 
 cause them to meet in front of his retina. The observer must make 
 himself less myopic in order to bring such rays to a focus on his 
 retina; this he does by means of a concave glass. For example, a 
 myope of fa can only see the fundus in a given case with -fe, what 
 is the H of the observed eye ? By placing the concave glass before 
 his eye, he has reduced his myopia so that he has no longer M = -J-, 
 but fa T *g- = fa. As we have previously found that H M minus 
 the distance, we have H = fa _ 2 = %. 
 
 The observer being hypermetropic. 
 
 PROPOSITION IY. For a hypermetropic observer to see an em~ 
 metropic eye. Inasmuch as the rays leaving an emmetropic eye are
 
 132 
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 parallel, the observer, in order to bring such rays to a focus on his 
 retina, will simply have to neutralize his manifest hypermetropia. If 
 he is H -fa, then he will simply have to place a convex fa behind the 
 mirror. 
 
 He may find, however, that with the ophthalmoscope he does not 
 relax his accommodation. His hypermetropia, consequently, will be re- 
 duced by just the amount of accommodation which he is using. And 
 he may find that instead of using say a convex of -fa, which fully 
 neutralizes his manifest II, he will, with the ophthalmoscope, require 
 only -^ to bring parallel rays to a focus. Under these conditions his 
 eye is in fact equal to a hypermetrope's of ^-, who can entirely relax 
 his accommodation, and the observer will then know that an eye seen 
 distinctly through this glass must be emmetropic. It may happen in 
 this way that a person, who is slightly hypermetropic for the distance, 
 becomes for the ophthalmoscope emmetropic, and so has to use no 
 glass. For example, a hypermetrope of -fa may find, on account of 
 his inability to relax his accommodation, that in order to see an em- 
 metropic eye he needs a concave g^. The amount of accommodation 
 which he uses would then only be -fa, and many inexperienced ob- 
 servers use fa. In this case the observer is virtually myopic, and 
 must proceed as such. 
 
 The observer may of course use his accommodation in all cases 
 instead of a convex glass, that is to say, the lens in his own eye instead 
 of one behind the mirror. He would, however, in this case have to 
 know just what amount of tension of his ciliary muscle corresponds 
 to a given glass. 
 
 PKOPOSITION V. For a hypermetropic observer to determine the 
 amount of myopia in the observed eye. Let A be myopic \ (Fig. 55) ; 
 
 rays of light coming from a will meet eight inches in front of A's 
 nodal point at a'. If B, who is hypermetropic -J-, places his eye two 
 inches from A, then rays from A would meet, if uninterrupted, at a 
 point just six inches behind I?s nodal point. Now, as B's eye being 
 hypermetropic ^ is adapted for such rays, they will be brought to a 
 focus on the retina. Consequently A's myopia must be equal to
 
 REFRACTION ACCORDING TO THE STANDARD OF THE INCH. 133 
 
 hypermetropia plus the distance, J/=^ +2 =|-. From this it follows 
 that a hypermetrope of a certain degree can see the fundus of a 
 myope of a certain degree without any glass. 
 
 If, however, the myopia of the observed eye is greater than the 
 observer's hypermetropia, it is evident that the rays emerging from 
 the eye examined will be so convergent that they will meet in front 
 of the observer's retina ; to bring them to a focus he must make him- 
 self more hypermetropic. This he does by means of a concave glass, 
 which he finds just as an emmetrope does by trial. For example, a 
 hypermetrope of -fa finds that he, with his accommodation relaxed, 
 sees the fundus distinctly in a given case with concave -^, what is the 
 myopia in the observed eye ? 
 
 By putting the concave -^ before his eye, the observer has made 
 himself just so much more hypermetropic. He is consequently no 
 longer hypermetropic one eighteenth, but -fa -f- ^ = ^. Now, as the 
 myopia in the observed eye is equal to the observer's hypermetropia, 
 plus the distance, we get M = ^ + 2 = |-. 
 
 If, however, the myopia in the observed eye is less than the ob- 
 server's hypermetropia (the distance between the two eyes also taken 
 into consideration), rays emerging from the observed eye will not be 
 convergent enough to meet on the retina, but behind it. To make 
 such rays meet on his retina he must make himself less hyperme- 
 tropic. This he does by a convex glass which he finds by trial. For 
 example, a hypermetrope of ^ sees in a given case with a convex -fa, 
 what is the degree of myopia present in the examined eye? By 
 adding the convex y 1 ^ to his eye, the observer has reduced his hyper- 
 metropia, making himself no longer hypermetropic ^, but -^ fa = fa. 
 Now, as the myopia equals the hypermetropia plus the distance, we 
 get M = fa + 2 = jjJjj-. Thus we see that a hypermetrope may, accord- 
 ing to circumstances, in estimating myopia, use no glass at all, or a 
 convex, or a concave one. 
 
 PROPOSITION VI. For a hypermetropic observer to estimate the 
 amount of hypermetropia in the examined eye. The best way in this 
 case is for the observer to find by trial with what glass he sees the 
 fundus most distinctly, and then to take his own error of refraction 
 into consideration. For example, a hypermetrope of fa sees the ex- 
 amined eye with convex -^, what is the hypermetropia present ? The 
 observer knows that a part of this, equal to one eighteenth, is em- 
 ployed in neutralizing his hypermetropia ; consequently, to get at the 
 true glass which would be used independently of his error in refrac- 
 tion, he must subtract this fa. | fa = fa. As the observer has thus
 
 134: TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 neutralized his hypermetropia, lie is virtually emmetropic, and knows 
 that the H present must be equal to the glass used minus the distance. 
 
 & = T5-2= ITT- 
 
 THE DETERMINATION OF THE REFRACTION OB' AN EYE BY THE MIRKOR 
 ALONE, AND BY MEANS OF THE INVERTED IMAGE. 
 
 It has been already shown how, with a myopic eye, we get with the 
 mirror alone an inverted aerial image of a small portion of the fun- 
 dus, an image which is situated in front of the eye, and at the distance 
 of its far point. 
 
 With a hypermetropic eye, on the contrary, we get a virtual and 
 erect image behind the eye, and at a distance equal to the degree of 
 the hypermetropia. 
 
 If, then, we could only tell in a given case whether the image 
 which we see is inverted or upright, then we should know at once 
 whether the eye examined was myopic or hypermetropic. There are 
 various ways of ascertaining this : 
 
 (1.) Both the image and the field of view are larger (except in 
 very extreme degrees) in myopia than in hypermetropia. 
 
 (2.) In myopia the image moves in a sense contrary to that of the 
 observer's head, and the more so the farther it is in front of the ob- 
 served eye. In hypermetropia it moves with the head of the observer, 
 and the excursion is less. 
 
 (3.) The observer, as a rule, can tell whether he is accommodating 
 for an image which lies in front of the eye examined, or behind it, 
 the difference in the position of the images even in high degrees of 
 the two kinds of ametropia being considerable. 
 
 Suppose, in this connection, the observer is emmetropic, and that 
 his near point lies in six inches. He can then accommodate for an 
 object at that distance, but no nearer. In a given case in putting up 
 the mirror he gets an image which, on his gradually approaching his 
 head and exerting in a corresponding degree an increased tension on 
 his accommodation, remains distinct up to a certain point, when sud- 
 denly it begins to grow a little indistinct. Withdrawing his head a 
 trifle till the image is clearly defined again, the observer know r s that 
 the image must lie six inches in front of his own eye. And, if the 
 distance between this and the observed eye is greater than six inches, 
 the image must then lie in front of the eye examined, which is con- 
 sequently myopic. 
 
 But, on the other hand, supposing the image does not grow indis- 
 tinct at all till the observer gets close up to the observed eye say two 
 inches from it he then knows that the image can not lie in front of
 
 REFRACTION ACCORDING TO THE STANDARD OF THE INCH. 135 
 
 the observed eye, which is only two inches distant, for if it did it 
 would be so blurred as not to be recognizable, being so far within the 
 limits of his accommodation. The image must lie behind the eye, 
 which must be consequently hypermetropic. 
 
 The nature of the refraction having been ascertained in this way, 
 it remains to determine its degree. The application of the mirror in 
 this manner and for this purpose is at the best but limited, as it is 
 only in cases of high degrees of ametropia that it is of any service at 
 all, and only in cases of great myopia where its advantages outweigh 
 its difficulties and give it a practical importance. Theoretically it 
 would, of course, be just as applicable to // as M, the only difficulty 
 being the telling just how far behind the observed eye the virtual 
 image of a small segment of the f undus really is. The difficulty is, 
 however, so great, either by means of the accommodation or with glasses, 
 that it is hardly worth while attempting it, especially when with the 
 upright image the fundus of a hypermetropic eye is so readily and 
 distinctly seen an advantage which does not obtain from the very 
 construction of the eye in myopia of high degrees, the illumination 
 of which, for many reasons, is difficult and insufficient. It is thereof ore 
 to the illustration of this latter condition alone that our examples will 
 be applied. 
 
 We will begin, for the sake of simplicity, by supposing that the 
 observer is himself myopic, for example, -. His far point would then 
 lie at eight inches, and any object at a greater distance than this would 
 appear indistinct. Such an observer in a given case gets an image 
 with the mirror alone, and at the ordinary distance say sixteen inches 
 an image which, though recognizable as to its general outlines, is 
 not sharply defined. Approaching the eye till the definition becomes 
 perfect, and stopping the moment it does so, the observer knows that 
 the image must lie at his far point, or eight inches in front of him. 
 The observed eye is still, however, twelve inches from him ; conse- 
 quently the image must lie four inches in front of it, and the myopia 
 be equal to ^. Suppose, however, the distance between the two eyes 
 had been ten instead of twelve inches, then the distance of the image 
 in front of the observed eye would have been 10 8 = 2 inches, and 
 the myopia would have been equal to . Again, suppose the observer 
 had been myopic ^, and the distance between the eyes was ten inches, 
 then the place of image would have been 10 6 = 4, and M = . 
 The observer has then only to know his own myopia and the distance 
 between the two eyes, and to subtract the former from the latter, to 
 know the amount of M in the observed eye. 
 
 If, however, the observer is not myopic naturally, he can make
 
 136 TEXT-BOOK OF OPIITIIALMOSCOPY. 
 
 himself so very readily by putting a convex glass behind the mirror. 
 If he be emmetropic and can fully relax his accommodation, and uses 
 -|--g-, his far-point will then lie at eight inches, as in the former case, 
 and he now proceeds in precisely the same way as if he were naturally 
 myopic, and in the manner just related. If he can not fully relax his 
 accommodation, then allowance must be made for this. If, for exam- 
 ple, he involuntarily uses what is equal to -\- -fa, then he is already 
 myopic -fa, and will have to add the difference between that and -|-. 
 | fa = T ^-, and with this glass he will be in precisely the same con- 
 dition as a myope of % or an emmetrope with -|- -|-, who can relax his 
 accommodation entirely. If, on the other hand, the observer is hyper- 
 metropic, he must first neutralize this. If, for example, he has 11= 
 -fa, he will, in order to make himself equal to a myope of , have to 
 use I -f- fa = ^, and so on. 
 
 In all these cases requiring the addition of a convex lens the ob- 
 server might have used his accommodation instead of the glass, pro- 
 vided he had such a control over it as to be able to estimate precisely 
 what amount he was using. 
 
 It may even happen that the observer's myopia is so great that he 
 will be forced to use a concave glass in order to bring his far-point to 
 six or eight inches. It is better to do this when the M is greater than 
 , as the difficulty increases when the observer has to approach closer 
 than this to the image. If he has J^f= %, then he will need to carry 
 his far-point out to eight inches, J -|- = . 
 
 DETERMINATION OF ASTIGMATISM WITH THE MIRROR ALONE. 
 
 Many years ago, Mr. Bowman * pointed out the fact that he had 
 been led to the detection of regular astigmatism and the directions of 
 the chief meridians by the use of the mirror of the ophthalmoscope in 
 the way which he had previously suggested for conical cornea. The 
 mirror is to be held at about two feet from the eye, and its inclination 
 rapidly varied so as to throw the light on the eye at small angles to 
 the perpendicular, and from opposite sides, in successive meridians. 
 The area of the pupil then exhibits a somewhat linear shadow in some 
 meridians rather than in others. Little or no effect occurs, however, 
 from moderate or even from comparatively well-marked deviations 
 from the normal curvature. 
 
 Mr. Couper, in 1872,f dilated somewhat upon this method, and 
 proposed the use of a special mirror of thirty inches focal length, with 
 which the eye is illuminated from a distance of some three or four 
 
 * See " Refraction and Accommodation," Donders, p. 490, 1864. 
 t "Fourth International Congress Report," London, 1872, p. 109.
 
 ASTIGMATISM WITH THE MIRROR ALONE. 137 
 
 feet. In this way Mr. Couper asserts that very low degrees of astig- 
 matism can be detected, and the directions of the principal meridians 
 ascertained. There are many objections, theoretical as well as practi- 
 cal, to this method in the author's mind, and in his hands it has not 
 proved either " easy or expeditious." Mr. Couper himself admits 
 that it is not very well adapted to several of the commonly occurring 
 forms of astigmatism, and it would hardly seem advisable to take the 
 trouble of procuring a special and uncommon form of mirror for so 
 limited a sphere of action, especially when not only the presence and 
 kind, but even the degree of. every form of astigmatism can be accu- 
 rately and easily measured with the ordinary mirror by the use of the 
 upright image in the manner already explained in the foregoing 
 pages. 
 
 Since Mr. Bowman's article, others have taken the matter up and 
 produced many and voluminous essays upon the subject of deter- 
 mination of refraction with the mirror alone under the titles of 
 " Keratoscopy," " Pupiloscopy," and " Retinoscopy." It still re- 
 mains, however, in my opinion, the most difficult and least satisfactory 
 of any of the methods of determining the refraction of an eye, and 
 contributes nothing which can not be more easily and more expedi- 
 tiously performed by the upright image. 
 
 I would refer the curious, however, and those fond of optical 
 problems for their own sake, to papers on the subject by Cuignet, 
 u Keratoscopie," "Recueil d'Ophth.," 1873, p. 14; ibid., 1874, p. 
 316 ; ibid., 1877, p. 59 ; ibid., June, 1880. Mengin, " Eecueil 
 d'Ophth.," April, 1878. Litton Forbes, "On Keratoscopy," "Royal 
 Ophth. Hosp. Reports," vol. x., part i., p. 62, 1880. Morton, " Re- 
 fraction of the Eye," London, 1881. Charnley, "Royal London 
 Ophth. Hosp. Reports," vol. x., part iii., p. 344, 1882. Landolt, 
 " Traite Complet d'Ophthalmologie," vol. iii., part i., p. 265, 1883 ; 
 and others. 
 
 DETERMINATION OF THE REFRACTION BY MEANS OF THE INVERTED IMAGE. 
 
 Since the nearer an image is formed behind a lens the smaller it 
 will be, it follows that the inverted image with a myopic eye, from 
 which the rays already emerge as convergent, must be smaller than 
 with an emmetropic eye when the same lens is used with each, and is 
 held at or within its focal length from the eye. On the other hand, 
 the image will be larger with a hypermetropic than with a normal eye 
 under the same conditions. 
 
 In this way we can often tell by the size of the image alone 
 whether an error in refraction is present, and what its character is ;
 
 138 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 but only in a general way, and only when the defect is of a marked 
 degree. 
 
 We are able, moreover, to supplement the evidence gained in this 
 manner by slight to-and-fro movements of the lens. 
 
 "With a myopic eye, the size of the image, for example, of the disk, 
 increases as we draw the lens away from the observed eye. With 
 hypermetropia, on the contrary, it decreases as the lens recedes. In 
 emmetropia the image remains the same for all distances of the lens.* 
 
 Various appliances have from time to time been brought out for 
 the purpose of ascertaining the exact position and size of the inverted 
 image formed through the objective glass in different degrees of ame- 
 tropia, with the aim of determining thereby its exact degree. Thus, 
 Hasner produced an ophthalmoscope with sliding tubes and a gradu- 
 ated scale on the principle of some of the optometers ; Coccius, an 
 ocular composed of two lenses, also in a sliding tube ; Colsmann, a 
 plano-convex lens, with a scale engraved transversely on the plane 
 surface, by which the size of the image could be numerically meas- 
 ured and some idea of the degree of refraction estimated. But all 
 these, together with other devices, even the most recent, would seem 
 to be either useless or inexpedient. 
 
 The observer can, however, if he thinks it of sufficient importance, 
 gain some insight not only into the kind of ametropia present, but 
 also, approximately at least, as to its degree. 
 
 To do this he has only to reduce all eyes to a greater or less degree 
 of myopia by putting before them a convex lens of a constant strength, 
 and then proceed to estimate the place of the image precisely as if the 
 observed eye were really myopic. Let -|- -- be either held close before 
 the eye, or, better still, placed in the spectacle-frame of the test-case. 
 Rays leaving an emmetropic eye are parallel, and consequently such 
 rays, after passing through the lens, will come to a focus at six inches 
 in front of the glass where the image would lie. 
 
 Rays from a myopic eye would strike the glass as already conver- 
 gent, and the image would then be inside of the focal distance, and to 
 a degree corresponding to the amount of the M. On the other hand, 
 the image would lie with the hypermetropic eye farther from the glass 
 than its principal focus, and the farther the greater the degree of II. 
 
 In a given case the observer sees the image distinctly, while his A 
 is perfectly relaxed through -j- \. The image must then be six inches 
 in front of him. The distance between his and the observed eye or 
 rather between his eye and the glass is twelve inches ; the image of 
 the observed eye must be then six inches in front of the glass, or at its 
 
 * Giraud Teuton, " Annales cTOculistique," September, 1869, p. 95.
 
 REFRACTION BY MEANS OF THE INVERTED IMAGE. 139 
 
 principal focus. To produce an image at this place the rays must leave 
 the observed eye as parallel ; consequently, the observed eye must be 
 emmetropic. In a second case the observer, through -f- ^-, sees the 
 image while he is only nine inches from the glass ; consequently, the 
 image must be only three inches in front of the observed eye, consider- 
 ably within its principal focus. To produce an image in this place, 
 the rays leaving the eye must have been convergent ; consequently, 
 the observed eye is myopic, and the M = ^ $ = ^. 
 
 Again, the observer sees the image clearly when the distance be- 
 tween his eye and the glass is sixteen inches. The image must be 
 therefore ten inches in front of the observed eye, and beyond the 
 principal focus. The rays coming from the observed eye must have 
 been divergent, and the eye hypermetropic. If = $ T V = -^. 
 
 The distance between the glass and the nodal point has been 
 neglected, as the method, at the best, has no sufficient claim to ex- 
 actness. Its range of usefulness is indeed very limited ; still, it may 
 often be of advantage to those who use the inverted image, and that 
 only. 
 
 THE DETERMINATION OF ASTIGMATISM BY MEANS OF THE INVESTED 
 
 IMAGE. 
 
 From what has already been said in connection with astigmatism, 
 as observed by the upright image, it will be remembered that, when 
 this irregularity of refraction is present, we see in the direct method 
 the disk elongated in the meridian of greatest curvature, because, the 
 lenticular system being stronger in that direction, the magnifying 
 power is greater. With the inverted image we see the disk elongated 
 in. the opposite direction, that is, in the direction of the weakest 
 meridian, because, the image being formed behind the lens, it is less 
 reduced in that meridian than the others. 
 
 Thus, as Knapp and Schweigger showed by the alternate use of 
 the upright and inverted image, we can not only detect the presence 
 of astigmatism, but also the direction of its principal meridians. 
 This, however, only holds good, as will be explained a little later, 
 when the glass is held at a distance less than its focal length from the 
 eye observed. 
 
 It was in accordance with this restriction that Javal * pointed out 
 the fact that it was not necessary to have recourse to the alternate use 
 of both methods, but that the same interchange in the form of the disk 
 could be effected with the inverted image alone, with the great advan- 
 tage of keeping a continuous picture of the disk before the eye of the 
 
 * "Etudes Ophth.," Wecker; tome ii., fasc. 2, p. 836, 1867.
 
 140 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 observer a picture which gradually changed its form, through all the 
 phases of an oval with its longest diameter in one direction, to a circle, 
 and then to an oval again, with its longest diameter in the opposite 
 direction. The change is brought about by simply varying the dis- 
 tance of the object-glass from the observed eye within the limits set 
 by the image of the disk becoming smaller than the pupillary space, 
 either from too close an advancement toward or too great a separation 
 of the lens from the eye. 
 
 Giraud Teulon * has amplified this idea of Javal's in a most ex- 
 tended and elaborate mathematical discussion, with a clearness of style 
 and a wealth of formula as varied as it is vast. To this essay, which 
 is beyond the scope and character of the present work, the mathe- 
 matical reader is referred for particulars. To such as are not, the 
 following resume, condensed from the original so far as its ophthal- 
 moscopic bearing is concerned, will be of service as well as interest : 
 
 (1.) In the emmetropic eye, when the accommodation is relaxed, 
 the image of the optic disk remains identically the same in character, 
 and of the same size for every distance of the lens. 
 
 (2.) In an eye which is regularly ametropic the image decreases 
 (77) or increases (J/) with the distance of the lens. It always pre- 
 serves, however, its original form, remaining circular if the disk is 
 circular, and oval if it is oval. 
 
 (3.) In an astigmatic eye the recession of the lens causes a varia- 
 tion not only in the dimensions but also in the form of the image 
 itself, i. e., of the disk. If the image be oval, with its long axis in a 
 certain direction, when the lens is a short distance from the eye, it 
 becomes exactly circular when this distance equals the focal length 
 of the lens. At a greater distance, however, the direction of the 
 long axis of the oval changes, becoming perpendicular to its former 
 direction. 
 
 Thus nothing is easier than to determine whether an eye is or is 
 not astigmatic. Any positive lens which is suitable to produce an 
 inverted image of all the diameters of the optic disk will solve the 
 problem and indicate at the same time the direction of the principal 
 meridians, and will, moreover, with a little care on the part of the 
 observer, point out the nature of the defect ; thus : 
 
 When the lens is close to the eye, the long diameter of the oval 
 belongs to the meridian of the least refraction. From this position of 
 the lens to one which is equal to its focal length from the eye,f when 
 the image is exactly circular, the different diameters of the image have 
 
 * " Ann. d'Oculistiqnes," Sept. et Oct., p. 95, 1869. 
 
 t Plus the distance of the anterior focus, about one half inch.
 
 ASTIGMATISM BY MEANS OF THE INVERTED IMAGE. 
 
 either increased or decreased. Those which have increased indicate 
 myopic, those which have decreased hypermetropic meridians. 
 
 If the two principal meridians have decreased or increased at 
 once, that which has done so most rapidly belongs to the most ame- 
 tropic meridian. This shows compound astigmatism general M or 
 H, with increased $f or If in one meridian. 
 
 Beyond the distance at which the image is exactly circular the con- 
 ditions are reversed and become the same as in the upright image 
 that is, the long diameter of the oval is in the meridian of the great- 
 est curvature. 
 
 The principle contained in the above may perhaps be more tersely 
 expressed as follows : 
 
 If the long diameter of the oval contracts when the lens is moved 
 from the eye so as to become equal to the short, and thus make a cir- 
 cle, then the astigmatism is due to //. If, on the contrary, the short 
 diameter expands so as to become equal, at the focal distance of the 
 lens, to the long, and thus make a circle, then it is due to myopia. 
 
 If all the diameters contract but one contracts more than the rest 
 then general If is present with II increased in one meridian. If 
 all increase but one more than the rest then M is present with M 
 increased in one principal meridian. The astigmatism is compound. 
 
 If one diameter expands and one contracts, then both J/" and H are 
 present, and the astigmatism is mixed. 
 
 We see from this that astigmatism may be detected in two stages 
 in the passage of the lens : first, when it is moved from a point close 
 to the eye to a distance equal to its focal length ; secondly, from this 
 point outward to a distance limited to the contracting field of view 
 by which the image of the disk is rapidly shut out by that of the iris. 
 
 It is in this last stage from the focal distance outward that the 
 effect is most pronounced, as a rule. It is, however, better to make 
 the lens move through the entire course. Great care must be taken 
 not to rotate the lens at all, but to maintain it as exactly as possible in 
 a plane perpendicular to its line of motion. 
 
 So sensitive is this test that Javal declares that 1 D or less can be 
 detected by it. Thus this method should never be omitted in making 
 the preliminary examination with the inverted image, for, by a few 
 passes back and forth with the lens, we can determine not only the 
 existence of ametropia, but also its nature, and moreover gain an ap- 
 proximate idea as to its degree. 
 
 To determine this latter, however, with any exactness, it is far 
 better as well as simpler to go at once to the upright image, which, 
 in the comprehensiveness and delicacy of the test mentioned in the
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 light-streak of the vessels, amply fulfils all requirements either theo- 
 retical or practical. By this means the determination of astigmatism 
 of any form or degree becomes almost as simple as that of regular 
 refraction. 
 
 THE AMOUNT OF ENLARGEMENT PRODUCED BY THE UPRIGHT IMAGE. 
 
 Looking through the lenticular system of the eye at an object be- 
 yond say the optic nerve is precisely like looking through any lens 
 of an equivalent power. The object thus seen appears enlarged, and 
 the question is to determine, in case of the eye, how great this enlarge- 
 ment is. 
 
 Since the relative dimensions of the images of the same object on 
 the retina are to each other as the respective distances of the object in 
 front of the eye, that is in front of the nodal point, all that is needed 
 to determine the comparative size of the image on the retina is to 
 know the distances at which the object is seen. If, for example, a 
 given object is at eight inches from our nodal point it will produce 
 an image on our retina of a certain size. If moved to two inches 
 and it is assumed that through the accommodation the object remains 
 clear then the size of the image of the object at two inches will be, 
 to that when it is at eight, as 8 : 2 = 4. The image in the last case 
 will be four times as large. 
 
 The result would have been precisely the same if, instead of our 
 accommodation, we had used -j- placed close against the eye, and we 
 had neglected the distance between the glass and our nodal point. 
 
 To get, therefore, the magnifying power of any glass when the 
 object viewed is at its focal length, we have simply to divide some 
 distance taken as a standard by the focal length of the lens used. A 
 distance of eight inches has been agreed upon. The magnifying 
 power, therefore, of a two-inch lens = f = 4 ; of a one-inch lens f = 
 8 ; of one-half-inch lens = 16, and so on. 
 
 Now, the focal length of the lenticular system of the eye has been 
 calculated to be equal to 6.7" Paris lines that is to say, the distance 
 from the nodal point of the eye to the retina is 6.7 lines. The mag- 
 s'' 96'" 
 nifying power of such a lens is consequently -7^ or ' ^ = 14. 
 
 The fundus of an emmetropic eye is therefore seen under an enlarge- 
 ment of 14 diameters. 
 
 Moreover, when we look through a magnifying-glass placed close 
 to our eye at an object, say, at its focal length, we do not see 
 the object itself but its virtual image, and this image becomes, for 
 the time being, a denned picture, which the observer can project to
 
 AMOUNT OF ENLARGEMENT BY UPRIGHT IMAGE. 
 
 any distance, finite or infinite, that he pleases. The greater the dis- 
 tance to which the image is projected, the greater the space which it 
 appears to cover just as a small scotoma in one's eye may appear, 
 when projected upon a piece of white paper held near the eye, to 
 cover only a small circumference, but yet seem, when projected against 
 the neighboring wall, to occupy a large extent of surface. This is 
 due, of course, merely to the increased opening of the visual angle. 
 
 This may be illustrated in a very simple way by imitating the con- 
 dition of a normal eye. Set, for example, a one-inch lens so that it 
 shall be just one inch from a piece of card on which some object 
 as a picture of the fundus, for instance has been drawn. This is a 
 rough but sufficiently exact imitation of the eye.* If we now place 
 the model of the eye close to our own eye, we see an enlarged image 
 of the picture beyond, which, by keeping the other eye open, can be 
 projected to any distance we see fit. So, too, with the real eye as well 
 as with the model, the optic nerve being thrown up against the oppo- 
 site wall, and to all appearances covering a wide extent of surface. 
 
 If we vary the experiment a little and draw, instead of the fundus, 
 a square, each side of which is a determined length, say one line, and 
 then rule a sheet of paper with squares of the same dimensions, we 
 can then have ocular proof of the amount of enlargement. To do this 
 we have simply to hold the model as close to our eye as possible, and 
 then to hold the sheet of paper previously ruled into squares at ex- 
 actly eight inches, since this distance is taken for the standard. If, 
 now, the experiment is correctly performed, and the different measure- 
 ments are likewise correct, we shall see, by keeping both eyes open, 
 that the single square seen by one eye, and projected against the paper 
 seen by the other, covers eight squares in each direction. Thus, the 
 square seen with the glass forms on the retina the same size image as 
 eight squares do without the glass. The magnifying power of the 
 glass, therefore, is eight-fold. By moving the paper away from us, 
 we see that the single square seen through the glass covers always an 
 increasing, while if toward us a decreasing, number of squares. 
 
 We have seen that with the emmetropic eye the enlargement is 
 14J times, and it remains to be seen how this is influenced by a con- 
 dition of ametropia. 
 
 * I might say here that a very convenient representation of the emmetropio 
 eye can be had ready-made, in what is known in the shops as a cotton or linen 
 counter. This consists of a small upright bit of brass, in which is set an inch 
 Jens of about half an inch in diameter. This upright is connected with a second 
 upright by a short horizontal bottom-piece which is just the focal length of the 
 glass. To the second upright can be attached a bit of card with the picture of the 
 fundus of the eye drawn upon it.
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 Let Iffa or 12 D, be present, due to the shortening of the antero- 
 posterior axis. A convex $ (12 D], placed close against the cornea 
 the distance between the nodal points being neglected will, for all 
 practical purposes, reduce the eye to a condition of emmetropia, as 
 rays leaving it would be parallel ; yet the lenticular power, at the 
 focal distance of which is the retina in each case, is very different 
 from that of the naturally ernmetropic eye, for, whereas in the latter it 
 is equal to 6.7 lines, in the reduced hypermetropic eye it is greater by 
 the lens which we have added, and equals ^, f , -f- , or, reducing this 
 last to lines, -g* T -j- fa = -fa. AVe have, consequently, as the enlarge- 
 ment, 8", or 96'", divided' by 5.6'". f.f = 174 times - 
 
 It would have been the same had If been latent and corrected by 
 the accommodation. 
 
 Suppose M , or 12 J), is present, caused by lengthening of the 
 axis. It would require (12 D) close to the cornea to make the 
 rays leave the eye as parallel. The lenticular system, at the focal dis- 
 tance of which the retina is, would then be equal to fa,,, -fa,,, = -J^. 
 
 06 111 
 gV2T 11 '2- 
 
 If in any case it could possibly happen that with a normal length 
 of axis there was a faulty condition of refractive power an increase 
 on the one hand producing J/, and on the other a decrease causing H 
 then the lens which restored the balance would simply reduce the 
 eye to an emmetropic eye, and we should have the same enlargement 
 as in the normal eye. 
 
 Now, although all this is exceedingly simple in theory, it is by no 
 means so when we come to apply it in a practical manner and to the 
 wants of the ophthalmoscope ; for the correcting-glass can not be ap- 
 plied directly against the cornea, neither can the distance between the 
 nodal points be neglected. Kor can we assume, as we have done, that 
 the anatomical conditions are the same in all eyes to such a degree 
 that the component parts of the fundus as, for example, the optic 
 disk and vessels are invariably the same size. Indeed, we are certain 
 that here, as elsewhere in the body, they vary to a considerable amount. 
 This would be naturally expected, and would be in accordance with 
 the fact that considerable variations occur in the size of the image in 
 eyes which are known to be emmetropic. 
 
 Mauthner is inclined to believe that this difference in size of the 
 image in a normal eye may be due to a difference in the length of the 
 antero-posterior axis, which is counterbalanced by a corresponding 
 increase or decrease in the refracting apparatus of the eye, by which 
 the rays still issue as parallel. Thus, we might have a longer axis 
 with a weaker, or a shorter axis with a stronger lenticular power. The
 
 AMOUNT OF ENLARGEMENT BY UPRIGHT IMAGE. 145 
 
 eye would in each case be emmetropic, but the enlargement would be 
 greater in the latter than in the former case, and in proportion to the 
 degree of shortening. 
 
 Mauthner has calculated that while the enlargement in II = \ (12 
 D) is 17 times, the glass being considered an integral part of the eye, 
 it is in the same degree of H corrected by -j- 3i, half an inch from the 
 nodal point, but 15^ times; and again, if corrected by-j-J one inch 
 in front of the nodal point it is only 13 times. 
 
 From a series of mathematical deductions, the same author arrives 
 at the following general conclusions : When an anomaly in refraction 
 is corrected by the proper glass one inch from the nodal point, we 
 obtain with M always a greater, and with H always a less, enlarge- 
 ment than with emmetropia, while with the inverted image the en- 
 largement is less with M and greater with // than with E. 
 
 The examination of a myopic eye with a concave glass, which is 
 necessarily stronger than the degree of the myopia, since the glass can 
 not be placed at the nodal point, is on the principle of the Galilean 
 telescope, in which the lenticular system of the eye is the object-glass, 
 and the lens behind the mirror the eye-piece. In such a combination 
 the stronger the eye-piece the greater the magnifying power, but the 
 farther the eye-piece must be from the eye. 
 
 If, for example, we have a myopia of ^-, the fundus can \>e seen, 
 A. being relaxed either through - at one inch, or \ at two, or 
 i at four inches from the nodal point of the observed eye. In each 
 case the fundus will be seen under an increasing enlargement, but at 
 the same time with a rapidly decreasing field of view. 
 
 Stammeshaus, taking advantage of this principle, proposed to re- 
 duce such eyes as were not naturally myopic to that condition by con- 
 vex glasses, and then to view the fundus through concave glasses of 
 different strengths and increasing distances in front of the eye, accord- 
 ing to the amount of enlargement desired. This method, which had 
 already been tried in this country several years before the suggestion 
 of Stammeshaus appeared in print, possesses theoretical rather than 
 any practical merits, in which indeed it is signally wanting, not only 
 on account of the great reduction of the field, but also from distortion 
 of the image and from annoying reflections which arise from both sur- 
 faces of the interposed convex glass. When, however, the myopia is 
 natural, and the pupil fully dilated with atropine, the method may be 
 occasionally used with advantage, though even here it is better to go 
 at once to the inverted image, using a weak object-lens in the manner 
 suggested by Liebreich, and already described in the chapter on the 
 
 use of the inverted image. 
 10
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 EXAMINATION OF THE MEDIA OF THE EYE. 
 
 THERE are two principal methods of examination of the media : 
 (1.) Oblique illumination. (2.) The ophthalmoscope. 
 
 The former should never be omitted as a preliminary step to the 
 latter, even where there is apparently no reason to suspect that there is 
 any trouble in the media, for I have been so often the subject of mor- 
 tification myself, and seen it so many times in others, that I can not 
 refrain from again warning those who would use the ophthalmoscope 
 successfully never to neglect this important factor in the detection 
 of disease, especially before speaking of " diffuse opacity or oedema of 
 the retina," or " want of definition in the outlines of the optic disk." 
 
 OBLIQUE ILLUMINATION. 
 
 THE CORNEA. The normal cornea, as a rule, even in adult life, has 
 the appearance in ordinary diffused light, whether natural or artificial, 
 of being a perfectly clear and transparent membrane. When, how- 
 ever, condensed light is thrown upon it at an angle, as, for example, 
 by oblique illumination, a delicate, smoke-like haze can be detected, 
 which, though always present, even in infancy, becomes more and 
 more pronounced as life progresses, until, in extreme old age or pre- 
 mature decay, this haziness is sometimes so dense as to lead to the sus- 
 picion that it is due to a pathological and not a physiological condition. 
 
 This opalescent appearance, whether in old or young eyes, is due 
 to the laminated structure of the cornea and the mesh-like manner in 
 which its component parts are arranged ; for, although the substance 
 proper of the cornea can not be said in any very strict sense to be 
 arranged in regular layers, still its tissue, together with the corneal 
 epithelium, Bowman's membrane, the membrane of Descemet, and the 
 endothelium, is sufficiently stratified to present a number of surfaces 
 at different levels, from which, taken as a whole, enough light is 
 reflected to produce the slight want of transparency expressed in the 
 delicate haze just alluded to ; and especially is this true when the 
 angle of incidence and reflection is of a considerable degree.
 
 EXAMINATION OF THE MEDIA OF THE EYE. 147 
 
 The amount of this haze varies very much with different individu- 
 als even of the same age. Thus, in children, or even in young adults, 
 especially in those who seem to have some scrofulous taint, I have often 
 noticed an unnatural pellucidness of the cornea, which gave an un- 
 wonted brilliancy and glassy expression to the eye ; while, in others of 
 the same age, the cornea, when subjected to oblique light, showed all 
 that want of transparency corresponding to a much later time of life. 
 
 By throwing the light obliquely from the side into the eye, we 
 illuminate the surface of the iris and the anterior capsule, which re- 
 flect the light thrown upon them back to our own eye. Thus, we 
 detect the shape and position of even the minutest speck in the other- 
 wise clear substance of the cornea, by the contrast produced between 
 it and the surrounding tissue, by transmitted light, while at the same 
 time, from that portion of the light which is reflected from their an- 
 terior surfaces, we see the opacities themselves in their true color and 
 form, or what very nearly approaches it. Even when the pupil is 
 thoroughly dilated by atropine, sufficient light is reflected from the 
 anterior capsule and body of the lens and deeper portions of the eye 
 to get the effect of contrast between the opacities and surrounding 
 clear tissue quite as well, and, I have sometimes thought, better 
 marked than with an nndilated pupil ; and especially is this true with 
 the minutest spots in keratitis punctata and slight disturbances in or 
 upon the membrane of Descemet. The entire surface of the cornea 
 must, of course, be gone over with the eye in its various positions. 
 
 Yery different from the delicate, smoke-like haze seen in the 
 healthy eye, and which seems to lie beneath the polished surface of 
 the cornea, is the coarse, dull reflex of a diffuse character which is 
 seen by oblique illumination in some forms of superficial corneal dis- 
 ease, and which is due to a lack of transparency and roughness of the 
 epithelial layer. In such cases a part, usually the lower half, or even 
 the whole surface of the cornea, has a dead, lack-lustre look, which is 
 often noticeable even in ordinary daylight, but which under concen- 
 trated light becomes strongly, sometimes intensely, marked, so that 
 the surface of the cornea, either in part or whole, has the appearance 
 of ground glass. This may vary in its color from a pure gray to a 
 yellowish-brown, or even a rosy tint, especially near the corneal mar- 
 gin, as if this latter appearance was borrowed from the presence of 
 some vessels too minute to be seen as such. In rare instances, I have 
 also seen what had the appearance of interstitial haemorrhage, so deep 
 and close was the injection. In one case the entire cornea was a blood- 
 red mass, as if the bleeding had occurred into the very substance of 
 the membrane, the epithelial layer retaining its polish.
 
 148 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 So, too, the proper substance of the cornea may be the seat of a 
 diffuse opacity, or want of translucency, which, though of pathological 
 origin, may be so slight as to be distinguished with difficulty from a 
 physiological condition, and which requires oblique illumination for its 
 detection. When, however, the opacity is sufficient to produce any 
 marked effect upon vision, and lies in the outer portions of the mem- 
 brane, it is usually to be recognized in ordinary daylight, and then 
 presents no difficulty of diagnosis to the naked eye. 
 
 This, however, is not the case when the trouble lies in the inner 
 layers of the cornea, or in the membrane of Descemet. Here oblique 
 illumination plays a most important role and renders a most useful 
 service. "With it the minute spots due to inflammation of the mem- 
 brane of Descemet (Descemitis), or serous iritis, or choroiditis, come 
 out boldly into view, when under examination by diffused light nothing 
 abnormal could be detected. So, too, slight abrasions of the surface, 
 minute specks, or deposits from foreign bodies, or the foreign bodies 
 themselves, are brought distinctly into view. 
 
 It is sometimes a little difficult even for a trained observer to tell 
 the precise level which opacities in the cornea occupy, though experi- 
 ence in a little while usually enables him to form a pretty accurate 
 estimate of their position, so much so that I think it hardly necessary 
 to go into an elaborate explanation of the method of examining the 
 cornea for this purpose under water, especially as I have never done 
 it myself or ever seen it done. Still, it is well enough to know that 
 it can be done, and that the instrument by which it is accomplished is 
 called an orthoscope, of which there are various patterns, such as 
 those of Czermak, Coccius, and Arlt.* 
 
 THE AQUEOUS HUMOR. 
 
 The entire cornea having been thoroughly examined, the observer 
 should pass next to a consideration of the anterior chamber and its 
 contents. The aqueous humor, which in a state of health is a per- 
 fectly transparent fluid, is often disturbed to a greater or less degree 
 by the presence of minute particles, which are for the time held in 
 suspension in it, and which make themselves manifest, under oblique 
 illumination, by a more or less diffuse cloudiness of the anterior cham- 
 ber. These diffused disturbances in the aqueous, whether of a puru- 
 lent or sanguineous nature, offer but little trouble in their detection 
 and need but little comment, except to call attention to the fact that 
 it sometimes requires a little care to determine whether the opacity in 
 
 * " Zander," Carter's Translation, p. 62.
 
 EXAMINATION OF THE MEDIA OF THE EYE. 149 
 
 question is really in the anterior chamber itself or in the inner layers 
 of the cornea. 
 
 Still less need be said of the aggregate masses of pus, or blood, or 
 other detritus so often found at the lower borders of the anterior 
 chamber, and which can be plainly seen with the naked eye, but 
 which can be rendered a little more conspicuous by means of con- 
 densed light, and seen to much better advantage with it than with 
 the ophthalmoscope. 
 
 As a great rarity, fine filamentous bands have been seen to stretch 
 across from the apex of a pyramidal cataract w r hich projects from the 
 anterior surface of the lens to the inner surface of the cornea oppo- 
 site ; moreover, very minute, thread-like synechise, suggestive of a 
 former and long-past perforation of the cornea, or at least of con- 
 tact of the iris with its inner surface, are sometimes brought to light 
 in this manner. Precisely the same thing may occur after small per- 
 forated wounds, or even after the performance of an iridectomy, 
 where the cut edge of the pupillary border of the iris has laid for a 
 shorter or longer time against the inner surface of the cornea. 
 
 While on the subject of the aqueous humor, it may be well to 
 remind the reader that occasionally it is the abode of that species of 
 entozoa known as filaria. These animals have been seen by several 
 observers, among them Macnamara, who says there is no possibility 
 of mistaking the appearance of entozoa of this kind in the anterior 
 chamber, as the creature may be distinctly seen moving about in the 
 aqueous. From Dr. Barkan's case in " Knapp's Archiv," the detec- 
 tion would seem not such an easy matter, as it was not until a portion 
 of the animal was examined under the microscope that a diagnosis was 
 confirmed. 
 
 THE IRIS. 
 
 By means of light thrown obliquely into the eye, the anterior sur- 
 face of the iris can be thoroughly illuminated, and can then be seen 
 under considerable enlargement if a second lens is used in the manner 
 already pointed out (page 6). By this method the grosser appear- 
 ances of the membrane can be studied both in health and disease. 
 With oblique illumination, also, the presence of small cysts, tumors, 
 and other irregularities of its surface, such as condylomata, can be 
 seen and watched in their course of growth and decline. The em- 
 bossed, roughened, and, at the same time, velvety appearance of the 
 entire surface of the iris due to iritis, and more yet to irido-choroidi- 
 tis, comes out strongly marked under the influence of condensed light, 
 and even increased vascularity of the membrane with a little care can 
 generally be ascertained. In rare cases the iris may be the seat of
 
 150 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTIIALMOSCOPY. 
 
 minute crystals of cholesterine, which then glitter like points of dia- 
 mond dust under oblique illumination. I have seen a case in which 
 the entire iris was studded with minute particles, giving to the mem- 
 brane the appearance as if made of gold sealing-wax. 
 
 The minute, as well as the larger, adhesions of the pupillary bor- 
 ders of the iris to the capsule of the lens, their extent, form, and color, 
 can be observed to the fullest advantage by this method of illumina- 
 tion. So, too, exudations upon the surface of the lens, the remains 
 of capsule after an operation for cataract, or the membranes which so 
 often stretch themselves across from the pillars of an iridectomy, 
 or the thread-like remains of the pupillary membrane. Yery deli- 
 cate membranes, even where no operation has been performed, some- 
 times form over the pupil, and I have known these web-like forma- 
 tions to be so delicate as not to interfere in some cases, in any ap- 
 preciable degree, with the clearness of the picture of the fundus as 
 seen with the direct light from the ophthalmoscope, while in others 
 the interference is so slight as to express itself only by a delicate want 
 of definition of the entire fundus, the exact cause of which it is ex- 
 ceedingly puzzling, if not impossible, to ascertain without the aid of 
 oblique illumination. 
 
 As a modification of the method of examining the iris by oblique 
 illumination, Liebreich* proposed that the cone of condensed light 
 should be thrown not directly upon the surface of the iris, but 
 obliquely through the pupil and behind the membrane, so that this 
 latter should be seen by transmitted light, or that reflected for the 
 more posterior portions of the fundus. It is, however, only in albi- 
 notic eyes, or where the iris itself is destitute of pigment, or very 
 atrophic, that the method yields any satisfactory results. 
 
 The same objection is applicable to Becker's method of throw- 
 ing a cone of light upon the eye from a common ophthalmoscopic 
 mirror in such a way that only one half of the cornea is illuminated, 
 while the remainder of the light falls upon the sclera. In this way 
 one half of the cornea and the deeper parts of the eye are in the shade, 
 and only slightly illuminated by direct light in comparison with that 
 which is reflected from the back of the eye, that is, by transmitted 
 lightf 
 
 THE LENS. 
 
 Although the lens is apparently a perfectly transparent body when 
 viewed by diffuse light, nevertheless, like the cornea, when subjected 
 to condensed light thrown upon it from an angle, it betrays its want 
 
 * Graefe's " Archiv," Vol. I., Ab. i., p. 353. 
 
 t " Wiener medicinische Jahrbucher," 1863, p. 162.
 
 EXAMINATION OF THE MEDIA OF THE EYE. 151 
 
 of transparency by a delicate network of fine striae, which, cross the 
 anterior portions of the lens and form radiating lines which consti- 
 tute, as Mr. Tweedy * has expressed it, a visible stellation of the nor- 
 mal lens. These lines are exceedingly fine and difficult to perceive 
 except under the most favorable circumstances. 
 
 ' A much more tangible appearance, and one which can always be 
 obtained, is the delicate and smoke-like cloudiness following the pas- 
 sage of the rays into the substance of the lens. This is due partly to 
 the fact that the anterior capsule has a greater index of refraction 
 than the aqueous humor, but more particularly to the anatomical 
 arrangement of the fibres of the lens itself. From the multiplicity 
 of these fibres, and from the fact that they are laid, as they are, one 
 over the other, sufficient light is reflected to produce the delicate haze 
 in question. 
 
 This mist-like opacity exists as a physiological condition, to a 
 greater or less degree, in all lenses. Barely perceptible in early 
 youth, it grows more and more pronounced with progressing years, 
 till oftentimes in old age it becomes, through some chemical or physi- 
 cal change in the fibres, so dense as to suggest unmistakable evidence 
 of the presence of cataract, or, if of a greenish or yellowish hue, the 
 existence of glaucoma. Fortunately this apparent want of transpar- 
 ency in the majority of cases vanishes under the ophthalmoscope, and 
 with it the doubt in the observer's mind whether the turbidity is due 
 to a pathological or physiological condition ; for, as a rule, when the 
 reflex in the field of the pupil is perfectly clear and free from inter- 
 ruptions, and the details of the fundus come out sharply, little fear 
 need be entertained as to trouble in the lens. Care, therefore, should 
 be taken not to pronounce too positively as to the presence of disease, 
 from any peculiarity in the color of the reflex from the eye, either 
 under daylight or from oblique illumination, as a physiological reflex 
 may, from age or other circumstances, vary in its density and color 
 from a delicate steel-like gray to a yellowish or reddish-brown. Still, 
 there are cases, especially in young and middle-aged people, or those 
 who have grown prematurely old, in which the utmost care is neces- 
 sary to make a differential diagnosis, or to say whether a somewhat too 
 pronounced haziness seen under oblique illumination is or is not an 
 abnormal condition of the media. These are the cases which test 
 most thoroughly the skill and acumen of even a practised observer, 
 and the inexperienced must be doubly on their guard. 
 
 Luckily, diffuse opacity of the lens, without one or more well- 
 defined imperfections, be they never so small, is very rare. The state 
 
 * " Royal London Opbth. Hosp. Reports," vol. viii, Pt. 1, p. 24.
 
 152 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTIIALMOSCOPY. 
 
 of vision often helps us to a diagnosis, for this is very seldom reduced 
 in itself, or the cause of complaint on the part of the patient, when the 
 want of transparency is due to physiological conditions, perhaps from 
 the fact that it conies, especially in elderly people, so slowly as not to 
 have excited comment. When the diffuse haziness is the result of a 
 pathological process, vision is usually reduced, and the loss, as a rule, 
 easily detected by the patient; even when it happens in one eye, 
 though the reverse may take place, and the trouble escape notice for 
 a long time, and then only by accident be brought to light. 
 
 Before the invention of the ophthalmoscope, and the more ex- 
 tended use of oblique illumination, great reliance was placed on what 
 is known in the older works as the catoptric test. In later times this 
 has gradually fallen into disuse, until among the more modern observ- 
 ers it is rarely, if ever, employed. This is regretted, as it should be, by 
 some writers, especially by Mauthner, who loudly and not unpoetic- 
 ally sings its praises. But I must confess that, with the exception of 
 determining, in the most beautiful and, at the same time, most irrefu- 
 table manner, the presence or non-presence of the lens itself, this 
 method has not given in my own hands as satisfactory results, either 
 as to the existence or position of lenticular opacity, as have the other 
 more simple methods now in common use, that is, by oblique illumi- 
 nation and the ophthalmoscope. Still, I have introduced a descrip- 
 tion of this test here, as it is claimed that it lends its most important 
 service in the very conditions now under consideration, that is, diffuse 
 opacity of the lens. The principles which govern this test and its 
 application are briefly stated as follows : 
 
 The anterior surface of the lens curves outward, so as to present a 
 convex surface to exterior objects. As the surface is highly polished, 
 and the index of refraction higher than that of the aqueous humor, 
 it has all the properties of a convex mirror, and will produce a reflec- 
 tion of an object placed in front of it. The image of such object will 
 be upright and reduced. It is a little difficult to see this image, as it 
 lies directly behind that from the surface of the cornea ; it suffers, 
 moreover, in contrast with the latter, being much less brilliant, since 
 the difference between the index of refraction of the cornea and the 
 air is much greater than that between the lens and the aqueous 
 humor. 
 
 The posterior capsule of the lens, on the other hand, backed by 
 the vitreous, presents a concave surface to objects placed in front of 
 it, and, as these latter must always be at a greater distance from the 
 reflecting surface than the length of its radius of curvature, the images 
 of the objects will be reversed as well as reduced. In this way the
 
 EXAMINATION OF THE MEDIA OF THE EYE. 153 
 
 reflection from the posterior can readily be told from that of the ante- 
 rior surface of the lens. It can also be easily distinguished from that 
 of the cornea, since it is not only reversed and paler, but also is at a 
 distance from it. Moreover, the two images move, when the object 
 is moved, in opposite directions to each other. 
 
 The best method of viewing these images is to place the object 
 used at one side of the eye examined, and for the observer to stand 
 upon the other. The best object for this test, and the one which 
 gives on the whole the most conspicuous images, is the classical one 
 of a lighted candle. 
 
 This should be held as close to the eye as possible, though, as be- 
 fore said, to one side, while the observer stands upon the opposite 
 side. In this way we get the largest possible image and the brightest 
 illumination, since the angle of incidence and reflection are as large 
 as circumstances will allow. 
 
 If the candle now be held below the eye (the patient being seated, 
 while the observer stands), the corneal image, which is upright, is 
 formed near the lower border of the membrane, while that from the 
 posterior capsule is reversed and stands considerably above the former, 
 since the line of direction, passing from the candle through the cor- 
 neal image, will impinge, if continued, at the upper part of the poste- 
 rior capsule. If the candle is now carried upward, the corneal image 
 rises, while that from the posterior capsule sinks. If the former 
 passes to the right, the latter goes to the left, and so on. In this 
 manner the image may be made to cover, by slight successive move- 
 ments, the entire surface of the capsule. 
 
 If, now, there is a disturbance in the body of the lens anterior to 
 its posterior surface, that part of the image which would be formed 
 by the posterior surface, were the rays not cut oif by the opacity lying 
 in front, is wanting. The image of the candle-flame is then either 
 obscured or entirely interrupted, according to the density of the 
 opacity. If, on the other hand, the opacity lies behind the reflecting 
 surface, that is, the posterior capsule, it has no effect either on the 
 continuity or brilliancy of the image. The opacity must lie, there- 
 fore, in the vitreous body. 
 
 Now as to the diffuse opacity of the lens. " When the sun," says 
 Mauthner, with a pardonable enthusiasm in comparing greater with 
 lesser things, " sets or rises in a murky atmosphere, his at other times 
 golden face has a rosy and occasionally even lurid tinge, from the fact 
 that the red rays survive the quenching effect of a troubled medium 
 better than the others, and therefore pass through it in greater quan- 
 tities. For precisely the same reason the image of the posterior cap-
 
 154 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 sule, in case of a diffuse disturbance in the lens, has a rosy or even 
 blood-red appearance, while that of the anterior capsule is not af- 
 fected." * 
 
 So, too, in cases of mild hyalitis, where there was a delicate, yel- 
 lowish-gray reflex from the fundus, the writer has been able to ex- 
 clude all participation of the lens by the perfect brilliancy offered in 
 the reflexes of the anterior and posterior capsules, as shown by the 
 catoptric test. 
 
 OPACITIES OF THE LENS. 
 
 Passing from the examination of the diffuse disturbances of the 
 lens to those of a defined character, we enter the field where oblique 
 illumination has its happiest exemplification, for in no other way do 
 these lenticular imperfections come out so strongly in their true form, 
 color, and position, as by this method when properly applied. 
 
 All lenticular opacities whether of the capsule, anterior or pos- 
 terior, or of the substance of the lens, cortical or nuclear show them- 
 selves under oblique illumination as interruptions, of greater or less 
 extent and density, in what under normal conditions is a uniformly 
 clear field of pupil. When the opacity is in the capsule it is called 
 an anterior or posterior capsular cataract, according as it is in the 
 anterior or posterior portion of the investing membrane. If the dis- 
 turbance is in the outer layers of the lenticular substance it is called 
 a cortical, if in the inner a nuclear, cataract. All these varieties may 
 exist alone or be combined with each other. In the latter case the 
 cataract is said to be mixed. 
 
 It is certainly not worth while to weary my readers with a de- 
 tailed description of all the multitudinous shapes which the opacities 
 included under the name of cataract, either stationary or progressive, 
 may assume. Still, there are several varieties which possess such uni- 
 form and characteristic features as to have a distinctive name, and as 
 such merit a short description. 
 
 Anterior Capsular Cataract. This usually appears under lateral 
 illumination as a sharply defined spot in the centre of the capsule ; 
 it may, however, be more or less irregular in shape, and vary consid- 
 erably in size as well as position. So, too, with the posterior capsular 
 cataract. 
 
 Pyramidal Cataract. This consists of a whitish mass in the pu- 
 pillary space, the apex of which projects, to a greater or less degree, 
 from the centre of the anterior capsule into the anterior chamber, 
 while its base extends backward into the substance of the lens. 
 
 * "Lebrbucb der Ophtb.," Mauthner, p. 149.
 
 EXAMINATION OF THE MEDIA OF THE EYE. 155 
 
 Mautlmer * mentions having seen in several cases a modification 
 of this form of cataract, which consisted of a double pyramid with a 
 common base at the anterior capsule. The apex of one extended into 
 the anterior chamber, that of the other backward toward the centre 
 of the lens. In one case he saw two pyramidal cataracts in the game 
 lens. The same author mentions the fact that sometimes, by oblique 
 illumination, the anterior capsule may be seen to lie in radiating 
 folds in the neighborhood of the pyramid. 
 
 Zonular Cataract. This is a disturbance of the lens, in which 
 the outer layers of cortical substance remain clear, as does the centre 
 or nucleus of the lens, while the intermediate portion is affected. 
 Thus, the nucleus is inclosed by a more or less dense and cloudy en- 
 velope or zone, which is usually of a uniform thickness, and through 
 which with the ophthalmoscope we get more or less distinctly a reflex 
 from the fundus. 
 
 Zonular cataract, instead of consisting of a single zone, may be 
 composed of two (Graefe, Sichel), or even three concentric layers, 
 which are opaque, and which are separated from each other by inter- 
 mediate layers of clear substance. 
 
 The zonular, like other forms of cataract, may be either simple or 
 mixed ; when the latter it is usually progressive. In this respect it 
 may be well to mention that Graefe observes that the cataractous proc- 
 ess remains stationary so long as the cortical substance preserves its 
 transparency ; but, if this becomes the seat of diffuse or punctate 
 opacities, it may be looked upon as a sure sign that the process is pro- 
 gressing. 
 
 Spindle-shaped Cataract. Under this title a curious and very 
 rare form of lenticular disturbance is described by several authors (von 
 Ammon, Pilz, Miiller, Becker). 
 
 From the centre of the anterior capsule in Becker's case, a bluish- 
 white opacity extended, gradually increasing in size, toward the cen- 
 tre of the lens. Here it inclosed the nucleus in a globular-like envel- 
 ope, and then gradually decreased in size till its apex was inserted 
 into the posterior capsule. Though not always so regular in its out- 
 lines, its general characteristics are to extend along the central axis of 
 the lens and to assume as it progresses a fusiform shape. 
 
 Posterior Polar Cataract. This is one which has its seat in the 
 deepest layers of the lens, near the posterior pole, or which may, ac- 
 cording to some, take its rise in the vitreous body. It may exist as a 
 circumscribed and defined mass, but usually has one or more often- 
 times spike-like projections leaving it in different directions, and 
 
 * "Lehrbuch der Ophth.," p. 140.
 
 156 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 which usually take the curve and plane of the posterior capsule. These 
 projections are sometimes so regularly arranged as to resemble the 
 spokes of a wheel. The same effect may take place on the anterior 
 capsule and its neighboring corticalis, or both capsules may be af- 
 fected at the same time, while the intervening substance of the lens 
 remains clear. 
 
 Secondary Cataracts. These, whether the result of injury or of 
 operative interference, show themselves in the shape of membranes in 
 the pupillary space. Sometimes these membranes are so delicate as 
 to be almost transparent in their entire extent, or again here and there 
 minute opacities or pigment-spots may be scattered over them. On 
 the other hand, these membranes may be so densely opaque as to be 
 impervious to light, either from lateral illumination or the ophthal- 
 moscope, and in this case they sometimes suggest the idea that a cata- 
 ractous lens is still present. 
 
 These membranes may also assume band-like forms, which then 
 appear to run across from one border of the iris to the other, but 
 which in reality have their attachments, as attempts to remove them 
 show, in the neighborhood of the ciliary body. 
 
 The size and position of foreign bodies in the lens, such as bits of 
 steel or stone, can often be ascertained by oblique illumination, even 
 when the surrounding substance has become so much disturbed that 
 the imbedded fragments can not be detected with the ophthalmoscope. 
 For this reason lateral illumination should never be neglected after 
 such accidents. Sometimes, however, the lenticular substance sur- 
 rounding the body remains perfectly clear, even for long periods after 
 the accident, and then, if the fragment is a chip of steel or other pol- 
 ished substance, the characteristic metallic reflex is obtained. So, too, 
 we are often enabled to follow the track of a perforating body by con- 
 densed light, and to trace its passage through the cornea and lens, 
 either by the disturbances in transparency at the point of entrance, or 
 sometimes through the entire thickness of the wound. We can thus 
 become convinced that the foreign body, though no longer in sight, 
 has entered the eye. 
 
 When a cataract has become fully formed, oblique illumination is 
 by far the best means of studying its peculiarities. This is especially 
 the case after inflammatory processes, such as iritis and choroiditis, 
 through which the lenticular substance has undergone degeneration. 
 In these cases we can often detect with its aid what appears under 
 ordinary illumination as a homogeneous whitish-gray substance, that 
 is concrete masses of chalky degeneration, or a multitude of minute 
 and glittering specks of cholesterine, which give a sparkling appear-
 
 EXAMINATION OF THE MEDIA OF THE EYE. 157 
 
 ance, or a satin-like sheen, to the surface of the lens. The lens may, 
 moreover, even when no such degeneration has taken place, have a 
 marbled or segmented appearance, such as the section of a piece of talc 
 or isinglass shows when polished. 
 
 The position of the lens, and whether in a given case it lies in its 
 proper place or is dislocated, can often be determined by means of 
 lateral illumination. Especially is this true when a perfectly trans- 
 parent lens is dislocated into the anterior chamber, either partially or 
 entirely. Through total reflection we then get a beautiful silver 
 ring, which plays round the extreme edge of the lens. As a rule, 
 however, this method, in ordinary dislocations, is not so satisfactory 
 as that with the ophthalmoscope, and for this reason this subject will 
 be more fully treated under that heading. 
 
 Opacities in the vitreous are, as a rule, better studied with the 
 ophthalmoscope than with lateral illumination. Still there are occa- 
 sions where this latter yields the best results, such as profuse haemor- 
 rhages from vessels lying in the anterior parts of the eye, and where 
 we consequently iind it impossible to get a reflex from the fundus 
 with the ophthalmoscope. So, too, with tumors or gummata situated 
 in the ciliary region, or in diffuse hyalitis, from which we get a dull, 
 and occasionally a rather bright, yellowish reflex, but never so bright 
 as that which comes from glioma, or from metastatic choroiditis, which 
 is the sequela of cerebro-spinal meningitis. More, however, will be 
 said on this subject in its appropriate place. 
 
 EXAMINATION OF THE MEDIA BY THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE. 
 
 When light is thrown into the eye from the mirror alone, at the 
 ordinary distance for the inverted image, the pupil is seen to glow 
 with a uniform brilliancy, which varies somewhat in color and inten- 
 sity, according to the pigmentation of the fundus and the portion of 
 it which is opposite, for the time being, the pupillary space. Should 
 anything be present which interferes with the passage of the light, 
 and therefore with the transparency of the media, this manifests itself 
 either by a general reduction in the intensity of the reflex in the 
 pupil, or by isolated interruptions in the illumination, according as the 
 opacities in the media are of a diffuse or concrete nature ; and it may 
 be well to mention here that very delicate disturbances, especially of 
 a diffuse character, are better seen with the weak-light mirror, since 
 with the strong they are, from their delicacy, sometimes overcome by 
 the excess of illumination. On the contrary, these opacities, although 
 diffuse, may be so dense, from their consistency or numbers, as to re- 
 quire all the illumination possible in order to get a reflex from the
 
 158 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 fundus. When this is so, either a plane or concave silvered mirror is 
 demanded. With a little care in subduing the light, when occasion 
 requires it, the common concave mirror may be made to answer every 
 purpose. "When, however, the eye is very sensitive to light, that is, 
 when the pupil contracts unduly, I prefer, without there are very 
 strong indications against it, to use a mild instillation of atropine than 
 to employ a weak-light mirror, as is recommended abroad, for the pur- 
 pose of avoiding too great a contraction of the iris ; and especially in 
 the case of patients of middle or advanced age, where there is rea- 
 son to apprehend that there may be trouble in the periphery of the 
 lens. 
 
 All interruptions of whatever size in the field of the pupil, no 
 matter where they are situated, appear with the ophthalmoscope, as a 
 rule, black. This is due to contrast, for the rays thrown by the oph- 
 thalmoscope directly upon these opacities are not reflected from these 
 surfaces in sufficient quantities, as is the case with oblique illumina- 
 tion, to give them much, if any, individual tinge ; while, on the other 
 hand, the light reflected from the fundus is not strong enough, except 
 in the case of thin membranes, to pass through them and thus give 
 them a transparency. In rare instances, opacities in the media may 
 be of such a nature as to reflect light in sufficient quantities to pro- 
 duce a lustre of their own by direct reflection, as is the case sometimes 
 with bits of metal or particles of cholesterine. 
 
 Thin membranes, from their delicacy, often appear of a grayish 
 hue in the midst of the otherwise reddish-yellow field. There are 
 other cases in which, in spite of all our efforts at illumination, the 
 entire pupillary space maintains a jetty blackness. This shows that 
 there is some insurmountable obstacle to the penetration of light into 
 the eye. 
 
 Sometimes an otherwise uniform and bright reflex is suddenly in- 
 terrupted by the appearance here and there of black specks, of a greater 
 or less size, due to particles or shreds of mucus which have adhered 
 for the moment to the surface of the cornea. Long, black, string-like 
 formations may come suddenly into the field, due to the eye-lashes, 
 and caused by the drooping of the upper lid. The first requires a 
 little care not to mistake them for deeper-seated and permanent dis- 
 turbances. They can be removed by rubbing the upper lid gently 
 over the surface of the cornea. The true character of the latter is at 
 once detected when once they have been seen. 
 
 Besides the method of viewing the opacities of the anterior parts 
 of the eye with the mirror alone and from a distance, we have two 
 others by which they can be seen under an increased enlargement,
 
 EXAMINATION OF THE MEDIA OF THE EYE. 159 
 
 and many may be thus brought to view which would otherwise escape 
 detection. 
 
 This first method consists in placing a strong convex glass, -}- 10 D 
 or -f- 12 D, behind the mirror, and then approaching carefully toward 
 the eye till different levels cornea, aqueous, humor, anterior capsule, 
 substance of the lens, and even anterior parts of the vitreous are 
 brought successively into focus. 
 
 In this way minute opacities in the cornea, and especially in the 
 membrane of Descemet, are brought into view which would other- 
 wise remain invisible. To reap the full advantages of this method of 
 examination, a brilliant illumination and a dilated pupil are requisite, 
 though a great deal may be done without the last condition being 
 fulfilled. 
 
 By slight to-and-fro movements of the head, we can bring differ- 
 ent planes of the media of the anterior parts of the eye successively into 
 focus, and thus gain some idea as to the antero-posterior position of 
 the opacities, since the nearer we can approach the eye the accom- 
 modation being as fully relaxed as possible the deeper seated must 
 the disturbance be. 
 
 The second method by which we get increased enlargement and 
 more brilliant illumination consists of using the mirror at a short 
 distance from the eye examined, say six or eight inches, and then in- 
 terposing a convex lens between the mirror and the observed eye in 
 such a way that the object viewed, the surface of the iris, for instance, 
 shall be just within the principal focal length of the lens. The object- 
 lens being held in front of the ophthalmoscope, acts in the double 
 capacity of magnifier and condenser, and thus increases the amount 
 of the illumination. By slight movements of the lens back and forth, 
 we can bring successively into focus the different planes of the ante- 
 rior media, and see them under a considerable enlargement. This 
 manner of using the instrument is precisely the same as with the 
 ordinary inverted image ; but the head of the observer is at six or 
 eight instead of sixteen inches from the observer's eye, and the image 
 obtained, instead of being inverted, is upright and magnified. This 
 last method is not so comprehensive or satisfactory as the preceding, 
 but is well adapted for studying the surface of the iris, small perfora- 
 tions of the membrane, and minute posterior synechiae. 
 
 A general or diffuse opacity of any of the anterior media of the 
 eye only expresses itself as such under the ophthalmoscope by the dis- 
 turbing influence which it has upon the fundus oculi, the brilliancy of 
 which when slight it reduces, and the details of which -when dense it 
 obscures or veils.
 
 160 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 The Cornea. From the reasons already stated in regard to illumi- 
 nation, and from the fact that with the ophthalmoscope it is some- 
 what difficult to judge accurately of distances, examination, not only of 
 the cornea, but of all the anterior media, is, as a rule, more satisfac- 
 torily performed by oblique illumination than with the ophthalmo- 
 scope, still there are some cases where the former yields to the latter ; 
 and this is manifestly the case wherever there are slight inequalities 
 in the surfaces by which the media are bounded, and particularly is 
 this true in the condition known as " fascettes " of the cornea, where, 
 from the inequalities of the surface, the light reflected from the f undus 
 is irregularly refracted, so that it produces, under slight movements 
 of the instrument, the characteristic play of light and shadow. Some- 
 times, too, very minute specks or opacities in the otherwise perfectly 
 transparent substance of the cornea or lens are seen by transmitted 
 light when they would have escaped attention under oblique illumina- 
 tion. Especially is this the case where very small opacities lie deeply 
 in the cornea, in the membrane of Descemet, or in the lens; and 
 examinations with the mirror should never be omitted when the 
 patient complains of a sensation as if something was in the eye, which 
 oblique illumination has failed to detect. 
 
 The ease with which these small objects can be seen can be in- 
 creased, especially when the pupil is enlarged and the light strong, by 
 placing a convex (-f- 10 D) glass behind the ophthalmoscope and ap- 
 proaching close to the eye after the manner just described. I have, 
 moreover, in this way often convinced myself that the membrane of 
 Descemet, even when not the seat of actual deposits, has sometimes the 
 appearance of being thrown into delicate folds or undulations, so deli- 
 cate, indeed, as to escape notice except under the enlargement of the 
 magnifier and the movements of the ophthalmoscope, combined, also, 
 with the movements of the eye in different directions on the part of 
 the patient. When this is done, the pupillary space, which with the 
 mirror alone, and at a distance, had a perfectly uniform reflex, acquires 
 a sheen-like appearance, as if light was reflected from delicate inequal- 
 ity in the surface of a substance, the transparency of which was not, 
 however, affected as a usual thing to any perceptible degree. Some- 
 times, however, slight but annoying disturbances in vision are an 
 accompaniment of the trouble, and it is important not to overlook 
 them, especially after blows or other contusions of the eye or head. 
 Whether, after all, this appearance is due to some change in the inner- 
 most layers of the cornea, or is in the membrane of Descemet itself, 
 may be a question. I am, however, inclined toward the latter view. Of 
 its existence, which is often palpable enough, there can be no doubt.
 
 EXAMINATION OF THE MEDIA OF THE EYE. 
 
 Aqueous Humor. The ophthalmoscope is of very little use in the 
 study of the aqueous humor or the accumulations which take place in 
 the anterior chamber. Minute particles can, however, when a magni- 
 fying-glass is used behind the instrument, sometimes be seen as they 
 rise above or sink below the borders of the iris, and thus show that 
 they are in a plane anterior to that of the iris. 
 
 i 
 
 THE IKIS. 
 
 The surface of the iris, like that of the cornea, is generally better 
 studied by means of oblique illumination than with the ophthalmo- 
 scope. Still, there are occasions where the instrument performs useful 
 service even here, and when it is used it is better to place a high mag- 
 nifier (-[- 10 D) behind the mirror, and then to employ as strong an il- 
 lumination as possible while the observer approaches the eye until the 
 plane of the iris is in focus ; or, even better still, instead of placing 
 the magnifier behind the mirror, the two-inch object-glass can be held 
 just in front of the eye to be examined, while the observer throws the 
 light from the mirror through it. In this way the glass acts both as a 
 condenser and magnifier. When used in this manner, the observer 
 must approach close to the glass, which by slight to-and-fro move- 
 ments can be made to focus the plane of the iris or anterior capsule 
 of the lens. In this way minute bodies or apertures may be detected, 
 condylomata studied, or even an increased vascularity of the mem- 
 brane be seen under a greater enlargement. In this manner also the 
 writer has been able to detect adhesions to the lens, especially in old 
 people, where the pupil is very narrow and very sluggish to light. 
 
 Light does not, under ordinary conditions, pass through the iris, at 
 least in sufficient quantities to give any reflex of the fundus beyond. 
 When, however, the membrane is destitute of pigment, as in albinos, 
 or has undergone extensive degeneration through atrophy, sufficient 
 light is returned to the observer to enable him to obtain a more or 
 less feeble reflex through the membrane, or even in pronounced cases 
 to discern the outlines of the ciliary bodies, which then appear as dark 
 projections of various heights. In one case of extensive atrophy which 
 I examined, the membrane presented alternate spaces of light and 
 shade, radiating from the pupil like the fan-shaped sectors of a com- 
 mon ventilator. 
 
 Perforations of the iris and separations from its peripheric attach- 
 ments and the remains of the pupillary membrane, provided the media 
 behind have preserved their transparency sufficiently, betray them- 
 selves by the red glow from the fundus, which then occupies the 
 
 vacancv. The space may, however, especially after injuries, be the 
 11
 
 162 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 seat of a small haemorrhage or exudation, or masses of cortical sub- 
 stance, so that no reflex can be obtained through them. The true nature 
 of the obstacles can then usually be easily determined by oblique illu- 
 mination. On the other hand, what sometimes seems under oblique 
 illumination to be an interruption in the surface of the membrane 
 covered with black pigment or with the remains of a layer of blood, 
 proves with the ophthalmoscope to be a vacant space or cleft in the 
 iris, through which we not only get a perfectly clear reflex, but can even 
 discern some of the details of the fundus. For this reason the oph- 
 thalmoscope is most advantageously employed in determining the con- 
 dition of the pupillary space and its fitness for the passage of light, 
 as, for example, after an attack of iritis, the performance of iridec- 
 tomy, and especially that of cataract, where by its means we can judge 
 at once whether the field of pupil is limited in extent, or whether 
 adhesions have taken place from the borders of the iris, or whether 
 the pupil is the seat of exudations, the remains of capsule, or cortical 
 substance ; in fact, everything which relates to its clearness, size, 
 shape, and permeability to light. 
 
 THE LENS. 
 
 Alterations in the curvature of the lens can not, as a rule, be told 
 with the ophthalmoscope. One or two cases have been known, how- 
 ever, even in the writer's experience, where a marked inequality in 
 the surface could be detected. 
 
 As with the other anterior media, diffuse opacity of the lens be- 
 trays itself by a reduction in the brilliancy of the ophthalmoscopic 
 picture, over which it casts a delicate haze. It is, as a rule, better ex- 
 amined with oblique illumination than with the ophthalmoscope ; but 
 in either case it requires the closest attention and care on the part of the 
 observer not to overlook this delicate cloudiness, and whenever this is 
 suspected both methods should be employed. 
 
 Precisely the same appearances as those which have already been 
 described in the case of the membrane of Descemet, and which sug- 
 gest a delicate folding or ruffling of the surface, are often seen on the 
 anterior capsule of the lens, or in the cortical substance lying just be- 
 neath it. There can be little doubt that oftentimes this is a physiologi- 
 cal condition and due to some peculiarity in the capsule, suggesting a 
 continuation of the fold-like arrangement of the zonula on to the sur- 
 face of the lens ; but, on the other hand, it is just as certain that these 
 striae, or delicate minings, in the surface of the capsule are of patho- 
 logical origin, as if due to some mild form of capsulitis of an idio- 
 pathic form. I have also seen them as the result of injury to the eye,
 
 EXAMINATION OF THE MEDIA OF THE EYE. 163 
 
 and have now under observation a case of injury from a blow fol- 
 lowed by a mild iritis, in which these stripes or folds developed. They 
 ran horizontally across the upper half of the anterior capsule of the 
 lens, the lower part being clear, as-was the entire substance of the lens. 
 
 Sometimes, moreover, delicate irregularities are seen in the sub- 
 stance of the lens, especially toward the periphery. These have usu- 
 ally a twig-like course, and produce the impression as if they were 
 inequalities in an otherwise transparent and homogeneous substance, 
 having just enough difference in their construction and index of re- 
 fraction to render them visible under the play of light from the oph- 
 thalmoscope. Dust-like aggregations and minute spots are often seen 
 in the peripherical portions of an otherwise perfectly clear lens. There 
 can be no doubt that these appearances are often purely physiological. 
 That they are not always so is proved from the fact that examinations 
 repeated after successive intervals show that they do increase till the 
 lens finally becomes cataractous. I would not wish to mislead the 
 reader, or give the idea that any opacity in the lens is not a matter of 
 serious consideration, which I freely admit it is, but I merely wish to 
 point out the fact that opacities may exist for years without change in 
 size or shape, while the rest of the lens remains perfectly clear ; and 
 this is particularly true when the opacity is an isolated one with a 
 clearly defined contour, as, for example, the small, round spots on the 
 posterior surface of the lens, which are often attributed, whether 
 rightly or not, to the remains of the central hyaloid artery. These 
 spots may, however, exist in any part of the lens, not only on the pos- 
 terior but also on the anterior surface, and not only near the centre, 
 but also at the periphery ; and, moreover, they may be of any shape, 
 either circular or cleft-like. This fact ought to make our prognosis a 
 little more guarded than it usually is, and cause us to refrain from 
 unduly alarming a patient about a threatening loss of vision, combined 
 with a serious operation, when no occasion for either may ever occur. 
 Especially is this true in patients who have for years been very my- 
 opic, and whose eyes show an extensive posterior staphyloma, with 
 other changes in the choroid. 
 
 Defined opacities in the lens appear as black interruptions in a 
 reddish-yellow field, since they lie, as already pointed out, between 
 the observer's eye and the source of illumination, which in this case is 
 the reflection from the fundus. As they reflect from their surfaces 
 but little light when the angle of incidence and reflection is small, 
 they do not appear as they do under oblique illumination in their true 
 color, but, on the other hand, their position, extent, and outline are 
 more clearly defined as they are seen against a brilliant background.
 
 164 
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 It is certainly not worth while to exhaust the reader's mind with 
 a long and detailed description of the multitudinous variations, either 
 as to place, form, or extent, that these opacities may assume or the 
 changes they may undergo. A single glance with the ophthalmo- 
 scope at nature, or even a glance at the accompanying drawings taken 
 from Jaeger's " Atlas," will give a better idea as to their true appear- 
 ances than the longest and most minute verbal description. The pu- 
 pillary space is supposed to be illuminated with the mirror, and the 
 dark spots are seen by contrast against the lighter field. 
 
 Fig. 56 represents an eye, affected with iritis, under the influence 
 of atropine. The black points extending into the clear field of the 
 pupil mark the points of adhesion between the iris and the anterior 
 capsule of the lens. The festooned appearance of the membrane is 
 due to the fact that the intermediate portions of the iris are still free 
 from the capsule and are capable of dilatation. 
 
 FIG. 56. 
 
 FIG. 57. 
 
 Fig. 57 shows the left eye of the same subject, in which the effect 
 of the atropine has been sufficient to sever the attachments from the 
 lens, the remains of which are seen on the anterior capsule. Care 
 should be taken not to confound the remains of such attachments with 
 cataractous opacities. In both eyes oblique illumination, even when 
 the pupil was undilated, showed that besides the synechiae, which 
 came clearly into view, there was a very delicate membranous opacity 
 which extended over the central portions of the capsule. This was 
 barely visible with the direct light from the ophthalmoscope. 
 
 Fig. 58. This represents one of the many forms of cortical cata- 
 ract. The disturbance is situated in the anterior portions of the lens, 
 and in the centre of the field of pupil. For this reason the opacity 
 does not appear to change its position from the centre of the field, and 
 there are no parallactic displacements in its relation to the borders of 
 the iris, whatever may be the position or movements of the eye of 
 either patient or observer.
 
 EXAMINATION OF THE MEDIA OF THE EYE. 165 
 
 Fig. 59. This also represents another form of anterior cortical 
 cataract. The disturbances here consist of four stripes of opaque 
 cortical substance running from the different quarters of the equator 
 of the lens toward its centre, where they are united by a fifth. There 
 is, moreover, an isolated stripe running from below upward toward 
 
 Fia. 58. FIG. 59. 
 
 the centre. In looking at the central portion of these disturbances 
 they would maintain their respective positions on movements of 
 the head. Inasmuch as they are in the plane of the iris and centre 
 of the field of pupil, their outer extremities would, however, have 
 a slight parallactic displacement in relation to the borders of the 
 iris, and the stripes would appear to become longer or shorter, accord- 
 ing to the direction in which the eye was turned. Suppose, for ex- 
 ample, that the isolated stripe is in the lower and outer quadrant of 
 the lens, and the eye is looking directly forward. If, now, the eye is 
 moved outward, the stripe will appear to move in the same direction 
 and to become a little shorter. If the eye is turned inward, then the 
 opacity moves inward, and at the same time lengthens. 
 
 When the same or similar disturbances are found in the posterior 
 layers of the lens, they form a posterior instead of an anterior cortical 
 cataract, and present in the main the same ophthalmoscopic picture. 
 As the opacities in this case lie at a considerable distance behind the 
 plane of the iris, they can not be in focus at the same time with this 
 membrane, as is the case in the anterior cortical or capsular cataract. 
 These deep-seated disturbances seem to lie within and beyond the 
 pupil and in its central portions, provided the eye looks straight to- 
 ward the observer. On movement of the eye, however, the opacities 
 make a greater or less excursion, according to the distance that they 
 lie behind the plane of the iris. They always move, too, in respect 
 to the iris, in a direction opposite to that in which the eye of the 
 patient is moved, while it will be remembered that the disturbances 
 in the anterior layers move in the same direction ; moreover, the
 
 166 
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 opacities, as a whole, present a surface which is concave toward the 
 observer. 
 
 The image produced by the catoptric test is interrupted when it 
 comes over the cataractous portions of the lens lying in front of the 
 posterior capsule. Of course, the image from the anterior capsule 
 will never in any case be interfered with, as the reflecting surface 
 must lie in front of all lenticular disturbances, unless indeed the cap- 
 sule itself should become so altered by disease as to give no reflection. 
 
 There are still other cases where the anterior and posterior cortical 
 layers are affected at the same time, and here we get the ophthalmo- 
 scopic appearances which have just been described, united so that 
 upon lateral movements of the eye of the patient the opacities of the 
 two surfaces appear to pass each other. Fig. 60 represents such a 
 cataract, the deeper black opacities representing the disturbances on 
 the plane of the iris are seen to be in focus, while the most posterior, 
 
 FIG. 61. 
 
 from being out of focus, appear of a lighter hue and of a less defined 
 shape. The drawing also shows where the iris has been torn from 
 its attachments by a blow, allowing the light from the f undus to pass 
 through the rent. 
 
 Fig. 61. This illustrates peripherical disturbances in the cortical 
 substance, and shows how important it is to make a thorough exami- 
 nation of the periphery of the lens when disturbances of vision, 
 however slight, are complained of. In this case the eye was myopic 
 9 D, and vision had been gradually decreasing for some years. In 
 ordinary daylight and an undilated pupil, no abnormal appearances 
 whatever were visible. The opacities lay in both the anterior and 
 posterior cortical layers of the lens, and the ophthalmoscopic appear- 
 ances were such as are represented in the drawing. These changes 
 were supposed to be due to a long-continued form of choroiditis. 
 The most interesting point in the case is the fact that, after a long-
 
 EXAMINATION OF THE MEDIA OF THE EYE. 
 
 167 
 
 continued treatment, examinations with the ophthalmoscope showed a 
 gradual decrease in the disturbances, till finally at the end of five 
 years they entirely disappeared, " no trace," according to Jaeger, " being 
 left." I have myself often seen these peripheric opacities, especially in 
 near-sighted eyes, remain in statu quo for years, and have occasionally 
 convinced myself that they had gradually become reduced in size. 
 I have, moreover, seen a case where, as Jaeger * asserts, opacities in 
 the lens have entirely disappeared. 
 
 Fig. 62 is of the same character as Fig. 61, only more pronounced. 
 
 FIG. 62. 
 
 FIG. 63. 
 
 The reader must bear in mind that these cortical disturbances are 
 not always clearly defined with sharp pointed processes, but, on the 
 contrary, these may be obtuse or the whole disturbance a more or less 
 ill-defined mass, as in Fig. 63, which represents an anterior and poste- 
 rior cortical cataract. 
 
 Fig. 64 is an example of a 
 zonular cataract, which, as will 
 be remembered, consists of an 
 opaque layer of lenticular fibres 
 lying between the nucleus of 
 the lens on the one hand and 
 the outer layers of the cortical 
 substance on the other, both of 
 these latter having preserved 
 their transparency. Usually, as 
 
 in the present case, the opacity is so delicate as to allow the light 
 from the fundus to pass through it. Thus the central portions of 
 the envelope present but little contrast with the rest of the yellowish- 
 red field of pupil ; and the portion between the fine dark circle in 
 the drawing and the borders of the iris is seen to be transparent. 
 
 * " Wiener Zeitschrift fur praktische Heilkunde," 1861, Nos. 31, 32, E. Jaeger. 
 " Ophth. Hand Atlas," p. 9, Taf. II., Fig. 9, E. Jaeger. " Annales d'Oculistique," 
 B. i., iii., p. 201, Galezowski.
 
 168 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 From the angle at which the return rays strike the edges of the 
 zonular envelope, these from total reflection appear of a much darker 
 hue, and thus we get the appearance given in the drawing of a dark 
 circle surrounding a central portion of a delicate reddish tinge. The 
 size of the circle will, of course, vary, according as the opacity is 
 nearer the circumference or centre of the lens. So, too, will the con- 
 trast between it and the included space vary in proportion to the 
 density of the disturbance. Zonular cataract may be accompanied 
 with changes in the cortical substance, and then it forms a mixed 
 cataract. 
 
 The ordinary senile, or nuclear cataract, when it is most marked 
 in the central portions of the lens, gives very much the same ophthal- 
 moscopic picture as that just described. As the opacity increases, 
 however, it loses the characteristic bright centre with a circular bor- 
 der, and becomes a more or less dense and dark mass with radiating 
 spokes. 
 
 Dislocation of the Lens. Under ordinary physiological conditions 
 the borders of the lens are not rendered visible with the ophthalmo- 
 scope. This, however, may be the case, as, for example, when the 
 iris is wanting either congenitally, or when it has been removed either 
 in part or whole by surgical interference or accident, or when it has 
 been separated from its attachments, or, under some conditions, when 
 it has been dilated to its fullest extent with atropine, or is so wanting 
 in pigment as to allow large quantities of light from the f undus to 
 pass through it, as with albinos ; and, finally, when the lens itself has 
 from any cause become dislocated. Under these conditions the bor- 
 ders of the lens reveal themselves in two distinct ways, according as 
 we view them with reflected or transmitted light. 
 
 Suppose any of the above conditions suitable for the observation, 
 such as a dilatation of the pupil to its maximum or a perfectly clean 
 iridectomy, exists. When light is thrown into such a field of pupil 
 by oblique illumination, the great mass of rays will, of course, pass 
 directly through the lens into the vitreous beyond ; but the small por- 
 tion of those which strike upon the very borders of the lens will, after 
 passing through the intervening portions, meet the posterior capsule 
 at such an angle that they will be totally reflected, and thus come 
 back to the observer's eye ; consequently the very outermost limits of 
 the lens will appear brilliantly illuminated. We see, therefore, the 
 borders of the lens under oblique illumination as a finely drawn and 
 glittering circle. This is very beautifully marked when the lens is 
 entirely dislocated into the anterior chamber, preserving, as it some- 
 times does, its perfect transparency. On the other hand, when we
 
 EXAMINATION OF THE MEDIA OF THE EYE. 
 
 169 
 
 use the ophthalmoscope, the rays which return from the fundus and 
 strike upon the borders of the lens after passing through the posterior 
 portions, meet the anterior capsule at such an angle that they are 
 totally reflected and pass back again into the eye. The observer does 
 not receive these rays, and consequently the border of the lens appears 
 to him dark, and he sees the lens surrounded by a narrow dark rim. 
 When, however, the lens is entirely dislocated into the anterior cham- 
 ber, so as to expose the borders of the lens for its entire circuit, we 
 can get, for the reasons stated above, the glittering ring even with the 
 ophthalmoscope, by rotation and displacement of the mirror, com- 
 bined with the movements of the eye on the part of the patient. 
 The illuminated space between the dark border of the lens and the 
 ciliary processes marks the position of the zonula of Zinn. Usually 
 this membrane is so transparent as to be invisible ; but it has been 
 asserted that under favorable conditions the folding of the zonula can 
 be followed in the form of grayish stripes from the ciliary processes to 
 the borders of the lens. I have myself seen something which sug- 
 gests the above appearance on the marginal portions of the lens, but 
 never any such appearances in the intervening space between its bor- 
 ders and ciliary processes. 
 
 The appearances just mentioned as to the borders of the lens will 
 be more marked when the lens is dislocated, so that a part of its bor- 
 der passes through the field of the 
 pupil, as will be seen from Fig. 
 65. In such a condition the re- 
 fraction would be very different in 
 the two sections, and there would 
 be, when the eye of the observer 
 was placed so as to receive rays 
 from each section, a doubling of 
 the details of the fundus. The 
 displacement of the lens is usu- 
 ally downward, but may be in 
 any direction. The iris is usually 
 
 forced somewhat from its plane, and there is generally more or less 
 trembling of the membrane. 
 
 Instead of a partial dislocation this may be total, either into the 
 anterior chamber or into the vitreous humor, where it sinks to the 
 bottom of the eye, and presents the appearance, according to the 
 amount of transparency which it has maintained, of either a pellucid 
 or dark lenticular mass. 
 
 Fracture of the Capsule of the Lens. Some ten years ago Dr. 
 
 FIG. 65.
 
 170 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 Dyer published a paper * in which he described the fracture of the 
 capsule and substance of the lens from violent hanging. The first 
 subject examined was Probst, the famous murderer. The examina- 
 tion immediately before death showed nothing at all abnormal ; that 
 immediately after gave with the mirror the following results in brief : 
 
 " In the right eye there was a line running transversely across the 
 lens and about a line below the centre. From this at various angles 
 ran short and long, but very fine lines. These ran close together, but 
 in no regular arrangement. The transverse line had the appearance 
 of a crack in a clear piece of ice. It was evidently a fracture, involv- 
 ing the anterior capsule and extending in a horizontal plane backward 
 into the substance of the lens." 
 
 " The left eye showed a line difficult to distinguish but to be made 
 out with certainty, corresponding in position with that of the right 
 eye. It was undoubtedly a fracture of the anterior capsule. Experi- 
 ments were afterward made on dogs with similar results." 
 
 I mention these examinations of Dr. Dyer because I have several 
 times seen very similar appearances from similar causes, that is, from 
 violent concussions, of which the following may serve as an example : 
 
 A gentleman while driving was thrown violently from his car- 
 riage, striking, when he fell, directly upon his head. He consulted 
 me a little later for a loss of vision in the left eye, which he knew to 
 be the result of the accident. Examination showed that there had 
 been an extensive rupture of the choroid. The media of the eye 
 were, however, perfectly clear, and no disturbance in the lens could 
 be detected. In the right eye, however, there was a delicate split- 
 like opacity in the anterior capsule, which extended from the lower 
 periphery of the lens toward its centre, so as to reach a little higher 
 than the border of the undilated pupil. The rest of the lens was 
 perfectly transparent. Hardly visible at first, this delicate opacity 
 became in the course of a few weeks much more pronounced, and 
 with the ophthalmoscope gave all the appearances that would a single 
 and very delicate spiculum of an ordinary cortical cataract. Whether 
 this disturbance was seated in the capsule or just below it could not 
 be determined with exactness, though from the fact that it never in- 
 creased in size it was inferred that it must be in the membrane, and 
 that the continuity of this had not been broken, otherwise the lens 
 would have become cataractous, which was not the case at least for the 
 three years that the patient was under observation. During this time 
 the opacity neither increased in size nor shape, or was the perfect 
 transparency of the rest of the lens interfered with in the least. When 
 * " Trans. Amer. Ophth. Soc.," 1866, p. 13.
 
 EXAMINATION OF THE MEDIA OF THE EYE. 171 
 
 Been again, six years after the accident, all signs of an} 7 fracture had 
 disappeared. 
 
 I have seen several such cases, the results of injury. 
 
 An attempt has been made by many writers to divide cataracts 
 into two great classes, the stationary and progressive. This classifi- 
 cation should not, however, be taken too literally, as all cataracts have 
 a tendency to increase, whatever may be their kind or situation. All 
 that can be said is that certain forms, as a rule, show this tendency 
 less than others, especially the zonular and polar varieties, which often 
 remain unchanged for years, or even forever. Still, too much stress 
 in the way of a favorable prognosis should not be laid, either from the 
 situation or nature of the disturbance. 
 
 The process in the formation of cataract in elderly people usually 
 begins at the nucleus, which separates, as it were, from the cortical 
 substance, and becomes denser and more opaque. This is followed in 
 time by a cloudiness of the more superficial layers, till the whole lens 
 becomes cataractous. When a nuclear cataract appears with a cortical 
 one, it is called a mixed cataract. In young people, on the other 
 hand, the disturbance usually begins in the cortical substance, and 
 thence extends through the lens, forming what is called a soft cata- 
 ract. 
 
 VITREOUS HUMOE. 
 
 The vitreous humor in a state of health is, under the ophthalmo- 
 scope, a perfectly transparent body. It can, however, from the effect 
 of morbid processes, become the seat of opacities which may vary in 
 size and shape from the merest particle or filament to coarse, broad 
 bands, and from the thinnest possible web, which hardly interferes 
 in the slightest degree with the illumination of the fundus, to the 
 densest membrane which may exclude all light from entering the 
 deeper parts of the eye. 
 
 As in the lens and aqueous humor these opacities may be of a gen- 
 eral or diffuse nature, or circumscribed masses or membranes suspended 
 or floating about in an otherwise transparent medium. From this fact 
 they are usually classed as fixed and movable, conditions which are 
 often important in a diagnostic point of view as to the true character 
 of the vitreous, and whether in a given case it be of normal consist- 
 ency or in a " fluid " condition. 
 
 Whatever may be the nature of these bodies in the vitreous, and 
 whether they spring from the formation of bands and membranes of 
 the nature of connective tissue, or be the results of morbid exudations 
 or haemorrhage, they appear, as a rule, black with the ophthalmo- 
 scope, because they are seen by transmitted light in contrast with the
 
 172 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 surrounding medium, which is transparent, or, in other words, they 
 are interruptions in an otherwise illuminated field. It is only occa- 
 sionally that a membrane, when of considerable size or density and 
 movable, so turns on itself as to reflect the light which strikes upon it. 
 When this takes place, that part of the membrane from which the 
 light is reflected changes from a black to a darkish gray, or even a 
 grayish-white tinge. The same is true of bits of metal suspended in 
 the vitreous, which frequently preserve their metallic glitter when- 
 ever the angle of incidence and reflection is of such a degree as to 
 carry the reflected ray to the observer's eye. "When this is not the 
 case, and especially when encapsulated, they appear of a very dark 
 hue or even black. 
 
 Another remarkable exception to the rule that opacities in the 
 vitreous appear black with the ophthalmoscope, is the effect due to 
 minute particles of cholesterine which, under the movements of the 
 eye, flash into view like minute motes of light, and then disappear to 
 be replaced by others in the same or in a little different position. I 
 have seen an eye so full of these minute particles as to resemble, more 
 closely than anything I can think of, one of those globular paper 
 weights which represent a mimic landscape in a snow-storm, and 
 which upon being reversed are filled with a myriad of small and feath- 
 ery particles. These particles of cholesterine may exist with an other- 
 wise perfectly clear vitreous and normal condition of the other parts 
 of the eye, and with perfect or nearly perfect vision. 
 
 Such being the general aspect of all kinds of opacities in the vit- 
 reous, it remains to study a little more in detail the three classes into 
 which they are commonly divided. 
 
 Diffuse Opacities. That such a condition may and does occur 
 there can be no question, but that it occurs as frequently as is alleged 
 I am inclined to doubt, and from my own experience and frequent 
 mistakes I would strenuously recommend the observer to exhaust 
 every method and detail of examination as to the condition of the an- 
 terior media, the cornea, aqueous humor, and lens, and then the vitre- 
 ous itself, for delicate stationary membranes before adopting such a 
 diagnosis. To this end I would remind the reader that any existing 
 error of refraction in his own eye should be corrected, and that an 
 accurate adjustment of the accommodation, aided if necessary by the 
 proper glasses, should be obtained for different levels or antero-poste- 
 rior planes in the vitreous. The observer will often be surprised to 
 see, after a careful examination of the anterior media, that what he 
 had taken for a delicate diffused opacity in the vitreous resolves itself 
 into a gauze-like but stationary membrane, which is only to be recog-
 
 EXAMINATION OF THE MEDIA OF THE EYE. 173 
 
 nized when the plane in which it lies is accurately in focus. "When 
 this takes place the delicate membrane then betrays itself, much in 
 the same manner and with much the same appearance as does the 
 film on an unclean slide under the microscope ; that is, with here and 
 there a minute dark speck, and here and there a fine, hair-like line or 
 lines running transversely across the field. 
 
 Diffuse opacity of the vitreous, when it is really present, shows 
 itself rather by the effect which it has upon the distinctness of the 
 fundus beyond, than by any marked peculiarity of its own, just as a 
 delicate mist makes itself more apparent from the effect on surround- 
 ing objects than it does from its own constituent elements. Here, 
 again, under favorable circumstances, such as a good light and con- 
 siderable enlargement produced by a somewhat strong convex glass 
 behind the ophthalmoscope, this diffuse opacity may be made to 
 resolve itself into small definite particles or shreds of membranes, or 
 both. 
 
 The want of clearness of the fundus from diffused opacity of 
 the vitreous may vary from a scarcely perceptible want of definition 
 of the details of the background of the eye to their almost total ob- 
 scuration, in which the optic nerve is barely discernible as an indefinite 
 white spot or disk surrounded by a dulled and blurred background, 
 with no vessels apparent, or, if apparent, only to be detected upon the 
 disk itself. When, however, the obscurity is as great as this, care is 
 required on the observer's part not to confound a general haziness of 
 the cornea, especially in glaucomatous affections, with that in the 
 vitreous. It must be borne in mind, too, that any want of transpar- 
 ency in the vitreous shows itself more readily with the upright im- 
 age. Indeed, with the bright glare of the inverted image, these 
 delicate and diffuse opacities often escape detection. 
 
 As regards the etiology of these diffuse troubles, they may be said 
 to be due, as a rule, to some form of choroiditis, especially that of a 
 low type such as the serous variety. Mauthner says that they may 
 also occur in glaucoma. 
 
 Unfortunately for the beginner, no picture gives any adequate 
 representation of these delicate and subtile changes in the vitreous, 
 the most difficult to diagnosticate of all its troubles, and this, too, 
 not only in regard to the media lying in front of the vitreous body, 
 but also in regard to some morbid conditions of the membranes be- 
 yond, especially those of the retina. It is often extremely difficult, 
 sometimes impossible, to differentiate between a want of sharp defini- 
 tion in the fundus coming from a slight disturbance in the transpar- 
 ency of the deeper portions of the vitreous and that arising from a
 
 1T4: TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 delicate and almost imperceptible haziness of the retina, that is, from 
 some slight cedema, such as I feel convinced occurs in amblyopia po- 
 tatorum, and other low types of retinal inflammation. Of some value, 
 then, as a diagnostic mark is the diminution or entire want of the 
 light-streak on the centre of the retinal vessels. Disturbances lying 
 in front of the retina will, it is true, obscure to a certain degree the 
 brilliancy of the image beyond, and thus proportionately reduce the 
 brightness of the light-streak. This will, however, remain comparative- 
 ly well marked, even when the general obscuration is of a considerable 
 degree ; w T hile, on the other hand, should the want of transparency 
 be in the retina itself, the slightest oedema will cause the light-streak 
 to be diminished in size and brilliancy, or to disappear entirely. 
 More will be found in regard to this matter under the head of " The 
 Light-Streak as a Diagnostic Mark," Part II. 
 
 Movable Opacities. These may be of any size or shape, varying 
 from small, circumscribed black masses, with or without processes of 
 different size and length, to long, snake-like membranes, which move 
 with an undulatory motion through the vitreous on the slightest move- 
 ment of the observed eye. Yet, notwithstanding this freedom of 
 movement and extent of the excursion, which would lead one to be- 
 lieve that these membranes are entirely free, they are often, if not as 
 a rule, attached by filamentary bands to some peripheric portion of 
 the fundus. When of moderate size, and present in considerable 
 numbers, these movable opacities often produce the effect, as well to 
 the observed as observing eye, of what is usually known as the mother 
 in vinegar. 
 
 Fig. 66 is taken from a chromo-lithograph by Jaeger, "Hand 
 Atlas," Taf. III., Fig. 21. It represents a myopic eye affected with 
 
 inflammation of the choroid with 
 opacities in the vitreous. The 
 lenticular system was perfectly 
 clear, but the vitreous was, for 
 the most part, in a fluid condi- 
 tion. When the eye remained 
 quiet there seemed to be, with 
 the ophthalmoscope, a uniform 
 
 haze over the entire field. If the 
 
 FIG. 66. eye was moved, however, even to 
 
 a slight degree, a great number 
 
 of very minute as well as some larger opacities of a black or dark- 
 brown color came into view, which rose and fell in a cloud-like man- 
 ner, especially in the anterior and middle portions of the eye. When
 
 EXAMINATION" OF THE MEDIA OF THE EYE. 
 
 175 
 
 the eye became quiet again, the opacities gradually sank, the larger 
 more quickly than the smaller ones. The back of the eye appeared 
 less clear than usual, but still all the details of the fundus could be 
 plainly seen somewhat veiled to be sure, but still sufficiently distinct 
 and in their normal color. 
 
 Fig. 67 (Jaeger, " Hand Atlas," Taf. III., Fig. 22) represents an 
 eye in which there was inflammation of the retina and choroid with 
 opacities in the vitreous. The examination with the ophthalmoscope 
 showed that the lens was perfectly clear, as was, indeed, the vitreous 
 body itself when the eye was motionless. The details of the fundus 
 under this condition of rest preserved their usual clearness and defini- 
 tion. On movement of the eye, however, the opacities in the fluid 
 
 FIG. 67. 
 
 FIG. 68. 
 
 vitreous floated up at once into the field of the pupil as compact and 
 untransparent masses of a nearly black hue, and of various sizes and 
 shapes. On the eye becoming quiet again these masses gravitated to 
 the bottom of the eye in the equatorial region, and passed completely 
 out of view behind the iris. 
 
 Fig. 68 (Jaeger, Taf. III., Fig. 23) is of the same character, only 
 the opacities are larger and more pronounced. In this case the bottom 
 of the eye was obscured, and the details of the fundus were veiled by 
 the thick masses which only permitted the light to penetrate in re- 
 duced quantities to the back of the eye. 
 
 Under the head of movable opacities may also be classed clots of 
 blood, the result of haemorrhage, either from disease or injury, which 
 may assume the shape and form of circumscribed masses or mem- 
 branes, such as are formed from other causes, and it is exceedingly 
 difficult sometimes to say whether the disturbances in the vitreous are 
 due to haemorrhage or arise from other formations. Mauthner ob- 
 serves that, when due to bleeding, the edges of the opacities have a 
 reddish tinge* This I have never noticed, these masses always ap- 
 
 * "Lehrbuch der Ophthalmoscopie," p. 151.
 
 176 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 pearing black, as they necessarily must, unless, indeed, they turn at 
 such an angle that the light returning from the fundus should so 
 strike them as to be reflected again to the observer's eye, which, so 
 far as my experience goes, never happens. There is nothing which so 
 excludes the light from entering the eye as an extensive haemorrhage 
 into the vitreous and in the immediate neighborhood of the lens. 
 Not the faintest glimmer of the fundus can then be had ; the pupil- 
 lary space preserving a jetty blackness even when condensed light is 
 thrown into it by the oblique method. Sometimes, however, we do 
 succeed by this last method in getting a reddish hue, when the pupil 
 is dilated to its utmost, and the condensing lens is so held as to get 
 the greatest angle of incidence and reflection, and especially is this 
 true when the clot is of recent origin. 
 
 The same want of transparency that exists with haemorrhage is 
 also found in purulent exudations into the vitreous, arising either 
 from injuries or disease, especially that from metastatic choroiditis, as 
 seen in cerebro-spinal and puerperal troubles. Whenever, therefore, 
 the pupil appears with the ophthalmoscope of a uniform blackness, 
 and participation of the anterior media have been excluded by differ- 
 ential diagnosis, it is necessary to have recourse to oblique illumina- 
 tion to resolve the obscurity into its true color and shape. Even with 
 this aid it is sometimes impossible to get a reflection from these abnor- 
 mal formations unless they happen to be in the most anterior parts 
 of the vitreous, that is, in close proximity to the posterior parts of the 
 lens. 
 
 Fixed Opacities. These present very much the same appear- 
 ances as the movable ones would if deprived of motion, for like them 
 they may be either circumscribed black points or bodies of various 
 size and shape with or without numerous processes, which may be so 
 arranged as to form with each other the appearance of bands stretched 
 across the vitreous, either in the same or in different planes ; or, again, 
 they may be so interwoven with each other as to give the appearance 
 of a more or less regular network or cobweb, which may be either 
 coarse or dense or of extreme tenuity. A favorite place for the forma- 
 tion of these bands is just behind the teleform fossa ; especially are 
 they found after an operation for cataract. They then appear to 
 start from the neighborhood of the anterior parts of the ciliary body, 
 and run backward in converging lines toward the centre of the eye. 
 That they are due to some low morbid process which had also affected 
 the nutrition of the lens, and were present before the operation and 
 not the result of the healing process, would seem probable, at least in 
 many cases. On the other hand, they often form after the operation
 
 EXAMINATION OF THE MEDIA OF THE EYE. 177 
 
 has been performed, sometimes even after a considerable interval has 
 elapsed, either as the result of a mild inflammatory action following 
 the operation, or sometimes without any apparent cause. At any rate, 
 they are the despair of the surgeon as well as of the patient, as they 
 often resist any and every effort at removal, closing at once over the 
 passage made by the needle. These stationary opacities in the vitre- 
 ous, if of any density, require but little skill or care in determining 
 their true position and nature. But, as already pointed out under 
 diifuse opacities, it is very different with these delicate stationary 
 membranes, which offer so little resistance to the light as to appear 
 perfectly transparent, except under peculiar conditions, and whose 
 only expression of existence, on a cursory examination, is the vague 
 and indescribable want of definition that they produce on the brill- 
 iancy of the general fundus. 
 
 Sometimes membranes of considerable density, either extended su- 
 perficially or in the form of broad bands interwoven together so as to 
 make a coarse network, are seen to protrude from different parts of 
 the fundus into the otherwise clear vitreous. These give a grayish 
 or greenish reflex, according to the angle under which they are seen, 
 and are due evidently to some hypertrophy of the connective tissue, 
 which would seem to be the product of some inflammatory action in 
 the retina. They may become vascularized, and then, especially when 
 movable, present a very beautiful appearance as they sway to and fro 
 with every movement of the eye. These membranes, though com- 
 mon enough to be mentioned by all authors, are nevertheless com- 
 paratively rare. I have myself seen some dozen cases, and in two of 
 these the point of origin could be traced directly to the retina. In 
 the first case a delicate gauze-like membrane stretched across the tri- 
 angle made by the first bifurcation of one of the ascending veins after 
 it had left the nerve. It was of delicate structure, so that the red 
 reflex from the fundus was but slightly dimmed. It lay in a plane 
 close to the retina, and its surface was covered by a delicate and sprig- 
 like ramification of vessels which seemed to be entirely of venous ori- 
 gin. In the second case observed by me, the membrane was of larger 
 extent, and apparently arose from along the course of one of the lower 
 veins at a considerable distance from the nerve. Like the first, it was 
 of gauze-like texture, and was covered with small vessels which had 
 the appearance and ramification of minute veins. The membrane 
 moved freely under every motion of the eye, and bore a close resem- 
 blance, as a whole, to one of the more delicate sea-weeds, both in the 
 gracefulness of its motion and the delicate tracings formed by the ves- 
 sels upon its surface. 
 12
 
 178 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSOOPY. 
 
 Dr. Strawbridge * gives a description and drawing (Fig. 69) of an 
 extensive membrane arising from the deeper-seated portions of the 
 eye, and protruding into the vitreous to such a degree that its anterior 
 limits could be viewed by oblique illumination. The membrane, 
 which was traversed by numerous vessels, was dense and white in 
 
 FIG. 69. 
 
 some places and attenuated and feathery in others, and through these 
 latter the fundus could be seen beyond, of a normal color and appear- 
 ance. The retinal veins were, however, tortuous and overfilled. 
 
 Jaeger f gives a drawing of an extensive membranous formation 
 which surrounds the optic nerve like the frame to a picture, and then 
 spreads out especially in a downward direction over the course of the 
 principal vessels. The new growth is dense and opaque in some 
 places, and attenuated and transparent in others, allowing the fundus 
 to be seen in its normal condition. The web seems to be combined 
 of layers and bands of connective tissue, so as to form superficial ex- 
 tensions and bands in different places, producing a play of light and 
 shade which gives to it a reticulated or honeycombed appearance. 
 The optic nerve seen through the central aperture of the membrane is 
 much reddened, though the membrane itself does not seem to be the 
 seat of any vessels of new formation. 
 
 * " Trans. Amer. Ophth. Soc.," 1875, p. 304. 
 
 t " Ophthal. Hand- Atlas," 1869, Tab. XVIIL, Fig. 84.
 
 EXAMINATION OF THE MEDIA OF THE EYE. 179 
 
 Jaeger describes this membrane as others have under the head of 
 troubles in the vitreous ; but it is evident in all these cases, as well 
 from the ophthalmoscopic picture as from the descriptions, that these 
 membranes are rather due to some form of retinitis, such as prolifera- 
 tion of the adventitia or the connective-tissue elements of the limitans 
 interna, than to a morbid process which affects in a primary manner 
 the vitreous humor. 
 
 These growths or membranes are evidently of the same nature, 
 only exaggerated in form, as the hypertrophy of the radial fibres and 
 connective-tissue elements of the limitans, which project from the 
 inner surface of the retina into the vitreous, and which have been 
 described by Iwanoff.* 
 
 In this connection I might mention a case which at first sight I took 
 for a membrane in the vitreous, but which, upon an exhaustive examina- 
 tion, I was inclined to look upon as a fold of the retina itself. This fold 
 extended from just beyond the macula lutea in a median line half-way 
 toward the ora serrata. When the fold lifted itself up and down under 
 movements of the eye, the transition from the normal part of the retina 
 to the fold could be plainly seen. The vessels, too, could be observed 
 to run over from the adjacent retina uninterrupted in their course, and 
 were evidently the ordinary vessels of the retina and not those of new 
 formation. This deformity was evidently congenital. Both eyes were 
 highly myopic, and vision very much reduced. The patient was a 
 young boy of eight years of age, and did not come of myopic parents. 
 
 Neoplasms, strictly speaking, do not develop themselves in the 
 vitreous proper ; still, Becker f mentions a remarkable case of a diaph- 
 anous substance forming in the vitreous, and provided with vessels 
 which seemed to have a connection with the retinal veins. 
 
 The same writer also mentions two cases in which masses projected 
 into the vitreous, one of which was an abscess upon which vessels 
 could be plainly observed, while upon the second, which lay close be- 
 hind the lens, the vessels could be plainly seen with the naked eye 
 running from the periphery toward the centre of the abscess. In this 
 case, from the first appearance of a general pinkish hue to the detec- 
 tion of individual vessels, there was but the space of four days, while 
 .the vessels had entirely disappeared after the thirteenth day. 
 
 The writer once saw a very peculiar formation in the vitreous of a 
 gelatinous nature, which resembled in consistency what is seen in the 
 anterior chamber in spongy iritis. It gave the impression that certain 
 parts of the vitreous had solidified into a spongy mass while other 
 
 * " Archiv fflr Ophth," Bd. xi., Abth. i., p. 134. 
 t "Bericht ueber der Wiener Augenklinik," p. 106.
 
 180 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 parts retained their normal clearness. It did not resemble the exuda- 
 tion found in metastatic choroiditis, but rather that of coagulated 
 white of egg. Through the clear places the fundus could be seen in 
 certain districts as if through loop-holes, while it was completely con- 
 cealed in others by the opaque substance. 
 
 There were no vessels at all in the mass, nor did it suggest a tumor 
 in any way, unless it might be one of those very rare cases of glioma, 
 starting from the limitans interna. 
 
 The vision was reduced to perception of light, and, as there was 
 marked ciliary injection and some photophobia in the well eye, enu- 
 cleation was proposed but refused, so that the true nature of the for- 
 mation could not be determined. 
 
 Abscesses of the Vitreous. These are described by Yon Graefe 
 and others as giving with the ophthalmoscope, when the vitreous still 
 preserves sufficiently its transparency, the appearance of globular, half- 
 transparent or more or less opaque, and jelly-like bodies, which are 
 attached to the inner membranes of the eye, and sometimes provided 
 with a neck-like projection. The formation and retrogression of these 
 bodies, when the condition of the media will permit, may, according 
 to these authors, be watched from day to day with the instrument. I 
 myself have never seen such an appearance with the ophthalmoscope, 
 though I did observe, on one occasion, a more or less general yellow 
 reflex with the oblique illumination. This seemed to come from the 
 deeper portions of the eye, and proved on section at the time of enu- 
 cleation to be due to an abscess the size of a small pea in the very 
 centre of the vitreous. 
 
 A diffuse purulent infiltration of the vitreous can only be surmised 
 by the instrument by a total loss of reflex from the fundus. With the 
 ophthalmoscope, where the angle of incident and reflected light is 
 very small, we miss the yellowish-greenish reflex obtained under dif- 
 fuse daylight and by oblique illumination, especially when the trouble 
 is situated in the anterior parts of the vitreous. 
 
 Foreign Bodies in the Vitreous. These follow the general rule of 
 all foreign elements of an opaque nature in the media, and appear 
 black with the ophthalmoscope, unless they happen to be of a metallic 
 nature. Even then, bits of highly polished metal may look black, un-. 
 less it so happens that they are either themselves fixed in such a posi- 
 tion as to produce the right angle of reflection or this latter is brought 
 about under the varying movements of the eye. Often light scales of 
 metal seem to be suspended in the vitreous as if imbedded in a gelat- 
 inous substance of sufficient consistency to support them. As a rule, 
 however, 'a careful examination brings to light one or more delicate
 
 EXAMINATION OF THE MEDIA OF THE EYE. 181 
 
 thread-like attachments, which can be often traced far toward the pe- 
 riphery, and sometimes even to the inner membranes. And especially 
 is this the case when the foreign body lies in the anterior half of the 
 globe, and near the posterior surface of the lens. Sometimes these 
 bodies are thus suspended at only one end, and then swing about in 
 the fluid vitreous, occasionally sending out a metallic lustre as they 
 present the proper angle of reflection, and then becoming again per- 
 fectly black. These foreign bodies may become either partially or 
 entirely encapsulated, the membrane surrounding them being either 
 opaque, as is the rule, and thus concealing entirely the true nature of 
 the substance, or remaining transparent enough, which is very rare, to 
 allow the body to be seen through it. According to Graefe, even the 
 track made by the passage of these bodies through the vitreous can 
 sometimes be traced a few hours after the injury by a delicate want of 
 transparency, which may subsequently become a defined membranous 
 extension or canal. 
 
 The process by which these bodies become enveloped by mem- 
 branes may extend either from the periphery toward the foreign body, 
 thus gradually concentrating around it, as described by Jaeger and 
 Berlin, or the membrane may form directly round the particle with- 
 out the slightest participation of the inner membranes so far as can be 
 detected either by the ophthalmoscope or on section a fact which 
 must be looked upon as strongly corroborative of the view that the 
 vitreous body is capable of independent morbid processes of an in- 
 flammatory nature. 
 
 One thing is certainly peculiar, and that is that bodies of consid- 
 erable size, and whose specific gravity is greater than the vitreous, 
 should be suspended in it, even when it is admitted that they are held 
 in the position which they occupy by investing membranes and sup- 
 porting bands. Since time is required for the formation of these 
 bands, it would naturally appear that long before they could have been 
 formed such objects as shot, bits of iron or glass, would have sunk from 
 . their own weight to the floor of the globe, allowing even for the jelly- 
 like consistency of the vitreous. It would seem, therefore, more ra- 
 tional to suppose that they had been invested by membranes of new 
 formation, and had been gradually lifted into their suspended position 
 by the subsequent contraction of the bands, perhaps along the very 
 course by which they had advanced into the eye. 
 
 A very curious case occurred in my own practice which, I think, 
 can only be explained in some such manner, although even this expla- 
 nation seems far-fetched, even if not impossible. 
 
 A gentleman of middle age was shooting in the company of a
 
 182 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 friend, who, mistaking his position, discharged his gun in such a direc- 
 tion that a single shot, probably a glancing one, struck the right eye. 
 The patient fell to the ground, probably from sudden f aintness. On 
 getting up he felt the pain of the blow in and around the eye, but 
 found that he could still see with it, almost if not quite as clearly as 
 with the uninjured one. On the following day he came to town, and a 
 careful examination revealed the following conditions : At the outer 
 and upper angle of the globe, and just over the ciliary region, was a 
 small elevation of tissue, with a few enlarged vessels running over it. 
 This was no doubt the spot of entrance. The wound was, however, 
 closed completely. The iris responded freely to light, and, except the 
 trifling wound alluded to above, there was absolutely no external mani- 
 festation that the eye had been injured. Vision was perfect, Y = --. 
 There was no limitation of the field, and not a trace of any injury to 
 the internal parts of the eye could be detected with the most thorough 
 ophthalmoscopic examination. The examination was repeated on the 
 following day, under atropine, for the purpose of definitely answering 
 the question whether the missile had actually penetrated the globe. 
 Nothing could be seen of it. Two alternatives presented themselves 
 either the shot had entered the eye, and imbedded itself in the ciliary 
 region without penetrating deeply into the tissue, or, as it certainly 
 seemed more probable from the total absence of symptoms, the shot 
 had struck the eye and glanced from it without penetrating the globe. 
 This encouraging view was held by the patient, and I must say shared 
 in by me. He was cautioned against all work and exposure, and told 
 to report in a few days. Three or four days after this he again re- 
 turned. He had been, he thought, a little imprudent, both as to the 
 use of his eyes and exposure to weather, and had taken cold in the 
 eye. The ball of the eye was inflamed, the wound more prominent, 
 and there was the greenish-yellow reflex in the pupillary space so 
 typical of hyalitis. The lens at this time seemed to be perfectly 
 clear. As the patient was unwilling to have the eye removed, unless 
 he could be assured that the shot was really in it, and as there was 
 not the slightest trace of any sympathetic trouble in the other eye, 
 enucleation was not performed. Two years after this, however, the 
 eye was removed for a recurrent attack of inflammation, and the shot 
 was found in the centre of the lens. How it got there is a mystery, 
 unless it is supposed to have migrated there from its original position, 
 in the same way as we see the migration of foreign substances in 
 other parts of the body. 
 
 Sometimes these foreign bodies strike the eye with such velocity 
 as to traverse the entire vitreous and penetrate the opposite wall,
 
 EXAMINATION OF THE MEDIA OF THE EYE. 183 
 
 where they can be seen with the ophthalmoscope to remain, some- 
 times for years, without causing the least disturbance to the surround- 
 ing tissue. At other times inflammation ensues, either at the moment 
 of the injury or at some later period. This is followed by atrophy of 
 the tissue of the retina and choroid or altered new-formed tissue, 
 leaving the foreign body as a dark speck in a white patch of atrophy, 
 represented by the sclera, the healthy portions of the choroid being 
 separated from the atrophic by segments, or, indeed, by an entire cir- 
 cle of pigment. Sometimes an injury to the retina and choroid may 
 be seen, either with the mirror or on section, at the back of the eye, 
 while the foreign body itself occupies another position on the floor of 
 the globe, usually at, or of tener still a little in 'front of, the equator. 
 
 When this takes place, Berlin is of the opinion that the body has 
 entered the eye with sufficient force to have traversed the vitreous, 
 struck the opposite wall, and to have rebounded from this to fall 
 finally by gravitation to the floor of the eye. Whether this be the true 
 explanation of the occurrence or not remains to be proved. But that 
 an injury to the inner membranes may be detected in one place and 
 the foreign body seen in another is an established fact ; and for this 
 reason when, after an injury has been discovered at the back of the 
 eye, the observer should never neglect to make a diligent search at 
 the periphery of the lower field for the body itself, as his line of ac- 
 tion in regard to the removal of the eye may depend on the fact that 
 the presence of a foreign body within the globe is recognized. 
 
 It is alleged that separation of the retina is sometimes caused by 
 cicatricial contraction of the wounded parts. This occurs, I can not 
 help thinking, more frequently from some alteration in the vitreous. 
 Separation of this latter, which is described by Iwanoff as not an un- 
 common occurrence after penetration of the globe by foreign bodies, 
 can not, so far as I know, be recognized with the ophthalmoscope, 
 though, of late, attempts have been made to lay down some rules for 
 that purpose. 
 
 Air-bulbles in the Vitreous. I was indebted to Dr. Mittendorf 
 for the opportunity of viewing the following very rare case, which 
 was unique in my own experience and that of my colleagues. Dr. 
 Mittendorf has, however, curiously enough, seen one other. The 
 case, as reported by him, is as follows : 
 
 C. K , aged twenty years, strong and healthy, a blacksmith by 
 
 trade, presented himself at the New York Eye and Ear Infirmary 
 November 6, 1883. There was a large irregular wound at the tem- 
 poral side of the sclera 3 mm. from the sclero-corneal margin. The 
 patient had been struck in the eye by a splinter of iron three or four
 
 184 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 hours before coming to the infirmary. No view of the fundus could 
 be obtained, owing to intra-ocular haemorrhage, but there was hardly 
 any doubt about the presence of a foreign body in the vitreous. The 
 wound was irregular and slightly gaping, with the vitreous presenting. 
 
 In the afternoon of the same day a partial view of the interior of 
 the eye could be had with the ophthalmoscope. This disclosed a large 
 clot of blood at the lower portion of the vitreous, and three round 
 and highly refracting bodies with dark borders at the upper part. 
 
 These resembled in every way air-bubbles or oil-globules under 
 the microscope. They were undoubted air-bubbles, and situated im- 
 mediately behind the upper portion of the lens, which remained per- 
 fectly clear. The larger one appeared to be the size of a hemp-seed. 
 The two smaller ones are hardly as large as rape-seed. The next 
 morning the bubbles had coalesced and formed a flat vesicle at the 
 posterior pole of the lens. After the patient had remained in the 
 erect position for some time, the bubble gradually arose to the upper 
 portion of the fundus and assumed a slightly elongated shape, and had 
 the appearance of a small oil-globule rising in water. After a lapse 
 of thirty-six hours the air became completely absorbed, and no trace 
 could be seen of the bubbles on the third day. The eye remained 
 free from inflammation for some time, and the patient left the infirm- 
 ary doing tolerably well. No attempt was made to extract the for- 
 eign body, as the patient objected to all interference with the eye. 
 
 In order to establish the diagnosis, Dr. Mittendorf injected a small 
 quantity of air into the vitreous of a rabbit, and the appearances of 
 the bubble which formed were with the ophthalmoscope precisely 
 those which have been described in the case related above, in which 
 air had been either forced into the eye or liberated in some way from 
 the piece of iron within it. 
 
 DIFFERENTIAL DIAGNOSIS OF TROUBLES IN THE MEDIA. 
 
 Most of the rules and expedients laid down for the proper exami- 
 nation of the anterior media, the cornea, aqueous humor, and lens, 
 are also applicable to that of the vitreous, and need not now be re- 
 peated, nor need the method of exactly determining their antero-pos- 
 terior position be further dwelt upon, as it has already been fully de- 
 scribed in the chapter on determining the errors of refraction. Still, 
 there are certain characteristic effects which are produced by opacities 
 in the different media which may serve sometimes to make a differ- 
 ential diagnosis more accurate, or at least more expeditious. 
 
 Should, in a given case, the opacities float into view with now a 
 rising and then a falling motion, it would be safe to conclude that
 
 EXAMINATION OF THE MEDIA OF THE EYE. 185 
 
 these were in the vitreous and not in any of the other media, and, 
 moreover, a discrimination could be at once made as to their being 
 " movable " and not " fixed opacities." Should, however, the dis- 
 turbance move only in concert with the eye, and not have any motion 
 of its own, then it is a fixed body, and may, so far as its appearance 
 with the ophthalmoscope is concerned, give rise to a doubt whether it 
 is in the vitreous humor, in the lens, aqueous humor, or even in the 
 cornea. This, it is true, should not have been the case if the observer 
 has fulfilled his duty by carefully examining the anterior media by 
 means of oblique illumination. Still, the observer may, while the in- 
 strument is still at his eye, remedy his want of care by attentively 
 observing the behavior of the opacity in regard to the movements of 
 the observed eye and its centre of motion, and the relation which it 
 bears to the pupillary space and the borders of the iris. 
 
 The centre of motion lies in the vitreous humor, somewhat behind 
 the middle point of the visual line. Objects lying in front of this cen- 
 tre will, when the eye moves, move in the same direction. If situ- 
 ated at the centre they will have no apparent motion. If situated 
 behind the centre they will move in the reverse direction from that in 
 which the eye moves, and the farther the opacities are from the cen- 
 tre of motion the greater will be their excursions. 
 
 Thus, in a given case, if an opacity is seen to make a considerable 
 excursion toward the right when the observed eye is moved toward 
 the right, and passes rapidly out of the pupillary space in the same 
 direction that the eye moves, the observer knows that it must be in 
 the cornea. Should the amount of displacement be restricted, but yet 
 still toward the right, then in all probability the opacity is on the 
 anterior capsule. If the motion of the disturbance should be still 
 more restricted, but yet in the same direction, then the opacity must 
 be in the neighborhood of the posterior capsule. Should the opacity 
 have no lateral motion whatever, then it must lie at the centre of 
 motion, that is, the centre of the eye. Should, on the contrary, the 
 motion of the disturbance be 
 toward the left when the eye 
 moves toward the right, then 
 the observer knows that it must 
 lie in the vitreous behind the 
 centre of the eye, and the great- 
 er its displacement toward the 
 left the deeper its position. 
 
 Suppose A (Fig. TO) to be a 
 transparent sphere with various TIG.
 
 186 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 opacities situated along its central axis. Suppose it rotates toward 
 the right, so that its axis a It occupies the position of the dotted line 
 a! V . No. 1 will make a large excursion and appear to move toward 
 the right ; Nos. 2 and 3 will make a less excursion in the same direc- 
 tion. No. 4 will remain stationary, while No. 5 will move in the 
 opposite direction, that is, toward the left. 
 
 This is certainly very simple in theory^ and, provided the pupil is 
 sufficiently large, or, better still, dilated with atropine, is often very 
 advantageous in practice. But with a narrow pupil the inexperienced 
 observer is apt to be misled, at least in regard to the opacities in the 
 posterior portions of the lens, because the iris being in advance of 
 these makes a proportionately wider excursion, and for this reason the 
 opacity, though still in front of the centre of motion, appears to ap- 
 proach the pupillary margin of the opposite side, and thus to move in 
 a direction opposite to that in which the eye moves, which leads to 
 the idea that the opacity is behind instead of in front of the centre of 
 the eye, or, in other words, in the vitreous instead of in the lens. For 
 this reason it is always well to mark attentively the relations which 
 the opacity bears to the pupillary space and the borders of the iris 
 under movements of the observed eye. If the opacity makes a wide 
 excursion and passes rapidly out of the field of the pupil in the direc- 
 tion in which the eye is moving, it must be in the anterior parts of 
 the eye and probably in the cornea. Oblique illumination will then 
 settle this at once. If, on the contrary, the opacity makes a wide 
 excursion across the pupillary space in a direction opposite to that in 
 which the eye moves, and passes rapidly behind the borders of the 
 iris, then it is in the posterior parts of the eye, and the greater the ex- 
 cursion the farther back it is. If, however, the excursion is limited, 
 and the opacity appears to change its position but slightly in refer- 
 ence to the borders of the iris, and this in the direction in which the 
 eye moves, then the opacity is in the lens, and most probably on the 
 anterior surface, and nearly in a plane with that of the iris. On the 
 contrary, when the displacement is greater in reference to the pupil- 
 lary space, and the opacity appears to pass across it rapidly in the 
 opposite direction from which the eye is moving and disappears be- 
 hind the iris, it is in the posterior part of the lens, and the greater the 
 excursion the deeper it lies. 
 
 To make a differential diagnosis with certainty as to whether a 
 given opacity is in the anterior parts of the vitreous or the most pos- 
 terior parts of the lens, say the posterior capsule, we must turn to a 
 nicer and more delicate test which has been described very accurately 
 and clearly by Mauthner in his text-book of " Ophthalmoscopie." This
 
 EXAMINATION OF THE MEDIA OF THE EYE. 187 
 
 consists in observing the behavior of the coraeal reflex in relation to 
 the opacities on movement of the eye. 
 
 When the observed eye looks directly at the hole in the observer's 
 mirror, the visual axis of the observed eye coincides with that of the 
 observer ; and as the path of the illuminating rays is also in the same 
 line, the corneal reflex will be seen in the centre of the pupillary space, 
 and will lie at the apex of the cornea ; consequently the visual line of 
 the observer will pass through the centre of the reflex and also through 
 the centre of motion of the observed eye. These two points will, 
 therefore, act as fixed points, and always lie in the visual line of the 
 observer the reflex, because it lies in the path of the rays, which 
 can not change unless the position of the mirror changes and the cen- 
 tre of motion because it is the point round which the eye rotates. 
 For this reason an object situated in front of the centre of motion 
 will appear in reference to the corneal reflex to move in the same di- 
 rection as the eye moves ; if situated behind, it will move in an oppo- 
 site direction. If the reflex covers the opacity, notwithstanding the 
 various movements of the eye, then the opacity must lie at the very 
 centre of the eye ; and Mauthner declares that in this way he has 
 been able to convince himself that the small opacities which are some- 
 times seen on the axial line in retinitis pigmentosa were really situ- 
 ated in the vitreous, and not, as is commonly supposed, in the pos- 
 terior capsule of the lens. My own observation would lead me to 
 suspect that, for the same reason, the minute opacity seen so often in 
 very high grades of myopia in the axis of the eye is not, as so com- 
 monly supposed, a posterior polar cataract, is not in fact in the lens, 
 but is in reality a minute collection of pigment in the vitreous. The 
 delicacy of this test in regard to the lens depends on the fact that the 
 centre of motion is not really in the centre of the visual axis, but, 
 according to Donders, 1.77 mm. behind it. The fact that the posi- 
 tion of the centre of motion varies in myopic and hypermetropic 
 eyes has no appreciable effect on the apparent movement of these 
 opacities. 
 
 ENTOZOA. 
 
 The presence and detection of entozoa in the eye have always 
 been a very interesting study with ophthalmologists, and the number 
 of recorded cases from the earliest days of ophthalinoscopy has grad- 
 ually increased until the literature of the present day is exceedingly 
 rich in them. 
 
 The varieties hitherto met with are the cysticercus cellulosse and 
 the filaria. 
 
 The cysticercus has been found in every part of the eye and its
 
 188 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 appendages that is to say, under the skin of the lid, in the orbit, 
 under the conjunctiva, in the cornea, iris, lens, in the vitreous, and be- 
 tween the choroid and retina. 
 
 A very remarkable fact in the history of this disease is the great 
 frequency in which this parasite has been found within the eye in cer- 
 tain countries, or even in certain districts of the same country, and its 
 rarity or even total absence in others. Thus Yon Graefe, in some 
 eighty thousand cases of eye-disease, observed the worm eighty times, 
 or one case in every thousand. Hirschberg, out of twenty-one hun- 
 dred new patients examined in the short space of six months, saw a 
 cysticercus five times, or one in four hundred and twenty cases of eye- 
 disease ; while Mauthner, in Vienna, among thirty thousand cases of 
 general eye-disease of which he had cognizance, had never seen a 
 single case of a cysticercus. Until very recently I had never seen 
 even a doubtful case, nor did I know of a single well-authenticated 
 case ever having been seen in the interior of the eye by any of my 
 colleagues in this or the neighboring cities, or, indeed, in the entire 
 country. Through the kindness of Dr. Minor, I have been permitted 
 within the past few weeks to examine a case in which, from the oph- 
 thalmoscopic appearances, there was reason to believe that it was a 
 true case of cysticercus, although it was not absolutely proved to 
 be so. 
 
 As, therefore, I have little or no personal knowledge of this sub- 
 ject, I must avail myself of the observations of others, and I therefore 
 reproduce here an abstract of the description furnished by Becker for 
 Mautlmer's work on the ophthalmoscope. These observations of 
 Becker are prefaced by Mauthner by a short general description of the 
 animal, as follows : 
 
 The worm is provided at its posterior end with a round, cyst-like 
 formation which acts as the receptaculum scolicis, into which the ani- 
 mal can withdraw, presenting when in this position the appearance of 
 a round, whitish body. A small fold marks the mouth of this recep- 
 tacle. When the animal protrudes its head and neck out of the re- 
 ceptacle its body appears to be sprinkled here and there with calca- 
 reous deposits, and presents sometimes a smooth and sometimes a 
 wrinkled surface. The body decreases in size toward the neck, to 
 which is attached the head, with its four flattened-down but angular 
 projections. A round-shaped snout can be projected by the animal 
 from the centre of its head, and this latter is provided at its base with 
 a double row of hook-like tentacles, which are capable of retraction. 
 Each of the angular projections of the head is, moreover, provided 
 with a rounded sucking apparatus. The most common seat for the
 
 EXAMINATION OF THE MEDIA OF THE EYE. 189 
 
 development of the animal is between the choroid and retina, and it 
 occurs twice as often here, according to Graefe, as in the vitreous. 
 As a rule, the worm is not inclosed in any sac, but on three occasions 
 it was observed to have a peculiar envelope of its own, and on all of 
 these occasions the animal was in the vitreous. The length of time in 
 which the parasite can exist in the eye has not been determined, but 
 Graefe has observed it for the space of two years. Its presence in the 
 eye leads sooner or later (from three to fifteen months) to disturbances 
 of vision, and to the production of irido-choroiditis, which can pass 
 into true panophthalmitis, but the trouble usually runs a more chronic 
 and insidious course, to a gradual atrophy of the bulb. In two cases 
 only, in which the worm in the vitreous was encapsulated, were the 
 form of the eye and a portion of the visual power retained. The case 
 reported by Teal would appear to be unique, in which a free cysticer- 
 cus was observed for two years without the eye suffering from the 
 entozoon, and without the vision having decreased to any considerable 
 amount. Moreover, as the sight of the eye had been bad from child- 
 hood, there were fair grounds for supposing that the animal had main- 
 tained itself in the eye from that period. 
 
 The ophthalmoscopic appearances in the cases seen by Becker were 
 briefly as follows : 
 
 The retina was for a considerable portion of its surface disturbed 
 and of a grayish-white color, instead of a bluish tinge. It was appar- 
 ently raised but little above its ordinary level, and slightly folded, or 
 perhaps irregularly thickened, so that its surface was not smooth and 
 even, but apparently hollowed out in many places. The vessels were 
 tortuous and bent, following the irregularities of the surface. They 
 still conveyed their contents, and appeared red, but were here and there 
 enveloped by extravasated blood. There was also the appearance of 
 dark gray flecks or spots in the grayish-white retina. That portion of 
 the retina which showed this kind of degeneration was in the posterior 
 portion of the bulb, and included the macula lutea. The fact should 
 here be emphasized that no other disease of the retina produces a simi- 
 lar picture. In the neighborhood of that part of the fundus which 
 had undergone the changes mentioned above there occurred an actual 
 separation of the retina which then projected into the vitreous. The 
 circulation in the vessels of the cyst-like elevation of the retina was 
 not interfered with, as could be told from its red appearance. On two 
 occasions, in which the retina remained, comparatively speaking, trans- 
 parent, a cyst-like swelling of a bluish color could be observed. The 
 walls of the bladder-like projection could be seen to bend backward 
 with a convex surface, and to be distinctly separated from that of the
 
 190 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 retina. A critical examination led to the conclusion that the retina at 
 this point was lifted up from the choroid by an independent bluish 
 but depressed body with rounded contours, the walls of which con- 
 tained no vessels. This lack of vessels speaks against the diagnosis of 
 a new growth, and in favor of that of an entozoon. 
 
 If the bladder perforated the retina, then the appearances were 
 different, and a bluish cyst-like body, which varied in size from two 
 to four diameters of the optic disk, appeared to project into the vitre- 
 ous. The surface appeared finely granular and, under strong illumi- 
 nation, produced a lively iridescence. The play of all the colors, in 
 which a brilliant red predominated, was particularly noticeable toward 
 the borders, and at some particular point there appeared a glittering 
 white spot. 
 
 The cyst-like body was in such cases attached by a neck-like pro- 
 cess to a point of the retina which was then degenerated in the manner 
 already pointed out. 
 
 The appearances described above would in themselves suffice to 
 mark the diagnosis, but a more convincing proof is obtained by the 
 detection of the movements of the animal. If the observer riveted 
 his attention upon some particular point of the projection, especially 
 toward the borders, or, better still, upon the white spots just alluded 
 to, he would be able to notice, after some moments of delay, and while 
 the observed eye remained motionless, that suddenly an unmistakable 
 change in form took place along the walls of the projection, or of 
 the light-spot so often mentioned. This latter is then seen to be 
 displaced in a certain direction to become greater or smaller in size, 
 returning, after a short time, to its original condition ; or it might 
 even assume a somewhat different shape and position. If the attention 
 was fixed upon the border of the cyst, two kinds of movements might 
 be observed. The contour itself might change its form, now bulging 
 out, and then becoming concave, or a wave-like motion run along the 
 surface, and at the same time a change of color occur, the blue places 
 becoming white, and the white gray. Or the play of color might stop 
 entirely, giving place to a dull shimmer on the surface. The move- 
 ments upon the surface of the cyst and clear spots in its interior 
 always happened at the same time. The clear spot then corresponded 
 in position to that occupied by the head and neck in the receptaculum. 
 Any movement, no matter how slight, in the position of these two 
 made the cyst, which was full of liquid, tremble. The glittering 
 effect which has been spoken of was caused by the minute calcareous 
 deposits in the walls of the cyst. Much as these movements resem- 
 bled each other, whether the cysticercus was in the vitreous or under
 
 EXAMINATION OF THE MEDIA OF THE EYE. 191 
 
 the retina, still certain peculiarities manifested themselves, due to the 
 difference in position. For, if the free cyst extended into the vitreous, 
 all the details described above could be more clearly perceived ; while, 
 on the other hand, if the entire process was only seen through the 
 retina, the changes in color were correspondingly dull, although, at 
 the same time, the movements themselves were more conspicuous, since 
 the observer could then estimate directly the amount of motion by 
 comparing the excursion of the walls of the cyst with the retinal ves- 
 sels, which do not share in the movements. In some cases, however, 
 the movements of the animal were so energetic that the overlying 
 retina was also implicated. 
 
 It may be said that all doubt about the diagnosis is removed in 
 these cases when the observer happens to hit, by chance, the time 
 when both the head and neck of the animal are extended from the 
 receptaculum. In such a case the head and neck may be seen to point, 
 for a considerable time, fixed and immovable, toward one direction. 
 The head, from its position, with its suckers somewhat retracted and 
 its snout outstretched, then allows the circle of tenaculi to be divined, 
 rather than clearly perceived, as fine, dark lines. In another moment, 
 however, the neck may be seen to undergo, with comparative rapidity, 
 all sorts of delicate undulations and changes in position. The neck 
 becomes thicker and shorter, or extends itself to its full length, and 
 then twists itself into every position, or even doubles upon itself ; 
 while the head, by means of alternate projections and retractions of 
 its sensitive suckers, and of the shorter but thicker snout, assumes the 
 most wonderful and singular shapes. The sucking apparatus resem- 
 bles precisely the tentacles of the snail, and constantly performs, like 
 them, a ceaseless change in form and movement. 
 
 It must be accounted as an exceptionally lucky occurrence when 
 both the head and neck of the animal can be observed outside of the 
 sac. In the short space of twenty or thirty minutes such a cyst-like 
 formation has been observed to shove itself along under the retina for 
 a space of several lines. In what way or by what mechanism these 
 movements are performed has not yet been determined. 
 
 The vitreous humor is interspersed with punctate disturbances, 
 which are aggregated together in small collections. Membranous dis- 
 turbances are only present after repeated operations have been per- 
 formed without any successful result. 
 
 Liebreich gives in his atlas two chromo-lithographs of the ophthal- 
 moscopic appearances of the cysticercus. Fig. 5, Tab. VII., from 
 which the drawing is made (Fig. 71), represents the animal after he 
 had perforated the retina and was in the vitreous, in which it occupied
 
 192 
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 FIG. 71. 
 
 such a position that its movements and the contractions of the cyst 
 could be plainly seen. Fig. 6 shows the cysticercus still beneath the 
 
 retina, as is demonstrat- 
 ^^ ed by the retinal ves- 
 
 sels which run over it. 
 The head and neck are 
 within the bladder, and 
 only appear very indis- 
 tinctly through it (Fig. 
 72). 
 
 Jaeger also gives a 
 drawing of a cysticercus 
 in his " Hand- Atlas," Taf . 
 XYIIL, Fig. 83, as does 
 Hirschberg, Graefe's 
 " Archives," vol. xxii., 
 Plates Y. and VI. 
 
 The case alluded to, 
 
 Flo 72 ^ reported by Dr. Mi- 
 
 nor as occurring in New 
 York, and described by him, is as follows : * 
 
 " During the past summer a patient consulted me at the New York 
 * " The Medical Pvecord," December 27, 1884, p. 703.
 
 EXAMINATION OF THE MEDIA OF THE EYE. 193 
 
 Eye and Ear Infirmary for impaired vision, and I made the diagnosis 
 of cysticercus in the vitreous. The extreme rarity of such cases not 
 a single authentic case, so far as I am aware, having been observed in 
 America caused at first much doubt in my mind ; but the patient 
 has been frequently and carefully observed since he was first seen, 
 and I am now confident that the diagnosis was correct. And I am 
 strengthened in my conclusion by the opinions of some of my con- 
 freres of the New York Ophthalmological Society where the patient 
 was shown who have seen cases of cysticercus in the vitreous in the 
 European clinics. The patient has repulsed all overtures pointing 
 toward an operation for the removal of the entozoon, and I simply 
 desire to place the case on record, with the hope that I may, at some 
 future time, add the result of the operation thereto. 
 
 " J. M , aged sixty, male ; seen in July, 1884, when the fol- 
 lowing notes were made : Ten days ago suffered great reduction in 
 vision in the right eye, which has remained almost unchanged since. 
 Vision in right eye = ^-f^, with excentric fixation, vision being pos- 
 sessed only in the temporal half of the visual field. The ophthalmo- 
 scope shows detachment of the retina throughout the temporal half 
 of the fundus. Far forward in the supero-temporal quadrant, just 
 behind the ciliary body, is a cyst, nearly transparent, of ovoid form, 
 which contains (?) a cylindrical mass, appar- 
 ently about one half of an inch long and one 
 eighth of an inch thick, that terminates in 
 a free somewhat pointed extremity. Just 
 behind the tip on either side is a small black 
 dot booklets and behind these a slight 
 constriction the neck above which, after 
 gradual enlargement, the tongue-like pro- 
 cess reaches a point so far forward that it 
 
 , i m 11 i -L j .c j v Fra- 73. As seen by the 
 
 can not be seen. Two parallel bauds of deli- , . . 
 
 direct method of ex- 
 
 cate whitish tissue can be traced from the animation, 
 
 neck up to the point at which the whole 
 
 object is lost to view. The upper part of the cyst is lost to view at 
 the same point. The retina, as it approaches the cyst, assumes a 
 wavy and wrinkled outline, and presents a mottled appearance, being 
 interspersed with a number of small grayish spots (see figure). The 
 obliquity of the eye necessary for a proper view is such as to make 
 it difficult to distinguish between movements of the globe as a whole 
 and individual movements of objects in its interior. Yet I have sat- 
 isfied myself, as others have done, that the tongue-like process does 
 possess individual movements. I have observed slight lengthening 
 
 1 O
 
 19tt TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPE 
 
 and shortening, a little lateral movement and tremulousness of the 
 process. The position of the entozoon is such as to make it impossi- 
 ble to establish the exact relation of parts. The junction of the neck 
 with the cyst-body can not be seen, and the cyst is so transparent that 
 it can not be positively said whether the head and neck are contained 
 therein, or whether they lie free in the vitreous, just in front of the 
 cyst. I am inclined to think that the latter is the case, for with the 
 inverted image a marked parallax can be obtained, which not only 
 shows considerable depth to the cyst-cavity, but that the head and 
 neck lie well forward in the anterior part of the cyst, or entirely in 
 front of the cyst-wall." 
 
 In regard to the second class of entozoa the filaria it can only 
 be said that doubtful cases have been reported by Fano, Quadri, and 
 Mauthner ; and the latter remarks that he saw in the perfectly clear 
 vitreous of a man of forty years an object that was freely movable, 
 but which had no independent motion of its own, but which he un- 
 hesitatingly believed to be a filaria, though perhaps a dead one. I 
 have myself seen a case which was presented at the New York Oph- 
 thalmological Society, with the suspicion that it might be a case of 
 filaria in the vitreous. The object in question presented the appear- 
 ance of a long filiform body, which projected through the vitreous in 
 the median axis from the optic disk to about two thirds the distance 
 to the posterior surface of the lens. It had a graceful, undulatory 
 motion when the eye of the patient was moved, but, like the case of 
 Mauthner's, no independent motion of its own. It resembled, more 
 than anything else, a very much attenuated and minute eel with a deli- 
 cate, tapering neck, surmounted by a somewhat bulbous head. It was 
 certainly wonderfully like a worm in shape and character ; but it was 
 totally untransparent, and the general opinion of the society was that 
 it was not a living organization of any kind, but either a delicate and 
 filamentous band in the vitreous or the remains of the hyaloid artery. 
 This opinion was strengthened by the fact that there was also a small 
 black spot situated on the posterior capsule of the lens close to the 
 posterior pole, and which forcibly suggested the idea that it was once 
 the place of attachment of the anterior portion of the body, whatever 
 it was.
 
 APPENDIX 
 
 THE following remarks are intended only for those who are unac- 
 quainted with the elements of optics. They illustrate, in a brief and, 
 it is hoped, a simple way, the principles upon which the ophthalmo- 
 scope depends, and only include such as are essential for the student 
 to understand. 
 
 A luminous body is made up of an infinite number of luminous 
 points, from which lines of light radiate in all directions like the 
 spokes of a wheel, the only difference being that the luminous point 
 is the centre of a sphere, while the hub is only the centre of a circle. 
 It is in the direction of these lines, or, as they are called, rays, that 
 light is propagated in wave-like propulsion. Thus, in the diagram 
 (Fig. 1), the straight lines radiating from the centre, or luminous 
 point, may be looked upon as the ray 
 which shows the direction in which the 
 light travels ; while the sinuous lines 
 show the manner in which it travels, or 
 its undulatory motion. It is evident that 
 the height of the wave has nothing to 
 do with the direction in which the wave 
 moves. 
 
 Strictly speaking, the term ray is a 
 relic of the old emission theory. The ray 
 has no real existence, but is an imaginary 
 straight line drawn from the luminous 
 point, from which the light-wave starts, 
 to the point against which it impinges. Still, as the height of the 
 wave is to the human mind an inappreciable quantity, it is exceed- 
 ingly convenient in optics to represent, not only the direction in which 
 light travels, but also its wave-like motion, by straight lines instead of 
 undulatory ones. 
 
 A collection of luminous rays is called a luminous pencil. 
 
 As luminous rays in nature always travel in straight lines, and 
 
 FIG. 1.
 
 196 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 always diverge from each other as soon as they leave the luminous 
 point, it follows that, strictly speaking, there can be, from natural 
 sources, but one kind of rays that is, divergent rays. Thus, the rays 
 from the sun and other heavenly bodies are, in fact, divergent ; but, 
 inasmuch as these bodies are at an infinite distance, and inasmuch as 
 the pupil of the eye is only from one to two lines broad, it follows 
 that only those rays which travel nearly parallel to each other can find 
 their way into the eye. Thus, if, in the diagram (Fig. 2), we suppose 
 
 FIG. 2. 
 
 the sun to be at an infinite distance, it at once becomes apparent that 
 only those rays can enter the pupil which run parallel to each otlier. 
 The slightest conceivable divergence would prevent this, and these 
 rays would be excluded from the eye. Hence, when we see objects 
 which are at an infinite distance, we do so by means of rays which 
 are practically parallel. Such rays play a very important part in 
 ophthalmoscopy as well as in physiological optics, as they form the 
 standard by which we measure the power, not only of lenses, but also 
 of the eye itself. Moreover, experience teaches us that it is not ne- 
 cessary to go to infinity for parallel rays. Bays coming from any dis- 
 tance greater than twenty feet are assumed, in physiological optics, to 
 be parallel. 
 
 When light coming from a luminous body strikes against the sur- 
 face of a non-luminous one, part of it is absorbed by the body and 
 part of it is reflected by it. There are two kinds of reflection : (1) 
 that which takes place from a polished surface, and is called regular 
 or specular reflection ; (2) that which is called irregular, because it 
 produces no image, but only serves to render the object visible. 
 Strictly speaking, perhaps all, certainly most objects, produce both 
 kinds of reflection, but usually one so predominates over the other as 
 to render the distinction a just one. 
 
 Let a polished plane mirror be taken, and held about one foot 
 from the eye, so as to catch the reflection of some luminous body, 
 say the lighted chandelier, which we will assume to be at a distance 
 of ten feet. It requires but a little abstraction of the mind to make 
 one lose perception of the surface of the mirror, but what is seen is 
 the fac-simile of the source of light in all its detail of form and color. 
 Now, let a bit of paper, say an inch square, with some very fine print- 
 ing on it, be pasted upon the centre of the mirror. Repeat the ex-
 
 APPENDIX. 197 
 
 periment under precisely the same conditions as before. Directing 
 the attention to the image of the chandelier, this will be seen in all its 
 detail, exactly as in the former case, excepting that the small portion 
 of the image corresponding to the bit of paper is wanting. One is 
 indeed conscious of this latter, even while looking intently at the 
 image in the glass ; but it appears to the eye only as a blurred piece 
 of white paper, on which not a letter of the type can be deciphered/- 
 Now, fix the attention on the paper, so as to read it distinctly. One 
 at once becomes aware of an effort on the part of the eye, and notices 
 that the image of the chandelier has become blurred. Repeat this 
 indefinitely, and it will be found that one never sees both the print 
 and the image distinctly at the same time, although the bit of paper 
 is at precisely the same distance from the eye as the surface of the 
 mirror, and the chandelier, which is the source of light, is at precisely 
 the same distance from each. That there is some difference in the 
 condition of the rays which come from the surface of the mirror, and 
 which go to form the image of the gas-flame, and those which come 
 from the paper, is evident from the consciousness of tension and 
 relaxation taking place in the eye when looking at the objects, and 
 from the alternating distinctness and indistinctness of the objects 
 themselves. The difference is precisely this : 
 
 The rays coming from the source of light strike both the paper 
 and the surface of the glass with precisely the same degree of diver- 
 gence from each other ; but the polished surface of the mirror, after 
 receiving the rays, gives them back exactly as it received them in 
 every respect. It simply alters the direction in which the rays were 
 travelling, but does not change their relation to each other. They 
 leave the surface of the mirror with precisely the same degree of 
 divergence that they had when they touched it, consequently the 
 object appears just as it did before the reflection took place, only in 
 a different position. But the slightly roughened surface of the bit 
 of paper, although it received its rays from the same source and un- 
 der precisely the same degree of divergence as the mirror, does not, 
 like the latter, reflect them just as it receives them, but it absorbs the 
 light, as it were, into itself, and then throws out such rays as it does 
 not consume, just as if it had produced them itself, instead of bor- 
 rowing them from another source. Thus, the rays coming from the 
 paper enter the eye, in the above experiment, as if they diverged from 
 the surface of the paper itself, which is at a distance of only one foot, 
 while those which form the image enter as if they came from ten 
 feet. 
 
 Let A in Fig. 3 be the lamp, ten feet from the mirror m. Rays
 
 198 
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 from this will strike the mirror, and be reflected from it with the 
 same degree of divergence among themselves with which they struck 
 it. Entering the eye, they will be projected backward till they inter- 
 sect at A', where an image of the lamp will apparently be formed, 
 just as far behind the mirror as the real lamp is in front of it, namely, 
 ten feet. On the other hand, the rays striking upon the paper p will 
 be absorbed practically into it, and then given off as if they came 
 directly from it, and thus enter the eye as if they originally diverged 
 from a distance of one foot. From this it will be at once apparent 
 that the position of the source of light, from which the non-luminous 
 body borrowed its light to become visible, has no effect on the direc- 
 tion of the rays which are practically re-emitted, rather than reflected, 
 from such a body. Thus, if we put the book which we read at twelve 
 inches from the eye, and place the light at any distance we please 
 be it one foot or twenty the rays will always enter the eye as if they 
 came from a distance of twelve inches. And, further, we can change 
 in various ways the direction of the incident rays so as to make them 
 divergent, parallel, or convergent ; and still, as long as the book is 
 held at a given distance, the rays will always enter the eye as if they 
 diverged from the surface of the page. 
 
 FIG. 3. 
 
 This is " irregular reflection," and it is through this that we see 
 the details of the bottom of the eye, in their due form and color, just 
 as we see all other objects. It is for this reason that I have dwelt so 
 particularly on this point; for, by keeping it in mind, the student 
 will be aided essentially in understanding not only the theory of the 
 ophthalmoscope, but also its practical application. 
 
 Although there are in nature only divergent, or, at the most, par- 
 allel rays, we have, as has just been stated, certain agents at our com- 
 mand by which we can alter the direction of the rays so as to make 
 them at will either divergent, parallel, or convergent. This is done
 
 APPENDIX. 199 
 
 by lenses and mirrors, and, as these are the two essential elements of 
 all ophthalmoscopes, a thorough acquaintance with their fundamental 
 properties, however elementary, is absolutely necessary. 
 
 Convex Lenses. The simplest form of a lens, and one with which 
 the reader's microscopical studies will have rendered him familiar as 
 a condensing lens, is a piece of glass having a flat or plane surface on 
 one side, and a spherical or convex surface on the other, hence called 
 a plano-convex lens. Such a lens is represented in section in Fig. 4. 
 The amount of curvature of the spherical 
 surface depends on the radius of the sphere 
 on which the glass is ground. Thus, in 
 Fig. 4, R II would be the radius of the 
 sphere on which the lens is ground, or, in 
 the language of optics, the radius of the 
 curvature of the lens. R N and R M would 
 be likewise radii, as in fact would any line 
 drawn from the centre of the sphere to any 
 point on the surface of the glass. The ex- FlG 4 
 
 tent of the plane surface would, of course, 
 
 depend on the size of the segment of the sphere taken. This might 
 be only the size of the shaded portion in the figure, or what is included 
 between the dotted line 8 G and the circumference ; or, in fact, the 
 whole half -sphere. Yet, the curvature, and of course the radius, would 
 remain the same. Consequently, the strength of the lens does not 
 depend upon its thickness, though it is slightly influenced thereby. 
 
 Suppose such a lens to be exposed to the waves of light coming 
 from an infinite distance, and that consequently parallel rays strike 
 upon its convex surface (Fig. 5). 
 
 The width of a wave of light can not be estimated, of course, by 
 the human eye. Nevertheless, the wave must have an appreciable 
 breadth as compared with the point where it strikes the surface of the 
 lens. We will suppose, for the sake of illustration, that the rays of 
 light are enlarged to the extent shown in the diagram (Fig. 5), and 
 are advancing, through the air, toward the lens in the direction of, 
 and parallel to a straight line drawn through the centre of the lens, 
 the radius of whose curvature is R H. For the sake of convenience, 
 we will represent the light-waves by straight instead of curved lines. 
 
 Take the upper beam in Fig. 5. One end of the beam (#), ad- 
 vancing through the air, will come in contact with the glass at the 
 point h before the end b does. As the glass is a denser medium than 
 the air, the end a will be retarded somewhat in its progress, while b 
 travels with its original velocity. This difference in speed will make
 
 200 
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 5 swing round #, describing a large arc, while a describes a small one, 
 and this disproportionate rate of progress will continue until both ends 
 of the beam, having entered the glass, are subject to the same retard- 
 
 FIG. 5. 
 
 ing influences, and then they will both advance at an equal rate of 
 speed ; just as, with* a column of soldiers in marching into a street 
 which runs at an angle with the one they are already in, the whole 
 front of the column keeps moving, but the outer end of it moves with 
 a greater rapidity than the inner till the line comes fairly into the 
 street, and then both ends advance with the same rapidity. 
 
 By contact with the glass the direction of the ray is changed at #, 
 but, once the ray has fairly entered the glass, its direction will be 
 maintained so long as it remains within it. But a glance at the dia- 
 gram will show that, from the new direction in which the ray is mov- 
 ing, the end b will emerge from the glass sooner than the end a ; and 
 as 5 will, as soon as it emerges into the air, travel faster than a, it will 
 make the same movement round a that it did before, and this will con- 
 tinue until a emerges from the glass, and thus a new direction will be 
 established. Thus the ray has been bent at two points : first, on en- 
 tering, and, secondly, on leaving the lens. And it will be seen, by 
 looking at the diagram, that the ray, at its first refraction at a, where 
 it passes from a lighter to a denser medium, is bent toward the line 
 R A, which geometry teaches is the perpendicular to the surface at 
 the point of incidence <z, since the perpendicular to any point on the 
 surface of a sphere is the radius of the sphere at that point. But, 
 when the ray emerges from the denser medium of the glass into the 
 air at the point c, it is seen to be bent away from the line c m, which 
 is perpendicular to the surface A B at the point c. 
 
 Passing now to the central ray, we see that both ends of the ray e 
 and^? would impinge upon the glass at the same time. Consequently, 
 as each end of the ray would be retarded at the same moment, and in 
 the same degree, there could then be no change in the direction of
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 201 
 
 the ray, though there would be in its velocity. The ray, in fact, 
 would then pass through the glass without swerving from its course.* 
 It will be seen from the diagram that this ray is not only parallel to 
 the line L D, but is coincident with it ; and, further, that the line 
 L D is but an extension of the line r 0, which is a radius, and con- 
 sequently perpendicular to the point 0. It follows from this that, 
 when a ray strikes a spherical surface coincident with the perpendicu- 
 lar to the point of incidence, it passes through the lens without being 
 refracted. This, of course, holds good for all the radii, and not only 
 for the one which passes through the centre of the lens, as represented 
 in the diagram. 
 
 Observing the lowest ray, we see that it goes through precisely 
 the same changes as the upper, and we notice that all three rays from 
 the direction which they have acquired must meet behind the lens in 
 the point F, which is therefore called the focus of the lens. If con- 
 tinued beyond this point, the rays would cross each other, and what 
 was the upper ray originally would become the lower one. 
 
 The reader will understand that the diagram is not supposed to 
 show exactly how the beam of light is bent in nature ; but is simply, 
 as necessarily must be the case, a very rough way of illustrating the 
 principle of retardation of one part of the wave, and its consequent 
 change in direction. 
 
 From the explanation given of the cause of refraction, it would 
 follow logically, even if it had not been proved by actual experiment, 
 that certain conditions must affect the amount that a ray is bent by a 
 lens. A glance at the diagram (Fig. 6), which represents two plano- 
 
 FIG. 6. 
 
 convex lenses of different curvature, A and A', will show that in the 
 lens of greatest curvature, A, the end of the ray marked b will be at 
 a proportionately greater distance from the surface of the glass than 
 in the lens of lesser curvature (A') ; consequently, 5 will have a larger 
 
 * This would hold good even in the case pictured in the diagram, where the 
 disproportion between the breadth of the ray and the size of the lens would be 
 utterly absurd were it not for the purposes of illustration.
 
 202 
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMO^COPY. 
 
 interval of time and space to travel in the air with its original rate of 
 speed, while a is impeded by the denser medium of the glass ; b will 
 therefore rotate round a to a greater degree than when the curvature 
 is less, as in A', and will therefore come to a focus sooner (F\ 
 
 Again, the substance of the lens must affect the amount which the 
 ray is bent. If the lens is made of a substance which has compara- 
 tively little density or retarding power, that end of the ray which 
 enters it first will be comparatively little impeded, and the direction 
 of the ray consequently but litle changed ; while, on the other hand, 
 if the lens, having the same curvature, be made of a dense or highly 
 refracting substance, such as the diamond, the opposition to one end 
 of the ray will be increased, and the direction of the whole just so 
 much the more altered. Thus we have two principal factors in a lens, 
 by which the direction of the rays, which pass through it, is governed, 
 and from these we get the law, that the greater the curvature of the 
 lens, or, in other words, the shorter the radius and the greater the 
 density of the substance of which it is made, the greater the amount 
 of refraction. The ratio which the refractive power of one substance 
 bears to another, taken as a standard, is called its index of refraction. 
 
 If, now, we have lenses always made of the same substance, and 
 always subject them to the same standard of measurement, it is evi- 
 dent that we can not only express the power of an individual lens, 
 but can also make a comparison of the relative force of different lenses. 
 Lenses in common use are made of glass, and in ophthalmology at 
 least are measured by the effect they have on parallel rays of light ; 
 and it so happens that, in the case of glass, parallel rays are brought 
 to a focus at a distance behind the lens just equal to twice the radius 
 of its curvature. Thus, if the plano-convex lens is ground on a radius 
 of six inches, the focus will be twelve inches. 
 
 FIG. T. 
 
 Let the lines a, &, <?, d, e, in the diagram, be parallel rays, and A B 
 a plano-convex lens, whose radius of curvature r or r c is six 
 inches, then the point at which the rays meet, or its focus, will be at 
 F, twelve inches behind the lens (Fig. T).
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 203 
 
 Plano-convex lenses are the simplest, but, from their thickness, 
 are unwieldy and inconvenient. To avoid this, lenses are usually 
 ground on both sides, and, when the two surfaces are equal, as is com- 
 monly the case, the power of the lens is doubled. If, for example, 
 we take the same lens and grind another spherical surface on it, as is 
 
 FIG. 8. 
 
 shown by the dotted line in Fig. 8, then each surface refracts the ray 
 in an equal degree. The first brings the ray to twelve inches (7^), the 
 second to six inches (F'}. 
 
 But, as the length of the radius on which each surface is ground 
 is six inches, it follows that the focal length of the glass and the radius 
 are equal to each other ; from which we get the general rule that the 
 focal length of a biconvex glass is equal to the radius of its curvature. 
 The power of a lens can therefore be expressed by its focal length, 
 and we speak of a glass of three inches focal length, or of three inches 
 radius, or, shorter still, a three-inch glass. It must follow, from the 
 above, that the strength of a glass is inversely as its focal length, for 
 the longer this is the weaker must be the glass. From this fact, it 
 often becomes a matter of great convenience to express the force of a 
 lens in the form of a fraction which shall show what relation it bears 
 to a common standard, and consequently to other lenses. If we take, 
 as such, a one-inch lens, then parallel rays will meet behind it at a dis- 
 tance of one inch. A two-inch lens will bring such rays to a focus at 
 two inches, and is, therefore, only one half as strong as the first ; and 
 a ten-inch lens will only bring the rays to a focus at ten inches, and is 
 consequently but one tenth as strong as the one-inch lens, and so on. 
 
 By using this fractional form we are able to express on paper the 
 increase or decrease of refractive power when a combination of lenses 
 takes place ; for example, the addition of a four-inch lens and a twelve- 
 inch lens does not make a sixteen-inch lens, but merely shows that we 
 have added together a lens which is equal in focal power to one fourth 
 of the unit or standard to another which is one twelfth of such unit. 
 Thus, -f- Jj = --. So, too, if a twelve-inch lens is subtracted from a 
 four-inch one, we express it % -fa = .
 
 204: TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 These fractional expressions are of daily occurrence in optical 
 literature, and this simple explanation may serve to fix their signifi- 
 cance in the mind. 
 
 There are one or two other technical terms frequently employed 
 in describing the properties of lenses, which it is well to bear in mind. 
 Thus, the principal axis of a lens having two surfaces is a line drawn 
 through the centre of curvature of each surface. Thus, in Fig. 9, a 
 
 line, A B^ drawn through the points 
 a and <z', which are the centres of 
 the two surfaces c and c', is the prin- 
 cipal axis. The point 0, in the cen- 
 tre of the lens, is called the optic 
 centre, and a line drawn through 
 the optic centre, not coincident with 
 j, * g the principal axis, is called a second- 
 
 ary axis. Thus the line EO D is a 
 secondary axis. And it is evident that, although there can be but one 
 principal axis, there may be any number of secondary axes. For the 
 purposes of ophthalmoscopy, the nodal points of a lens may be con- 
 sidered equivalent to its optic centre. 
 
 We have seen that a convex lens has the power of collecting the 
 rays coming from a point of light so as to reproduce this at its focus. 
 Thus, if we darken a window on which the sun is shining so that only 
 a pin-hole is left through which the rays could pass, we should get 
 practically only the rays coming from a single point of light. If we 
 now take a lens, and, holding it in the course of the rays, allow these, 
 after passing through the glass, to fall upon a piece of paper or other 
 screen held at the focal distance of the glass, we shall then get the 
 point of light reproduced on the paper. But, what is true of a single 
 point is true of a collection of points ; and, if we expose the lens to 
 the full force of the sun, we then get on the paper the reproduction 
 of all the points in the sun, and the round and brilliantly illuminated 
 spot on the paper, vaguely called the " focus," is not a mere collection 
 of rays of light, but is a miniature fac-simile of the shape of the sun 
 itself. So, too, with all luminous bodies. 
 
 But, as it has been shown that all bodies which are visible may be 
 considered to have a light of their own, it follows that we ought to 
 be able to get an image of these with a lens just as we do of those 
 which are really luminous and to show that this is true, we have 
 merely, standing at the far end of a room, to let the light coming 
 from the window pass through the lens and be collected, as before, on 
 the paper. If we do this, we then get, not only the image of the
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 205 
 
 window, but also the objects of the landscape beyond. And here, as 
 elsewhere, since all the points in the image are proportionally at the 
 same distance from each other as those of the object, the one is a per- 
 fect fac-simile of the other, the only difference being that the image 
 is smaller and inverted. The reason of this is as follows : 
 
 Let A, in Fig. 10, be a distant point of light, from which the ray 
 A a emerges. This ray, as soon as it touches the lens, is refracted at 
 #, and then proceeds in the direction a A'. A second ray, A a', from 
 
 Fia. 10. 
 
 the same point, strikes the opposite end of the lens at a', where it 
 undergoes refraction, and will proceed as a' A'. It will be seen that 
 the refracted rays will intersect each other at the point A f , where the 
 image of the point A will be formed. For the sake of simplicity we 
 have taken only the outside rays of the cone A a a' ; all the included 
 rays will undergo precisely the same changes, and finally meet at A'. 
 So, too, those coming from B will meet at B' , and all the inter- 
 mediate points on the straight line between A and B will have their 
 image on the line between A and ', and thus an image of the entire 
 object will be produced, inverted and smaller. 
 
 If, now, after having found by construction where the image of 
 any point lies behind the lens, we draw a straight line from the point 
 to its image, we find that it passes through the optical centre of the 
 lens. Consequently, in order to find the direction in which the image of 
 any given point will be after being refracted by a lens, we have only 
 to draw a line from such point through the centre of the lens, and we 
 know that the image must lie somewhere on that line. 
 
 Thus, the image of the point A (Fig. 10) in the head of the arrow, 
 which we will assume to be at such a distance that the rays coming 
 from it are parallel, will lie somewhere on the line A A', and that 
 of B on the line BOB'; and, since the rays before refraction are 
 parallel, their point of intersection on this line will be at a distance 
 behind the lens equal to its focal length.
 
 206 
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 Let in Fig. 11 A B be an arrow three feet long placed twenty 
 feet in front of Z, a twelve-inch lens, and let a b be the image of A 
 B at the focal distance of the lens, namely, one foot. It will be seen 
 
 FIG. 11. 
 
 that the triangle formed by the object A B and the lines drawn from 
 its extremities through the centre of the lens and the triangle formed 
 by the image and the same lines are similar ; consequently the bases of 
 the two triangles must be to each other as their altitudes, or, in other 
 words, the size of the image is to the size of the object as the distance 
 of the image behind the lens is to the distance of the object in front 
 of it; or, more tersely expressed, the image is to the object as their 
 respective distances from the lens. Thus, in Fig. 10 as the object A 
 B is twice as far from the lens as the image, this latter is just half 
 as large as the object. In the shape of a formula (Fig. 11) it is as 
 follows : a b : A B = c' o : C o. As we have taken c' o as equal to one 
 foot, and Co equal to twenty feet, we get ab:AB = l:20;ai 
 the image is consequently ^ of the object A B. 
 
 We have hitherto been occupied in considering the action of a 
 convex lens on rays of light coming from a distant object, the posi- 
 tion of which was stationary. A word must be said on rays which are 
 not parallel and objects which change their positions. 
 
 If we walk toward a mirror the image also approaches the glass, 
 and if we retire the image recedes ; or, in other words, the image and 
 the object have a conjugate relation to each other. It is the same with 
 lenses, only as the object approaches the lens the image retires, and, 
 vice versa, as the object recedes from it the image approaches it. This 
 will be made clearer by a diagram, which, as it may be of essential 
 service in explaining the various relations of conjugate foci, merits a 
 short description. This diagram (Fig. 12) is supposed to represent a 
 convex lens (Z), painted in this case on a piece of board. We will sup- 
 pose the lens to be of six inches focal length. The line C' C is the 
 principal axis of the lens as it passes through the centres of both curva- 
 tures. We will further suppose that the line D a is a ray of light
 
 APPENDIX. 207 
 
 from some distant source, and that its direction before it strikes the 
 lens is parallel to the line C' C. The ray D a would therefore 
 after refraction cut the line C' O C at the focal distance of the lens, 
 that is to say, at F, six inches behind the glass. A slit is made in the 
 diagram along the line C' C, so. that the ray after crossing the line 
 disappears, its continuation being shown by the dotted line. The ray 
 itself is made of a piece of sheet-iron cut at such an angle that, while 
 its unrefracted part shall be parallel to the axis, the refracted part 
 shall be so bent as to cut the axis six inches from the lens. The ray 
 is fastened to the lens at a by means of a pivot, round which it can 
 rotate, but by which it is held firmly enough to maintain a given 
 position. As the ray stands in Fig. 12 it is parallel to the axis of the 
 lens, and has the direction as if it came from an infinite distance. If 
 now we change the position of the luminous object, and bring it to- 
 ward the lens till it reaches the point ^(Fig. 12), which we will sup- 
 pose to be twenty-four inches in front of the glass, then rays will 
 proceed from this point toward the lens, and such rays will no longer 
 be parallel to the axis of the lens, but divergent ; and, in order to 
 make our ray D a represent a ray coming from E and striking the 
 
 FIG. 12. 
 
 lens at a, we must depress the end at D till the ray coincides with 
 the dotted line E a. But as soon as we do this the other end of the 
 ray a F rises in precisely the same degree as the first sinks, and the 
 refracted part of the ray will consequently cut the axis at a greater 
 distance behind the lens. Thus, if we bring the point D to E, the 
 image at Precedes to F 1 , and the line no longer passes at F through 
 the principal focus of the glass, but at a point behind it, F', which is 
 therefore a secondary focus. Rays leaving F' would, on the other 
 hand, return over the same course and have their focus at E, a fact 
 which it is well to bear in mind, as it plays an important part in the 
 theory of the ophthalmoscope. 
 
 If now we advance the object still closer to the lens, say to twelve 
 inches, precisely the same thing occurs, and F' recedes to F". If we 
 make a still further advance, that is to six inches, F" rises to D', and
 
 208 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 
 
 we have now come to the exact opposite of the conditions with which 
 we started ; for whereas, in the first instance, the unrefracted portion 
 of the ray was parallel to the axis, and the refracted part passed 
 through the principal focus six inches behind the lens, now the unre- 
 fracted part is in the principal focus six inches in front of the lens, 
 and the refracted part leaves the lens parallel to its axis. And yet it 
 is evident that in all these changes of the object and its image the 
 amount that the ray itself has been bent has always remained the 
 same. This is precisely what takes place with an actual lens, for the 
 reason that the refractive power of the lens is always the same for 
 any given point on its surface. Thus we can alter the position of the 
 object, and so change the angle at which the ray strikes a given point, 
 which in its turn would alter the position of the image ; but the angle 
 between that part which is refracted and that which is not is always 
 the same.* 
 
 But suppose that, instead of, as in the first instance, depressing the 
 end of the ray at D, we raise it (Fig. 13), then the bent portion, a F^ 
 would sink in a corresponding degree and cut the axis nearer to the 
 
 FIG. 13. 
 
 lens, and F would then advance to F' ; Da would no longer be 
 parallel to the principal axis of the lens, but convergent to it. When 
 convergent rays, therefore, fall on a convex lens, they must have their 
 focus inside of the principal focus. And here, too, if we reverse the 
 thing and suppose the ray to proceed from F', it will return over the 
 same path and will leave the lens in the direction a D f , divergent to 
 the principal axis. Consequently, whenever an object is inside of the 
 principal focus, rays leaving it will emerge from the lens as divergent, 
 and no image will be formed. 
 
 Having now become familiar with the conjugate connection in a 
 
 * This is not absolutely the case, as the most peripheric rays are more re- 
 fracted than the central rays, causing what is known as " spherical aberration," 
 but for all practical purposes it is correct.
 
 APPENDIX. 209 
 
 general way between an object and its image, it is often very conven- 
 ient, and indeed very important, to know the amount of displacement 
 of the image corresponding to a given displacement of the object. 
 The simplest way of illustrating this point seems to me that suggested 
 by Mr. Lawrence. 
 
 Let us take a six-inch lens. If the object were at a distance, then 
 the rays, being parallel, would come to a point at the principal focus 
 of the lens and the image would be six inches behind the lens. If 
 now we move the object up to twenty-four inches, the image would 
 retreat, and the question is, how much ? As the object is twenty-four 
 inches in front of the lens, it would require a lens of twenty-four 
 inches focal length to render rays coming from it parallel ; or, ex- 
 pressed in the form of a fraction, -j- fa. Consequently, of the six- 
 inch lens what would be equal to + fa would be expended in making 
 the rays parallel, while the remainder would be left to exercise its 
 power in bringing the rays to a focus. This remainder would of 
 course be equal to fa = -|- ; and, instead of a lens of six inches 
 focal length acting on rays diverging from twenty-four inches, we 
 should have what is equivalent to precisely the same thing, only 
 differently expressed, viz., an eight-inch lens acting on parallel rays, 
 and the image would then lie at eight inches. 
 
 Let Z, in Fig. 14, be a six-inch lens and A the object at twenty- 
 four inches. It will take a lens equal to fa to render the rays parallel, 
 
 FIG. 14. 
 
 and this may be represented by an imaginary lens in front of the 
 actual lens. This second lens, L ', has been borrowed from the first, 
 and consequently the six-inch lens has been reduced by just so much, 
 fa = -J-, where the image will be formed, at F ' . 
 
 If we move the object still nearer, say to twelve inches from the 
 lens, then it would take so much more of the original lens to make the 
 rays parallel and the lens, instead of being , would be practically 
 ~~ iV T2"- ^ ne i ma ge would then lie at twelve inches behind the 
 glass, and so on. Thus, knowing the strength of the lens and the 
 distance of the object, we can always tell just where the image will 
 14
 
 210 TEXT-BOOK OF OPIITHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 lie, for this would be simply the focal length of the lens minus the 
 distance of the object in front of the lens ; or, better expressed, minus 
 the strength of the imaginary lens which it takes to render the rays 
 coming from the object parallel. We can express this mathemati- 
 cally as follows : If we take a as the place of the image sought, a the 
 distance of the object from the centre of the lens, audy the focal dis- 
 tance of the glass, we then have = . In our example we took 
 
 a f a 
 
 f as six inches and the distance of the object as twenty-four. Con- 
 sequently we get = - =-. Therefore, a 8 inches.* 
 
 All this can be practically worked out on the diagram (Fig. 12). 
 For if we depress D to C', twenty-four inches from the lens, then F, 
 which was at six inches, goes out to F', which is at eight inches, pro- 
 vided the diagram has been made correctly. 
 
 Concave Lenses. A concave lens is simply the reverse of a con- 
 vex, and its effect on light is to render the rays which pass through it 
 more divergent than they previously were. 
 
 Let Fig. 15 represent a common biconcave lens whose surfaces 
 are ground, we will say, on a radius of six inches. 
 
 FIG. 15. 
 
 Let A and B be parallel rays coming from a distant source of light. 
 The end of the ray, marked a, will strike the glass first and will be 
 impeded by it, while 5 is still left to travel in the air. This will alter 
 the direction of the ray A, and the same thing will take place with the 
 ray B ; the two will, after passing through the lens, diverge from each 
 other, A' B' . Consequently, the rays can never meet, and there can 
 be no such thing as a focus behind the lens in the case of parallel rays. 
 But, if we imagine these rays to be continued backward in the direc- 
 tion A' F and B' F, the rays will meet at F in front of the lens. 
 As this focus has no real existence, but only an optical one, it is called 
 a virtual focus, but for all practical purposes it has the same signifi- 
 
 % 
 
 * "Lehrbuch der Ophth.," Mauthner, Ab. 1, p. 54.
 
 APPENDIX. 211 
 
 cance as the focus of a convex lens. And we may remark here, once 
 for all, that all the laws which relate to the one relate to the other, 
 and just as we call a convex lens a positive lens, and affix to it the 
 sign plus, so we call a concave lens a negative lens, and give it the 
 sign minus. 
 
 We can calculate the place of the image in the case of a concave 
 lens just as we did that found by a convex lens. Suppose we have a 
 concave lens of six inches focal length, or . If the object were at 
 twenty feet or more, the rays from it would be practically parallel, 
 and, after passing through the lens, would be rendered divergent to 
 such a degree that, if continued backward, they would meet six inches 
 in front of the lens (see Fig. 15), and here the virtual image would 
 lie. If, now, we move the object to a distance of twelve inches, the 
 rays would diverge as if they came from this distance, and, from the 
 new position of the object, the amount of divergence would be the 
 same as if parallel rays passed through -%. To rays already diverg- 
 ing to this degree we interpose a lens -J-, and, practically speaking, 
 we get the combined force of two lenses, one of which would be 
 equal to -j^, the other to -J-. iV + (~ i) ~~ i- Conse- 
 quently, an object at twelve inches in front of a six-inch lens would 
 have its focus at four inches in front of it. 
 
 We can use the same formula as for convex lenses, only substituting 
 
 for / a negative focal distance, thus : = = ( ,-| ). 
 
 a f a \Jr a/ 
 
 This formula will suffice for infinity, or for any distance less than infinity. 
 But, if convergent rays fall upon a concave glass, the matter be- 
 comes a little more complicated, though still simple enough to be 
 readily understood. If, for example, rays of light have been rendered 
 previously so convergent that they would meet six inches behind a 
 given point, the amount of convergence is the same as if parallel rays 
 had passed through a convex six-inch lens, or, expressed in the form 
 of a fraction, -f- . If now we interpose a ^ to rays which would 
 meet six inches behind the glass, we reduce the convergence by this 
 amount, and the image recedes in a proportionate degree, -^ = -1$. 
 The image, therefore, will lie twelve inches behind the glass. If, 
 however, we had placed the same glass not at six but at four inches in 
 front of the point where the rays would have met, then the amount of 
 convergence of the rays when they strike the glass would be equal to 
 what -(- % would have produced on parallel rays, and we should have 
 ^ T V = , and the image would then lie six inches behind the lens. 
 To find the place where the image would fall, we have simply to 
 subtract the strength of the glass from the distance at which the
 
 212 
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 rays would have met. The formula becomes, therefore, = - 
 
 / 
 Taking, as we did in the above example, a = six inches, and the 
 
 glass -jJg-, we get, -= = . The image lies, therefore, 
 
 twelve inches behind the glass. 
 
 In the above cases the concave lens used was only sufficient to 
 reduce the degree of convergence ; but it may well happen that this 
 shall be strong enough, not only to neutralize the convergence, but 
 after doing this to produce a divergence. Suppose that % is placed 
 in the track of rays which, if uninterrupted, would have met six 
 inches behind where the glass is held, we have then what would be 
 equivalent to a negative glass of % meeting a positive one of . Of 
 the negative glass, what would be equivalent to ^ is expended in 
 rendering the rays, which were convergent before meeting the lens, 
 parallel. The remainder of the glass would then exert its diverging 
 influence. This would be equal to | = ^ The rays, there- 
 fore, though convergent on striking the glass, would diverge after 
 passing through it, to such a degree that if prolonged backward they 
 would meet twelve inches in front of the lens. 
 
 Substituting the above values in the same formula, we get, 
 
 = = . a = 12". The virtual image lies, therefore, 
 a 6 4: 12 
 
 twelve inches in front of the glass. 
 
 Cylindric Lenses. There is still another kind of lens called cylin- 
 dric, because it is a segment of a cylinder instead of a sphere. Cylin- 
 dric glasses, like spherical, may be either concave or convex, or some- 
 times even a combination of both. 
 
 The action of a convex cylindric glass may be illustrated by the 
 following figure : 
 
 FIG. 16. 
 
 Let Fig. 16 represent a convex cylindric glass. If we divide the 
 glass by a plane passing through the centre of curvature and the axis
 
 APPENDIX. 213 
 
 of the cylinder, it is seen at once that the upper and lower sides of 
 the parallelogram thus formed are parallel to each other. 
 
 It will be readily understood that an indefinite number of second- 
 ary planes might lie, side by side, parallel to each other, and that the 
 upper and lower boundary-lines of each plane would be also parallel 
 to each other, though the height of the planes would grow less and less 
 as we approached the border of the glass, as shown by the dotted line, 
 toward b. 
 
 A ray of light passing through one of these planes, and perpen- 
 dicular to the axis of the cylinder, such as A, would not be bent from 
 its course, since both ends of the ray would be retarded in an equal 
 degree; and, even if the ray were not perpendicular to the line cd, 
 which represents the first surface struck, it would not have its direc- 
 tion materially changed on leaving the glass, as the line ef, represent- 
 ing the second surface, is parallel to the first ; consequently, any de- 
 viation which took place at the first surface would be rectified by the 
 second, just as happens with the parallel surfaces of window-panes. 
 But, on the other hand, if the ray passes through a plane at right 
 angles to the axis of the cylinder, as, for example, the ray B, then 
 one end of the ray will strike the glass before the other, and the same 
 result will follow that has already been so fully described. The ray 
 will be bent from its original direction in proportion to the curvature 
 of the lens. But, if the ray should not pass through the plane c, d, e,f, 
 as A does, or some -plane parallel to it, nor yet, again, just at right 
 angles to it, as B does, but somewhere between the two, then the ray 
 would be refracted in an intermediate degree, and in proportion to the 
 angle which it makes with the axis of the cylinder. 
 
 We can grind a spherical surface on the under side of the glass, 
 and then we should have the combination of a spherical and a cylin- 
 drical lens. These are called sphero-cylindric glasses. They have 
 two principal meridians, one parallel to the axis of the cylinder, the 
 other at right angles with it. These two meridians would of course 
 have different foci ; thus, if we had the combination of a spherical 
 surface equal to one sixth, and a cylindric to one twelfth, we should 
 have the focus of one. meridian at six inches, because only the spheri- 
 cal surface would affect the rays ; while, for the meridian at right 
 angles with it, we should get the force of both lenses, and the focus 
 would be at four inches. 
 
 Instead of a spherical surface, we might put on the under surface 
 of the glass another cylindric one at right angles with the first. Such 
 a lens is called bicyliridric, but is rarely used. 
 
 As rays of light are invisible, we can not trace their passage
 
 214 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 through the air, and consequently we can not see the effect that lenses 
 have in altering their direction. But the actual path of the rays can 
 be seen, and all the various effects of lenses and their combinations be 
 beautifully studied, if we allow the rays to pass through smoke instead 
 of air. This can be readily done by arranging a box with a glass 
 cover or side, and by cutting a hole through one end, just large 
 enough to be covered by a given lens, such, for example, as come in 
 the test cases. The smoke is prevented from escaping through the 
 hole by a piece of plane glass. The box is then tilled with a light 
 cloud of tobacco-smoke, which must be allowed a few minutes to dis- 
 tribute itself evenly throughout the box. If we now darken the room, 
 and place a strongly-burning light at a suitable distance from the box, 
 so that the rays from the lamp shall pass through the hole, we then 
 get their illuminated track through the smoke, in such a way that all 
 the various changes effected by different glasses and their combina- 
 tions can be distinctly followed and studied. 
 
 Mirrors. The mirrors now commonly used in ophthalmoscopy are 
 either plane or concave. Let MN (Fig. 17) be a common plane mirror ; 
 A a point of light from which the ray A B strikes the surface of the 
 mirror at B. This ray will be reflected in the direction B 0, making 
 the angle A B D equal to the angle D B 0, D being perpendicular 
 to the point of incidence or, in other words, the angle of reflection 
 is equal to the angle of incidence. An eye placed at would receive 
 
 FIG. 17. (From Ganot.) FIG. 18. (From Ganot.) 
 
 the ray as if it came from the direction B 0, and not A B ; so, too, 
 the ray A C would enter the eye as if it came from a C and not from 
 A C. Consequently, the image would appear to lie in the direction of 
 these rays ; and, as the amount of divergence between the rays them- 
 selves has not been changed, the distance of the image in this new 
 direction would be found by simply extending the rays backward till 
 they intersected ; and this is what the mind in reality does. The 
 image, therefore, for a plane mirror must lie as far behind it as the
 
 APPENDIX. 215 
 
 object lies in front of it, and the image of A would appear at a. 
 What is true of one point is true of all, as in Fig. 18. 
 
 The law that the angle of reflection is equal to that of incidence 
 holds good for all mirrors, spherical as well as plane. Let Fig. 19 
 
 FIG. 19. 
 
 be a concave mirror, and a R the radius of curvature in which it is 
 ground. Let a be a point on its surface. The perpendicular to this 
 point, as in all other spherical surfaces, would be a line drawn from 
 the point to the centre of the sphere, a JR would then be the perpen- 
 dicular to a. Let C a be a ray from some distant point which strikes 
 the surface of the mirror at a. This would be reflected from the 
 mirror in the direction a F, so that the angles JRa F and R a c would 
 be equal, the ray cutting the principal axis of the mirror at F. Pre- 
 cisely the same thing will take place with the ray B d, which will also 
 cut the axis at F, which is consequently the focus of the mirror. The 
 focal length of spherical mirrors is determined as in lenses by parallel 
 rays, and is equal to half the radius of curvature on which it is ground. 
 It will be seen, then, that a concave mirror, by means of reflection, 
 does just what a convex lens does by refraction. It causes rays of 
 light to converge, brings them to a focus, and makes an image. All 
 the laws which are applicable to the one are equally so to the other ; 
 the only difference being that the effects of the mirror are produced 
 in front of it, while those of the lens are produced behind it ; and 
 
 FIG. 20. 
 
 that the converging power of a mirror is twice as great, in respect to 
 a given curvature, as that of a biconvex lens. The action of a concave 
 mirror in the formation of an image will be seen in Fig. 20. 
 
 As with a lens, so with a mirror, a line drawn from any given
 
 216 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 point on its surface through the centre of its. curvature forms the 
 axial line for that point, and on which the image of that point is 
 formed ; thus the image of A (Fig. 20) lies on the lineal C E, at #, the 
 focal distance of the mirror, and the image of B on the line B CD at 
 b the image, like that of a convex lens, being smaller and inverted. 
 
 The relation of change in position between object and image, or. 
 in other words, the relation of conjugate foci, can readily be seen 
 from a diagram similar to that used in the case of the convex lens. 
 As the diagram stands, in Fig. 21, the incident ray ca is parallel to 
 
 FIG. 21. 
 
 the principal axis of the mirror, and the reflected ray a F cuts this at 
 the principal focal length F, aK being the perpendicular to the 
 point a. 
 
 By a simple arrangement of strings, at the back of the diagram 
 which is made of board, a movable ray is made to rotate round the 
 point a. By this contrivance the reflected ray moves concurrently 
 with the incident ray, so that the angles which they form with the per- 
 pendicular always remain equal. Thus, if we depress the ray C a at C 
 (Fig. 22), so that it cuts the axis at c', thus approaching the perpendic- 
 
 FIG. 22. 
 
 ular, and making a smaller angle with it, R a c', instead of, as at first, 
 R a c, then a F approaches the perpendicular to the same degree, and 
 cuts the axis at F' , instead of at F^ the angles which each part of the 
 ray makes with the perpendicular being still equal. If we carry a c' to 
 R, so that it becomes coincident with the perpendicular, F 1 advances 
 at the same time, and likwise becomes coincident with it. There is 
 now no angle of incidence, and there can be, therefore, no angle of 
 reflection. The ray would return straight back over the same course. 
 If we depress c' still further, till it reaches F', the reflected portion
 
 APPENDIX. 217 
 
 of the ray will rise and pass by the incident portion, and take the po- 
 sition a c'. If we carry the incident ray still further, say to F, then 
 the reflected ray rises to a c, and becomes parallel to the axis A R. If 
 we should persist in carrying the incident ray still nearer the mirror, 
 then the reflected portion would rise still more, and pursue its course 
 divergent to the principal axis A B. 
 
 The same law of reversion holds good here as with lenses. Thus, 
 parallel rays, passing over the course, Ca, would have their focus at 
 F, and rays leaving F would return in the direction a o ; c' would 
 likewise have its image at F ', and F' at <?', and so on. 
 
 A convex mirror is the opposite of a concave, and rays reflected 
 from its surface are rendered more divergent. But, as these mirrors 
 are now seldom used in the construction of ophthalmoscopes, a knowl- 
 edge of their principles is not a matter of necessity, and it is to such 
 alone that these few introductory remarks are confined. 
 
 PHYSIOLOGICAL OPTICS. 
 
 Practically speaking, the eye may be looked upon as a simple bi- 
 convex lens, the focal length of which is about equal to eighteen 
 twentieths of an inch (22.231 mm.), the retina being the screen on 
 which the image formed by the lens is received. It is true, if we look 
 at the diagrammatic section of the eye (Fig. 23), we see at once that 
 the refractive system is not 
 a simple but a compound 
 one, consisting of various 
 surfaces of different de- 
 grees of curvature, and of 
 interlying media of differ- 
 ent densities. The princi- 
 pal refracting surface is, of 
 course, the cornea. Behind FIG. 23. 
 
 this comes the aqueous hu- 
 mor ; then the anterior surface of the lens ; then the different strata 
 of the lens itself, with their different densities ; and, finally, its pos- 
 terior surface. All these various elements have, it is true, a deter- 
 mining influence on the direction of the rays. The resolving of all 
 these different factors, however, into one simple biconvex lens may, 
 for the simplicity of illustration, and for practical purposes, be con- 
 sidered justifiable. 
 
 This can easily be accomplished to the eye, at least by continu- 
 ing the curve of the posterior surface of the lens till it cuts the cornea 
 above and below, as seen by the dotted line in Fig. 23. This gives a
 
 218 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 fair representation of a biconvex lens, the anterior surface of which 
 is formed by the anterior surface of the cornea, and the posterior by 
 the posterior surface of the lens, while all the included media may be 
 looked upon as so many strata of the same lens having different in- 
 dices of refraction, similar to a Dollond lens, and thus constructed for 
 the same purpose. The beautiful device of putting a movable dia- 
 phragm, the iris, between the layers of this composite lens, for the 
 sake of protection, has, of course, simply the effect of cutting off the 
 peripheric rays, and regulating the supply of light. The result of 
 this compound lens is that, in a normal eye, parallel rays just come to 
 a focus on the retina. 
 
 Optically speaking, there are three kinds of eyes, their classifica- 
 tion depending on the anatomical construction. It is assumed that 
 the anterior parts of the eye, or those portions which refract the light, 
 and which we will assume to extend to the posterior surface of the 
 lens, are the same in all eyes, and that the only difference in their re- 
 fractive power is occasioned by variations in the length of the antero- 
 posterior axis. This is of course only an assumption, as it is admitted 
 that there are considerable individual differences in different eyes; 
 still, the variations are not so great as to preclude a practical accepta- 
 tion of the assertion, at least for ophthalmoscopic purposes. The 
 three varieties of eyes are : 
 
 1. The normal eye, the antero-posterior axis of which is just of 
 the proper length to allow parallel rays to be brought to a focus on 
 the retina, and hence called emmetropic. 
 
 2. The myopic eye, where the antero-posterior axis is too long. 
 
 3. The hypermetropic, where this is too short. The last two 
 classes, to distinguish them from the first, are called ametropic. 
 
 As the anterior parts of all eyes may be assumed to be the same, 
 
 FIG. 24. 
 
 we have simply to alter the length of the antero-posterior axis of the 
 normal eye to get a representation of the two variations from the 
 standard, as in Fig. 24. Here the first fine line shows a shortening,
 
 APPENDIX. 219 
 
 and the dotted line a lengthening, of the axis ; the first represent- 
 ing a hypermetropic, the second a myopic eye. 
 
 If, now, we subject this triple representative of the eye to parallel 
 rays of light, we should have the result represented in Fig. 24, which 
 is merely an elaboration of the previous diagram (Fig. 12), with which 
 you are now so familiar, the chief difference being that we have here 
 two rays, c a and <?' <z', which move round a fixed point on the surface 
 of the lens a and a', instead of one, as in the former case. For the 
 sake of simplicity, the refraction which takes place at the surface of 
 the cornea is not represented, that only at the lens being shown, as it 
 is from the centre of the lens (o) that the variations in the length of 
 the antero-posterior axis are estimated so far as the practical workings 
 of the ophthalmoscope are concerned. 
 
 Looking at the diagram, we see that the rays c a and c' a' just meet 
 on the retina of the normal eye, that they cut the retina of the hyper- 
 metropic eye before they come to a focus, while they do not reach 
 the retina of the myopic eye till after they have crossed each other. 
 The optical significance of this is, as will be seen from the figure, not 
 that the refractive power of ametropic or abnormal eyes is faulty, but 
 that the retina, or screen, is no longer in the right position to receive 
 the image ; or, in other words, this is no longer at the focal length of 
 the lenticular system, the retina of the hypermetropic eye being in 
 front of this, that of the myopic behind it. The simplest remedy for 
 this would be a displacement of the retina either backward or forward, 
 to suit the circumstances. This can not, of course, be done. We can 
 not alter at will the anatomical construction of the eye, but we can 
 change the direction of the rays so as to make them come to a focus 
 on the retina no matter where this may be. Thus, by depressing the 
 end of the ray c toward the axis (Fig. 25), the other part of the ray,, 
 
 FIG. 25. 
 
 or that within the eye, will rise and cut the axis farther back, and in 
 proportion to the amount of depression, which we will assume to 
 be in the present case represented by the point d. If we elevate d 
 to d, a like recession of the intraocular end takes place with the 
 lower ray, and the crossing of the two is no longer at F, on the retina
 
 220 
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPIITHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 of the normal eye, but at F', on that of the myopic eye. In order to get 
 the rays to cross on the retina of the myopic eye, we have had to force 
 them to leave their previous parallel condition, as shown in Fig. 24, 
 and represented by the dotted line in Fig. 25, and assume, when they 
 strike the cornea, a certain degree of divergence. From this it fol- 
 lows directly that the only rays which can be brought to a focus on 
 the retina of a myopic eye are divergent rays, and the amount of 
 divergence necessary depends on the degree of abnormal lengthening 
 of the axis. Under the conditions taken in the diagram, d would 
 have its image at F' ; and, vice versa, rays returning from F' would 
 have their image at d / consequently, only convergent rays can leave 
 thefundus of a myopic eye. 
 
 If, on the other hand, we wished to make the rays c and <?', which 
 are parallel in the case of the normal eye, meet on the retina of the 
 hypermetropic eye (Fig. 26), we should have to separate the outer 
 
 FIG. 26. 
 
 
 eajds of the rays from each other, so as to bring their intraocular ends 
 tof meet on the anterior line. As we separate the ends of the rays c 
 and <?', F approaches to F', and when this is reached we see that 
 the rays <? and G' no longer run parallel to each other, but are con- 
 vergent, as in Fig. 26. 
 
 Thus we see that the only rays which can meet on the retina of a 
 hypermetropic eye when at rest are convergent rays, while, on the 
 contrary, rays diverging from a point on the retina, say F', must of 
 necessity leave the eye as divergent. We can not, it is true, alter the 
 
 c' 
 
 FIG. 27. 
 
 direction of the rays in case of the actual eye by the hand, as we have 
 in the diagram, but we can by means of suitable glasses. Thus, with 
 concave glasses, we can make rays which were originally parallel
 
 APPENDIX. 221 
 
 diverge from each other to any required degree. Take the same dia- 
 gram, Fig. 27. Instead of compressing c and <?' to d, we can use a con- 
 cave glass, which would make the rays, after they had passed through 
 it, diverge from each other to such a degree that they would strike 
 upon the cornea as if they came from the direction of d, and of 
 course, as we have altered the direction of one end of the ray, we 
 also have that of the other, and F passes to F 1 '. 
 
 There are two ways, therefore, by which a near-sighted eye can 
 see objects. Either the objects themselves must be brought toward 
 the eye till the rays from it assume such a divergence that they come 
 to a focus on the retina, or the object remains at a stated distance 
 and the rays from it are rendered sufficiently divergent by means of 
 glasses. Thus, if a person is compelled to bring an object to a dis- 
 tance of twelve inches from the eye before he can see it plainly, his 
 farthest point of distinct vision, or, as is technically said, his " far- 
 point," lies at twelve inches. To produce this effect, that is to say, 
 to render rays coming from a distant object as divergent as if they 
 came from twelve inches, it would require a twelve-inch concave glass, 
 or fa. The myopia is, therefore, said to be equal to -fa (M = fa). 
 We neglect here, for the sake of simplicity, the distance between the 
 eye and the glass. The myopia in a given case, then, is expressed by 
 the weakest glass which renders vision distinct for distant objects. 
 
 So, too, with the hypermetropic eye (Fig. 28). The parallel rays 
 c a c' a' would not be brought to a focus on the retina, but would pass 
 
 FIG. 28. 
 
 behind it before crossing. By means of convex glasses we can make 
 the rays which were originally parallel converge to any required de- 
 gree. By the proper glass we could make the rays cac' a', after pass- 
 ing through the lens, bend toward each other and strike the eye as if 
 they really came from the direction of the dotted lines e and e'. F 
 then would advance to F^ and we should have the focus of the rays 
 on the retina and not behind it. That convex glass, therefore, which 
 just renders the rays so convergent that they will meet on the retina, 
 expresses the degree of hypermetropia present. If this glass is -j- fa, 
 then we call the eye hypermetropic fa, and so on, neglecting for the
 
 222 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTIIALMOSCOPY. 
 
 sake of simplicity the distance between the glass and the nodal point 
 of the eye. 
 
 Mention has been made several times of the eye being at rest, and 
 this leads me naturally to say a few words in regard to another factor 
 which plays an important part in the production of an image upon 
 the retina, namely, the accommodation. This is the ability which we 
 have of increasing the existing refraction of the eye, whatever this 
 may be. This is brought about by the ciliary muscle, which increases 
 the power of the lens, and in precisely the same way in the case of 
 the lens of the eye as with other lenses, that is, by increasing the de- 
 gree of its curvature. The manner in which this is done is shown in 
 the drawing, " Recent Advances of Ophthalmic Science," p. 109. 
 
 FIG. 29. Diagram showing the relative condition of the eye when at rest and in 
 strong accommodation (after Kramer and Helmholtz, the anatomy after Arlt). 
 
 " The right-hand half of the diagram represents the eye in a state 
 of rest, the left in full accommodation for near vision, the relative 
 curvature of the crystalline on the two sides corresponding quite ac- 
 curately in scale to the calculations of Kramer and Helmholtz. The 
 pupil is also shown as projected forward and somewhat contracted in 
 accommodation. It will be noticed that the ciliary processes do not, 
 in either case, touch the margin of the lens, an observation due to 
 Yon Graefe, and confirmed by other investigators." 
 
 The exact manner in which the action of the ciliary muscle is prop- 
 agated to the lens still remains unsolved, though the commonly ac- 
 cepted theory is that it draws forward the suspensory ligament of the 
 lens, which then through its own elasticity assumes a greater curva- 
 ture. This, as is seen from the drawing, is represented as taking place 
 entirely at the anterior surface of the lens. By many physiologists a 
 slight, and by some a considerable, change is supposed to take place 
 also in the posterior surface. 
 
 An emmetropic eye, therefore, when in a state of rest and looking
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 223 
 
 at a distant object, is already adjusted for parallel rays which then just 
 come to a focus on the retina at F, as shown by the dotted line c a F 
 (Fig. 30). But if the object is moved to twelve inches, that is, to d, 
 then F goes out to F', and we should either have to move the retina 
 
 FIG. 30. 
 
 backward, as in the case of the myopic eye to reach F', or we must 
 increase the refractive power of the anterior part of the eye. As we 
 have just seen, Nature prefers to do the latter, and does it by putting 
 on an extra curve to the lens, as shown in the lower half of the dia- 
 gram (Fig. 30) ; and the nearer the object to the eye the greater the 
 curve required, or, in other words, the greater the accommodation. 
 By this means F' is brought back to F. Now, an eye which is ad- 
 justed for rays that diverge from an object at a distance of twelve 
 inches is a myopic eye ; and, practically speaking, the normal eye has 
 become equivalent to a myopic eye, the only difference being that in 
 one case the object is obtained by having a longer antero-posterior 
 axis, and in the other by means of a stronger lenticular power. We 
 might just as well have got this extra refractive force outside of the 
 eye by the help of a lens as by increasing the strength of that within 
 the eye ; and when the ciliary muscle is weak, or the lens loses its 
 power by becoming inelastic and natter through old age, this is pre- 
 cisely what is done. 
 
 So, too, with a hypermetropic eye. If this was looking at a distant 
 object from which parallel rays proceeded, these would meet behind 
 
 FIG. 81. 
 
 the retina, as the antero-posterior axis of this eye is too short, as, for 
 example, at F' (Fig. 31). Here, too, one of two things must happen : 
 either we must move the retina back to F", or by increasing the re- 
 fractive power bring F' to F, which, of course, is what really does
 
 224 
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 take place, as represented in the lower half of the diagram (Fig. 31), 
 We might have done the same thing by means of a glass outside of 
 the eye, as in Fig. 28 ; and, when for any reason the deformity is so 
 great or the ciliary muscle so weak that the effort to produce or main- 
 tain the requisite increase in curvature occasions pain or fatigue, we 
 do then make use of a glass. 
 
 Practically speaking, then, a hypermetropic eye transforms itself 
 into an emmetropic or normal eye when it sees an object distinctly in 
 the distance, the only difference between the two being that one 
 brings the rays to a focus on the retina without effort, while the other 
 is obliged to increase the refractive power by increasing the curvature 
 of the lens, or, in other words, by accommodating. 
 
 FIG. 32. 
 
 If now we bring these three conditions of the eye into comparison 
 with each other, we may get a clearer idea of what accommodation is. 
 In Fig. 32 let A be a myopic, B an emmetropic, and C a hyperme- 
 tropic eye, and suppose that they are all looking at an object twelve 
 inches from the eye, d. 
 
 The practical result is the same in each case, since all the eyes 
 bring the rays to a focus on the retina ; but the myopic eye, having 
 its far-point in twelve inches, is not compelled to increase its refraction 
 at all. It thus sees the object without any effort. But the emme- 
 tropic eye, having its retina inside of the focus for rays coming from
 
 APPENDIX. 225 
 
 twelve inches, has to use, in making itself equal to the myopic eye, a 
 certain amount of tension of the ciliary muscle. The hypermetropic 
 eye (C 1 ) must exert still more. If, however, we moved the object to 
 six inches, then the myopic eye would in its turn have to make itself 
 more myopic by calling forth its accommodation, and thus increasing 
 the curve of the lens. Therefore, I repeat that accommodation is 
 simply the means which we possess of increasing the refractive power 
 of the eye, whatever may be its original condition. Thus, a normal 
 eye may be changed for the moment into a myopic eye of a greater 
 or less degree, and then, relaxing its accommodation, return to its 
 primitive condition. So, too, a myopic eye may become more myo- 
 pic, and a hypermetropic may assume a state of refraction correspond- 
 ing to an emmetropic or myopic eye to suit existing demands, and 
 then, by relaxing the tension of the ciliary muscle, return to its former 
 condition. 
 
 Unfortunately, the converse of the proposition does not hold 
 good. We can not decrease the original condition of refraction by 
 flattening the lens ; thus, we can not lessen the refraction of an em- 
 metropic eye so as to make it hypermetropic ; neither can we make 
 a myopic eye less myopic nor a hypermetropic eye more hyper- 
 metropic. Thus, in Fig. 32, if we should carry the object at d away 
 from the eye to twenty-four inches, then both the emmetropic and 
 hypermetropic eyes, in order to see the object, would simply have 
 to relax a little of the tension of the ciliary muscle, and so adjust the 
 eye for twenty-four inches. But the myopic eye, as it used no ten- 
 sion for an object at twelve inches, has none to relax for one at twenty- 
 four inches ; and all objects beyond a distance of twelve inches must 
 be seen indistinctly unless a glass is used. When this is done, and 
 the myopic eye is reduced to a normal eye, then the accommodation 
 takes place within certain limits, precisely as if the eye were origi- 
 nally a normal eye. 
 
 THE THEORY OF THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE. 
 
 We have seen in the earlier part of these remarks that, in order 
 to see an object which is not self-luminous, rays of light coming 
 from some other source must first strike upon the object and then 
 be reflected from it in such a direction as to enter the eye of the 
 observer. 
 
 It had been, of course, known for an indefinite period that rays of 
 light must enter the eye ; but up to a comparatively recent time it 
 was believed that these did not leave it again, but were absorbed within 
 
 the eye by virtue of the choroidal and retinal pigmentary layers, which 
 15
 
 226 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 were supposed to be a special provision for that purpose. But Helm- 
 holtz pointed out, if others had not done it before him, that, even if 
 this were true in the main, there were certain parts of the eye not cov- 
 ered by the choroidal pigment notably the optic nerve from which 
 rays of light must be reflected, and which ought, at least, to give an 
 indication of the fact of reflection from the back of the eye through 
 the pupil, even if the quantity of light was not enough to permit us 
 to see the fundus oculi in detail. Yet, notwithstanding the fact that 
 light must be reflected back from the eye, the pupil preserves a jetty 
 blackness in the broadest daylight. The solution of this problem, so 
 far as the eye was concerned, was the creation of the ophthalmoscope, 
 which, while it was the work of a single mind, may yet be said to be 
 the embodiment of the labors and aspirations of some of the greatest 
 physiologists for several centuries past. 
 
 Helmholtz showed that the blackness of the pupil depended on 
 the optical law, that the rays leaving the eye must return in the same 
 direction in which they enter it, that is, in the direction of the source 
 of illumination. 
 
 This may be illustrated in a simple way as follows : 
 Let A be a candle and B any small object (Fig. 33). Kays com- 
 ing from the candle would strike the object B and be reflected from 
 
 FIG. 33. 
 
 it by irregular reflection in all directions, and the object would be visi- 
 ble by means of these reflected rays to observers stationed at different 
 places, as, for example, at a, 5, c, d, e, /", the lines running to which 
 may be supposed to represent the rays diverging from a single point
 
 APPENDIX. 227 
 
 of the object B, the incident rays not being shown. Now, suppose 
 we surround the object by a spherical screen (Fig. 34) in such a way 
 that, starting from the point A, we pass round behind the object, and 
 so on till we stop just short of completing the circle at h'. We see at 
 
 FIG. 34. 
 
 once that by doing this we cut off all the rays, both incident and re- 
 flected, except those which enter and escape through the narrow open- 
 ing between h and h' in the direction of the source of light. Conse- 
 quently, as the eyes stationed at the points a, 5, c, d, e, f, do not receive 
 any of these return rays, the object will not be seen, and the aperture 
 through which the rays returned will necessarily appear black. In 
 order, then, to get a view of the object, or even a sensation of light, 
 we must put our eye in the course of the returning rays, and here we 
 at once find ourselves in a dilemma : for, if we place our 'eye at ^, 
 that is, behind the candle, this latter cuts off the returning rays, as the 
 flame is not transparent ; and if we place our eye in front of the can- 
 dle, then our head immediately cuts off the rays emerging . from the 
 candle, consequently none can enter the supposed sphere (Fig. 34), and 
 none therefore return. 
 
 Now, the above, although a rough, is a sufficiently exact repre- 
 sentation of the conditions of the eye to warrant us in asserting that 
 what takes place in one case will in the other. Indeed, we have only 
 to add a dioptric system to make the conditions practically the same. 
 The dioptric system of the eye has no effect upon the general direction 
 in which the rays leave the eye. These must leave it in the direction 
 opposite to that in which they entered it, or, in other words, toward the 
 source of the illumination, no matter what the optical condition of the
 
 228 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 eye may be. The student, moreover, must bear in mind that toward 
 does not mean to the source of illumination, as is often stated and fig- 
 ured in works on the ophthalmoscope, where it is asserted that the sur- 
 face of the fundus of the eye and the source of illumination are con- 
 jugate foci. This, it is true, may possibly be the case ; but it never, 
 or almost never, does so happen. It can only happen when the 
 observed eye is adjusted exactly either by its refraction or by the 
 use of its accommodation for the lamp. If this were not so, we 
 could never tell with the ophthalmoscope what the refraction of 
 an eye really was. Now, although the dioptric system does not affect 
 the general direction of the rays of light, it of course does affect the 
 amount of their convergence or divergence. This effect of the 
 refracting media will be made clearer by the following diagram : 
 Let A (Fig. 35) be an illuminated point on the fundus of the nor- 
 
 -c' 
 
 or 
 
 FIG. 35. 
 
 mal eye, B. Kays diverging from this point will issue from the 
 pupil. If it were not for the lenticular system the external rays of 
 the cone would proceed in the direction A o and A o', and an ob- 
 server's eye at either of these places would receive such rays. Meet- 
 ing, however, the refracting media, these rays are rendered more 
 convergent and bent in toward the visual axis, and they would then 
 proceed in the direction c and c'. The observer would have to 
 move his head to these points to get the reflex, and the more he 
 moved his head toward the median line the more apt he would be 
 to cut off the entering rays, without which there could, of course, be 
 no reflected ones, and the more difficult it would be to get a reflex. 
 
 To illustrate the preceding principle, we can take a French model 
 of the eye, such as is used for the purposes of teaching the use of the 
 ophthalmoscope. If a candle is placed before this, the pupillary space 
 appears black, no matter how near or how far off the lamp is, for the 
 reasons just stated. But if now, returning to Fig. 34, we could bore 
 a hole in the flame at g, so as to make a vacant space through which 
 the rays might pass, we should then, if we placed our eye at g, be in 
 the track of the rays returning in the direction h, ti y g, and we ought
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 229 
 
 then to get either a view of the object itself or at least a sensation of 
 light through reflection. A very simple experiment shows this to be 
 the case. 
 
 Let Fig. 36 represent the candle and the model of the eye a foot 
 or two in front of it. A short piece of metal tube is passed through 
 the centre of the flame, and is held in its position by a wire twisted 
 round the candle. We have by this means a perforation through the 
 centre of the flame, and the rays of light returning to the flame and 
 striking within the aperture ought to pass through the tube and make 
 themselves manifest to the eye placed in their path. This is indeed 
 the case, for the pupil of the eye which was formerly black is seen to 
 be illuminated ; and if some other simple conditions be fulfilled, which 
 are to be dwelt on a little later, a faint image of the back of the eye 
 is obtained. 
 
 As shown in the drawing (Fig. 36), it is better to have a slight 
 shield or screen thrown round the far end of the tube to protect the 
 
 FIG. 36. 
 
 eye. This is not, however, necessary, nor indeed is it to have even 
 the tube, for, by carefully approaching the eye to the very edge of 
 the flame, the outside rays of the returning pencil of light will enter 
 the eye of the observer, and the same effect in a less degree will be pro- 
 duced. A screen, if preferred, may be used to protect the eye. This 
 is precisely what Briicke did several years before the ophthalmoscope 
 was invented, thus coming within an ace of being himself the dis- 
 coverer, and thus adding one more to the long list of those classical 
 failures which are almost as brilliant and almost as immortal as the 
 success itself.
 
 230 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 From this to the complete development of the ophthalmoscope 
 was but a single step, which accident might have stumbled upon at 
 any moment, if genius, with its unerring instincts and irrefutable 
 methods, had not anticipated it, and completely solved the whole 
 problem. The deductions of Helmholtz may be illustrated in the fol- 
 lowing simple way, which is merely the representation of an ordinary 
 ophthalmoscopic examination : 
 
 Let Z (Fig. 37) be the lamp, which is the source of illumination, 
 at about one foot from B, the observed eye, and m the mirror, con- 
 sisting of three plates of plane glass, placed at the proper inclination. 
 
 L r 
 
 r F 
 
 FIG. 37. 
 
 Now, first, in regard to the rays which enter the eye : 
 Rays will diverge from Z, and, striking on the plane mirror m, 
 will be reflected just as they were received, the only difference being 
 that their direction is changed. They will consequently strike on IPs 
 cornea as divergent rays. As the eye is normal and at rest, it has 
 only refractive power sufficient to bring parallel rays to a focus on 
 the retina ; these rays, cast into the eye by the mirror as divergent, 
 must, therefore, if continued, meet behind the retina at F, where 
 the image of the point at Z would have been formed if _Z?' retina 
 had not interfered. But IPs retina does interfere, and cuts the cone 
 of light this side of its apex, and thus a circular illuminated spot is 
 formed on its surface between r and s. 
 
 It is evident that the size of this illuminated circle must vary with 
 the distance of the lamp from the mirror, and the kind of mirror used, 
 and its distance from the eye to be observed. Thus, if we should 
 move the lamp farther off, say to Z' (Fig. 37), the rays striking on the 
 mirror would be less divergent ; and, leaving it less divergent, they
 
 APPENDIX. 231 
 
 would be brought to a focus nearer to IPs retina, say at F 1 . IPs reti- 
 na would then cut the cone of light nearer to its apex, and the circle 
 r' s' would be smaller, but brighter, as the rays would be more con- 
 densed. On the other hand, if the lamp were brought nearer to the 
 mirror, then the rays reflected against -B's cornea would be more 
 divergent, and their focus at a greater distance behind the retina. 
 Consequently, the illuminated circle would be larger, but less brill- 
 iant, as the rays would be less condensed. 
 
 Of course, this gain in brilliancy, in both of the above cases, has 
 its limits, and can only hold good so long as the condensation of the 
 light by the mirror outweighs the loss of rays consequent on the re- 
 moval of the lamp. 
 
 Experience as well as theory shows us that, for the average practi- 
 cal working of the ophthalmoscope, a concave mirror is better for illu- 
 minating purposes than a plane one. 
 
 Let the light L (Fig. 38) be at twelve inches from the mirror, 
 and all the conditions the same as in the preceding case, with the ex- 
 
 Fio. 38. 
 
 ception that, for a plane mirror, we substitute a concave one (m\ say 
 of six inches focal length. If the lamp was at such a distance that the 
 rays coming from it were parallel, they would, after reflection, meet 
 at six inches in front of the mirror. But, as they come from a dis- 
 tance of only twelve inches, the focus will no longer be at six, but at 
 twelve inches, in front of the mirror ( -fa = 1 V). Consequently, 
 the rays will leave the mirror as a converging cone of light, and, if 
 unintercepted, would meet at a distance of twelve inches in front of 
 the mirror. JB's eye, however, intercepts this already converging 
 cone, which is thus rendered still more converging ; and, as ffs eye is 
 adapted for parallel rays, these converging rays must come to a focus 
 in front of ffs retina, say at F, and, crossing here, will form, by the
 
 232 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 time they arrive at the retina, the illuminated circle r s (Fig. 38). 
 And if we increased the curvature of the mirror, as is shown bj the 
 dotted line, this would simply render the rays leaving it more conver- 
 gent, by which they would cross each other sooner, at F', and the cir- 
 cle of illumination on the retina would be larger, but, as a rule, less 
 brilliant ; for, although a larger number of rays would be thrown into 
 the eye, they would be diffused, by their early crossing in the vitre- 
 ous, over a disproportionately large surface of the retina. 
 
 It is evident that here also the position of the lamp must have its 
 influence, as must also the refraction of the eye, in this as in all other 
 cases. For, if the eye is myopic, the retina will cut the cone at a 
 greater distance from the apex, and the circle of illumination will be 
 larger, but less brilliant, than in a normal eye ; while, with a hyper- 
 metropic eye, the reverse will hold good. The size of the pupil must 
 also have an effect on the circle of illumination ; the more dilated the 
 former, the larger the latter will be. 
 
 Plane and concave mirrors are now the only ones which are com- 
 monly used in the construction of ophthalmoscopes. Still, convex 
 mirrors are occasionally seen in the older instruments ; and, for a de- 
 scription of the laws on which they depend, I would refer to any 
 good hand-book on optics. A concave mirror of seven inches focal 
 length is the one best adapted to all work, if only one is to be 
 used. 
 
 "We come now to the second step in the problem, that which relates 
 to the rays which leave the eye, and by means of which the various 
 objects therein become visible. 
 
 As soon as the entering rays reach the bottom of the eye, they are 
 received by the various membranes, and by them reflected in two 
 ways : First, by regular reflection, as there are some polished surfaces 
 present. Secondly, by irregular reflection. The first has nothing to 
 do with our ability to see the fundus of the eye. For, if we depended 
 on this regular reflection, we should see only the details of the source 
 of the illumination. We see the objects at the bottom of the eye, 
 just as we see all others, through the irregular reflection. The light 
 thrown into the eye by the ophthalmoscope is received by the differ- 
 ent membranes, and then thrown out again by them, just as if they 
 had produced them, and were themselves self-luminous bodies. 
 
 Thus the mirror, the position of the lamp, and the direction of the 
 rays, as they enter the eye, only affect the extent and brilliancy of the 
 illumination, and exert no influence whatever on the direction of the 
 rays which leave the eye. These must always diverge from the 
 membranes themselves, as a starting-point, although it may well hap-
 
 APPENDIX. 233 
 
 pen that the incident rays which produce the illumination, when they 
 strike the retina and other membranes, are convergent. 
 
 Let the same conditions be repeated, and let us suppose that the 
 entering rays (Fig. 39) have crossed each other in the vitreous, and 
 
 FIG. 39. 
 
 that there is a circle of illumination formed on the retina, comprised 
 between the letters R and 8. Eays will be reflected from every point 
 in the circle, just as if they had been generated there ; for example, 
 they will diverge from the point E, in every direction. Some will 
 strike the sides of the eye, and be again partially reflected and par- 
 tially absorbed, and this will go on till they are consumed. But such 
 as do find their way out of the pupil must leave the eye parallel to 
 each other, as the surfaces from which they started are practically in 
 the principal focus of the lenticular system of the eye, this being 
 normal. Some of these rays would pass through the hole in the mir- 
 ror (m), and the eye of an observer, supposing this to be adapted for 
 parallel rays, and placed against this hole, would then be in the track 
 of the rays coming from the point E, and would thus see this point 
 just as it would any other object. 
 
 Rays, therefore, leaving an emmetropic or normal eye at rest must 
 always be parallel, and, if, for illustration, we return to the diagram 
 (Fig. 24), we shall see that we can not arrange the intraocular ends of 
 the rays so that they shall diverge from any point of the circle which 
 represents the retina of the normal eye without having the external 
 parts of the ray run parallel to each other. 
 
 Suppose precisely the same conditions to be represented as in the 
 former case, except that we substitute for the observed eye a myopic 
 in the place of a normal eye (Fig. 40). Rays will leave the mirror 
 and strike upon the cornea with precisely the same degree of con-
 
 234: TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 vergence as before. They will cross at the same distance behind 
 the lens as formerly, but, as the retina of a myopic eye is farther 
 from the place of crossing, the circle of illumination will be larger, 
 but at the same time fainter. Rays will leave this illuminated cir- 
 
 FIG. 40. 
 
 cle rs from every point, and those leaving e, for example, will there- 
 fore diverge through the vitreous till they strike upon the lenticu- 
 lar system. After passing through this they will leave the eye as 
 convergent, because e is beyond the principal focus of the eye, 
 which is simply in accordance with the law already made manifest. 
 For, if we turn back to Fig. 26, we shall see that we can not make 
 the intraocular end of the rays diverge from any point in the cir- 
 cle representing the retina of a myopic eye without the external 
 portion of the rays converging toward each other. Of course, the 
 amount of this convergence depends on the amount of displacement 
 backward of the retina, or, in other words, on the degree of the 
 myopia present. If there were a myopia of one third, then the rays 
 would meet three inches in front of the eye. Now, if a normal eye 
 were placed behind the hole in the mirror, convergent rays would en- 
 ter it, and of course come to a focus in front of the retina at e', and 
 the observer would not have a clear image of e. These rays, leaving 
 the observed eye, must be reduced in their convergence till they be- 
 come parallel, as JB, the observing eye, is accommodated for such rays. 
 This is done by the suitable concave glass (g). 
 
 Again, let the same conditions be applied to a hypermetropic eye 
 (Fig. 41). Rays of precisely the same degree of convergence will 
 strike upon the cornea of the observed eye, and cross at the same 
 place in the vitreous ; but, as the retina of the hypermetropic eye is
 
 APPENDIX. 235 
 
 nearer to the apex of the cone, the circle of illumination will be 
 smaller than in either the normal or myopic eye, but, at the same 
 time, more brilliant. Rays diverging from the point e (Fig. 41), as 
 this is inside of the principal focus of the eye, will leave it diver- 
 gent, and, if we turn again to the diagram (Fig. 26), we shall see that 
 we can not make the intraocular ends of the rays meet on any part of 
 the circle which marks tlie retina of a hyperinetropic eye without the 
 external portions diverging from each other, as is shown in the fig- 
 ure (41). If, now, a normal eye were placed behind the hole in the 
 mirror, divergent rays would enter it, and as such would not come to 
 a focus until they had passed the retina, since the eye is adjusted for 
 parallel rays. The rays must, therefore, be made parallel before they 
 can be brought to e on IPs retina. This is done by rendering the rays 
 leaving A. less divergent, that is, parallel, by the proper convex glass 
 (g) behind the ophthalmoscope. But B might, instead of using a 
 
 FIG. 41. 
 
 glass, obtain the additional focalizing power by increasing the cur- 
 vature of his own lens, or, in other words, by using the necessary 
 amount of accommodation. 
 
 We have, in our examples, for the sake of simplicity, taken only 
 a single point (e) in the illuminated circle, but what is true of one 
 point is true of ah". Thus, the image of the bottom of the observed 
 eye is formed on the retina of the observer's eye, just as it is with 
 other objects. The observer sees this image " upright," that is, not 
 inverted. It is magnified also, for, after all, looking into another eye 
 is simply looking through a pretty strong maguifying-glass, formed 
 by its lenticular system, at the various objects beyond, such as the 
 retinal vessels, optic nerve, and choroid. 
 
 From the fact that we do look directly into the eye, the above is 
 called the " direct method " ; or, since the image is not reversed, that 
 by the " upright image " ; and, although this is by far the most beau-
 
 236 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 tiful and satisfactory way of seeing the bottom of the eye, there is 
 another which has advantages peculiar to itself, which render it an 
 indispensable adjunct to the one just described. This method, from 
 the fact that we do not look directly into the eye, but see an aerial 
 
 FIG. 42. 
 
 and inverted image of the fundus, is called the " indirect method," 
 or that by the " inverted image." The principles on which it de- 
 pends are shown in Fig. 42. 
 
 The mirror is not, as in the former case, placed close to the eye, 
 but at about eighteen or twenty inches from it, as J!/, which we will 
 suppose represents the common ophthalmoscopic mirror of six or 
 seven inches focal length. 
 
 Kays from L will strike the mirror, and will be brought by it to 
 such a degree of convergence that they will, as the lamp is about two 
 feet away, be brought to a focus, and cross each other at about eight 
 to ten inches in front of the mirror, say at d. The rays will then 
 continue their course as divergent rays, and, as such, would enter the 
 observed eye JB if it were not that a lens (g) (which we will assume 
 to be an ordinary two-inch one) is interposed in front of B. Passing 
 through this lens, the rays are again changed from divergent to con- 
 vergent, and as such enter IPs eye, by which they are rendered still 
 more convergent, so that they again cross each other in the vitreous, 
 say at d' , and thence continue as a diverging cone till they are inter- 
 cepted by the retina, on which they form the illuminated circle R and 
 s. This portion of the fundus once illuminated, just as in the former 
 case, sends out rays in every direction, as if they had been generated 
 from it ; and, bearing this fact in mind, we can discard the compara- 
 tively complicated manner in which the illumination was produced, 
 and turn our attention solely to the emitted rays, which must diverge 
 from every point in the illuminated circle. Take first the point R 
 (Fig. 43). Kays would diverge from this in all directions, and, pass-
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 23T 
 
 ing through the lens and pupil, since A is normal, would leave the 
 eye parallel to each other, and parallel to the axial ray, which, as you 
 will remember, is a straight line drawn from 
 the point of emission through the centre of the 
 lens. Rays leaving s would do precisely the 
 same thing. Now, as all these rays, after leav- 
 ing the eye, are parallel, it is evident that they 
 can never meet, and consequently no image 
 would be formed by them if left to themselves. 
 But here, again, the lens (</) comes into play ; 
 for, by this, the rays are changed from parallel 
 to convergent, and of course to such a degree 
 that they will meet, since the rays were par- 
 allel before entering the lens, at or about the 
 principal focus of the glass, whatever this may 
 be, where an inverted image will be formed 
 in the air (It's'). As there is no screen or 
 other object to stop the passage of the rays, 
 they will, after crossing and forming the im- 
 age of all the points in It #, continue on their 
 course. This crossing of the rays, and their 
 continuance through the air, after forming the 
 image at R' s', is precisely equivalent to rays 
 diverging from an actual object situated at 
 that spot, and we can, therefore, so far as our 
 vision is concerned, look upon this aerial im- 
 age as an actual object, which throws out rays 
 of its own in the direction of our eye, that is 
 to say, in the direction which they would pur- 
 sue after crossing. R' s' is then the fac-simile 
 of RS, the bottom of the eye. And, while 
 most of these rays would, if continued, strike 
 against the mirror, and thus be lost to the ob- 
 server, such as passed through the hole in the 
 mirror would enter his eye as if they came 
 from the points between R S', and he would 
 thus have the image of these formed on his 
 retina R" S", and so obtain a view of the fun- 
 
 dus. What is really seen, however, as will be plain by looking at 
 Fig. 43, is not the back of the eye itself, but its inverted image. 
 
 It will be observed, by looking at Fig. 42, that, if we change the 
 condition of the various factors taken, we must essentially change the
 
 238 
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 results. If, for example, we alter the position of tlie lamp so as to 
 bring it nearer to the mirror, then the first crossing of the rays, d 
 (Fig. 42), will be farther from the surface of the mirror ; and this, in 
 its turn, will necessitate a corresponding displacement of the second 
 crossing in the vitreous humor, which will then take place nearer the 
 retina, and the circle of illumination will then be smaller. If, on the 
 other hand, the lamp were moved farther from the mirror, the reverse 
 would take place. A precisely similar influence would be exerted if 
 we used a weaker or stronger mirror. As, however, the variations as 
 to the position of the lamp and the curve of the mirror are usually 
 confined to narrow limits, it is not worth while to dwell further on 
 this point. A much more essential factor is the lens, as this influences, 
 in a great degree, both the brilliancy and the size of the image. 
 
 Suppose (Fig. 44) that, in the first instance, while all the other 
 conditions remain the same, we use a four-inch lens. Rays leaving the 
 
 FIG. 44. 
 
 eye (B) as parallel would, after passing through the lens, be ren- 
 dered convergent to such a degree that they would meet four inches 
 in front of the lens, where we should have the aerial image as repre- 
 sented in the figure by R ' S'. If we now substitute for the four- 
 inch lens a three-inch one, represented in the figure by the first dotted 
 line, then the rays leaving B will, after passing through the glass, be 
 rendered more convergent, and will come to a focus sooner than in 
 the first case, and the image will be smaller, as represented by the 
 dotted line and the letters R" S". If, again, we take a two-inch lens, 
 as shown by the broken lines, precisely the same eft'ect will be pro- 
 duced. The rays will be rendered more convergent, and the image 
 will be still smaller, as shown by the second dotted line and the letters 
 R"' S"'. So that, by varying the strength of the glass, we can vary 
 the size of the image. The weaker the glass, the larger the image ; 
 but, at the same time, the smaller the field of vision, which fact needs 
 a little explanation. For the sake of simplicity we represented the 
 lens in the last figure as always in one position ; and this was per-
 
 APPENDIX. 239 
 
 fectly allowable so far as its effect on the rays which leave the bottom 
 of B ' eye is concerned. But, in point of fact, the position of the 
 lens varies with its strength ; the weaker the lens the farther we hold 
 it from the eye to be observed, for two reasons : first, to get a sufficient 
 number of rays into the eye ; secondly, in order to sink the image of 
 the eye itself, that is, of the sclera, cornea, and iris. The rule is to 
 hold the glass at about its focal length from the eye, though in practice, 
 however, we find it necessary to place it a little farther than this. 
 Thus, a two inch-lens we hold at about two and a half inches ; a three- 
 inch at four ; a four-inch at five, and so on. 
 
 Fig. 45 shows how, as we use a weaker lens and hold it farther 
 from the eye, the extent of what is seen of JB?s retina becomes smaller. 
 "We will suppose, in the first instance, the outside limitation of the 
 field to be represented by 
 
 the axial rays R and S. ..-""* 
 
 These rays will be inter- 
 cepted by the first glass 
 (g\ which we will sup- 
 pose is a two-inch lens at 
 two inches from the eye. 
 But if we use a four-inch 
 lens (g') at four inches FIG. 45. 
 
 from the eye, then these 
 
 external rays will not be intercepted by the glass, and no image of 
 them will be formed. The most external rays which in the last case 
 can be intercepted by the glass are those coming from the points /, s. 
 Consequently, the extent of IPs retina seen will be much reduced, as 
 in the first case it was represented by the space included between R 
 and S, and in the second by that only included between /, . Of 
 course, the size of the pupil affects the field of view ; but the com- 
 parative effect of the glasses remains virtually the same. 
 
 The refraction of the eye must also exert a considerable in- 
 fluence on the size of the image ; for, if the observed eye, instead of 
 being normal, is hypermetropic, the rays leaving it will be more or 
 less divergent, and a certain portion of the power of the lens will 
 be consumed in rendering these rays parallel, leaving the . remainder 
 only to bring the rays to a focus. 
 
 Suppose the observed eye to be hypermetropic , and that we use 
 a two-inch lens. The rays leaving IPs eye would not be parallel, but 
 would diverge as if they came from a spot four inches behind the 
 nodal point of the eye. 
 
 If the lens is two inches in front of the eye, it will be six inches in
 
 240 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 front of the point from which the rays would practically come. It 
 would take from the focal power of the lens what would be equivalent 
 to a convex glass of ^ to render these rays parallel, and we should 
 then have remaining % ^ |. That is, we should really have a 
 lens of only three inches focal length, although we were actually using 
 a two-inch glass. The image would not lie, as with a normal eye, 
 two inches in front of the lens, but at three, and would be propor- 
 tionally larger. 
 
 If, instead of a hypermetropic, we take a myopic eye of , the re- 
 verse will hold good. Kays would leave such an eye as convergent, 
 and would meet at four inches in front of the eye, where an inverted 
 image would be formed in the air. If, now, we place our glass two 
 inches in front of the eye, we intercept rays already so convergent that 
 they would meet two inches in front of the proposed position of the 
 glass. But, by adding this two-inch lens, we have added just so much 
 to the previous convergence ; that is, \ -f- % = 1. And the rays will 
 no longer meet, as is the case with parallel rays leaving a normal eye, 
 at two inches from the glass, but at one ; and the image will be 
 proportionally smaller. Using, therefore, the same glass at the same 
 place, we see that we get a different sized image in each case ; and 
 the importance of this, in a clinical point of view, at least to young 
 observers, renders it necessary to bear the fact constantly in mind. 
 
 It will have been noticed by the attentive observer that, whereas, 
 with the mirror alone, and at a distance, we usually get only a diffuse 
 illumination of the pupil, we do get in some cases a defined image of 
 a portion of the fundus ; for example, a small section of a retinal 
 vessel or a small segment of the optic nerve. This is usually due 
 to some error in refraction, and is most apparent in myopic eyes of the 
 higher degrees. 
 
 If the myopia, for example, is ^, rays leaving the fundus of the 
 eye will meet six inches in front of it, where an aerial image will be 
 formed which will be inverted and enlarged. Of this image the ob- 
 server will see but a small portion, since a comparatively small portion 
 of the rays, that is to say, only the central ones, will, after crossing in 
 the air, have such a direction that they can pass through the hole in 
 the mirror and thus enter the observer's eye. The details which com- 
 prise this portion will, however, be much enlarged. The size of the 
 pupil of the observed eye will, of course, make a difference, for, the 
 larger this is, the greater the field seen but, even at the best, this 
 must be restricted for the reasons given. 
 
 With a hypermetropic eye, on the other hand, the return rays 
 leave the eye as divergent instead of convergent, consequently there
 
 APPENDIX. 241 
 
 is no aerial image formed. This is, on the contrary, virtual, erect, 
 and situated behind the eye instead of in front of it. What we see 
 of this image is seen through the pupil, and the field of view must 
 necessarily be very much restricted, as we are looking through a nar- 
 row opening which is at a comparatively great distance from our eye. 
 The larger the pupil the larger our field of view ; but, even when fully 
 dilated, the magnifying power of the anterior parts of the eye is so 
 great that even a small portion of the fundus is made to fill the entire 
 pupillary space. 
 
 The reason why the observer in emmetropia ordinarily gets only a 
 diffuse illumination in the pupillary space is, in my opinion, simply 
 because his own eye is not adjusted for the rays leaving the fundus of 
 the observed eye. In illuminating the eye with the mirror alone, we 
 instinctively accommodate for the plane of the iris and the edges of 
 the pupillary space, just as in looking at a hole in a shutter we 
 accommodate for the edges of the hole and not for the diffuse light 
 beyond. In accommodating for the plane of the iris our eye is ad- 
 justed for divergent rays, while the rays leaving the fundus are par- 
 allel. Such rays will not unite on the observer's retina, and conse- 
 quently he does not get a defined image of even a small portion of the 
 observed fundus as in the other two cases, but only the sensation of a 
 diffuse brilliancy. That this is the correct explanation would appear 
 from the fact that, if we relax our accommodation entirely so as to ad- 
 just the eye for parallel rays, then the details of the iris become indis- 
 tinct, while what was a diffuse illumination of the pupillary space 
 becomes a defined image of a small part of the fundus beyond, a seg- 
 ment of the nerve, or of one of the vessels. . 
 
 THE METRIC SYSTEM. 
 
 In the foregoing remarks the old system has been preserved for 
 the purposes of illustration, as those not acquainted with even the ele- 
 ments of optics are, as a rule, much more familiar with the national 
 than with the metric standard. As, however, the metric system has 
 been adopted as the standard for modern ophthalmoscopes, it is essen- 
 tial to understand how to reduce the old system to the new. Fortu- 
 nately, this is very simple. 
 
 In the new or metric system, the French metre instead of the 
 French inch is used. The metre is taken as the unit, and each metre 
 is called a dioptric, or, as it is usually written, 1 D. As the French 
 metre is equal to thirty-seven inches, 1 D = -fa expressed in the old 
 style ; 2 D = ^ T , or y^-.-g- D. As, however, thirty-seven is a difficult 
 number to divide, we may for practical purposes use -$ instead of -fa : 
 
 16
 
 242 
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 thus, 3 D = -fo = ^j-, and so on. This is sufficiently exact, except for 
 the few higher numbers of glasses, and the division can readily be 
 performed in the head. Each dioptric, or 1 D, may be therefore 
 looked upon as equal to -5^ old style ; and, to find the glass in the old 
 system which corresponds to a certain number of dioptrics, we have 
 
 simply to take as many thirty-sixths as there 
 are dioptrics, 4 D = ^ = ^ old style. 
 
 On the other hand, to find what number 
 of dioptrics correspond to a given glass in 
 the old style, we have simply to reverse the 
 process. To find, for example, how many 
 dioptrics correspond to ^. As each dioptric 
 is equal to -g^-, there will be as many diop- 
 trics as -fa is contained in -^ ; or here, as be- 
 fore, for the sake of simplicity, -^ divided by 
 ^. % divided by -^ is the same as - 3 / = 
 
 D ; and so on. 
 
 OPHTH A.LMOSCOPE8. 
 
 Such being the principles upon which 
 the ophthalmoscope depends, it remains to 
 consider some of the forms under which in 
 modern times the instrument usually appears. 
 As has been said, of the making of ophthal- 
 moscopes there is no end, and there are a 
 thousand varieties by as many inventors now 
 in use. To describe all these would be im- 
 possible ; but below will be found some of 
 the forms which have been suggested by 
 the experience of the writer, and which are 
 adapted to various uses dependent on the 
 nature of the work to be performed. 
 
 Beginning with the simpler forms, Fig. 
 46 is an instrument with a single disk with 
 eight perforations. With this instrument the 
 p IG 4fi f undus of almost every eye can be seen ; but 
 
 from the nature of things it is not adapted 
 
 for the nicer shades of ophthalmoscopy. Other instruments similar 
 to this in form, but containing a larger number of glasses 12, 18, 
 and 24 can be had of the various makers, either with or without a 
 cover, the best being that which contains twenty-four lenses with the
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 243 
 
 ring cover, which, while it protects the glasses, allows the numbers 
 to be plainly visible for the whole extent of the disk. 
 
 Fig. 47 represents a combination-instrument consisting of a single 
 disk and a segment of a disk, as shown in the drawing. In the pres- 
 ent case a quadrant of a circle is used. This might, however, be 
 made larger or smaller if required. 
 
 The single disk contains sixteen glasses on the metric system, the 
 plus being numbered in white and the minus in red. The first row 
 of numbers, or that just beneath the glass, shows the real value of the 
 glass ; the second, or inner row, shows the result of the combinations 
 
 FIG. 47. 
 
 when the quadrant is in position. The quadrant rotates immediately 
 over the disk and around the same centre, and contains four glasses 
 -.5 16. and +.5 + 16. 
 
 When not in use the quadrant is beneath its cover. The instru- 
 ment then represents a simple ophthalmoscope with sixteen perfora- 
 tions, the series running with an interval of 1. D, and extending from 
 1 to 7. plus, and from 1. to 8 minus. 
 
 This is ample for all ordinary work, as the interval of 1. D is as
 
 244 
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 close as even an expert usually desires, and can with a little experi- 
 ence be used for even very minute discrepancies ; for if in a given 
 case the fundus is seen distinctly with 1. D and a little to spare, while 
 2. D blurs the picture, we know at once that the refraction must be 
 between the two, or 1.5 D. If, however, for any reason we wish to 
 prove this conclusion, we can bring up 0.5 D. From this glass we 
 get successive half-dioptrics from 1 to 8. plus, and from 1 to 9. minus. 
 In this way we have, so to speak, a fine and coarse adjustment, as in 
 the microscope. 
 
 If the higher numbers are desired, these are obtained by combina- 
 tion with those of the quadrant. These progress regularly up to 16 D, 
 every dioptric being marked upon the disk ; above this, up to -f- 23 D 
 and 24 D, we have to simply add the glass which comes beneath 
 the 16 D, turning always in the same direction. 
 
 Beginning with 0, and revolv- Beginning with 0, and revolv- 
 
 ing always from left to right, we ing always from right to left, we 
 obtain : obtain : 
 
 PLUS 
 
 1 
 2 
 3 
 4 
 5 
 6 
 7 
 8 
 9 
 10 
 11 
 12 
 13 
 14 
 15 
 16 
 17 
 18 
 19 
 20 
 21 
 22 
 23 
 
 Bring np + 16 
 
 + 1< 
 
 3 8: 
 
 " 
 
 -7: 
 
 u 
 
 -6: 
 
 K 
 
 -5: 
 
 tt 
 
 4: 
 
 it 
 
 -3: 
 
 " 
 
 -2: 
 
 H 
 
 -1: 
 
 It 
 
 0: 
 
 
 MINUS 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 4 
 
 
 5 
 
 
 6 
 
 
 7 
 
 Bring: up 16 
 
 8 
 
 -16 + 7 = 
 
 9 
 
 " +6 = 
 
 10 
 
 " +5 = 
 
 11 
 
 " 4-4 = 
 
 12 
 
 4-3 = 
 
 13 
 
 " +2 = 
 
 14 
 
 " +1 = 
 
 15 
 
 " +0 = 
 
 16 
 
 " -1 = 
 
 17 
 
 -2 = 
 
 18 
 
 " -3 = 
 
 19 
 
 -4 = 
 
 20 
 
 -5 = 
 
 21 
 
 " -6 = 
 
 22 
 
 " 7 = 
 
 23 
 
 " -8 = 
 
 24
 
 APPENDIX. 245 
 
 Thus, with the superposition of a single glass (+ 16 or 16), and 
 with an uninterrupted rotation, a series is obtained of successive diop- 
 trics from 1 to 23 plus, and from 1 to 21 minus. 
 
 With the use of the 0.5 we can obtain in addition the following 
 series with an interval of half a dioptric : 
 
 + 0. - 0.5 
 
 + 0.5 -1. 
 
 + 1. -1.5 
 
 + 1.5 -2. 
 
 + 2. - 2.5 
 
 + 2.5 - 3. 
 
 + 3. - 3.5 
 
 + 3.5 -4. 
 
 + 4. -4.5 
 
 + 4.5 -5. 
 
 + 5. - 5.5 
 
 + 5.5 - 6. 
 
 + 6. - 6.5 
 
 + 6.5 -7. 
 
 + 7. - 7.5 
 
 + 7.5 -8. 
 
 + 8. - 8.5 
 -9. 
 
 Making a total series of eighty glasses. Should the combination at 
 any moment not be wanted, a trifling displacement of the quadrant 
 to either side of the mirror-hole at once dissolves it, and the instru- 
 ment becomes a single-disk ophthalmoscope. 
 
 In this manner an enormous number of glasses can be placed at 
 our service, in case of need, without our being compelled to use them 
 on all occasions, or to turn through them in our search for a particular 
 glass. The fear that by a combination of two glasses the quantity of 
 the light would be diminished has not been realized, and I have fre- 
 quently got a good view of the fundus with 24 D (^ old style), 
 which is the severest test which can be applied. Indeed, I have never 
 used an instrument in which I obtained so much light for the upright 
 image. This may be due in part to the extreme thinness of the 
 glasses, the strongest being less than half a millimetre thick. 
 
 There is another form of the same instrument with a different 
 method of notation, consisting of two concentric rows of figures, the 
 outer row being the plus and the inner the minus. 
 
 This is certainly the more elegant form of the two, the only pos-
 
 246 
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 sible objection to it being that the real value of the glass is not always 
 immediately below the glass itself, its place being sometimes occupied 
 by the equivalent of the combination. 'No confusion can, however, 
 occur, as the plus and minus numbers have distinctive colors, and pro- 
 gress in different directions the red 
 from right to left, and the white left 
 to right. 
 
 The instrument is made either with 
 or without a cover, as shown in Fig. 48, 
 for the posterior surface of the glasses. 
 As a matter of fact, the glasses can be 
 kept cleaner when the posterior sur- 
 face is not covered than when it is, 
 provided that, as in the present case, 
 they are protected by a rim. 
 
 Dr. McMahon has made a trifling 
 but very ingenious modification in 
 the arrangement of the glasses in the 
 supplementary quadrant of the writer's 
 ophthalmoscope. This consists of in- 
 serting a vacant space, or zero-hole, be- 
 tween the plus and minus glasses in 
 the quadrant. By this arrangement the 
 fine adjustment mentioned in the text 
 is obtained without taking the instru- 
 ment from the eye. The objection to 
 this is that it brings about precisely 
 FIG. 48. what the writer was at a good deal of 
 
 pains to obviate. It makes the supple- 
 mentary quadrant an integral part of the instrument, and one which 
 is always in position, so that one can not unlock any combination by a 
 sweep of the hand, and thus restore the instrument to a simple oph- 
 thalmoscope. Moreover, the enumeration of so many glasses in so 
 contracted a space as this arrangement necessitates is very confusing, 
 while the four thicknesses of brass convert what should be a shallow 
 hole into a long canal, from the edges of which annoying reflections 
 arise. Still, the idea is ingenious, and might be acceptable to those 
 who look upon the ophthalmoscope not as an instrument for the 
 detection of morbid conditions, but solely as a means of determining 
 minute discrepancies in refraction, and who are able, or who think 
 they are able, to do it. A better way of arriving at the same result 
 would be (as it seems to me), to keep, as I had formerly done on
 
 APPENDIX. 247 
 
 another instrument, the quadrant at the lower part of the disk, and 
 to put the second zero-hole opposite to it above. 
 
 A much more useful improvement, at least for the beginner, is the 
 addition by Mr. Meyrowitz of another row of figures upon the back 
 of the disk, so that all the combinations can be read at a glance. 
 
 Fig. 49 shows a smaller form of the same instrument. The number 
 of combinations in the highest numbers, and those rarely if ever used, is 
 
 FIG. 49. 
 
 a little less than with the larger instrument, but this is more than coun- 
 terbalanced by the reduced size of the instrument, and the consequent 
 ease and comfort in its manipulation. It is the form which the writer 
 uses, and is, in his estimation, more satisfactory than the other forms. 
 
 MODIFICATIONS OF THE OPHTHALMOSCOPIC MERKOE. 
 
 Dr. O. F. Wads worth, of Boston, in 1876, made an ingenious and 
 useful addition to my ophthalmoscope. This consists of an additional 
 mirror, designed particularly for the use of the upright image and 
 the determination of the errors of refraction. The mirror is circular 
 in shape, and of the same focus as that now ordinarily used (Fig. 50). 
 
 The peculiarity of the mirror is that it is only fifteen millimetres
 
 248 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 in diameter. The small diameter of the mirror permits it to be set at 
 an angle of twenty degrees, and yet allows the hole in the mirror to 
 be brought close to the glass in the disk. The mirror rotates from 
 right to left, so that either eye can be examined. The disadvantages 
 of this mirror are, that it is so small that sufficient light is not ob- 
 tained to make an examination by the inverted method, thus necessi- 
 tating an alternate substitution of two mirrors. To avoid this neces- 
 sity, and at the same time to get more light for the direct method, 
 
 FIG. 60. 
 
 and sufficient for the indirect, and also to obtain the advantages which 
 the inclination of the mirror gives in the distinctness of the image, 
 I adopted, a little later, the following modifications of the old mirror, 
 suggested by Dr. "Wadsworth's idea : 
 
 The first modification was to keep the general shape of the mirror 
 as it now is, merely cutting off a segment, as shown in the drawing. 
 In this the reflecting portion is left plain, while the shaded portion 
 shows the segment which has been taken away (Fig. 51). 
 
 The mirror is swung on two pins, a and 5, or made with a hinge 
 at the point of juncture of the mirror and the mirror-case, that is, the 
 part which is shaded in the drawings. This latter arrangement per- 
 mits the mirror to lie close against the correcting glass when an in- 
 clination is not desired. When an inclination is needed, the mirror is 
 raised till it arrives at an angle of 20, and is here checked by the 
 
 hinge. Fig. 52 represents the mirror as 
 seen in section. When used for the in- 
 verted image the mirror can be folded back 
 Fm. 62. m * its case > wnen it assumes precisely the 
 
 same appearance as the mirror now in uee, 
 
 with the exception of the segment, which has been taken away. 
 This, like Jaeger's and Dr. Wadsworth's mirror, rotates from right to 
 left. With it we get abundant light for either method.
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 249 
 
 The second modification is still simpler, and consists of cutting off 
 both sides of the mirror, thus converting it into a parallelogram, as 
 seen in Fig. 53. 
 
 This is swung on two pivots, the inclination being 20, or, if 
 wanted, 25. This mirror tilts both ways, and does not have to be 
 rotated, and can be used perfectly well for both upright and inverted 
 image. 
 
 This mirror is usually known as the " tilting mirror." It is thirty- 
 three millimetres long, by nineteen broad. 
 
 In regard to the advantage of a mirror set at an angle for the use 
 of the upright image, there can be no possible doubt in the mind of 
 any one who has once seen the difference, in the ease of the illumina- 
 tion and the clearness and brilliancy of the picture. By its use, a 
 large quantity of light is saved, since the correcting glass, instead of 
 being at a considerable angle with the axis of vision, and therefore in 
 a position favorable to a largely increased loss of light through reflec- 
 tion from the surface of the glass, is nearly at right angles to it, by 
 
 which all the light possible is saved. This mirror gives also ample 
 light for the inverted image, and I now use it entirely for all methods 
 of examination. 
 
 If, however, more light is needed, this can be obtained by making 
 the shaded portions in the above drawings of mirror glass. A still 
 more elegant though more costly way of obtaining the same result is 
 to have a small mirror, circular in shape, and swung on pinions, a and 
 5, Fig. 54, and this surrounded by a concentric mirror, 6?, so that the 
 two together form a mirror both in size and shape like that now 
 used in ordinary ophthalmoscopes. The external portion would, of 
 course, be set stationary, the central portion tilting to the right and 
 left as occasion required.
 
 250 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 Fixed Ophthalmoscopes. These instruments, though numerous 
 in kind, seem to have passed out of date, and they are very rarely 
 seen at the present time, and still more rarely used. Among the 
 earlier of these instruments, and one which was most frequently used, 
 was Liebreich's. This consisted of the application of the inverted 
 image through a tube similar to that of a microscope. This was fast- 
 ened to a stand which allowed the instrument to be raised and low- 
 ered as occasion required. It was also fitted with a rest for the pa- 
 tient's chin. At one end of the tube a mirror was fixed, similar to 
 that of Jaeger's ophthalmoscope, while at the other was the object- 
 glass. The image was formed within the tube, between the object- 
 glass and the mirror, precisely as it is with the inverted image. The 
 picture was brilliant and clearly defined. For a further description, 
 the reader is referred to Graefe's " Archives," vol. i, part ii, p. 348. 
 
 Dr. Burke, in 1871, proposed a very ingenious fixed ophthalmo- 
 scope, which had the rather unexpected merit, at this late day, of 
 being founded, in part at least, on a new principle. This instrument 
 consists of concave mirrors, mounted on stands, with sliding tubes, so 
 as to permit of a change of elevation. The light from the source of 
 illumination, striking upon the first of the mirrors (which is perforated 
 with a focal length of thirty-three centimetres), is reflected against 
 the second mirror. This latter is unperforated, is of nineteen centi- 
 metres focal length, and is placed at just its focal distance from the 
 observed eye. By this mirror, the light received from the first is cast 
 into the eye to be examined. The fundus of the eye, being illumi- 
 nated, reflects, in its turn, the light through the pupil back to the 
 second mirror again, which, being concave, brings the rays to a focus 
 at the focal length, where a very brilliant, reversed, and much enlarged 
 image is formed. The head of the patient is supported by a chin-rest. 
 Unfortunately, the practical handling of the instrument is not as easy 
 as the theory is simple, and the result beautiful, when all things com- 
 bine favorably. It often exhausts the patience of both the observed 
 and observer before an image is obtained, and, even then, this is apt 
 to be veiled, in spite of every care, by annoying reflections. 
 
 Carter's Ophthalmoscope. Shortly after the appearance of Burke's 
 instrument, Mr. Carter (" Report of Fourth International Ophthalmo- 
 scopic Congress," London, 1872, p. 69), while keeping the general 
 form of the stands, substituted for the second mirror a large convex 
 object-glass. This simply reduced the instrument to a much enlarged 
 but ordinary Liebreich's ophthalmoscope. The shape of the instru- 
 ment and the principles on which it depends are precisely the same, 
 the only difference being that one is fixed and the other portable.
 
 APPENDIX. 251 
 
 The apparatus requires the use of a table, which should be four 
 feet long, and which need not be more than eighteen inches wide ; or 
 it may be arranged across one end of an ordinary dining-table. This 
 is, in many respects, the best demonstrating ophthalmoscope yet pro- 
 posed, and the only objections to it would appear to lie in the large- 
 ness of its dimensions, and the amount of separation, when in use, of 
 its component parts. 
 
 Binocular Ophthalmoscopes. After some previous attempts, for 
 the purposes of getting perspective effect, Giraud Teulon produced 
 (" Physiologic de Vision Binoculaire," Paris, 1861) his binocular 
 ophthalmoscope, which was an exceedingly ingenious and beautiful 
 application of the principles of total reflection by the means of 
 prisms. Before the solution of this problem we were restricted, in 
 our investigations of the fundus oculi, to the use of one eye, and no 
 more forcible argument as to the advantages of seeing with two, and 
 the absolute necessity of an instrument for this purpose, could possibly 
 be brought forward, than the curious mistake universally made as to 
 the true shape and conditions of the optic nerve in glaucoma now 
 one of the best known of diseases, with one of the most striking oph- 
 thalmoscopic pictures. That a deep excavation of the entire optic 
 nerve, with its concavity toward the observer, should have been mis- 
 taken, for several years, by observers then and forever famous, for a 
 protruding convexity due to swelling of the entire nerve, seems now 
 to be incredible. A single glance with the binocular instrument 
 would have corrected this impression ; and, had it been invented in 
 time to do this, Teulon's beautiful invention would have acquired for 
 itself even a greater renown and a more extensive use than it now pos- 
 sesses. But, curiously enough, the instrument is very rarely used, 
 even in detecting the differences in level in the fundus, since we 
 possess, with the ordinary ophthalmoscope, a means, not only of ascer- 
 taining the existence of such variations, but also of measuring their 
 exact extent. Still, the binocular instrument has virtues and beauties 
 of its own, which will always command the respect and excite the 
 interest of every careful student of ophthalmoscopy. The essential 
 parts of the instrument and the manner in which the image is formed 
 are shown in the beautiful drawing (Fig. 55) by Dr. John Green.* 
 
 Since the discovery of the principles on which the ophthalmoscope 
 depends, innumerable instruments have been invented with all possible 
 kinds of reflecting surfaces, plane and curved, with their combinations 
 of lenses and prisms ophthalmoscopes to be used with artificial light, 
 daylight, and even sunlight, autophthalmoscopes, and ophthalmoscopes 
 * " Recent Advances in Ophthalmic Science," Williams, p. 20.
 
 252 
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 for one, two, or three observers. All of these, with the exception of 
 those based on the plane mirror proposed by Helmholtz, and on the 
 concave mirror introduced by Ruete, have yielded to the practical and 
 
 FIG. 55. 
 
 realistic tendencies of the day and passed into disuse. Not one in 
 ten thousand of the examinations hourly taking place in all parts of 
 the world is made with any other than the simple concave mirror of 
 Kuete, and it has always struck me that but scanty justice had been
 
 APPENDIX. 253 
 
 done to one whose beautiful and comprehensive invention is the 
 almost universally used implement of our art especially when it is 
 taken into consideration that he also rendered practicable, even if he 
 did not invent, a method of examination which forms an indispensable 
 adjunct to that originally proposed by Helmholtz, and which has been 
 used by the great majority of observers, even to the entire exclusion 
 of the former. 
 
 These more complex forms of the instrument are rather the solu- 
 tions of interesting optical problems than the embodiment of any 
 clinical or even physiological purpose, and the reader must be re- 
 ferred to more technical works for their description. 
 
 ADJUNCTS TO THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE. 
 
 The most important adjunct to the ophthalmoscope, and one, indeed, 
 which forms an essential part of it so far as the inverted image is 
 concerned, is the object-glass. This glass varies in strength from a 
 one to a four or even a five inch lens, according to the amount of 
 enlargement and extent of field which we wish to obtain. These 
 latter stand in inverse proportion to each other : the larger the field of 
 view, the smaller do the details comprising it appear; the weaker the 
 glass, the smaller the field, but the larger its detail. 
 
 The best glass for average work is a biconvex lens of two and a 
 half inches focal length. It should have a diameter of one and a 
 half inch, and should be ground as thin as this dimension will per- 
 mit. It should be made of the best glass, and as highly polished as 
 possible. The comfort of working with a glass of this diameter, and 
 the increased illumination, and the sharpness of the image which it 
 gives, more than repay the little extra trouble and expense in pro- 
 curing it. This glass serves also as a condensing lens for examining 
 the media of the eye by oblique illumination. 
 
 The writer, for the purposes of illuminating the anterior portion 
 of the eye, has made use of the device shown in the drawing (Fig. 56). 
 It is a modification of an idea suggested by Mr. J. E. Adams, of 
 London, and consists of an arm, broken at the various points by ball- 
 and-socket joints, so as to give a perfectly free adjustment to the lens 
 in any direction, and at any distance up to the extreme length of the 
 arm. This leaves both hands of the surgeon unencumbered, permits 
 the use of fixation forceps if necessary, and does away with the neces- 
 sity of an assistant to hold the lens. 
 
 The arm is attached to an elastic head-band precisely like the 
 head-band of an aural or laryngoscopical mirror. When in use, the 
 band is slipped over the head of the patient in such a way that the
 
 254 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 hard-rubber support comes at the temporal region and on the side of 
 the eye to be illuminated, the lens being then swung into the position 
 desired. By having the plate at the temporal region, and the lamp 
 well at the side instead of directly in front, we get rid of annoying 
 
 FIG. 56. 
 
 reflections, and avoid the irritating effects of the light from a strong 
 condensing lens thrown directly through the pupil upon the patient's 
 retina. If the lens is so arranged as to be a little within or a little 
 without its focal length from the eye, the section of the cone of light 
 is large enough to keep the cornea covered, even if the eye makes con- 
 siderable excursions, while, as the lens is attached to the patient's head, 
 this latter can be moved to a considerable degree without displacing 
 the illumination from the eye. I have found it of great service in 
 operating upon delicate membranes in the pupillary space, as it gives a 
 much steadier illumination, and one which is more easily controlled 
 than when an assistant holds the lens. 
 
 By removing the lens from the clip and supplying a mirror, the 
 instrument, from the character of its joints and the mutability of its 
 position, can then be used as a fixed ophthalmoscope for the upright 
 image, and can thus be used in demonstrating the fundus to a class, 
 or in making a sketch of it without the observer being compelled to 
 take up and lay aside the instrument at every look ; or the upper half 
 of the ordinary ophthalmoscope can be inserted instead of a simple 
 mirror, and then any optical combination that the refraction of the 
 observed eye may require can be obtained. 
 
 I have had a band made which carries two lenses, one on a shorter 
 arm, which is then used as a magnifying-lens, but the single one answers 
 every purpose, and for ordinary occasions is the most convenient.
 
 APPENDIX. 255 
 
 The instrument is also very useful for the removal of foreign 
 bodies or magnifying small hairs, thus rendering their detection and 
 removal much easier, or in performing any operation at night or 
 whenever the light is poor. When, however, the light is sufficient, 
 and only an increased enlargement is desired, the surgeon, by wearing 
 the band on his own forehead and extending the arm to its utmost, 
 can obtain a large amount of magnifying power, while by slight 
 movements of the head he can successively inspect and keep in front 
 any portion of the anterior surface of the eye or lid. 
 
 Ophthalmo-Microscopes. For the purpose of examining the cor- 
 nea, iris, and anterior portions of the vitreous, under an increased magni- 
 fying power, Liebreich replaced the tube of his large ophthalmoscope 
 with that of a microscope.* With this, in spite of the difficulty in 
 keeping the patient's head immovable, he was enabled to see the cor- 
 nea, iris, and disturbances in the lens and anterior part of the vitreous 
 under an enlargement of ninety diameters. As the simple to-and-fro 
 movements of the tubes were not sufficient to give a complete control 
 over the instrument, it was subsequently f mounted on two rings, 
 similar to those of a ship's compass, by which motions in all necessary 
 directions were obtained. 
 
 Wecker also constructed a small microscope, which, by means of a 
 tripod, was made to rest firmly against the cheek and brow of the 
 patient, lateral illumination being obtained by a condensing lens. 
 This instrument gives an enlargement of eighty diameters.:}: 
 
 A binocular ophthalmo-microscope has also been constructed. 
 
 These instruments, though they deserve a mention here, are of 
 very little practical value, and are rarely used clinically, a sufficient 
 enlargement and illumination being obtained from a simple lens, or, 
 sometimes, by a combination of two lenses. 
 
 Artificial Eyes. It is often convenient, as well as instructive, for 
 the student to have some mechanical contrivance which shall repre- 
 sent the dioptric system of the eye. By its means he is often able to 
 get at a glance a tangible idea as to the different errors of refraction 
 and the manner in which images are formed, which would be impos- 
 sible from any written description. One of the simplest of such arti- 
 ficial eyes is what is known in the shops as " a cotton-counter," from 
 the fact that dealers use it to magnify and thus count the number of 
 threads in a given area of the fabric. It consists of a one-inch lens 
 set in a short upright of brass, while another upright is placed just at its 
 
 * Graefe's "Archives," Band 1, Ab. 2, p. 352. 
 
 t " Monatsblatter f. Augenheilkunde," 1863, p. 486. 
 
 t '' Etudes Ophthalmologique," 1864, vol. i., p. 272.
 
 256 
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 focal length. A piece of card can be fastened to this second upright, 
 which can then be looked upon as the retinal surface on which images 
 may be formed or a picture of the fundus be painted. A little more 
 extensive apparatus on the same principle is shown in Fig. 57. Here 
 the upright screen which represents the plane of the retina is made 
 movable by a screw, so that the space between the two uprights can 
 be altered at will. The anterior upright is so made that lenses of dif- 
 
 FIQ. 57. 
 
 ferent power can be inserted. Among these is one, the focal length 
 of which is 6.7 Paris lines. This gives precisely the same enlarge- 
 ment as would be obtained with the ophthalmoscope in examining an 
 emmetropic eye. This is a refinement, however, which is not essen-
 
 APPENDIX. 257 
 
 tial, as the ordinary one-inch lens answers every purpose. All the 
 varying degrees of myopia and hypermetropia can be obtained by 
 altering the length of the antero-posterior axis, and these can be con- 
 nected by placing the corresponding glass in the clip in front. 
 
 A more elaborate apparatus still is the artificial eye of Perrin, 
 which has been in use for many years. It has the globular form of 
 the eye itself, and is provided with different eye-pieces to represent 
 myopia, hypermetropia, and astigmatism ; it is also furnished with a 
 series of pictures of the normal and diseased eyes. It is, however, 
 better adapted for the purposes of teaching the ophthalmoscopic ap- 
 pearances to a class than for the study of optical errors. Other arti- 
 ficial eyes have been invented by Badal, Parent, and Remy. 
 
 In 1872 the writer showed to the New York Ophthalmological So- 
 ciety, and in the following summer to the American Ophthalmological 
 Society, the artificial eye shown in Fig. 58. It is the mechanical em- 
 bodiment of Donders's reduced eye with a cornea ground on a radius 
 of five millimetres with parallel surfaces, the media being represented 
 by water. Every degree of refraction can be expressed upon it, the 
 increase and decrease of the antero-posterior axis being noted in the 
 metric system. It is also fitted with a compound dioptric system of 
 lens and cornea, as well as with a cornea representing the aphakial 
 eye. The instrument has been found very useful both by myself and 
 others in the study and demonstration of every possible phase of diop- 
 trics. It is made by W. II. Hunter, 1145 Broadway, New York. 
 Later Landolt * introduced an eye on precisely the same principles, 
 which, if not quite so comprehensive in its scope, is certainly more ele- 
 gant in its shape and appearance. It can be obtained in this country 
 of Meyrowitz Brothers, 297 Fourth Avenue, New York. 
 
 It is often very important to be able to control the result of an 
 ophthalmoscopic examination for refraction by comparing it with that 
 obtained by glasses ; but, besides this, it is often of the greatest aid to 
 the student, in arriving at a diagnosis, to know the amount and charac- 
 ter of vision, for it often happens that what was at first eight taken 
 for the well-marked signs of a morbid process, has under a careful 
 examination resolved itself into some peculiarity either of a physio- 
 logical or optical nature, while, on the other hand, the state and char- 
 acter of the vision have called the observer's attention to some incipient 
 and grave disorder in which there were few or no ophthalmoscopic 
 signs. For this reason every ophthalmoscopic examination should be 
 combined with a careful determination of the amount of vision, and 
 the extent of the visual field and the condition of the refraction. 
 
 * " Klin. Monatsblatter," July and August, 1876, p. 243. 
 17
 
 258 
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 To do this in a manner at all satisfactory, a set of test-glasses and 
 test-types are necessary. As a rule, these are more elaborate and more 
 expensive than is absolutely essential. By the aid of the metric sys- 
 tem, simple combinations can now be made without any knowledge of 
 mathematics whatever. . A test-case has been designed by the writer 
 to meet the wants of students and general practitioners. 
 
 FIG. 58. 
 
 The set contains seven pairs each of concave and convex spherical 
 lenses, and five pairs each of concave and convex cylindrical lenses, 
 and with these almost every combination possible in the most com- 
 plete sets can be successfully effected ; moreover, as all the numbers 
 are in pairs, both eyes can be examined simultaneously with glasses 
 of equal strength.
 
 APPENDIX. 259 
 
 The case further contains a set of test-types and a triple-grooved, 
 graduated trial-frame, into which one, two, or three lenses may be 
 readily slipped to obtain the desired number. 
 
 As mentioned before, the lenses are marked in the metric system. 
 
 The simple numbers contained in the trial-case are as follows : 
 
 Spherical, concave, and convex : .25, .5, 1., 2., 3., 4., 8. 
 
 Cylindrical, concave, and convex : .25, .5, 1., 2., 3. 
 
 The combinations made therewith are : 
 
 Spherical : .25, .5, 1., 1.25, 1.5, 1.75, 2., 2.25, 2.5, 2.75, 3., 3.25, 3.5, 
 3.75, 4., 4.25, 4.5, 4.75, 5., 5.25, 5.5, 6., 6.25, 6.5, 7., 7.25, 7.5, 8., 8.25, 
 8.5, 8.75, 9., 9.25, 9.5, 10., 10.25, 10.5, 11., 11.25, 11.5, 12., 12.25, 
 12.5, 13., 14., 15. 
 
 Cylindrical : .25, .5, .75, 1, 1.25, 1.5, 1.75, 2., 2.25, 2.5, 2.75, 3., 
 3.25, 3.5, 3.75, 4., 4.25, 4.5, 5., 5.25, 5.5, 6.* 
 
 Dr. John Green and Dr. Roosa have also introduced excellent 
 test-cases for students and practitioners. 
 
 * This case can be had of Meyrowitz Brothers for the moderate sum of four- 
 teen dollars.
 
 EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 
 
 PLATE I. 
 
 Fig. 1* represents the fundus of a normal eye in young adult life, of 
 a type that was neither blonde nor brunette. The color of the back- 
 ground is of a uniform hue, and only shows an increase in shade at the 
 macula lutea, the centre of which is marked by the fovea, which, in 
 this case, has the appearance of a small circular spot with the merest 
 perceptible dot in its centre. The increase in hue which marks the 
 central portions of the yellow spot is due both to an increase in the 
 amount of pigment in the epithelial layer and to an increased density 
 in the network of small vessels and capillaries of the choroid lying 
 directly below this region, which is the finest of any in the entire 
 body (p. 45). 
 
 The uniformity in color and pigmentation is such that none of the 
 choroidal vessels are individually visible. 
 
 The retinal vessels leave the centre of the disk in a perfectly normal 
 manner. The veins are differentiated from the arteries by a somewhat 
 marked difference in color, while the light streak, though present on 
 both arteries and veins, is more marked and more brilliant upon the 
 former than upon the latter. The retinal vessels, after the usual sub- 
 divisions, radiate toward the region of the yellow spot, and, having en- 
 tered this, arrive within a short distance of the fovea centralis so that 
 the region of the macula lutea contains quite a number of minute 
 branches of the retinal vessels (p. 34). It is only the fovea itself which 
 is devoid of any vascular twigs. 
 
 * In looking at all ophthalmoscopic drawings, it should be remembered that they are 
 made under artificial light, and that they should be examined by such to get an adequate 
 idea of the shade of color. It should also be borne in mind that all ophthalmoscopic 
 drawings are necessarily diagrammatic in so far that a much larger portion of the field is 
 represented than can be seen at once. The extent of surface seen varies with the kind of 
 mirror, the distance of the lamp, the size of the pupil, and the distance of the observer's 
 eye from it. The extent of surface under view at one time, in the ordinary methods of 
 making the examination by the upright image, is from \\ to 2^- or 3 millimetres.
 
 262 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 The nerve shows the usual concentric markings, with a slightly de- 
 veloped choroidal ring. In this particular case the connective-tissue 
 string is carried well forward along the vessels, and the nerve-fibres are 
 so closely arranged that there is little or no physiological excavation. 
 There is likewise no venous pulsation, which usually shows itself by an 
 increased color of the vessel, just as it bends to enter the nerve-stem. 
 
 The vascular portion of the nerve is perhaps somewhat more pro- 
 nounced than it is usually, though not more so than is often found 
 compatible with a perfectly normal development. 
 
 Fig. 2 (Plate I.). This beautiful drawing is from Liebreich (Atlas 
 d'Ophthalmoscopie, Taf. II., Fig. 2). It represents the fundus of an 
 individual of a light blonde type, with a blue iris. From the clear- 
 ness of the stroma and the weak development of the pigment epithe- 
 lium, the choroidal vessels can be traced to their finest branches. (Lie- 
 breich. ) Portions of the branches from the different venae vorticae are 
 exposed to view. In the lower left-hand corner they are visible nearly 
 to their trunks, but less so in the right upper corner. 
 
 PLATE II. 
 
 Fig. 1 (Plate II.). In this figure (Liebreich, " Atlas d'Ophthal- 
 moscopie," Taf. II., Fig. 3) the pigmentation of the stroma is more 
 marked, while, according to Liebreich, that of the epithelial layer is 
 very feeble. This is the reason, in his opinion, why the choroidal 
 vessels here appear to be separated by pigmented intervascular spaces. 
 It is only in the right-hand lower corner, near the posterior pole of the 
 eye, that these vessels are concealed by a dark and richly pigmented 
 epithelium. If this explanation is correct, as already remarked (p. 44), 
 it must be assumed that there are different degrees of pigmentation of a 
 very marked character in different portions of the same fundus. A 
 more natural explanation would appear to be, that in this part of the 
 fundus there is a closer arrangement of all the vessels, large and small, 
 and accordingly a denser and more uniform color to the fundus. It is 
 this peculiar striped marking which is called the choroid tigre. 
 
 Fig. 2 (Plate II.). This picture is diagrammatic, inasmuch as the 
 peculiar concentric markings of the disk have been purposely exag- 
 gerated somewhat in color and tone for the sake of defining in a better 
 manner the positions of the different rings. The external ring is the 
 " pigment" or "choroidal ring." The second or white circle is the 
 " scleral ring." The third or colored ring is the " vascular portion " of 
 the disk; and the fourth is the "non-vascular portion'* or "clear 
 spot." (See text, p. 58.) 
 
 Fig. 3 (Plate II.). This figure (Liebreich, "Atlas d'Ophthalmos- 
 copie") is taken from a perfectly normal eye, although, from the size
 
 EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 263 
 
 of the disk and from the extent and depth of the excavation, the ap- 
 pearances would seem to be due to a pathological condition. This ap- 
 parent increase in size of the disk is due partly to a distended condition 
 of the head of the nerve and partly to the fact that the choroidal open- 
 ing is larger than usual, and drawn somewhat to one side. The nerve- 
 fibres are here distended outward, allowing the lamina cribrosa to mani- 
 fest itself at the bottom of the large and rather deep excavation. The 
 true outer border of the nerve-entrance is shown by the grayish semi- 
 lunar line, while the scleral ring, very much exaggerated in size, ex- 
 tends to the outside of this. The inner edge of the excavation, or that 
 to the left of the central vessel, is sharply defined and pierced by both 
 veins and arteries as they leave the disk. This sharp edge to the excava- 
 tion occurring within the surface of the disk itself is strongly corrobora- 
 tive of the fact that the excavation is physiological, or at least congenital, 
 and not due to pressure. (See text, p. 55.) 
 
 Fig. 4 (Plate II.). This shows a precisely opposite condition that 
 is to say, a reduction in the size of the choroidal foramen. This is 
 occasioned by a continuation of the choroidal membrane over the bor- 
 ders of the disk. Some of the larger choroidal vessels are visible, and 
 one of these is so arranged that there can be no doubt as to the true 
 nature of the anomaly. The picture is from an eye in which there was 
 a high degree of compound myopic astigmatism. Another member of 
 the same family had similar appearances in both eyes, although to a 
 less degree. (See text, p. 98. ) 
 
 Fig. 5 (Plate II.). This represents an anomalous collection of pig- 
 ment in the choroid. There was no defect in the visual field corre- 
 sponding to the pigmented plaque, and vision was perfect. Its dis- 
 covery was purely accidental in a person who made no complaint in 
 regard to the eyes, and who, rather singularly, was a pronounced blonde. 
 (See text, p. 89.) 
 
 Fig. 6 (Plate II.). This figure (Liebreich, "Atlas d'Ophthalmos- 
 copie," Taf. XII., Fig. 2) represents the anomaly known as "opaque 
 nerve-fibres," due to the continuation of the medullary sheath of the 
 optic nerve-fibres as they pass over into the retina. This is the com- 
 mon form under which the anomaly usually appears. The peripheric 
 border ends in flame-like processes, which seem to shoot out over the 
 retina, sometimes covering a vessel so as to completely hide it, and 
 sometimes passing beneath it. The interior border, or that near the 
 nerve, is sometimes separated from the papilla by a greater or less dis- 
 tance, or sometimes encroaches upon the surface of the disk, the bor- 
 ders of which it then entirely conceals. The plaque, instead of having 
 the radiating tongue-like form, may have the shape of a white crescent 
 with sharply defined contours, which then increases its resemblance to
 
 264 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 a pathological condition, and renders the diagnosis much more difficult. 
 (Liebreich.) (See text, p. 98.) 
 
 PLATE III. 
 
 Fig. 1 (Plate III.). This figure (Jaeger, "Hand Atlas," Taf. IV., 
 Fig. 28) represents the fundus of an albinotic person of the most marked 
 type. The general fundus, instead of being of a uniform red, is of a 
 yellowish-white color, and reflects a large amount of light. The central 
 vessels of the retina are perfectly normal, although the veins are a little 
 more tortuous than is ordinarily the case. 
 
 The granular, or shagreen, effect of the general fundus is entirely 
 wanting here, and it is only in the region of the macula lutea that there 
 is any trace of any uniformity in color due to an increased degree of 
 pigment in the epithelial layer and to a closer arrangement of the ves- 
 sels. The external vascular layer of the choroid is sharply designed 
 over the entire fundus, except in the neighborhood of the yellow spot, 
 where it is somewhat veiled by the overlying layers and by an increased 
 development of pigment, perhaps, in the epithelial layer. 
 
 In certain places the choroidal vessels of the middle layer show 
 themselves as band-like formations of more or less orange-color. These 
 bifurcate and anastomose with each other in such a way that a some- 
 what irregular network is formed, which usually is of a yellowish- white 
 color, and at times of considerable brilliancy of color so much so, 
 indeed, that one is convinced that this brilliancy is due to a reflection 
 from the sclera. (Jaeger.) 
 
 Fig. 2 (Plate III.). This figure (Liebreich, "Atlas d'Ophthal- 
 moscopie," Taf. XII., Fig. 3) shows an opposite condition, or one in 
 which there is an abnormal excess of pigment. These cases are exceed- 
 ingly rare, and are known under the title of cyanosis of the bulb. The 
 individual in this case had auburn hair and light eyebrows and eye- 
 lashes. The iris of the left eye was of a light brown ; that of the right 
 was of so deep a color that the pupil could only be distinguished with 
 great difficulty. The cornea at some little distance from its border is 
 marked by a collection of spots of a grayish color, which in some places 
 pass into a violet shade. With the ophthalmoscope there was only a 
 slight reflex from the fundus, and even this, when the patient looked 
 directly in front of him, vanished almost entirely. With the inverted 
 image the bottom of the eye appeared of a dark reddish tinge. It was 
 only in isolated places that there were any traces of the choroidal vessels. 
 The retinal vessels appeared darker than usual, and the light-streak on 
 their anterior surface less brilliant. On the contrary, the substance of 
 the retina revealed itself much more clearly than usual by a delicate 
 grayish haze and by a curious play of light, which was produced, espe-
 
 EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 265 
 
 cially around the region of the yellow spot, with the various movements 
 of the mirror. The macula lutea appeared almost black, the centre of 
 which was surrounded by a deep-brown ring. The general surface of the 
 disk was of a reddish hue, and the borders were sharply defined. The 
 retinal vessels at their point of emergence were enveloped by masses of 
 pigment, which cover about one third of the surface of the nerve, and 
 make what is usually the " clear spot " in a normal eye appear here 
 black. At the periphery also there was a narrow ring of pigment. The 
 eye was myopic. The vision was good, and the organ appeared to be in 
 an excellent condition. 
 
 Fig. 3 (Plate III.). This figure (Jaeger, " Hand Atlas," Taf. XIX., 
 Fig. 87) represents the eye of a young girl, who was affected with colo- 
 boma of the choroid and iris on both sides. A description of the ap- 
 pearances of the right eye has already been given in the text (p. 93). 
 There was in this, the left eye, a coloboma of the iris which extended as 
 far as the ciliary body. There was, however, no coloboma or other mal- 
 formation of the ciliary body, so far as could be seen. The media were 
 perfectly clear, and the fundus above and to the outer and inner side 
 was perfectly normal, both as to color and general appearance. Below, 
 on the contrary, corresponding to the coloboma, the effect produced by 
 the mirror was that of a surface of large extent, of a yellowish-white, 
 or a bluish-white, or at places even of a glittering-white color. The 
 nerve was of an oval form, and normal in all its diameters. In the 
 nerve-substance itself there was a deep excavation of a triangular shape, 
 having its base below, with its angle pointing upward and extending as 
 far as the centre of the nerve. From the fact that it extends to the 
 lower borders of the nerve, and that at this place one of the branches of 
 the lower vein makes a sudden bend over the steep edges of the ex- 
 cavation, this latter bears a strong resemblance to one of those glau- 
 comatous excavations of congenital origin. The coloboma taken as a 
 whole has a pear-shaped form, and measures in its greatest breadth about 
 five and a half diameters of the nerve. The upper border lies about one 
 half of the diameter of the disk below the edge of the nerve. The an- 
 terior border of the coloboma can not be perceived, as it lies too far for 
 ward to be reached by the instrument, but this must be, from the direc- 
 tion in which the lateral borders run to each other, on the other side of 
 the ora serrata and immediately in front of the ciliary processes. The 
 bottom of the coloboma is uneven and lies deeper than the plane of the 
 choroid, and in some places even deeper than the inner surface of the 
 sclera. The coloboma consists of three separate shallow excavations, 
 which adjoin, and in a certain sense, pass into one another. The upper 
 excavation is egg-shaped, and is of a whitish color when taken as a 
 whole, while in its deepest portion it has a weak but decidedly bluish 
 tinge. The middle and smaller excavation has rather a band-like form,
 
 266 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 and in its central third is a clear, yellowish white. The peripherical 
 portions are of the same color, though of a somewhat lighter shade. 
 
 The third excavation has by far the greatest extent, though it is the 
 shallowest. It is in some portions of a light, and in others of a darker, 
 grayish color. Over its surface especially toward the nose white 
 stripes occasionally run. In some parts of the periphery of the colo- 
 boma, toward the normal colored portions of the fundus, the choroidal 
 tissue still manifests itself by light yellowish stripes. 
 
 The epithelial layer is, however, wanting, and this allows (Jaeger) 
 portions of the network of the larger vessels to become visible as light 
 reddish stripes of a band-like character. Eemnants of pigment are 
 also seen in different places at the lateral borders of the coloboma and 
 at the boundary-lines of the different excavations. An extremely deli- 
 cate and transparent membrane is stretched over the coloboma for its 
 entire surface, all the inequalities of which it follows. The distribution 
 of the central vessels is normal. They run in the usual manner over 
 that part of the fundus in which the choroid has its normal appear- 
 ance, but only small and delicate branches are continued over the re- 
 gion of the coloboma. In this district, and below the plane of the 
 retinal vessels, broader vessels appear, which have a uniform color 
 across their entire surface. These divide into numerous branches, and 
 run in an irregular and tortuous manner. These vessels spring in part 
 from the region of the coloboma itself, and in part from beneath that 
 portion of the fundus which has a normal color and appearance. They 
 anastomose in certain places near the border of the coloboma with the 
 choroidal vessels which are there visible. From this fact, and from their 
 peculiar band-like character and light color, these vessels show them- 
 selves to be really sclero-choroidal vessels. It will be noticed that in 
 this case the coloboma does not include the optic nerve, but that there 
 is immediately below the nerve a narrow strip of normal-looking tissue. 
 That this strip still preserved its normal function was proved by the 
 fact that Mariotte's blind-spot was separated from the defect in the field 
 caused by the coloboma by a narrow band of visual field which still 
 maintained its perceptive power. (See text, p. 92.) 
 
 Fig. 4 (Plate III.). This figure represents a coloboma of the macula 
 lutea, with a secondary defect between it and the nerve. These cases 
 are very rare, and are apt to be confounded with an old exudation and 
 subsequent atrophy of the tissue, especially as the rest of the fundus 
 has a normal appearance. (See text, p. 94. ) 
 
 Fig. 5 (Plate III.). This picture was taken from a highly astigmatic 
 eye, in which the myopia was equal to 6 D in the vertical meridian, 
 while the horizontal was emmetropic. The fundns, taken as a whole, 
 presented a striated appearance, which, though very delicate, was still 
 perfectly perceptible. This was due, of course, to the optical error,
 
 EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 267 
 
 and was not present when this was properly corrected. It will be seen 
 that the upper and lower borders of the optic nerve are obliterated, 
 while the lateral ones are sharply defined. It is the same with the 
 vessels. Those which run horizontally are very much blurred, or else 
 entirely obliterated, which is the case with the fine horizontal vessels 
 which leave the nerve and run out toward the macula, when the ordi- 
 nary spherical glass is used which corrects the vertical meridian. These 
 horizontal vessels then come sharply into view, and the vertical vessels 
 are correspondingly indistinct. In order to see both the horizontal and 
 vertical vessels distinctly at the same time, a cylindric glass of 6 D must 
 be used. It is this condition which is so liable to be taken for a case of 
 neuritis by those who are unfamiliar with it. (See " Determination of 
 Astigmatism," p. 116, et al)
 
 PLATE I
 
 PLATE 

 
 INDEX. 
 
 Abscess, in vitreous, 180. 
 Accommodation, 222. 
 
 equivalent to increased refraction, 225. 
 
 in hypcrmetropic eye, 223. 
 
 in myopic eye, 223. 
 
 in normal eye, 222. 
 
 non-relaxation of, in moderate hyperme- 
 tropia, 111. 
 
 relaxation of, 107. 
 
 rules for relaxation of, 107, 108. 
 Adjuncts to ophthalmoscope, 253. 
 Age, effect on fundus, 84. 
 Air-bubbles in vitreous, 183. 
 Amblyopia, 113. 
 Ametropia, 218. 
 Ametropic observer, rules for, 127, 129. 
 
 a hypermetrope, 131. 
 
 a myope, 129. 
 Anastomosis, arterio-venous, 105. 
 
 between retinal and ciliary system, 29, 30. 
 
 between vessels of sheaths of nerve, 28. 
 
 of retino-choroidal vessels, 104. 
 Anatomy, fundus of normal eye, 21. 
 
 inner and outer sheath optic nerve, 21. 
 
 of choroid, 38. 
 
 of retina, 31. 
 
 of the normal eye, 21. 
 Anomalies, 86. 
 
 abnormal transparency of nerve fibres, 
 100. 
 
 arterio-venous anastomosis, 105. 
 
 bifurcation of optic fibres, 101. 
 
 choroidal opening, 97, 98. 
 
 cilio-retinal blood-vessels, 104. 
 
 coloboma of iris, 90. 
 
 coloboma of sheath of optic nerve, 96. 
 
 coloboma of the choroid, 92. 
 
 coloboma of the lens, 92. 
 
 coloboma of the macula, 94. 
 
 congenital absence of iris, 90. 
 
 discoloration of optic nerve, 101. 
 
 of disk, 97. 
 
 of the lens, 87. 
 
 of the media, 86. 
 
 of pigmentation of choroid, 88. 
 
 of pigmentation of optic nerve, 89. 
 
 of vessel wall, 102. 
 
 opaque nerve-fibres, 98. 
 
 persistent hyaloid artery, 103. 
 
 pink spots at macula, 94. 
 
 pupil, eccentric position of, 92. 
 
 pupillary membrane, 91. 
 
 vascular system, 101. 
 
 Anomaly, anastomosis of retino-choroidal 
 
 vessels, 104. 
 Anterior - chamber, examination (oblique 
 
 light), 148. 
 Aqueous humor, 161. 
 
 diffuse opacities of, 148. 
 
 examination of, 148. 
 
 examination with mirror, 161. 
 
 filaria in, 149. 
 
 pus in, 148. 
 
 synechiae in, 149. 
 Arachnoidal sheath (anatomy), 21. 
 
 space (anatomy), 22. 
 Arteria centralis retinae, 29. 
 Arterial pulse, 74. 
 
 " apparent " pulsation of, 75. 
 
 character of, 74. 
 
 diagnostic value of, 75. 
 
 produced artificially, 75. 
 Arteries, long ciliary, 39. 
 
 persistent hyaloid, 103. 
 
 ophthalmic, 28. 
 
 short ciliary, 29, 41. 
 
 variation in number, 102. 
 
 inferior, of retina, 65, 66. 
 
 subdivisions of, 66. 
 
 superior, of retina, 66. 
 Artery, hyaloid, 103. 
 
 Atropine, disks for dilatation of pupil, 9. 
 Artificial eye, 143, 255. 
 Astigmatism, determination of, 116. 
 
 determination by mirror alone, 136. 
 
 determined by inverted image, 139. 
 
 effect on fundus, 86. 
 
 elongation of disk in, 117. 
 
 hypermetropic, 119. 
 
 irregular, 121. 
 
 irregular, to be detected by mirror alone, 
 121. 
 
 method of determining, 118. 
 
 mixed, 119. 
 
 myopic, 119. 
 
 test for, 117, 118. 
 
 Atropine, strength of, for purposes of ex- 
 amination, 10. 
 Axis, antero-posterior, 218. 
 
 formulae for length of, 128. 
 
 of eye, 217. 
 
 Becker, method of illuminating cornea, 
 
 150. 
 
 Blood-column, composition of, 70. 
 bounded by bands, 103.
 
 270 
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSOOPY. 
 
 Blood, difference in color between arterial 
 
 and venous, 71. 
 Bowman, membrane of, 146. 
 Box, for studying passage of rays, 214. 
 Briicke, experiment of, 229. 
 
 Canal, central, 29, 65. 
 
 displacement of, 65. 
 Capillaries, choroidal, 45. 
 Capsule, fracture of, 169. 
 
 reflex from anterior, 152. 
 
 reflex from posterior, 152. 
 Cataract, anterior capsular, 154. 
 
 as seen with ophthalmoscope, 164. 
 
 cortical, 164, 165, 160. 
 
 oblique illumination in, 156. 
 
 oblique illumination, pcripheric, 166. 
 
 posterior polar, 155. 
 
 pyramidal, 154. 
 
 secondary, 156. 
 
 spindle-shaped, 155. 
 
 zonular, 155, 107. 
 Catoptric test, 152. 
 Centre of motion, 185. 
 Cholestcrin in iris, 150. 
 
 in lens, 156. 
 Choroid, anomalies of pigmentation, 88. 
 
 attachment to solera, 38, 39. 
 
 capillary net-work of, 45. 
 
 coloboma of, 92. 
 
 foramen of, 39. 
 
 pigmented crescent of, 50. 
 
 the (anatomy), 38. 
 
 thickness of, 38. 
 
 tigre 1 , 48. 
 
 veins of, 42. 
 
 vessels of, 39. 
 
 anastomosis with retinal, 39. 
 Choroidal opening, 97. 
 Ciliary, long arteries, 39. 
 
 short arteries, 41. 
 
 vessels, 28. 
 Circle, illuminated, 230. 
 
 of dispersion, 230. 
 
 of dispersion, size of, 231. 
 
 of dispersion, varies with different mir- 
 rors, 231. 
 
 of dispersion, varies with distance of lamp, 
 230. 
 
 of illumination, 230, 231. 
 
 scleral, 30. 
 Coloboma of iris, 90. 
 
 of lens, 92. 
 
 of macula, 94. 
 
 of the vitreous, 88. 
 Color of normal fundus, 46. 
 Condensing lens, use of, in oblique illumina- 
 tion, 5 (Fig. 1, p. 6). 
 Congenital excavations, 60, 61. 
 Connective-tissue ring, 57. 
 
 variation in size, shape, and color, 57. 
 Connective-tissue string, 29. 
 
 effect on appearance of vessels, 66. 
 Conus, 97. 
 Cornea, 160. 
 
 Cornea, abrasions of, 148. 
 
 examination of, 146. 
 
 examination of, with mirror, 160. 
 
 foreign bodies in, 148. 
 
 illuminated by Becker's method, 150. 
 
 oblique illumination of, 146. 
 
 reflex from, 152. 
 
 reflex of, as diagnostic mark, 187. 
 
 want of transparency of, 147. 
 Crescent, pigmented, 50. 
 Cylindric lens, 212. 
 Cysticercus, description of, 188, 189. 
 
 differential diagnosis of, 190. 
 
 drawings of, 192, 193. 
 
 ophthalmoscopic appearances of, 189. 
 
 sac of, 188, 189. 
 Cysts of iris, 149. 
 
 Descemet, membrane of, 146. 
 Descemitis, 148. 
 Dioptric, definition of, 241. 
 Dioptrics, conversion into inches, 242. 
 Disk, anomalies of, 97. 
 
 causes of elevation of surface, 62. 
 
 change in form of, 138. 
 
 change in, in astigmatism, 139. 
 
 change in, in movements of lens, 140. 
 
 clear spot of, 55. 
 
 concentric markings of, 58. 
 
 crescent round, 57. 
 
 differences in size, 53. 
 
 elevations of surface, 61. 
 
 elongation of, in astigmatism, 117. 
 
 excavation of, 58, 59. 
 
 honeycombed appearance of, 55. 
 
 plane of, 53. 
 
 shape of, 51. 
 
 variations in color, 55. 
 
 variations in elevation, 58. 
 
 variations in surface of, 54. 
 
 vascular portion of, 56. 
 . vessels of, 29. 
 Dislocation of the lens, 87. 
 Dispersion, circle of, 230. 
 Dural sheath (anatomy), 22. 
 
 Ectopia lentis, 87. 
 
 Emmetropia, determination of, 109, 123. 
 
 Enlargement, influenced by ametropia, 143. 
 
 hypermetropia, 144. 
 
 myopia, 145. 
 
 Liebreich's method of, 16. 
 
 produced by upright image, 142. 
 Entozoa, 187. 
 
 Examination by daylight, advantages of, 
 4. 
 
 by inverted image, 12. 
 
 by upright image, 18. 
 
 of eye by artificial light, 5. 
 
 of media of eye, 146. 
 
 aqueous humor, 148. 
 
 cornea, 146. 
 
 lens, 150. 
 
 iris, 149. 
 
 vitreous, 157.
 
 INDEX. 
 
 271 
 
 Examination with ophthalmoscope, 8, 9. 
 
 necessity for use of atropine, 7, 9. 
 
 obstacles in the way of, 9. 
 
 use of atropine in, 9. 
 Excavation, " apparent," 60. 
 
 congenital, 60, 61. 
 
 measurement of, in glaucoma, 115. 
 
 of disk, 58. 
 
 physiological, 59. 
 
 physiological characteristics of, 59, 60. 
 Exudations upon lens, 150. 
 Eye, ametropic, 218. 
 
 artificial, 143. 
 
 Donders's reduced, 257. 
 
 of author, 257. 
 
 of Landolt, 257. 
 
 emmetropic (definition of), 218. 
 
 equivalent to biconvex lens, 217. 
 
 hypermetropic (definition of), 218. 
 
 myopic (definition of), 218. 
 Eyes, artificial, 255. 
 
 Far-point, 221. 
 
 Field, influenced by object lens, 239. 
 
 of view, influenced by strength of object- 
 glass, 14. 
 Filaria, description of, 194. 
 
 existence of, 187. 
 
 in aqueous humor, 1 49. 
 Focal length of eye, 217. 
 
 of lenticular system, 142. 
 Foci, conjugate, of mirrors, 216. 
 Focus, alterations in, by change of object, 208 
 
 conjugate, 209. 
 
 equal to radius in biconvex glass, 203. 
 
 equal to twice the radius in plano-convex, 
 202. 
 
 virtual, 210. 
 Foreign bodies in cornea, 148. 
 
 enveloped in membranes, 180. 
 
 in vitreous, 180. 
 
 rebound of, from back of eye, 183. 
 
 suspension of, in vitreous, 130. 
 Formula, to determine length of axis, 128. 
 Fovea, appearance of, 79. 
 
 distance from edp;e of nerve, 79. 
 
 shape and appearance of, reflex of, 81. 
 
 centralis (anatomy), 33, 34. 
 
 increased pigmentation of surrounding 
 tissue, 34. 
 
 position of, 34. 
 Fundus, differences in regard to age, 84. 
 
 effect on, by optical conditions, 85. 
 
 illumination of, 231. 
 
 illumination of, by ophthalmoscope, 230. 
 
 seen by irregular reflection, 232. 
 
 variations in, owing to optical conditions, 
 85. 
 
 visible by irregular reflection, 232. 
 
 oculi, not a conjugate focus with source 
 of light, 228. 
 
 variation in texture of, 50. 
 
 Glaucoma, measurement of excavation, 115. 
 Glass, magnifying power of, 142. 
 
 Halo, absence of, with upright image, 80. 
 
 cause of, 82. 
 
 surrounding macula, 78. 
 
 the, not seen in all eyes, 79. 
 
 why absent with upright image, 81. 
 Helmholtz's weak-light mirror, 4. 
 Hyalitis, 154. 
 Hyaloid artery, 103. 
 
 Hypermetropia, ability to determine '' total," 
 with the mirror, 110, 111. 
 
 as revealed by upright image, 110. 
 
 determination of, 110, 125. 
 
 determination of "latent," 110. 
 
 non relaxation of A, in, 111. 
 Ilypopion, in anterior chamber, 148. 
 
 Illuminated circle, 230, 231. 
 Illumination, oblique, importance of, 6. 
 
 kinds of, 3. 
 
 of the fundus, manner of obtaining, 10. 
 Image, aerial, of myopic eye, 11. 
 
 change in position of, by change of ob- 
 ject, 207. 
 
 enlargement produced by " upright," 142. 
 
 formation of, by lens, 205. 
 
 from concave mirror, 215. 
 
 " indirect," principles of, 237. 
 
 influence on life of, by refraction, 239. 
 
 of fundus, production of, 11. 
 
 place of reflected, 214. 
 
 projection of, 143. 
 
 reflected, 214. 
 
 size of, as to object, 206. 
 
 to determine whether erect or inverted, 
 11. 
 
 virtual, in hypermetropic eye, 11. 
 Incidence, angle of, 214. 
 Increased enlargement, by inverted image, 16 
 Inequalities, in fundus, how to detect, 14. 
 
 measurement of, 113. 
 Inner sheath, vessels of, 28. 
 Intervaginal space (anatomy), 21. 
 
 (anatomy), 23. 
 
 in myopic eyes, 23. 
 Inverted image, examination by, 12 (Fig. 2). 
 
 increased enlargement in, 16. 
 Irido-choroiditis, 149. 
 Iris, 161. 
 
 absence of, 90. 
 
 adhesion to lens, 150. 
 
 cholesterine in, 150. 
 
 coloboma of, 90. 
 
 condylomata of, 149. 
 
 cysts of, 149. 
 
 examination of, 149. 
 
 examination of, with mirror, 161. 
 
 Liebreich's method of examination, 1 50. 
 
 oblique illumination of. 147, 149. 
 Iritis, 149. 
 
 as seen with the mirror (Fig. 56), 164. 
 
 Keratoscopy, 137. 
 
 Lamina cribrosa (anatomy), 25, 26. 
 vessels of, 28.
 
 272 
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSOOPY. 
 
 Lamina vitrea, 38. 
 
 Lamp, effect on circle of dispersion, 4. 
 
 influence of position, 232. 
 
 influence on circle of illumination, 232. 
 
 position of, 3. 
 
 source of illumination, 230-232. 
 
 varieties of, 3. 
 Length, focal, of eye, 217. 
 Lens, adhesions to, 150. 
 
 anomalies of, 87. 
 
 coloboma of, 92. 
 
 diffuse opacity of, 151. 
 
 dislocation of, 87. 
 
 dislocation of (as seen in the mirror), 168. 
 
 dislocation of (oblique illumination), 157. 
 
 dislocation of (as seen with mirror), 168. 
 
 examination, 150. 
 
 examination of (oblique light), 150. 
 
 examination of, with ophthalmoscope, 161. 
 
 exudations upon, 150. 
 
 fracture of the capsule of, 169. 
 
 opacities of (circumscribed), 154. 
 
 physiological opacities of, 163. 
 
 physiological reflex from, 151. 
 
 stationary opacities in, 163. 
 
 want of transparency in normal eye, 151. 
 Lenses, action of, on light, 199. 
 
 axes of, 204. 
 
 biconvex, 203. 
 
 bicylindric, 214. 
 
 concave, 210. 
 
 condensing, use of, 5. 
 
 convex, 199. 
 
 cylindric, 212. 
 
 effect of changing curvature, 201. 
 
 focus of, 201. 
 
 image of, in case of concave lens, 211. 
 
 image formed by, 204, 205. 
 
 influence on size of image, 238. 
 
 optic centre of, 204. 
 
 plano-convex action of, 200. 
 
 position of, 157. 
 
 radius of, 199. 
 
 sphero-cylindric, 213. 
 
 strength" of, 19.9. 
 
 strength of, expressed in a fraction, 203. 
 Light, laws of, 195. 
 
 pencil of, 195. 
 
 quantity of, from different mirrors, 4. 
 
 rays of, 195. 
 Light streak, the, 75. 
 
 increase and decrease of, 102. 
 
 test for astigmatism, 118. 
 
 theory of, 76. 
 
 undulatory motion of, 195. 
 Lymphatic spaces, 27, 35, 37. 
 Luminous bodies, 195. 
 
 Macula, spots at, 94. 
 lutea, cause of color, 32. 
 coloboma of, 94. 
 distance from centre of disk, 32. 
 how to examine, with upright image, 79. 
 with indirect image, 77. 
 increased pigmentation in region of, 49. 
 
 Macula, increased pigmentation of region of, 
 80. 
 
 not devoid of vessels, 67, 80. 
 
 not synonymous with the i'ovea centralis, Y'J 
 
 reflex round, with indirect image, 77. 
 
 reflexions from, 77. 
 
 region of, 31, 77. 
 
 region of, with upright image, 79. 
 
 situation of, 32. 
 
 size of, 32, 33. 
 
 vessels of, 35, 36. 
 
 Magnifying-glass, power of, 142, 143. 
 Media, anomalies of, 86. 
 
 differential diagnosis in troubles of, 1 84. 
 
 examination of, with mirror, 157. 
 
 examination with ophthalmoscope, 157. 
 Medullary sheath (anatomy), loss of, in nerve- 
 stem, 24. 
 Membrane, Bowman's, 146. 
 
 determination of position of, in vitreous, 
 116. 
 
 in vitreous, 177. 
 
 of Descemet, 146. 
 
 vascular in vitreous, 177, 178. 
 Method, " indirect," principles of, 236. 
 Metre, 241. 
 Metric system, 241. 
 
 conversion of, into inches, 242. 
 Microscope, ophthalmic, 255. 
 Mirror, concave, best adapted for general 
 work, 4. 
 
 concave, best for illumination, 231. 
 
 conjugate foci of, 215. 
 
 of Helmholtz, 230. 
 
 modifications of, 247. 
 
 plane, 214. 
 
 proper focal length of, 4. 
 
 tilting, 249. 
 
 Wadsworth's, 248. 
 
 weak-light, advantages of, in examination 
 
 of media, 157. 
 
 weak -light of Helmholtz, advantages of, 4. 
 Mirrors, 214. 
 
 concave, 215. 
 
 Motion, center of, in eye, 185. 
 Myopia, determination of, 110, 124. 
 
 Neoplasms, in vitreous, 179. 
 Nerve, discoloration of, 101. 
 
 protrusion of, 115. 
 Nerve fibres (anatomy), 26. 
 
 abnormal transparency of, 100. 
 
 bifurcation of, 101. 
 
 opaque, 98. 
 Nerve-stem, form of, 25. 
 
 anatomy, 24. 
 
 cross section (anatomy), 25. 
 
 optic (anatomy), 24. 
 
 transparent and non-transparent portion, 
 
 24. 
 
 Neuritis, measurement of protrusion of, 115. 
 Nodal point, 204. 
 Normal eye, cause of color of fundus, 43. 
 
 fundus of, 43. 
 
 variation in shade and color, 46.
 
 INDEX. 
 
 273 
 
 Object-glass, 253. 
 
 (jointed), 253. 
 
 advantages of strong and of weak, in my- 
 opia, 15. 
 
 Oblique illumination, condition of the me- 
 dia, 5. 
 
 of iris, 147, 149. 
 
 method of, 7. 
 
 of cornea, 146. 
 
 position of lens, 157. 
 Opacities, determination of position, 1 59. 
 
 in vitreous, 157, 171. 
 
 in vitreous diffuse, 172. 
 
 in vitreous fixed, 176. 
 
 in vitreous movable, 174, 176. 
 
 membranes in, 177. 
 
 of lens (circumscribed), 154. 
 
 (diffuse), 154. 
 
 (physiological), 163. 
 
 Opacity, determination of position in vitre- 
 ous, 185. 
 
 Ophthalmo-microscopes, 255. 
 Ophthalmoscope artists, 254. 
 
 Carter's, 250. 
 
 construction of, 3. 
 
 examination, elements of, 2. 
 
 measurement of differences of level, 113. 
 
 method of examination with, 10. 
 
 remarks on, 11. 
 
 theory of, 225. 
 
 where superior to test by atropia and 
 
 glasses, 112. 
 Ophthalmoscopes, 242. 
 
 binocular, 251. 
 
 fixed, 250. 
 Optic axis, dimensions of tables of, 113, 
 
 114. 
 
 Optic centre (of lens), 204. 
 Optic disk, objective point for examination, 
 
 12. 
 Optic nerve, anomalous pigmentation of, 89. 
 
 circulation of, 27. 
 
 stem of, 24. 
 
 cross section of, 25. 
 
 diameter of, 52. 
 
 diversity in shape and size, 52, 62. 
 
 enlargement, as seen with ophthalmoscope, 
 52. 
 
 entrance, 51. 
 
 entrance, designations of, 51. 
 
 entrance, form of, 25, 51. 
 
 longitudinal section of, 23. 
 Optics, physiological, 217. 
 Optic nerve, coloboma of sheath, 96. 
 Orthoscopc, 148. 
 
 Papilla, 51. 
 
 Parallax, how to obtain, 13, 14 (Fig. 3). 
 
 Pencil, of light, 195. 
 
 Phantom, 256. 
 
 Physiological optics, 217. 
 
 Pial sheath (anatomy), 21. 
 
 vessels of, 27. 
 Pigment ring, 58. 
 Plasmic current, 70. 
 18 
 
 Position of observer's seat, 10. 
 
 of patient's seat, 10. 
 Pulse, absence of, in retinal vessels, 71. 
 
 arterial, 74. 
 
 venous, 72. 
 Pupil, blackness of, 226. 
 
 eccentric position of, 92. 
 Pupillary membrane, 91. 
 Pupiloscopy, 137. 
 Purple, visual, 65. 
 
 Radius, of lens, 199. 
 Kays, convergent, 200. 
 
 divergent, 210. 
 
 divergent, in nature, 1 96. 
 
 parallel (description of), 196. 
 Reflection, angle of, 214. 
 
 from plane mirror, 214. 
 
 irregular, 196, 198. 
 
 regular, 196. 
 
 regular and irregular, 232. 
 
 image formed by, 214. 
 
 specular, 196. 
 
 two kinds of, 196. 
 Reflex, around macula, indirect image, 77. 
 
 around macula lutea, shape of, 78. 
 
 cause of, from yellow spot, 82. 
 
 from lens, 151. 
 
 from yellow spot, 77. 
 
 of fundus, 10. 
 Refraction, by cylindric lens, 213. 
 
 cause of, 199, 201. 
 
 conditions affecting, 201. 
 
 determination according to inch standard, 
 122. 
 
 emmetropia, 123. 
 
 myopia, 124. 
 
 hypermetropia, 125. 
 
 determination of, 106. 
 
 determination of, by mirror alone, 134. 
 
 determination of, by inverted image, 137. 
 
 diagrammatic representation of, 219. 
 
 different degrees of, in various parts of 
 the eye, 108. 
 
 effect on appearance of fundus, 85. 
 
 how to ascertain in a general way, 109. 
 
 index of, 202. 
 
 influence on circle of dispersion, 232. 
 
 influence on size of image, 2 r :9. 
 
 object-point for determination, 108. 
 
 ophthalmoscope for, 106. 
 
 smoke-box for study of, 214. 
 Region of macula, 31. 
 Retina, arteria centralis, 29. 
 
 anatomy of, 31. 
 
 diagrammatic section of, 33. 
 
 differences in level of, 31. 
 
 fold in, 178. 
 
 layers of, 34. 
 
 lymph-spaces of, 36, 37. 
 
 parallactic displacement of vessels of, 63. 
 
 pigment layer of, 36. 
 
 principal branches of vessels of, 65. 
 
 principal vein, anomalous exit of, 65. 
 
 striation of, 64.
 
 274 
 
 TEXT-BOOK OF OPHTHALMOSCOPY. 
 
 Retina, thickest part of, 31. 
 
 thickness of, as estimated with ophthal- 
 moscope, 63. 
 
 transparency of, 62. 
 
 vessels of, 33, 34. 
 
 vessels of, as seen with mirror, 63. 
 
 vessels, principal branches of, 65. 
 Retinal vessels, division of, 66. 
 Retinoscopy, 137. 
 Reversion, law of, 207, 217. 
 Ring, connective-tissue, 57. 
 
 pigment, 58. 
 
 scleral, 57. 
 
 simulating conus, 58. 
 
 Scleral circle, 30, 31. 
 Scleral opening, 49, 58. 
 Scleral ring, 57. 
 
 more pronounced in glaucoma, 57. 
 
 simulating conus, 58. 
 Sheath, arachnoidal, 21. 
 
 dural, 22. 
 
 external vessels of, 28. 
 Sheath, medullary, 24. 
 
 outer, inner, 21. 
 
 pial, 21. 
 Space, arachnoidal, 22. 
 
 intervaginal, 21, 23. 
 
 lymphatic, 27. 
 
 subarachnoidal, 22. 
 
 subdural, 22. 
 
 sub vaginal, 21. 
 Strabismus, 112. 
 
 Subarachnoidal space (anatomy), 22. 
 Subdural space (anatomy), 22. 
 Subvaginal space (anatomy), 21. 
 Synecliiae in anterior chamber, 149. 
 System, inch, conversion into metric, 242. 
 
 metric, 241. 
 
 old style, 241. 
 
 Table (III), decrease and increase of axis, 127. 
 Table (IV), dimensions of axis, old style, 128. 
 Table (II), showing increase of optic axis, 
 
 114. 
 Table (I), showing shortening of optic axis, 
 
 113. 
 
 Test, catoptric, 152. 
 Theory of the ophthalmoscope, illustration 
 
 of, 229. 
 
 Tortuosity of vessels, 102. 
 Tumors, 149. 
 Tumors of iris, 149. 
 Tumors, measurement of, 115. 
 
 Upright image, position of observer and pa- 
 tient, 18. 
 method of performing, 18, 19, 20. 
 
 Vein, diagrammatic section of, 35. 
 principal, of retina, 65. 
 inferior, of retina, 65, 66. 
 
 Vein, subdivision of, 66. 
 
 of choroid, 42. 
 
 superior, of retina, 65, 66. 
 
 subdivisions of, 66. 
 
 variation in number, 102. 
 Vena centralis, 29. 
 Venae vorticosse, 42. 
 
 ophthalmoscopic appearances of, 47. 
 Venous pulse, 72. 
 
 artificial production, 74. 
 
 diagnostic mark of increased tension, 74. 
 
 position of, 72. 
 
 theory of, 72. 
 
 Vessels, absence of, in macula, with in- 
 verted image, 79. 
 
 anastomosis of retino-choroidal, 104. 
 
 ciliary, 28. 
 
 cilio-retinal, 104. 
 
 crossing of retinal, 67. 
 
 diameter of retinal, 69. 
 
 different size of, 69. 
 
 division of retinal, 66. 
 
 no anastomosis of retinal, 67. 
 
 of choroid, 39. 
 
 of disk, 29. 
 
 of retina (with mirror), 63. 
 
 plan of retinal, 66. 
 
 temporal, as seen by inverted image, 67. 
 
 by upright image, 67. 
 
 temporal branches of retina, 67. 
 
 the central, 29. 
 
 tortuosity of, 102. 
 
 tortuosity of retinal, 67. 
 
 transparency of walls, 70. 
 
 walls of, in retina, 70. 
 Vessel-wall, anomalies of, 102. 
 Visual purple, not visible with the ophthal- 
 moscope, 65. 
 Vitreous, abscess in, 180. 
 
 air-bubbles in, 183. 
 
 coloboma of, 88. 
 
 examination of, 157. 
 
 foreign bodies in, 180. 
 
 neoplasms in, 179. 
 
 opacities in, 157. 
 
 position of membranes in, 116. 
 Vitreous humor, 180. 
 
 abscess in, 180. 
 
 opacities (as seen by mirror), 171. 
 
 Wall, vessel, decrease in transparency, 102. 
 
 Yellow spot, absence of vessels with in- 
 verted image, 79. 
 color of, 78. 
 
 how to find, with inverted image, 17. 
 color of, 32. 
 
 distance from nerve, 32. 
 region of, 31, 77. 
 situation of, 32. 
 size of, 32. 
 vessels of, 35, 36. 
 
 END OF PAET I.
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 
 
 Los Angeles 
 
 This book is DUE on the last date stamped below. 
 
 Form L9-Series 4939
 
 A 000 414514?